1 1! ■■•Hll Jiilil . WONPE ERNST HAECKEL nil m m mitn in ®I|p i. m. mHi ICtbrarg QH311 H13 -'.^• ''^flitiirn??,! m'^ ^'^^'''^ UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES S00819357 X i^^AAJ'ZZyi/h'^^^u^ 87330 This book may be kept out TWO WEEKS ONLY, and is subject to a fine of FIVE CENTS a day thereafter. It is due on the day indicated below: 24 May '489 7D8c'SlX 10Jun52& llOct62X 1^ i MAY 4 WT 2 May 5^^ 20^pr'59f 4 May 59. 5M— D-45 — Form 3 ^AR 1 gUL 1f ?n 0? THE WONDERS OF LIFE A POPULAR STUDY OF BIOLOGICAL PHILOSOPHY BY ERNST HAECKEL (Ph.D., M.D., LL.D., Sc.D., and Professor at the University of Jena) AUTHOR OF ••THE RIDDLE OF THE UNIVERSE" "THE HISTORY OF CREATION" " THE EVOLUTION OF MAN " ETC. TRANSLATED BY JOSEPH McCABE SUPPLEMENTARY VOLUME TO "THE RIDDLE OF THE UNIVERSE" «^ \^o'^ HARPER & BROTHERS PUBLISHERS NEW YORK AND LONDON Copyright, 1904, by Harper & Brothers. Alt rights reserved. Published January, 1905. CONTENTS Part I.— METHODOLOGICAL SECTION: KNOWLEDGE OF LIFE PAGE Preface v CHAPTER I Truth i CHAPTER II Life 27 CHAPTER III Miracles 54 CHAPTER IV The Science of Life 77 CHAPTER V Death 97 Part II.— MORPHOLOGICAL SECTION: NATURE OF LIFE CHAPTER VI Plasm 121 CHAPTER VII Unities of Life : 147 CHAPTER VIII Forms of Life 170 CHAPTER IX MONERA 190 *" 87330 CONTENTS Part III.— PHYSIOLOGICAL SECTION: FUNCTIONS OF LIFE PAGE CHAPTER X Nutrition 210 CHAPTER XI Reproduction 239 CHAPTER XII Movement 258 CHAPTER XIII Sensation 287 CHAPTER XIV Mental Life 315 Part IV.— CxENEALOGICAL SECTION: HISTORY OF LIFE CHAPTER XV The Origin op Life 336 CHAPTER XVI The Evolution of Life 359 CHAPTER XVII The Value of Life S^^ CHAPTER XVIII Morality 4ii CHAPTER XIX Dualism 433 CHAPTER XX Monism 452 Index 475 PREFACE THE publication of the present work on The Won- ders of Life has been occasioned by the success of The Riddle of the Universe, which I wrote five years ago. Within a few months of the issue of this study of the monistic philosophy, in the autumn of 1899, ten thousand copies were sold. Moreover, the publisher having been solicited on many sides to issue a popular edition of the work, more than a hundred thousand copies of this were sold within a year.^ This extraor- dinary and — as far as I was concerned — unexpected success of a philosophical work which was by no means light reading, and which had no particular charm of presentation, affords ample proof of the intense interest taken by even the general reader in the object of the work — the construction of a rational and solid philos- ophy of life. Naturally, the clear opposition of my monistic philos- ophy, based as it was on the most advanced and sound scientific knowledge, to the conventional ideas and to an outworn "revelation," led to the publication of a vast number of criticisms and attacks. During the first twelve months more than a hundred reviews and a dozen large pamphlets appeared, full of the most contradictory strictures and the most curious observations. One of * The English translation met with almost equal success. Nearly one hundred thousand copies of the cheap edition have already been sold. — Trans. V PREFACE the ablest of my pupils, Heinrich Schmidt, gave a sum- mary and criticism of them in his Der Kampf urn die Weltrdthsel, in the autumn of 1900. However, the literary struggle went on to assume gigantic proportions when twelve different translations of the Riddle appeared, and led to an ever-increasing agitation in every educated country of the Old and the New World. I gave a brief reply to the chief of these attacks in April, 1903, in the appendix to the popular edition of the Riddle. It would be useless to go further into this con- troversy and meet the many attacks that have since been made. It is a question here of that profound and irre- concilable opposition between knowledge and faith, between a real knowledge of nature and an alleged "revelation," which has occupied the thoughtful and inquiring mind for thousands of years. I base my monistic philosophy exclusively on the convictions which I have gained during fifty years' close and indefatigable study of nature and its harmonious working. My dual- istic opponents grant only a restricted value to these experiences; they would subordinate them to the fan- tastic ideas which they have reached by faith in a super- natural world of spirits. An honest and impartial con- sideration of this palpable contradiction discovers it to be irreconcilable — either science and experience, or faith and revelation! For this reason I do not propose to make any further reply to the opponents of The Riddle of the Universe, and I am still less disposed to take up the personal attacks which some of my critics have thought fit to make on me. In the course of this controversy I have grown painfully familiar with the means with which it is sought to silence the detested free-thinker — misrepresentation, sophistry, calumny, and denunciation. ' ' Critical ' ' philos- ophers of the modern Kantist school vie in this with orthodox theologians. What I have said in this con- vi PREFACE nection of the theologian Loofs, of Halle, the philologist Dennert, of Godesberg, and the metaphysician Paulsen, of Berlin, in the appendix to the cheap German edition of the Riddle, applies equally to many other opponents of the same type. These heated partisans may continue to attack and calumniate my person as they will; they will not hurt the sacred cause of truth in which I labor. Much more interesting to me than these attacks were the innumerable letters which I have received from thoughtful readers of the Riddle during the last five years, and particularly since the appearance of a popular edition. Of these I have already received more than five thousand. At first I conscientiously replied to each of these correspondents, but I had at length to content myself with sending a printed slip with the intimation that my time and strength did not permit me to make an adequate reply. However, though this correspond- ence was very exacting, it afforded a very welcome proof of the lively sympathy of a large number of readers with the aim of the monistic philosophy, and a very interest- ing insight into the mental attitude of the most varied classes of readers. I especially noticed that the same re- marks and questions occurred in many of these five thousand letters, very often expressed in the same terms. Most of the inquiries related to biological questions, which I had cursorily and inadequately touched both in The Riddle of the Universe and The History of Cre- ation. The natural desire to remedy these deficien- cies of my earlier writings and give a general reply to my interrogators was the immediate cause of the writing of the present work on The Wonders of Life. I was confirmed in this design by the circumstance that another scientist, the botanist Johannes Reinke, of Kiel, had published two works in which he had treated vii PREFACE the general problems of natural philosophy, especially of biology, from a purely dualistic and teleological point of view; these works were his Die Welt ah That (1899) and Einleitimg in die theoretische Biologie (1902). As both these- works are well written and present the principles of dualism and teleology with admirable con- sistency — as far as this is possible — it seemed to me that it was desirable to give a thorough exposition of my own monistic and causative system. Hence the present work on the wonders of life is, as the title indicates, a supplementary volume to The Riddle of the Universe. While the latter undertook to make a comprehensive survey of the general questions of science — as cosmological problems — in the light of the monistic philosophy, the present volume is confined to the realm of organic science, or the science of life. It seeks to deal connectedly with the general problems of biology, in strict accord with the monistic and me- chanical principles which I laid down in 1866 in my General Morphology. In this I laid special stress on the universality of the law of substance and the sub- stantial unity of nature, which I have further treated in the second and fourteenth chapters of The Riddle of the Universe. The arrangement of the vast material for this study of the wonders of life has been modelled on that of the Riddle. I have retained the division into larger and smaller sections and the synopses of the various chapters. Thus the whole biological content falls into four sections and twenty chapters. I should much have liked to add illustrations in many parts of the text to make the sub- ject plainer, especially as regards chapters vii., viii., xi., and xvi. ; but this would have led to a considerable increase in the size and price of the book. Moreover, there are now many illustrated works which will help the reader to go more fuhy into the various sections of viii PREFACE the study. Among others, my History of Creation (EngHsh translation) and Evolution of Man (EngUsh translation now in course of preparation) will be found helpful in this way. The German reader will also find many illustrations to elucidate the text of this book in my recently completed work, Kiinst- f or men der Natur (lo parts, with loo tables, 1899- 1904). I had said, in the preface to The Riddle of the Universe in 1899, that I proposed to close my study of the monistic system with that work, and that " I am wholly a child of the nineteenth century, and with its close I draw the line under my Hfe's work." If I now seem to run counter to this observation, I beg the reader to consider that this work on the wonders of life is a necessary supplement to the widely circulated Riddle of the Uni- verse, and that I felt bound to write it in response to the inquiries of so many of my readers. In this second work, as in the earlier one, I make no pretension to give the reader a comprehensive statement of my monistic philosophy in the full maturity it has reached — for me personally, at least — at the close of the nineteenth century. A subjective theory of the world such as this can, naturally, never hope to have a complete objective validity. My knowledge is incomplete, like that of all other men. Hence, even in this "biological sketch-book," I can only offer studies of unequal value and incomplete workmanship. There still remains the great design of embracing all the exuberant phenomena of organic life in one general scheme and explaining all the wonders of life from the monistic point of view, as forms of one great harmoniously working universe — whether you call this Nature or Cosmos, World or God. The twenty chapters of The Wonders of Life were written uninterruptedly in the course of four months ix PREFACE which I spent at Rapallo, on the shore of the blue Mediterranean. The quiet Hfe in this tiny coast -town of the ItaHan Riviera gave me leisure to weigh again all the views on organic life which I had formed by many- sided experience of life and learning since the beginning of my academic studies (1852) and my teaching at Jena (1861). To this I was stimulated by the constant sight of the blue Mediterranean, the countless inhabitants of which had, for fifty years, afforded such ample material for my biological studies; and my solitary walks in the wild gorges of the Ligurian Apennines, and the moving spectacle of its forest-crowned mountain altars, inspired me with a feeling of the unity of living nature — a feeling that only too easily fades away in the study of detail in the laboratory. On the other hand, such a situation did not allow a comprehensive survey of the boundless literature which has been evoked by the immense ad- vances in every branch of biology. However, the present work is not intended to be a systematic manual of general biology. In the revision of the text, on which I was engaged during the summer at Jena, I had to restrict myself to occasional additions and improvements. In this I had the assistance of my worthy pupil, Dr. Heinrich Schmidt, to whom also I am indebted for the careful revision of the proofs. When I completed my seventieth year at Rapallo, on February i6th, I was overwhelmed with a mass of con- gratulations, letters, telegrams, flowers, and other gifts, most of which came from unknown readers of The Riddle of the Universe in all parts of the world. If my thanks have not yet reached any of them, I beg to tender them in these lines. But I should be especially gratified if they would regard this work on the wonders of life as an expression of my thanks, and as a literary gift in return. May my readers be moved by it to penetrate X PREFACE deeper and deeper into the glorious work of Nature, and to reach the insight of our greatest German natural philosopher, Goethe: "What greater thing in life can man achieve Than that God-Nature be revealed to him?" Ernst Haeckel. Jena, June 17, 1^04. THE WONDERS OF LIFE THE WONDERS OF LIFE I TRUTH Truth and the riddle of the universe — Experience and thought — Empiricism and speculation — Natural philosophy — Science — Empirical science — Descriptive science — Observa- tion and experiment — History and tradition — Philosophic science — Theory of knowledge — Knowledge and the brain — ^stheta and phroneta — Seat of the soul, or organ of thought: phronema — Anatomy, physiology, ontogeny, and phylogeny of the phronema — Psychological metamorphoses — Evolution of consciousness — Monistic and dualistic theories of knowledge — Divergence of the two ways of attaining the truth. WHAT is truth ? This great question has occupied the more thoughtful of men for thousands of years, and elicited myriads of attempts to answer it, myriads of truths and untruths. Every history of philosophy gives a longer or shorter account of these countless efforts of the advancing mind of man to attain a clear knowledge of the world and of itself. Nay, even ''world-wisdom" itself, or philosophy in the proper sense of the word, is nothing but a connected effort to unite the general results of man's investigation, ob- servation, reflection, and thought, and bring them to a common focus. Without prejudice and without fear, philosophy would tear the mantle from "the veiled statue of Sais," and attain a full vision of the truth. t5, H. H!LL LIBRARY North Carolina state College THE WONDERS OF LIFE True philosophy, taken in this sense, may proudty and justly style itself "the queen of the sciences." When philosophy, as a search for truth in the highest sense, thus unites our isolated discoveries and seeks to weld them into one unified system of the world, it comes at length to state certain fundamental problems, the answer to which varies according to the degree of culture and the point of view of the inquirer. These final and highest objects of scientific inquiry have been of late comprehended under the title of The Riddle of the Universe, and I gave this name to the work I pub- lished in 1899, which dealt with them, in order to make its aim perfectly clear. In the first chapter I dealt briefly with what have been called "the seven great cosmic problems," and in the twelfth chapter I en- deavored to show that they may all be reduced to one final "problem of substance," or one great "riddle of the universe." The general formulation of this problem is effected by blending the two chief cosmic laws — the chemical law of the constancy of matter (Lavoisier, 1789), and the physical law of the constancy of force (Robert Mayer, 1842). This monistic association of the two fundamental laws, and establishment of the unified law of substance, has met with a good deal of agree- ment, but also with some opposition; but the most violent attacks were directed against my monistic theory of knowledge, or against the method I followed in seeking to solve the riddle of the universe. The only paths which I had recognized as profitable were those of experience and thought — or empirical knowledge and speculation. I had insisted that these two methods supplemented each other, and that they alone, under the direction of reason, lead to the attainment of truth. At the same time I had rejected as false two other much- frequented paths which purported to lead directly to a profounder knowledge, the ways of emotion and re vela- TRUTH tion; both of these are in opposition to reason, since they demand a behef in miracles. "All natural science is philosophy, and all true philos- ophy is natural science. All true science is natural phil- osophy.' ' I expressed in these words the general result of my monistic studies in 1866 (in the twenty-seventh chap- ter of my Gcnerelle Morphologic) . I then laid it down as the fundamental principle of the monistic system that the unity of nature and the unity of science follow abso- lutely from any connected study of modern philosophic science, and I expressed my conviction in these terms: "All human science is knowledge based on experience, or empirical philosophy; or, if the title be preferred, philosophic empiricism. Thoughtful experience, or thought based on experience, is the only way and method to be followed in the search for truth." I endeavored to establish these theses conclusively in the first book of the Generelle Morphologie, which contains (p. 108) a critical and methodological introduction to this science. Not only are those methods considered "which must necessarily supplement each other" (I. Empiricism and Philosophy; II. Analysis and Synthesis; III. In- duction and Deduction), but also those "which neces- sarily exclude each other" (IV. Dogmatism and Criti- cism; V. Teleology and Causality, or Vitalism and Me- chanicism; VI. Dualism and Monism). The monistic principles which I developed there thirty-eight years ago have only been confirmed by my subsequent labors, and so I may refer the interested reader to that work. The Riddle of the Universe is in the main an attempt to introduce to the general reader in a convenient form the chief points of the monistic system I established. How- ever, the opposition which has been aroused by the general philosophic observations of the Riddle compels me to give a further explanation of the chief features of my theory of knowledge. 3 THE WONDERS OF LIFE All true science that deserves the name is based on a collection of experiences, and consists of conclusions that have been reached by a rational connection of these experiences. "Only in experience is there truth," says Kant. The external world is the object that acts on man's organs of sense, and in the internal sense-centres of the cortex of the brain these impressions are subjectively transformed into presentations. The thought-centres, or association centres, of the cortex (whether or no one dis- tinguishes them from the sense-centres) are the real organs of the mind that unite these presentations into conclusions. The two methods of forming these con- clusions — induction and deduction, the formation of arguments and concepts, thought and consciousness — make up together the cerebral function we call reason. These long familiar and fundamental truths, the rec- ognition of which I have described for thirty - eight years as the first condition for solving the riddle of life, are still far from being generally appreciated. On the contrary, we find them combated by the extreme rep- resentatives of both tendencies of science. On the one side, the empirical and descriptive school would reduce the whole task to experience, without calling in the aid of philosophy ; while philosophic speculation, on the other side, would dispense with experience and endeavor to construct the world by pure thought. Starting from the correct principle that all science originally has its source in experience, the representa- tives of "experimental science" affirm that their task consists solely in the exact observation of "facts" and the classification and description of them, and that philosophic speculation is nothing more than an idle play of ideas. Hence this one-sided sensualism, as Condillac and Hume especially maintained it, affirmed that the whole action of the mind consists in a manipu- lation of sense - impressions. This narrow empirical TRUTH conception spread very widely during the nineteenth century, particularly in the second half, among the rapidly advancing sciences; it was favored by the specialism which grew up in the necessary division of labor. The majority of scientists are still of opinion that their task is confined to the exact observation and description of facts. All that goes beyond this, and especially all far-reaching philosophic conclusions from their accumulated observations, are regarded by them with suspicion. Rudolph Virchow strongly emphasized this narrow empirical tendency ten years ago. In his speech on the foundation of the BerUn University he explained the "transition from the philosophic to the scientific age"; he said that the sole aim of science is "the knowledge of facts, the objective investigation of natural phenomena in detail." The former poHtician seemed to forget that he had maintained a precisely opposite view forty years before (at Wiirtzburg), and that his own great achievement, the creation of cellular pathology, was a philosophic construction — the forma- tion of a new" and comprehensive theory of disease by the combination of countless observations and the con- clusions deduced therefrom. No science of any kind whatever consists solely in the description of observed facts. Hence we can only regard it as a pitiful contradiction in terms when we find biolog}^ classed in official documents to-day as a "descriptive science," and physics opposed to it as an "explanatory science." As if in both cases we had not, after de- scribing the observed phenomena, to pass on to trace them to their causes — that is, to explain them — by means of rational inferences! But it is even more regrettable to find that one of the ablest scientists of Germany, Oustav Kirchhoff, has claimed that description is the final and the highest task of science. The famous dis- coverer of spectrum analysis says in his Lectures on 5 THE WONDERS OF LIFE Mathematical Physics and Mechanics (1877): "It is the work of science to describe the movements perceived in Nature, in the most complete and simplest fashion." There is no meaning in this statement unless we take the word "description" in a quite unusual sense — unless "complete description" is meant to include explanation. For thousands of years true science has been, not merely a simple description of individual facts, but an explana- tion of them by tracing them to their causes. It is true that our knowledge of them is always imperfect, or even hypothetical; but this is equally true of the description of facts. Kirchhoff's statement is in flagrant contra- diction to his own great achievement, the founding of spectrum analysis; for the extraordinary significance of this does not lie in the discovery of the wonderful facts of spectroscopic optics and the "complete description" of individual spectra, but in the rational grouping and interpretation of them. The far-reaching conclusions that he has drawn from them have opened out entirely new paths to physics and chemistry. Hence KirchhofiF is in as sad a plight as Virchow when he formtilates so precarious a principle. However, these statements of the two great scientists have done a great deal of harm, as they have widened still more the deep gulf between science and philosoph}^ It may be of some service if a few thousand of the thoughtless followers of "de- scriptive science " are persuaded to refrain from attempts at explanation of facts. But the master-builders of science cannot be content with the collection of dead material ; they must press on to the knowledge of causes by a rational maniptilation of their facts. The accurate and discriminating observation of facts, supported by careful experiment, is certainly a great advantage that modern science has over all earlier efforts to attain the truth. The distinguished thinkers of classic antiquity were far superior to most modern scientists 6 TRUTH and philosophers in regard to judgment and reasoning, or all the subtler processes of thought; but they were superficial and unpractised observers, and were barely acquainted with experiment. In the Middle Ages scien- tific work degenerated in both its aspects, as the domi- nant creed demanded only faith and the recognition of its supernatural revelation, and depreciated observa- tion. The great importance of this as a foundation of real knowledge was first appreciated by Bacon of Verulam, whose Novum Organon (1620) laid down the principles of scientific knowledge, in opposition to the current scholasticism derived from Aristotle and his Organon. Bacon became the founder of modern em- pirical investigation, not only by making careful and exact observation of phenomena the basis of all philos- ophy, but also in demanding the supplementing of this by experiment; by this experiment he understood the putting of a question to Nature, as it were, which she must herself answer — a kind of observation under defi- nite and deliberate conditions. This more rigorous method of "exact observation," which is hardly three hundred years old, was very strongly aided by the inventions which enable the human eye to penetrate into the farthest abysses of space and the profoundest depths of smaller bodies — the telescope and microscope. The great improvement in these instruments during the nineteenth century, and the support given by other recent inventions, have led to triumphs of observation in this "century of science" that surpassed all anticipation. However, this very refinement of the technique of observation has its draw- backs, and has led to many an error. The effort to obtain the utmost accuracy in objective observation has often led to a neglect of the part which is played by the subjective mental action of the observer; his judg- ment and reason have been depreciated in comparison 7 THE WONDERS OF LIFE with the acuteness and clearness of his vision. Fre- quently the means has been turned into the end of knowledge. In the reproduction of the thing observed the objective photograph, presenting all parts of the object with equal plainness, has been more valued than the subjective design that reproduces only what is essential and leaves out what is superfluous; yet the latter is in many cases (for instance, in histological observation) much more important and correct than the former. But the greatest fault has been that many of these "exact" observers have refrained altogether from reflection and judgment on the phenomena ob- served, and have neglected subjective criticism; hence it is that so often a number of observers of the same phenomenon contradict each other, while each one boasts of the "exactness" of his observations. Like observation, experimentation has been wonder- fully improved of late years. The experimental sciences which make most use of it — experimental physics, chemistry, physiology, pathology, etc. — have made as- tounding progress. But it is just as important in the case of experiment — or observation under artificial con- ditions — as of simple observation that it be undertaken and carried out with a sound and clear judgment. Nature can only give a correct and unambiguous answer to the question you put her when it is clearly and dis- tinctly proposed. This is very often not the case, and the experimenter loses himself in meaningless efforts, with the foolish hope that "something may come of it." The modern province of experimental or me- chanical embryology is especially marred by these use- less and perverse experiments. Equally foolish is the conduct of those biologists who would transfer the ex- periment that is valuable in physiology to the field of anatomy, where it is rarely profitable. In the modern controversy about evolution the attempt is frequently 8 TRUTH made to prove or refute experimentally the origin of species. It is quite forgotten that the idea of species is only relative, and that no man of science can give an absolute definition of it. Nor is it less perverse to attempt to apply experimentation to historical problems where all the conditions for a successful application are lacking. The knowledge which we obtain directly by observa- tion and experiment is only sound when it refers to pres- ent events. We have to turn to other methods for the investigation of the past — to history and traditions ; and these are less easily accessible. This branch of science has been investigated for thousands of years, as far as the history of man and civilization, of peoples and states, and their customs, laws, languages, and migrations, is concerned. In this, the oral and written tradition from generation to generation, the ancient monuments, and documents, and weapons, etc., furnish an abounding empirical material from which critical judgment can draw a host of conclusions. However, the door to error lies wide open here, as the documents are usually im- perfect, and the subjective interpretation of them is often no clearer than their objective validity. Natural history, properly so called, or the study of the origin and past history of the universe, the earth, and its organic population, is much more recent than the history of mankind. Immanuel Kant was the first to lay the foundations of a mechanical cosmogony in his remark- able Natural History of the Heavens (1755), and Laplace gave mathematical shape to his ideas in 1796. Geology, also, or the story of the evolution of the earth, was not founded until the beginning of the eighteenth century, and did not assume a definite shape until the time of Hoff and Lyell (1830). Later still (1866) were laid the foundations of the science of organic evolution, when Darwin provided a sound foundation, in his theory of 9 THE WONDERS OF LIFE selection, for the theory of descent which Lamarck had proposed fifty years before. In sliarp contrast to this purely empirical method, which is favored by most men of science in our day, we have the purely speculative tendency which is current among our academic philosophers. The great regard which the critical philosophy of Immanuel Kant obtained during the nineteenth century has recently been in- creased in the various schools of philosophy. As is known, Kant affirmed that only a part of our knowl- edge is empirical, or a posteriori — that is, derived from experience; and that the rest of our knowledge (as, for instance, mathematical axioms) is a priori — that is to say, reached by the deductions of pure reason, inde- pendently of experience. This error led to the further statement that the foundations of science are meta- physical, and that, though man can attain a certain knowledge of phenomena by the innate forms of space and time, he cannot grasp the "thing in itself" that lies behind them. The purely speculative metaphysics which was built up on Kant's apriorism, and which found its extreme representative in Hegel, came at length to reject the empirical method altogether, and insisted that all knowledge is obtained by pure reason, independently of experience I Kant's chief error, which proved so injurious to the I whole of subsequent philosophy, lay in the absence of I any physiological and phylogenetic base to his theory of knowledge; this was only provided sixty years after his death by Darwin's reform of the science of evolution, ^ and by the discoveries of cerebral physiologists. He ^ regarded the human mind, with its innate quality of reason, as a completely formed entity from the first, and I made no inquiry into its historical development. Hence, " he defended its immortality as a practical postulate, incapable of proof; he had no suspicion of the evolution lO i TRUTH of man's soul from that of the nearest related mammals. The curious predisposition to a priori knowledge is really the effect of the inheritance of certain structures of the brain, which have been formed in man's vertebrate ancestors slowly and gradually, by adaptation to an association of experiences, and therefore of a posteriori knowledge. Even the absolutely certain truths of mathe- matics and physics, which Kant described as synthetic judgments a priori, were originally attained by the phyletic development of the judgment, and may be reduced to constantly repeated experiences and a priori conclusions derived therefrom. The "necessity" which Kant considered to be a special feature of these a priori propositions would be found in all other judgments if we were fully acquainted with the phenomena and their con- ditions. Among the censures which the academic metaphysi- cians, especially in Germany, have passed on my Riddle of the Universe, the heaviest is perhaps the charge that I know nothing whatever about the theory of knowledge. The charge is correct to this extent, that I do not under- stand the current dualistic theory of knowledge which is based on Kant's metaphysics; I cannot understand how their introspective psychological methods — disdaining all physiological, histological, or phylogenetic founda- tions — can satisfy the demands of "pure reason." My monistic theory of knowledge is assuredly very different from this. It is firmly and thoroughly based on the splendid advances of modern physiology, histology, and phylogeny — on the remarkable results of these empirical sciences in the last forty years, which are entirely ignored by the prevailing system of metaphysics. It is on the ground of these experiences that I have adopted the views on the nature of the human mind which are ex- pounded in the second part of The Riddle of the Universe (chapters vi.-xi.). The following are the chief points: II THE WONDERS OF LIFE 1. The soul of man is — objectively considered — essen- tially similar to that of all other vertebrates; it is the physiological action or function of the brain. 2. Like the functions of all other organs, those of the brain are effected by the cells, which make up the organ. 3. These brain-cells, which are also known as soul- cells, ganglionic cells, or neurona, are real nucleated cells of a very elaborate structure. 4. The arrangement and grouping of these psychic cells, the number of which runs into millions in the brain of man and the other mammals, is strictly regu- lated by law, and is distinguished within this highest class of the vertebrates by several characteristics, which can only be explained by the common origin of the mammals from one primitive mammal (or pro-mammal of the Triassic period). 5. Those groups of psychic cells which we must regard as the agents of the higher mental functions have their origin in the fore-brain, the earliest and foremost of the five embryonic brain-vesicles; they are confined to that part of the surface of the fore-brain which anatomists call the cortex, or gray bed, of the brain. 6. Within the cortex we have localized a number of different mental activities, or traced them to certain regions; if the latter are destroyed, their functions are extinguished. 7. These regions are so distributed in the cortex that one part of them is directly connected with the organs of sense, and receives and elaborates the impressions from these: these are the inner sense-centres, or sensoria. 8. Between these central organs of sense lie the intel- lectual or thought-organs, the instruments of presenta- tion and thought, judgment and consciousness, intellect and reason; they are called the thought-centres, or association-centres, because the various impressions re- 13 TRUTH ceived from the sense-centres are associated, combined, and united in harmonious thought by them.^ The anatomic distinction between the two regions of the cortex which we oppose to each other as the internal sense-centres and the thought or association-centres seems to me of the highest importance. Certain physio- logical considerations had for some time suggested this distinction, but the sound anatomic proof of it has only been furnished during the last ten years. In 1894 Flechsig showed that there are four central sense-regions ("internal sense-spheres," or aestheta) in the gray cortex of the brain, and ^.our thought-centres ("association- centres," or phroiieta) between these: the most im- portant of the latter, from the psychological point of view, is the "principal brain," or the "great occipito- temporal association-centre." The anatomic determina- tion of the two "psychic regions" which Flechsig first introduced was afterwards modified by himself and sub- stantially altered by others. The distinguished works of E dinger, Weigert, Hitzig, and others, lead to somewhat discrepant conclusions. But for the general conception of psychic action, and especially of the cognitive func- tions, which interests us at present, it is not necessary to have this delimitation of the regions. The chief point holds, that we can to-day anatomically distinguish be- tween the two most important organs of mental life; that the neurona, which compose both, differ histolog- ically (or in finer structure) and ontogenetically (or in origin) ; and that even chemical differences (or a different relation to certain coloring matters) may be perceived. We may conclude from this that the neurona or psychic cells which compose both organs also differ in their finer structure; there is probably a dif- ^ Further particulars about the relations of the thought- centres to the sense-centres will be found in the tenth chapter of The Riddle of the Universe. 13 THE WONDERS OF LIFE ference in the complicated fibrils which extend in the cytoplasm of both organs, although our coarse means of investigation have not yet succeeded in detecting this difference. In order to distinguish properly be- tween the two sets of neurona, I propose to call the sensory-cells or sense-centres cFsthetal cells, and the thought-cells or thought-centres phronetal cells. The former are, anatomically and physiologically, the inter- mediaries between the external sense-organs and the internal thought-organs. To this anatomic delimitation of the internal sense- centres and thought-organs in the cortex corresponds their physiological differentiation. The sensorium, or sense-centre, works up the external sense-impressions that are conveyed by the peripheral sense-organs and the specific energy of their sensory nerves; the custheta, or the central sense-instruments that make up the sen- sorium, and their organic units, the cesthetal cells, pre- pare the sense-impressions for thought and judgment in the proper sense. This work of "pure reason " is accom- plished by the phronema of the thought-centres, the phroneta (or the various thought-organs that compose it) and their histological elements, the phronetal cells, bringing about an association or combination of the pre- pared impressions. By this important distinction we avoid the error of the older sensualism (of Hume, Condillac, etc.) — namely, that all knowledge depends on sense-action alone It is true that the senses are the original source of all knowledge; but, in order to have real knowledge and thought, the specific task of reason, the impressions received from the external world by the sense-organs, and their nerves and centres, must be combined in the association-centres and elaborated in the conscious thought-centres. Then there is_t.he im- portant, but frequently overlooked, circumstance that there is in advance in the phronetal cells of the civilized 14 i"'W*"J*-^ -•■ -""" TRUTH man a valuable quality in the shape of inherited potential nerve-energy, which was originally engendered by the actual sense-action of the aesthetal cells in the course of many generations. An impartial and critical study of the action of the brain in various scientific leaders shows that, as a rule, there is a certain opposition, or an antagonistic correla- tion, between the two sections of the highest mental power. The empirical representatives of science, or those who are devoted to physical studies, have a pre- ponderant development of the sensorium, which means a greater disposition and capacity for the observation of phenomena in detail. On the other hand, the speculative representatives of what is called mental science and philosophy, or of metaphysical studies, have the phro- nema more strongly developed, which means a pre- ponderant tendency to, and capacity for, a compre- hensive perception of the universal in particulars. Hence it is that metaphysicians usually look with disdain on "materialistic" scientists and observers; while the latter regard the play of ideas of the former as an unscien- tific and speculative dissipation. This physiological an- tagonism may be traced histologically to the compara- tive development of the assthetal and the phronetal cells in the two cases. It is only in natural philosophers of the first rank, such as Copernicus, Newton, Lamarck, Darwin, and Johannes Miiller, that both sections are harmoniously developed, and thus the individual is equipped for the highest mental achievements. If we take the ambiguous term "soul" {psyche or anima) in the narrower sense of the higher mental power, we may assign as its "seat" (or, more correctly, its organ), in man and the other mammals, that part of the cortex which contains the phroneta and is made up of the phronetal cells; a short and convenient name for this is the phronerna. According to our monistic theory, 15 THE WONDERS OF LIFE the phronema is the organ of thought in the same sense in which we consider the eye the organ of vision, or the heart the central organ of circulation. With the destruc- tion of the organ its function disappears. In opposition to this biological and empirically grounded theory, the current metaphysical psychology regards the brain as the seat of the soul, only in a very different sense. It has a strictly dualistic conception of the human soul as a being apart, only dwelling in the brain (like a snail in its shell) for a time. At the death of the brain it is supposed to live on, and indeed for all eternity. The immortal soul, on this theory (which we can trace to Plato), is an immaterial entity, feeling, thinking, and acting independently, and only using the material body as a temporary implement. The well-known "piano- theory" compares the soul to a musician who plays an interesting piece (the individual life) on the instrument of the body, and then deserts it, to live forever on its own account. According to Descartes, who insured the widest acceptance for Plato's dualistic mysticism, the proper habitation of the soul in the brain — in the music- room — is the pineal gland, a posterior section of the middle-brain (the second embryonic cerebral vesicle). The famous pineal gland has lately been recognized by comparative anatomists as the rudiment of a single organ of vision, the pineal eye (which is still found in certain reptiles). Moreover, not one of the innumerable psychol- ogists w^ho seek the seat of the soul in some part of the body, after the fashion of Plato, has yet formulated a plausible theory of the connection of mind and body and the nature of their reciprocal action. On our monistic principles the answer to this question is very simple, and consonant with experience. In view of its extreme importance, it is advisable to devote at least a few lines to the consideration of the phronema in the light of anatomy, physiology, ontogeny, and phylogeny. i6 TRUTH When we conceive the phronema as the real "organ of the soul" in the strict sense — that is to say, as the central instrument of thought, knowledge, reason, and consciousness — we may at once lay down the principle that there is an anatomical unity of organ corresponding to the physiological and generally admitted unity of thought and consciousness. As we assign to this phronema a most elaborate anatomical structure, we may call it the organic apparatus of the soul, in the same sense in which we conceive the eye as a pur- posively arranged apparatus of vision. It is true that we have as yet only made a beginning of the finer anatomic analysis of the phronema, and are not yet able to mark off its field decisively from the neighboring spheres of sense and motion. With the most improved means of modern histology, the most perfect microscopes and coloring methods, we are only just beginning to penetrate into the marvellous structure of the phronetal cells and their complicated grouping. Yet we have advanced far enough to regard it as the most perfect piece of cell-machinery and the highest product of organic evolution. Millions of highly differentiated phronetal cells form the several stations of this tele- graphic system, and thousands of millions of the finest nerve-fibrils represent the wires which connect the stations with one another and with the sense-centres on the one hand, and with the motor-centres on the other. Comparative anatomy, moreover, acquaints us with the long and gradual development which the phronema has undergone within the higher class of the vertebrates, from the amphibia and reptiles up to the birds and mammals, and, within the last class, from the mono- tremes and marsupials up to the apes and men. The human brain seems to us to-day to be the greatest marvel that plasm, or the "living substance," has pro- duced in the course of millions of years. 17 THE WONDERS OF LIFE The remarkable progress which has been made in the last few decades in the anatomic and histological investi- gation of the brain does not yet, it is true, enable us to make a clear delimitation of the region of the phronema and its relations to the neighboring sensory and motor spheres in the cortex. We must, in fact, assume that there is no sharp distinction in the lower stages of the vertebrate soul; in the older and phylogenetically more distant stages they were not yet differentiated. Even now there are still intermediaries between the aesthetal and phronetal cells. But we may expect with confidence that further progress in the comparative anatomy of the brain will, with the aid of embryology, throw more and more light on these complicated structures. In any case, the fundamental fact is now empirically established that the phronema (the real organ of the soul) forms a definite part of the cortex of the brain, and that without it there can be no reason, no mental life, no thought, and no knowledge. Since we regard psychology as a branch of physiology, anH'examine the whole of the phenomena of mental life from the same monistic stand-point as all other vital functions, it follows that we can make no exception for knowledge and reason. In this we are diametrically opposed to the current systems of psychology, which regard psychology, not as a natural science, but as a mental science. In the next chapter we shall see that this position is wholly unjustified. Unfortunately, this dualistic attitude is shared by a number of distinguish- ed modern physiologists, who otherwise adopt the monistic principles; they take the soul to be, in the Cartesian sense, a supernatural entity. Descartes — a pupil of the Jesuits — only applied his theory to man, and regarded animals as soulless automata. But the theory is quite absurd in modern physiologists, who know from innumerable observations and experiments i8 TRUTH that the brain, or psychic organ, in man behaves just as it does in the other mammals, and especially the primates. This paradoxical dualism of some of our modern physiologists may be partly explained by the perverse theory of knowledge which the great authority of Kant, Hegel, etc., has imposed on them; and partly by a concern for the current belief in immortality, and the dread of being decried as "materialists" if they abandon it. As I do not share this beUef , I examine and appreciate the physiological work of the phroneta just as impartially as I deal with the organs of sense or the muscles. I find that the one is just as much subject as the other to the law of substance. Hence we must re- gard the chemical processes in the ganglionic cells of the cortex as the real factors of knowledge and all other psychic action. The chemistry of the neuroplasm de- termines the vital function of the phronema. The same must be said of its most perfect and enigmatic function, consciousness. Although this greatest wonder of life is only directly accessible by the introspective method, or by the mirroring of knowledge in knowledge, never- theless the use of the comparative method in psychology leads us to believe confidently that the lofty self- consciousness of man differs only in degree, and not in kind, from that of the ape, dog, horse, and other higher mammals. Our monistic conception of the nature and seat of the soul is strongly confirmed by psychiatry, or the science of mental disease. As an old medical maxim runs, Patkologia physiologiani illustrat — the science of disease throws light on the sound organism. This maxim is especially applicable to mental diseases, for they can all be traced to modifications of parts of the brain which discharge definite functions in the normal state. The localization of the disease in a definite part of the phronema diminishes or extinguishes the normal mental 19 THE WONDERS OF LIFE ftmction which is discharged by this section. Thus disease of the speech-centre, in the third frontal convolu- tion, destroys the power of speech; the destruction of the visual region (in the occipital convolutions) does away with the power of sight ; the lesion of the temporal convolutions destroys hearing. Nature herself here con- ducts delicate experiments which the physiologist could only accomplish very imperfectly or not at all. And al- though we have in this way only succeeded as yet in showing the functional dependence of a certain part of the mental functions on the respective parts of the cerebrum, no unprejudiced physician doubts to-day that it is equally true of the other parts. Each special mental activity is determined by the normal constitution of the relevant part of the brain, a section of the phronema. Very striking examples of this are afforded in the case of idiots and microcephali, the unfortunate beings whose cerebrum is more or less stunted, and who have accord- ingly to remain throughout life at a low stage of mental capacity. These poor creatures would be in a very pitiable condition if they had a clear consciousness of it, but that is not the case. They are like vertebrates from which the cerebrum has been partly or wholly removed in the laboratory. These may live for a long time, be artificially fed, and execute automatic or reflex (and in part purposive) motions, without our perceiving a trace of consciousness, reason, or other mental function in them. The embryology of the child-soul has been known in a general way for thousands of years, and has been an object of keen interest to all observant parents and teachers; but it was not until about twenty years ago that a strictly scientific study was made of this remark- able and important phenomenon. In 1884 Kussmaul published his Untersuchungen iiber das Seelenleben des neugeborenen Menschcn, and in 1882 W. Preyer pub- 20 TRUTH lished his Mind of the Child [English translation; Dr. J. Sully has several works on the same subject]. From the careful manuals which these and other observers have published, it is clear that the new-born infant not only has no reason or consciousness, but is also deaf, and only gradually develops its sense and thought-centres. It is only by gradual contact with the outer world that these functions successively appear, such as speech, laughing, etc.; later still come the power of association, the form- ing of concepts and words, etc. Recent anatomic ob- servations quite accord with these physiological facts. Taken together, they convince us that the phronema is undeveloped in the new-born infant; and so we can no more speak in this case of a "seat of the soul" than of a "human spirit" as a centre of thought, knowledge, and consciousness. Hence the destruction of abnormal new- born infants — as the Spartans practised it, for instance, in selecting the bravest — cannot rationally be classed as "murder," as is done in even modern legal works. We ought rather to look upon it as a practice of advantage both to the infants destroyed and to the community. As the whole course of embryology is, according to our biogenetic law, an abbreviated repetition of the history of the race, we must say the same of psychogenesis, or the development of the "soul" and its organ — the phronema. Comparative psychology comes next in importance to embryology as a means of studying the ancestral history of the soul. Within the ranks of the vertebrates we find to-day a long series of evolutionary stages which reach up from the lowest acrania and cyclostoma to the fishes and dipneusta, from these to the amphibia, and from these again to the amniota. Among the latter, moreover, the various orders of reptiles and birds on the one hand, and of mammals on the other, show us how the higher psychic powers have been developed 21 THE WONDERS OF LIFE step by step from the lower. To this physiological scale corresponds exactly the morphological gradation revealed by the comparative anatomy of the brain. The most interesting and important part of this is that which relates to the highest developed class — the mammals; within this class we find the same ever- advancing gradation. At its summit are the primates (man, the apes, and the half -apes), then the carnivora, a part of the ungulates, and the other placentals. A wide interval seems to separate these intelligent mammals from the lower placentals, the marsupials and mono- tremes. We do not find in the latter the high quantita- tive and qualitative development of the phronema which we have in the former; yet we find every intermediate stage between the two. The gradual development of the cerebrum and its chief part — the phronema — took place during the Tertiary period, the duration of which is estimated by many recent geologists at from twelve to fifteen (at the least three to five) million years. As I have gone somewhat fully, in chapters vi.-ix. of the Riddle, into the chief results of the modern study of the brain and its radical importance for psychology and the theory of knowledge, I need only refer the reader thereto. There is just one point I may touch here, as it has been attacked with particular vehemence by my critics. I had made several allusions to the works of the distinguished English zoologist, Romanes, who had made a careful comparative study of mental develop- ment in the animal and man, and had continued the work of Darwin. Romanes partly retracted his monis- tic convictions shortly before his death, and adopted mystic religious views. As this conversion was only known at first through one of his friends, a zealous Eng- lish theologian [Dr. Gore], it was natural to retain a certain reserve. However, it turned out that there had really been in this case (just as in the case of the aged 22 TRUTH Baer) one of those interesting psychological metamor- phoses which I have described in chapter vi. of the Riddle. Romanes suffered a good deal from illness and grief at the loss of friends in his last years. In this con- dition of extreme depression and melancholy he fell un- der mystic influences which promised him rest and hope by belief in the supernatural. It is hardly necessary to point out to impartial readers that such a conversion as this does not shake his earlier monistic views. As in similar cases where deep emotional disturbance, painful experiences, and exuberant hope have clouded the judgment, we must still hold that it is the place of the latter, and not of the emotions or of any supernatural revelation, to attain a knowledge of the truth. But for such attainment it is necessary for the organ of mind, the phronema, to be in a normal condition.' Of all the wonders of life, consciousness may be said to be the greatest and most astounding. It is true that to-day most physiologists are agreed that man's con- sciousness, like all his other mental powers, is a function of the brain, and may be reduced to physical and chemical processes in the cells of the cortex. Neverthe- less, some biologists still cling to the metaphysical view that this "central mystery of psychology" is an in- soluble enigma, and not a natural phenomenon. In face of this, I must refer the reader to the monistic theory of consciousness which I have given in chapter x. of the Riddle, and must insist that in this case again embryol- ogy is the best guide to a comprehension of the subject. Sight is next to consciousness, in many respects, as one of the wonders of life. The well-known embryology of the eye teaches us how sight — the perception of images ' English readers who are acquainted with Romanes's post- humous Thoughts on Religion will recognize the justice of this analysis. Romanes speaks expressly of the acceptance of Christianity entailing "the sacrifice of his intellect." — Trans. 23 THE WONDERS OF LIFE from the external world — has been gradually evolved from the simple sensitiveness to light of the lower animals, by the development of a transparent lens. In the same way the conscious soul, the internal mirror of the mind's own action, has been produced as a new wonder of life out of the unconscious associations in the phronema of our earher vertebrate ancestors. From this thorough and unprejudiced appreciation of the biology of the phronema it follows that the knowl- edge of truth, the aim of all science, is a natural physio- logical process, and that it must have its organs like all other psychic functions. These organs have been revealed to us so fully in the advance of biology during the last half-century that we may be said to have a generally satisfactory idea of the natural character of their organization and action, though we are still far from enjoying a complete anatomical and physiological insight into their details. The most important acquisi- tion we have made is the conviction that all knowledge was originally acquired a posteriori and from experience, and that its first sources are the impressions made on our organs of sense. Both these — the peripheral sense- organs — and the phronema, or central psychic organ, are subject to the law of substance; and the action of the phronema is just as reducible to chemical and physical processes as the action of the organs of sense. In diamietrical opposition to our monistic and em- pirical theory of knowledge, the prevailing dualistic metaphysics assumes that our knowledge is only partly empirical and a posteriori, and is partly quite indepen- dent of experience and a priori, or due to the original con- stitution of our "immaterial" mind. The powerful au- thority of Kant has lent enormous prestige to this mystic and supernatural view, and the academic philosophers of our time are endeavoring to maintain it. A "return to Kant" is held to be the only means of salvation for 24 TRUTH philosophy ; in my opinion it should be a return to nat- ure. As a fact, the return to Kant and his famous theory of knowledge is an unfortunate "crab-walk" on the part of philosophy. Our modern metaphysicians regard the brain, as Kant did one hundred and twenty years ago, as a mysterious, whitish-gray, pulpy mass, the significance of which as an instrument of the mind is very enigmatic and obscure. But for modern biology the brain is the most wonderful structure in nature, a compound of innumerable soul-cells or neurona. These have a most elaborate finer structure, are combined in a vast psychic apparatus by thousands of interlacing nerve- fibrils, and are thus fitted to accomplish the highest men- tal functions. First Table ANTITHESIS OF THE TWO WAYS OF ATTAINING THE TRUTH Monistic Theory of Knowl- edge 1 . Knowledge is a n atural proc- ess, not a miracle. 2. Knowledge, as a natural process, is subject to the general law of substance. 3. Knowledge is a physiological process, with the brain for its anatomic organ. 4. The part of the human brain in which knowledge is exclusively engendered is a definite and limited part of the cortex, the phronema. 5. The organ of knowledge, or the phronema, consists of the association - centres, and differs by its special histological structure from the neighboring sensory and motor centres in the cortex, and it is in close relation with these. DuALiSTic Theory of Knowl- edge 1. Knowledge is a supernatural process, a miracle. 2. Knowledge, as a transcen- dental process, is not sub- ject to the law of sub- stance. 3. Knowledge is not a physio- logical, but a purely spirit- ual, process. 4. The part of the human brain which seems to act as organ of knowledge is really only the instrument that allows the spiritual process to appear. 5. The organ of knowledge, or the phronema (the sum of the association - centres), is merely a part of the instrument of mind, like the neighboring and corre- lated sensory and motor- centres. 25 to: M. HILL LIBRARY THE WONDERS OP LIFE ANTITHESIS OF THE TWO WAYS OF ATTAINING THE TR\JTU~Continued 6. The innumerable cells which make up the phronema — the phronetal cells — are the elementary organs of the cognitive process: the possibility of knowledge depends on their normal physical texture and chem- ical composition. 7. The phj^sical process of knowledge consists in the combination or associa- tion of presentations, the first sources of which are the impressions transmit- ted to the sense-centres. 8. Hence all knowledge orig- inally comes from ex- perience, by means of the organs of sense; partly directly (direct experi- ence, observation, and ex- periment of the present), partly indirectly (histor- ical and indirectly trans- mitted past experiences). All knowledge (even math- ematical) is of empirical origin and a posteriori. The innumerable phronetal cells, as the microscopic elementary parts of the phronema, are, it is true, indispensable instruments of the cognitive process, but not its real factors — merely finer parts of its instrument. The metaphysical process of knowledge consists in the combination or association of presentations, which are only partly traceable to sense-impressions, and are partly supersensual, tran- scendental processes. Hence knowledge is of two kinds: empirical and a posteriori knowledge, ob- tained by experience, and transcendental a priori knowledge, independent of experience. Mathematics especially belongs to the latter class, its axioms differing from empirical truths by their absolute certainty. II LIFE Definition of life — Comparison with a flame — Organism and organization — Machine theory of Hfe — Organisms without organs: monera — Organization and hfe of the chromacea — Stages of organization — Complex organisms — Symbolic organisms — Organic compounds — Organisms and inorganic bodies compared in regard to matter, form, and function — • Crystalloid and colloid substances — Life of crystals — Growth of crystals — Waves of growth — Metabolism — Catalysis — Fermentation — Biogenesis — Vital force — Old and new vitalism — Palavitalism — Anti vitalism — Neo- vitalism. AS the object of this work is the critical study of the i. wonders of life, and a knowledge of the truth con- cerning them, we must first of all form a clear idea of the meaning of "life" and "wonder," or miracle. For thousands of years men have appreciated the difference between life and death, between living and lifeless bodies ; the former are called organisms, and the latter known as inorganic bodies. Biology — in the widest sense — is the name of the science which treats of organisms ; we might call the science which deals with the inorganic "abi- ology," abiotik, or anorgik. The chief difference be- tween the two provinces is that organisms accomplish peculiar, periodically repeated, and apparently spon- taneous movements, which we do not find in inorganic matter. Hence life may be conceived as a special process of movement. Recent study has shown that this is always connected with a particular chemical 27 THE WONDERS OF LIFE substance, plasm, and consists essentially in a circula- tion of matter, or metabolism. At the same time modern science has shown that the sharp distinction formerly drawn between the organic and the inorganic cannot be sustained, but that the two kingdoms are profoundly and inseparably united. Of all the phenomena of inorganic nature with which the life-process may be compared, none is so much like it externally and internally as the flame. This important comparison was made two thousand four hundred years ago by one of the greatest philosophers of the Ionic school, Heraclitus of Ephesus — the same thinker who first broached the idea of evolution in the two words, Panta rei — all things are in a state of flux. Heracli- tus shrewdly conceived life as a fire, a real process of combustion, and so compared the organism to a torch. Max Verworn has lately employed this metaphor with great effect in his admirable work on general physiology, and has especially dealt with the comparison of the individual life-form with the familiar butterfly shape of the gas-flame. He says: The comparison of life to a flame is particulariy smtable for helping us to realize the relation between form and metabolism. The butterfly-shape of a gas-flame has a very characteristic outline. At the base, immediately above the burner, there is still complete darkness; over this is a blue and faintly lumi- nous zone; and over this again the bright flame expands on either side like the wings of a butterfly. This peculiar form of the flame, with its characteristic features, which are permanent, as long as we do not interfere with the gas or the environment, is solely due to the fact that the grouping of the molecules of the gas and the oxygen at various parts of the flame is constant, though the molecules themselves change every moment. At the base of the flame the molecules of the gas are so thickly pressed that the oxygen necessary for their combustion cannot penetrate; hence the darkness we find here. In the bluish zone a few molecules of oxygen have combined with the molecules of the gas: we have a faint light as the result. But in the 28 LIFE body of the flame the molecules of the gas are so freely com- bined with the oxygen of the atmosphere that we have a lively combustion. However, the exchange of matter (metabolism) between the outpouring gas and the surrounding air is so reg- ulated that we always find the same molecules in the same quantity at the same spot. Thus we get the permanent flame, with all its characteristics. But if we alter the circulation by lessening the stream of gas, the shape of the flame changes, because now the disposition of the molecules on both sides is different. Thus the study of the gas-jet gives us, even in detail, the features we find in the structure of the cell. The scientific soundness of this metaphor is all the more notable as the phrase, "the flame of life," has long been familiar both in poetry and popular parlance. In the sense in which science usually employs the word "organism," and in which we employ it here, it is equivalent to "living thing" or "living body." The opposite to it, in the broad sense, is the anorganic or inorganic body. Hence he word "organism" belongs to physiology, and connotes essentially the visible life- activity of the body, its metabolism, nutrition, and reproduction. However, in most organisms we find, when we ex- amine their structure closely, that this consists of va- rious parts, and that these parts are put together for the evident purpose of accomplishing the vital functions. We call them organs, and the manner in which they are combined, apparently on a definite plan, is their or- ganization. In this respect, we compare the organism to a machine in which some one has similarly combined a number of (lifeless) parts for a definite purpose, but according to a preconceived and rationally initiated design. The familiar comparison of an organism to a machine has given rise to very serious errors in regard to the former, and has, of late, been made the base of false duaHstic principles. The modern "machine-theory of 29 THE WONDERS OF LIFE life" which is raised thereon demands an inteUigent design and a deliberate constructing engineer for the origin of the organism, just as we find in the case of the machine. The organism is then very freely compared to a watch or a locomotive. In order to secure the regular working of such a complicated mechanism, it is necessary to arrange for a perfect co-operation of all its parts, and the slightest accident to a single wheel suffices to throw it out of gear. This figure was particularly employed by Louis Agassiz (1858), who saw "an incar- nate thought of the Creator" in every species of animal and plant. Of late years it has been much used by Reinke in the support of his theosophic dualism. He described God, or "the world-soul," as the "cosmic in- telligence," but ascribes to this mystic immaterial being the same attributes that the catechism and the preacher give to the Creator of heaven and earth. He compares the human intelligence which the watch-maker has put into the elaborate structure of the watch with the "cosmic intelligence" which the Creator has put in the organism, and insists that it is impossible to deduce its purposive organization from its material constituents. In this he entirely overlooks the immense difTerence between the "raw material" in the two cases. The "organs" of the watch are metallic parts, which fulfil their purpose in virtue only of their physical properties f^ha-rdness, elasticity, etc.). The organs of the living organism, on the other hand, perform their functions chiefly in virtue of their chemical composition. Their soft plasma-body is a chemical laboratory, the highly elaborate molecular structure of which is the historical product of countless complicated processes of heredity and adaptation. This invisible and hypothetical molec- ular structure must not (as is often done) be confused with the real and microscopically discoverable structure of the plasm, which is of great importance in the question 30 LIFE of organization. If one is disposed to assume for this molecular structure a simple chemical substance, a deliberate design, and an " intelligent natural force" for cause, one is bound to do the same for powder, and say that the molecules of charcoal, sulphur, and saltpetre have been purposively combined to produce an ex- plosion. It is well known that powder was not made according to a theory, but accidentally discovered in the course of experiment. The whole of this favorite machine-theory of life, and the far-reaching dualistic conclusions drawn from it, tumble to pieces when we study the simplest organisms known to us, the monera; for these are really organisms without organs — and without organization ! I endeavored in my Gcnerelle Morphologic (1866) to draw the attention of biologists to these simplest and lowest organisms which have no visible organization or composition from different organs. I therefore proposed to give them the general title of monera. The more I have studied these structureless beings — cells without nuclei! — since that time, the more I have felt their importance in solving the greatest questions of biology — the problem of the origin of life, the nature of life, and so on. Unfortunately, these primitive little beings are ignored or neglected by most biologists to-day. O. Hertwig devotes one page of his three - hundred - page book on cells and tissues to them; he doubts the exist- ence of cells without nuclei. Reinke, who has himself shown the existence of unnucleated cells among the bacteria (beggiatoa), does not say a word about their general significance. Biitschli, who shares my monis- tic conception of life, and has given it considerable support by his own thorough study of plasma- structures and the artificial production of them in oil and soapsuds, believes, like many other writers, that the "composition of even the simplest 31 THE WONDERS OF LIFE elementary organism from cell-nucleus and proto- plasm" (the primitive organs of the cell) is indispensable. These and other writers suppose that the nucleus has been overlooked in the protoplasm of the monera I have described. This may be true for one section of them; but they say nothing about the other section, in which the nucleus is certainly lacking. To this class belong the remarkable chromacea {phycochroniacea or cyanophy- cea), and especially the simplest forms of these, the chroococcacea (chroococcus, aphanocapsa, glceocapsa, etc.). These plasmodomous (plasma-forming) monera, which live at the very frontier of the organic and inorganic worlds, are by no means uncommon or particularly difficult to find; on the contrar3^ they are found every- where, and are easy to observe. Yet they are generally ignored because they do not square with the prevailing dogma of the cell. I ascribe this special significance to the chromacea among all the monera I have instanced because I take them to be the oldest phyletically, and the most primi- tive of all living organisms known to us. In particular their very simple forms correspond exactly to all the theoretic claims which monistic biology can make as to the transition from the inorganic to the organic. Of the chroococcacea, the chroococcus, gloeocapsa, etc., are found throughout the world; they form thin, usually bluish -green coats or jelly-like deposits on damp rocks, stones, bark of trees, etc. When a small piece of this jelly is examined carefully under a powerful microscope, noth- ing is seen but thousands of tiny blue-green globules of plasma, distributed irregularly in the common structure- less mass. In some species we can detect a thin struct- ureless membrane enclosing the homogeneous particle of plasm; its origin can be explained on purely physical principles by "superficial energy" — like the firmer sur- face-layer of a drop of rain, or of a globule of oil swim- 32 LIFE ming in water. Other species secrete homogeneous jelly- like envelopes — a purely chemical process. In some of the chromacea the blue-green coloring matter {phyocyan) is stored in the surface-layer of the particle of plasm, while the inner part is colorless — a sort of "central body." However, the latter is by no means a real, chemically and morphologically distinct, nucleus. Such a thing is completely lacking. The whole life of these simple, motionless globules of plasm is confined to their metabolism (or plasniodomism, chapter x.) and the re- sulting growth. When the latter passes a certain stage, the homogeneous globule splits into two halves (like a drop of quicksilver when it falls). This simplest form of reproduction is shared by the chromacea (and the cognate bacteria) with the chromatella or chromato- phora, the green particles of chlorophyll inside ordinary plant-cells ; but these are only parts of a cell. Hence no unprejudiced observer can compare these unnucleated and independent granules of plasm with real (nucleated) cells, but must conceive them rather as cytodes. These anatomic and physiological facts may easily be observed in the chromacea, which are found everywhere. The organism of the simplest chromacea is really nothing more than a stmctureless globular particle of plasm; we cannot discover in them any composition of dif- ferent organs (or organella) for definite vital functions. Such a composition or organization would have no meaning in this case, since the sole vital purpose of these plasma-particles is self-maintenance. This is attained in the simplest fashion for the individual by metabolism; for the species it is effected by self- cleavage, the simplest conceivable form of reproduc- tion. Modern histologists have discovered a very intricate and delicate structure in many of the higher unicellular protists and in many of the tissue-cells of the higher THE WONDERS OF LIFE animals and plants (such as the nerve-cells). They wrongly conclude that this is universal. In my opinion, this complication of the structure of the elementary organism is always a secondary phenomenon, the slow and gradual result of countless phylogenetic processes of differentiation, initiated by adaptation and transmitted to posterity by heredity. The earliest ancestors of all these elaborate nucleated cells were at first simple, un- nucleated cytodes, such as we find to-day in the ubiq- uitous monera. We shall see more about them in the ninth and fifteenth chapters. Naturally, this lack of a visible histological structure in the plasma-globule of the monera does not exclude the possession of an invisible molecular structure. On the contrary, we are bound to assume that there is such a structure, as in all albuminoid compounds, and espe- cially all plasmic bodies. But we also find this elaborate chemical structure in many lifeless bodies; some of these, in fact, show a metabolism similar to that of the simplest organisms. We will return subsequently to this subject of catalysis. Briefly, the only difference between the simplest chromacea and inorganic bodies that have catalysis is in the special form of their metab- olism, which we call plasmodomism (formation of plasm), or "carbon-assimilation." The mere fact that the chromacea assume a globular form is no sign what- ever of a morphological vital process; drops of quick- silver and other inorganic fluids take the same shape when the individual body is formed under certain condi- tions. When a drop of oil falls into a fluid of the same specific gravity with which it cannot mix (such as a mixture of water and spirits of wine), it immediately assumes a globular shape. Inorganic solids usually take _the form of crystals instead. Hence the distinctive feature of the simplest organism, the plasma-particles of the monera, is neither anatomic structure nor a 34 LIFE certain shape, but solely the physiological function of plasmodomism — a process of chemical synthesis. The difference between the monera I have described and any higher organism is, I think, greater in every respect than the difference between the organic monera and the inorganic crystals. Nay, even the difference between the unnucleated monera (as cytodes) and the real nucleated cells may fairly be regarded as greater still. Even in the simplest real cell we find the distinc- tion between two different organella, or "cell-organs," the internal nucleus and the outer cell-body. The caryoplasm of the nucleus discharges t!ie functions of reproduction and heredity; the cytoplasm of the cell- body accomplishes the metabolism, nutrition, and adap- tation. Here we have, therefore, the first, oldest, and most important process of division of labor in the elementary organism. In the unicellular protists the organization rises in proportion to the differentiation of the various parts of the cell; in the tissue-forming histona it rises again in proportion to the distribution of work (or ergonomy) among the various organs. Darwin has given us in his theory of selection a me- chanical explanation of the apparent design and pur- posiveness in this. In order to have a correct monistic conception of organization, it is important to distinguish the individ- uality of the organism in its various stages of composi- tion. We shall treat this important question, about which there is a good deal of obscurity and contradiction, in a special chapter (vii.). It suffices for the moment to point out that the unicellular beings (protists) are simple organisms both in regard to morphology and physiology. On the other hand, this is only true in the physiological sense of the histona, the tissue-forming animals and plants. From the morphological point of view they are made up of innumerable cells, which form 35 THE WONDERS OF LIFE the various tissues. These histonal individuals are called sprouts in the plant world and persons in the ani- mal world. At a still higher stage of organization we have the trunk or stem (cormus), which is made up of a number of sprouts or persons, like the tree or the coral- stem. In the fixed animal stems the associated individ- uals have a direct bodily connection, and take their food in common; but in the social aggregations of the higher animals it is the ideal link of common interest that unites the individuals, as in swarms of bees, colonies of ants, herds of mammals, etc. These communities are sometimes called "animal-states." Like human polities, they are organisms of a higher type. However, in order to avoid misunderstanding, we must take the word "organism" in the sense in which most biologists use it — namely, to designate an in- dividual living thing, the material substratum of which is plasm or "living substance" — a nitrogenous carbon- compound in a semi-fluid condition. It leads to a good deal of misunderstanding when separate functions are called organisms, as is done sometimes in speaking of the soul or of speech. It would be just as correct to call see- ing or running an organism. It is advisable also in scientific treatises to refrain from calling inorganic compounds as such "organisms," as, for instance, the sea or the whole earth. Such names, having a purely symbolical value, may very well be used in poetry. The rhythmic wave-movement of the ocean may be re- garded as its respiration, the surge as its voice, and so on. Many scientists (like Fechner) conceive the whole earth Vv^ith all its organic and inorganic contents as a gigantic organism, whose countless organs have been arranged in an orderly whole by the world-reason (God). In the same way the physiologist, Preyer, re- gards the glowing heavenly bodies as "gigantic or- ganisms, whose breath is, perhaps, the glowing vapor 36 LIFE of iron, whose blood is liquid metal, and whose food may- be meteorites." The danger of this poetic application of the metaphorical sense of organism is very well seen in this instance, as Preyer builds on it a quite un- tenable hypothesis of the origin of life (see chapter xv.). In the wider sense the word "organic" has long been used in chemistry as an antithesis to inorganic. By organic chemistry is generally understood the chemistry of the compounds of carbon, that element being dis- tinguished from all the others (some seventy-eight in number) by very important properties. It has, in the first place, the property of entering into an immense varietv of combinations with other elements, and especially of uniting with oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen, and sulphur to form the most complicated albtiminoids (see the Riddle, chapter xiv.). Carbon is a biogenetic element of the first importance, as I explained in my carbon-theory in 1866. It might even be called "the creator of the organic world." At first these organo- genetic compounds do not appear in the organism in organized form — that is to say, they are not yet distrib- uted into organs with definite purposes. Such organi- zation is a result, not the cause, of the life-process. I have already shown in the fourteenth chapter of the Riddle (and at greater length in the fifteenth chapter of my History of Creation) that the belief in the essential unity of nature, or the monism of the cosmos, is of the greatest importance for our whole system. I gave a very thorough justification of this cosmic monism in 1866. In the fifth chapter of the Generelle Morphologic I considered the relation of the organic to the in- organic in every respect, pointing out the differences between them on the one hand, and their points of agree- ment in matter, form, and force on the other. Niigeli some time afterwards declared similarly for the unity of nature in his able MechaniscJi-physiologische Bcgriindung .37 THE WONDERS OF LIFE der Ahstamniiingslehre (1884). Wilhelm Ostwald has recently done the same, from the monistic point of view of his system of energy, in his NaUirphilosophie, espe- cially in the sixteenth chapter. Without being acquaint- ed with my earlier work, he has impartially compared the physico-chemical processes in the organic and inor- ganic worlds, partly adducing the same illustrations from the instructive field of crystallization. He came to the same monistic conclusions that I reached thirty- six years ago. As most biologists continue to ignore them, and as, especially, modern vitalism thrusts these inconvenient facts out of sight, I will give a brief sum- mary once more of the chief points as regards the matter, form, and forces of bodies. Chemical analysis shows that there are no elements present in organisms that are not found in inorganic bodies. The number of elements that cannot be further analyzed is now put at seventy-eight ; but of these only the five organogenetic elements already mentioned which combine to form plasm — carbon, oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen, and sulphur — are found invariably in living things. With these are generally (but not always) associated five other elements — phosphor, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and iron. Other elements may also be found in organisms ; bu t there is not a single biological element that is not also found in the inorganic world. Hence the distinctive features which separate the one from the other can be sought only in some special form of combination of the elements. And it is carbon es- pecially, the chief organic element, that by its peculiar affinity enters into the most diverse and complicated combinations with other elements, and produces the m.ost important of all substances, the albuminoids, at the head of which is the living plasm {cf. chapter vi.). An indispensable condition of the circulation of matter (metabolism) which we call life is the physical process of LIFE osmosis, which is connected with the variations in the quantity of water in the hving substance and its power of diffusion. The plasm, which is of a spongy or viscous consistency, can take in dissolved matter from without (endosmosis) and eject matter from within (exosmosis). This absorptive property (or "imbibition-energy") of the plasm is connected with the colloidal character of the albuminoids. As Graham has shown, we may divide all soluble substances into two groups in respect of their diosmosis — crystalloids and colloids. Crystalloids (such as soluble salt and sugar) pass more easily into water through a porous wall than colloids (such as albumen, glue, gum, caramel). Hence we can easily separate by dialysis two bodies of different groups which are mixed in a solution. For this we need a flat bottle with side walls of india-rubber and bottom of parchment. If we let this vessel float in a large one containing plenty of water, and pour a mixture of dissolved gum and sugar into the inner vessel, after a time nearly all the sugar passes through the parchment into the water, and an almost pure solution of gum remains in the bottle. This process of diffusion, or osmosis, plays a most important part in the life of all organisms; but it is by no means peculiar to the living substance, any more than the absorptive or viscous condition is. We may even have one and the same substance — either organic or inorganic — in both conditions, as crystal or as colloid. Albumen, which usually seems to be colloidal, forms hexagonal crystals in many plant-cells (for instance, in the aleuron- granules of the endosperm), and tetrahedric hoemoglobin- crystals in many animal-cells (as in the blood corpuscles of mammals). These albuminoid crystals are distin- guished by their capacity for absorbing a considerable quantity of water without losing their shape. On the other hand, mineral silicon, which appears as quartz in an immense variety (more than one hundred and sixty) 39 THE WONDERS OF LIFE of crystalline forms, is capable in certain circum- stances (as metasilicon) of becoming colloidal and form- ing jelly-like masses of glue. This fact is the more interesting because silicium behaves in other ways very like carbon, is quadrivalent like it, and forms very similar combinations. Amorphous (or non-crystalline) silicium (a brown powder) stands in relation to the black metallic silicon-crystals just as amorphous carbon does to graphite-crystals. There are other substances that may be either crystalloid or colloid in different circum- stances. Hence, however important colloidal structure may be for the plasm and its metabolism, it can by no means be advanced as a distinctive feature of living matter. Nor is it possible to assign an absolute distinction between the organic and the inorganic in respect of morphology any more than of chemistry. The instruc- tive monera once more form a connecting bridge be- tween the two realms. This is true both of the inter- nal structure and the outward form of both classes of bodies — of their individuality (chapter vii.) and their r type (chapter viii.). Inorganic crystals correspond mor- phologically to the simplest (unnucleated) forms of the organic cells. It is true that the great majority of organisms seem to be conspicuously different from inorganic bodies by the mere fact that they are made up of many different parts which they use as organs for definite purposes of life. But in the case of the monera there is no such organization. In the simplest cases (chromacea, bacteria) they are structureless, globular, discoid, or rod-shaped plasmic individuals, which accom- plish their peculiar vital function (simple growth and subdivision) solely by means of their chemical constitu- tion, or their invisible molecular structure. The comparison of cells with crystals was made in 1838 by the founders of the cell-theory, Schleiden and 40 LIFE Schwann. It has been much criticised by recent cytol- ogists, and does not hold in all respects. Still it is of importance, as the crystal is the most ])erfect form of inorganic individuality, has a definite internal structure and outward form, and obtains these by a regular growth. The external form of crystals is prismatic, and bounded by straight surfaces which cut each other at certain angles. But the same form is seen in the skeletons of many of the protists, especially the flinty shells of the diatomes and radiolaria; their silicious coverings lend themselves to mathematical determination just as well as the inorganic crystals. Midway between the organic plasma-products and inorganic crystals we have the bio-crystals, which are formed by the united plastic action of the plasm and the mineral matter — for in- stance, the crystalline flint and chalk skeletons of many of the sponges, corals, etc. Further, by the orderly association of a number of crystals we get com- pound crystal groups, which may be compared to the communities of protists — for instance, the branching ice-flowers and ice-trees on the frozen window. To this regular external form of the crystal corresponds a definite internal structure which shows itself in their cleavage, their stratified build, their polar axes, etc. If we do not restrict the term "life" to organisms properly so-called, and take it only as a function of plasm, we may speak in a broader sense of the life of crystals. This is seen especially in their growth, the phenomenon which Baer regarded as the chief character of all individual development. When a crystal is formed in a matrix, this is done by attracting homogeneous particles. When two different substances, A and B, are dissolved in a mixed and saturated solution, and a crystal of A is put in the mixture, only A is crystallized out of it, not B; on the other hand, if a crystal of B is put in, A reraains in solution and B alone assumes the 41 THE WONDERS OF LIFE solid crystalline form. We may, in a certain sense, call this choice assimilation. In many crystals we can detect internally an interaction of their parts. When we cut off an angle in a forming crystal, the opposite angle is only imperfectly formed. A more important difference between the growth of crystals and monera is that the former only grow by apposition, or the deposit of fresh solid matter at their surface; while the monera grow, like all cells, by iutitssusception, or the taking of new matter into their interior. But this difference is easily explained by their difference in consistency, the crystal being solid and the plasm semi-fluid. Moreover, the difference is not absolute; there are intermediary stages between apposition and intussusception. A colloid globule suspended in a salt solution in which it is not dissolved may grow by intussusception. It was once the custom to restrict sensation and movement to animals, but they are now recognized to be present in nearly all living matter. They are, in fact, not altogether lacking in crystals, as the molecules move in crystallization in definite directions, and unite accord- ing to fixed laws; they must, therefore, also possess sensation, as we could not otherwise understand the attraction of the homogeneous particles. We find in crystallization, as in every chemical process, certain movements which are unintelligible without sensation — unconscious sensation, of course. In this respect, also, then, the growth of all bodies follows the same laws {cf. chapters xiii. and xv.). The growth of a crystal is restricted like the growth of a moneron or of any cell. If the limit is passed and the conditions remain favorable to growth, we find an instance of that excessive or transgressive growth which we call reproduction in the case of living individuals. Bvit we find just the same kind of extension in the inorganic crystal. Every crystal grows in a super- 42 LIFE saturated medium only up to a definite size, which is determined by its chemical-molecular constitution. When this limit is reached a number of small crystals appear on the large one. Ostwald, who has made a thorough comparison of the process of growth in crystals and monera, especially notices the striking analogy between a bacterium (a plasmophagous moneron) growing and multiplying in its nutritive fluid and a crystal in its matrix. When the water slowly evaporates from a supersaturated solution of Glauber-salt, not only does a crystal slowly grow in it, but several young crystals appear on it. The analogy with the bacterium multiplying in its nutritive fluid can even be followed as far as its permanent forms or "spores." This quiescent form is assumed by the bacterium if its supply of food is exhausted; if fresh food is added, the multiplication by cleavage begins again. In the same way the crys- tals of Glauber-salt begin to decay when the solution is evaporated; they lose their crystal water, but not their power of multiplication. Even the amorphous powder of the salt causes again the formation of new watery crystals when put in a supersaturated solution. But the powder loses this property when it is heated, just as the dormant forms (or spores) of the bacteria lose their power of germination. The exhaustive comparison of the growth of crystals and monera (as the simplest forms of unnucleated cells) is important, because it shows the possibility of tracing the vital function of reproduction — which had usually been regarded as a quite special "wonder of life" — to purely physical conditions. The division of the growing individual into several young ones must necessarily take place when the natural limit of growth has been passed, and when the chemical composition of the growing body and the cohesion of its molecules allow no further en- largement by the assumption of new matter. In order 43 THE WONDERS OF LIFE to illustrate the limit of this transgressive growth by a simple physical example, Ostwald imagines a ball placed in a small flat basin, built up high on one side. The ball is in a state of equilibrium in the basin; when it is lightly pushed aside it always returns to its original position. But when the push goes beyond a certain point, and the ball is thrust over the side of the basin, the balance is lost; the ball does not return, but falls to the ground. The crystal behaves just in the same way in a supersaturated solution when it exercises its power of forming new crystals; and it is just the same with the bacterium growing in a nutritive fluid when it passes the limit of its volume of growth, and divides into two individuals. As we can find no morphological and little physiological difference between the living and non-living, we must look upon metabolism as the chief characteristic of or- ganic life. This process causes the conversion of food into plasm; it is determined by the vital force itself, and is the formation of new living matter. It thus effects the nutrition and growth of the living being, and therefore its reproduction, which is merely transgressive growth. As I shall describe this metabolism fully in the tenth chapter, I will do no more here than emphasize the fact that this vital process also has analogies in inorganic chemistry, in the curious process of catalysis, especially that form of it which we call fermentation. The distinguished chemist Berzelius discovered in 1810 the remarkable fact that certain bodies, by their mere presence, apart from their chemical affinity, set other bodies in decomposition or composition without being themselves affected. Thus, for instance, sulphuric acid changes the starch in sugar without undergoing any alteration itself. Finely ground platinum brought in contact with hydrogen-superoxide divides it into hydrogen and oxygen. Berzelius called this process 44 LIFE catalysis; Mitscherlich, who discovered the cause of it to be the pecuHar surface - action of many bodies, gave it the name of "contact -action." It was after- wards discovered that catalysis of this kind is very general, and that a special form of it — fermenta- tion — plays an important part in the life of organ- isms. This special form of contact-action which we call fermentation is always effected by catalytic bodies of the albuminoid class, and, in fact, of the group of non- coagulable proteins which are known as peptones. They have — in however small a quantity — the capacity to throw into decomposition large masses of organic matter (in the form of yeast, putrid matter, etc.) without them- selves taking part in the decomposition. When these j ferments are free and unorganized they are called enzyma, in opposition to organized ferments (bacteria, yeast-fungi, etc.); though the catalytic action of the latter also consists essentially in the production of enzyma. The recent investigations of Verworn, Hof- meister, Ostwald, etc., have shown that these catalyses play everywhere an important part in the life of the plasm. Many recent chemnsts and physiologists are of opinion that plasm is a colloid catalysator, and that all the varied activities of life are connected with this funda- mental vital chemistry. Thus Franz Hofmeister (1901) says in his excellent work on The Chemical Organization of the Cell: The belief that the agents of the chemical transformation in the cell are catalysators of a colloid nature is in complete accord with other facts that have been directly ascertained. What else are the chemists' ferments but colloid catalysators ? The idea that the ferments are the essential chemical ai^ency in the cell is calculated to meet the difficulty which arises from the smallness of the cell in appreciating its chemical processes. However large we suppose the colloid ferment molecules to be, there is room for millions of them in the smallest cell. 45 THE WONDERS OF LIFE In the same way Ostwald attributes the greatest significance to catalysis in connection with the vital processes, and seeks to explain them on his theory of energy by reference to the duration of chemical proc- esses. In the discourse "On Catalysis" that he de- livered at Hamburg in 1901 he says: We must recognize the enzyma as catalysators that arise in the organism during the life of the cells, and by their action relieve the living being of the greater part of its duties. Not only are digestion and assimilation controlled by enzyma from first to last, but the fundamental vital action of most organisms, the production of the necessary chemical energy by combustion at the expense of the oxygen in the air, takes place with the explicit co-operation of enzyma, and would be impossible with- out them. Free oxygen is, as is well known, a very inert body at the temperature of the living body, and the maintenance of life would be impossible without some acceleration of its rate of reaction. In his further observations on catalysis and metabolism he says that they are both equally subject to the physico- chemical laws of energy. Max Verworn has given us a very searching analysis of the molecular process in the catalytic aspect of metab • olism in his Biogen Hypothesis (1903), "a critical and experimental study of the processes in living matter." He simplifies the catalytic theory of the enzyma by tracing all the phenomena of life to the catalytic metab- olism of one single chemical compound, the plasm, and regards its active molecules, the biogens, as the ultimate chemical factors of the vital process. While the enzyma hypothesis assumes that there are in each cell a great number of different enzyma which are all co-ordinated, and each of which only performs its little special work, the biogen hypothesis deduces all the vital phenomena from one compound, the biogenetic plasm; and thus the biogen molecules, which increase by division into parts, 46 LIFE are the sole factors of biological catalysis. Verworn also points out the analogy between this enzymatic process of metabolism and the inorganic processes of catalysis — for instance, in the manufacture of English sulphuric acid. A small and constant quantity of nitro- muriatic acid, with the aid of air and water, converts an unlimited mass of sulphuretted acid into sulphuric acid without being changed itself; the molecule of the nitro- muriatic acid breaks up steadily by the giving-off of oxygen, and is then restored by the assumption of oxygen. The manifold and changeful phenomena of life and their sudden extinction at death seem to every thoughtful man to be something so wonderful and so different from all the changes in inorganic nature that from the very beginning of biological philosophy special forces were assumed to explain it. This was particularly due to the remarkable, orderly structure of the organism and the apparent purposiveness of the vital processes. Hence, in earlier days a special organic force {archcBus insitns) was assumed, controlling the individual life and pressing the "raw forces" of inorganic matter into its service. In the same way a special formative impulse was supposed to preside over the wonderful processes of development. When physiology began to win its independence, about the middle of the eighteenth century, it explained the peculiar features of organic life by a specific vital force. The idea was generally received, and Louis Dumas endeavored thoroughly to establish it at the beginning of the nineteenth century {cf. chapter iii. of the Riddle). As the theory of a vital force, or vitalism, plays an important part in the study of the wonders of life, has undergone the most curious modifications in the course of the nineteenth century, and has been lately revived with great force, we must give a short account of it in its various forms. The phrase can be interpreted in a 47 THE WONDERS OF LIFE monistic sense, if we understand bv it the sum of the forms of energy which are especially distinctive of the organism, particularly metabolism and heredity. In this we pass no opinion on their nature, and do not say that they are specifically different from the forces of inorganic nature. We might call this monistic concep- tion "physical vitalism." However, the usual meta- physical vitalism affirms in a thoroughly dualistic sense that the vital force is a teleological and super-mechanical principle, is essentially different from the ordinar}?- forces of nature, and of a transcendental character. The special form in which this theory of a supernatural vital force has been presented for the last twenty years is often called Neovitalism; we might call the older form, by contrast, Palavitalism. The older idea of the vital force as a special energy could very well be accepted in the first third of the nine- teenth century, and in the eighteenth, because the physiology of the time was destitute of the most im- portant aids to the founding of a mechanical theory. There was then no such thing as the cell-theory or as physiological chemistry ; ontogeny and paleontology were still in their cradles. Lamarck's theory of descent (1809) had been done to death, like his fundamental principle: "Life is only an elaborate physical phenomenon." Hence we can easily understand how physiologists acquiesced in the vitalist hypothesis up to 1833, and supposed the wonders of life to be enigmatic phenomena that escaped physical explanation. But the position of Palavitalism changed in the second third of the nineteenth century. In 1833 appeared Johannes Miiller's classical Manual of Human Physiology, in which the great biologist not only made a comparative study of the vital phenomena in man and the animals, but sought to provide a sound basis for it in all its sections by his own observations and experiments. It 48 LIFE is true that Miillcr retained to the last (1858) the current idea of a vital force, as the supreme regulator of all the vital activities. However, he did not regard it as a metaphysical principle (like Haller, Kant, and their followers), but as a natural force, subject, like all others, to fixed chemical and physical laws, and subordinate to the whole. In his comprehensive study of every single vital function — the organs of sense and the nervous system, metabolism and the action of the heart, speech and reproduction — Miiller endeavored above all to establish, by close observation of the facts and careful experiments, the regularity of the phenomena, and to explain their development by a comparison of the higher and lower forms. Hence Johannes Miiller is wrongly described — as he has been of late — as a vitalist; he was rather the first physiologist to provide a physical foundation for the current metaphysical vitalism. He really gives an indirect proof of the reverse theory, as E. Dubois-Reymond rightly observed in his brilliant memorial speech. In the same way Schleiden (1843) cut the ground from under vitalism in botany. By his cell- theory (1838) he showed the unity of the multicellular organism to be the resultant of the functions of all the cells which compose it. The physical explanation of the vital processes and the rejection of Palavitalism were general in the last third of the nineteenth century. This was due most of all to the great advance in experimental physiology, which Carl Ludwig and Felix Bernard led as regards the animal body, and Julius Sachs and Wilhelm Preyer for the plant. While these and other physiologists used the remarkable results of modern physics and chemistry in the experimental study of the vital func- tions, and sought to detennine their complicated course in terms of mass and weight and formulate their dis- coveries as mathematically as possible, they brought a 4 49 THE WONDERS OF LIFE great number of the wonders of life under the same fixed laws that were recognized in the physics and chemistry of the inorganic world. On the other hand, vitalism met with a powerful opponent in Charles Darwin, who solved, by his theory of selection, one of the most obscure biological problems, the constantly repeated question: How can we give a mechanical ex- planation of the orderly structures of the living being ? How was this ingenious machine of the animal or plant body unconsciously produced by natural means, without supposing that some intelligent artificer or creator had deliberately designed and produced it? The further development of Darwin's theory of selection in the last four decades, and the increasing support which has been given to the theory of descent in the great advance of ontogeny, phylogeny, compara- tive anatomy, and physiology, did much to establish the monistic conception of life. It took the shape more and more of a definite anti- vitalism. Hence it is strange to find that in the course of the last twenty years the old vitalism that everybody had thought dead has lifted up its head once more, though in a new and modified form.^ This modern vitalism comprises two essentially different tendencies. The partisans of the modern vital force are divided into two groups, which may be designated the sceptical and the dogmatic. Sceptical Neovitalism was first formulated by Bunge,of Basle (1887), in the introduction to his Manual of Physiological Chemistry. While he ^ This refers almost entirely to Germany. The reader will remember that, when Lord Kelvin endeavored to make the- osophic capital out of this temporary confusion in German science, he was immediately silenced by the leading biologists of this country, Professor E. Ray-Lankester (for zoology), Sir W. T. Thiselton-Dyer (for botany), and Sir J. Burdon- Sanderson (for physiology), who sharply reiected vitalism. — Trans. 50 LIFE granted the possibility of a full explanation of one part of the vital phenomena by mechanical causes, or the physical and chemical forces of lifeless nature, he rejected it for the other half, especially for psychic activities. He insists that the latter cannot be explained mechani- cally, and that there is nothing analogous to them in inorganic nature; only a supra-mechanical vital force can produce them, and this is transcendental and beyond the range of scientific inquiry. Much the same was said later by Rindfieisch (1888), more recently by Richard Neumeister in his Studies of the Nature of Vital Phenomena (1903), and by Oscar Hertwig in the lecture on "The Development of Biology in the Nine- teenth Century," which he delivered at Aachen in 1900. This sceptical Neovitalism is far surpassed by the dogmatic system, the chief actual representatives of which are the botanist Johannes Reinke and the meta- physician Hans Driesch. The vitalist writings of the latter, which are devoid of any grasp of historical development, have gained a certain vogue through the extraordinary arrogance of their author and the obscurity of his mystic and contradictory speculations. Reinke, on the other hand, has presented his transcendental dualism in clever and attractive form in two works which deserve notice on account of their consistent dualism. In the first of these, The World as Reality (1899), Reinke gives us "the outline of a scientific theory of the universe." The second work (1901) has the title. Introduction to Theoretical Biolof^y. The two works have the same relation to each other as my Riddle of the Universe and the present supplementary volume. As our philosophic convictions are diametrically opposed in the main issues, and as we both think ourselves consistent in developing them, the comparison of them is not without interest in the great struggle of beliefs. Reinke is an 51 THE WONDERS OF LIFE avowed supporter of dualism, theism, and teleology. He reduces all the phenomena of life to a supernatural miracle. Second Table ANTITHESIS OF THE MONISTIC AND DUALISTIC THEORIES OF ORGANIC LIFE Monistic Theory of Life (Biophysics) 1. The phenomena of life are merely functions of plasm, determined by the phys- ical, chemical, and mor- phological character of the living matter. 2. The energy of the plasm (as the sum-total of the forces which are connected with the living matter) is sub- ject to the general laws of physics and chemistry. 3 . The obvious regularity of the vital processes and the organization they produce are the outcome of natural evolution ; their physio- logical factors (heredity and adaptation) are sub- ject to the law of sub- stance. 4. All the various functions have thus been mechani- cally produced, orderly structures having been created by adaptation and transmitted to posterity by heredity. 5. Nutrition is a physico-chem- ical process, the metabo- lism of which has an analogy in inorganic ca- talysis. 6. Reproduction is a mechan- ical consequence of trans- gressive growth, analo- gous to the elective multi- plication of crystals. DuALisTic Theory of Life (Vitalism) 1. The phenomena of life are w^holly or partly inde- pendent of the plasm, and determined by a special immaterial force, the vital force {vis vitalis). 2. The energy of the plasm is w^iolly or partly subject to the immaterial vital force, which controls and directs the physical and chemical forces of the living matter. 3. The general regularity in the organization and in the vital processes it accom- plishes is the outcome of conscious creation; it can only be explained by in- telligent immaterial forces which are not subject to the law of substance. 4. All the various functions of organisms have been pro- duced by design, the historical evolution (or phyletic transformation) being directed to a pre- conceived ideal end. 5. Nutrition is an inexplicable miracle of life, and cannot be understood by chemical and physical processes. 6. Reproduction is an inex- plicable miracle of life, without any analogy in inorganic nature. 52 LIFE ANTITHESIS OF THE MONISTIC AND DUALISTIC THEORIES OF ORGANIC LIFE— Cotttinned The movement of orfj^anisms is, in every form, not essentially different from the movements of inor- ganic dynamos. Sensation is a general form of the energy of substance, not specifically different in sensitive organisms and irritable inorganic objects (such as powder, dyna- mite). There is no such thing as an immaterial soul. 7. The movement of organisms is an inexplicable meta- ph3''sical miracle of life, specifically different from all inorganic mov^ements. 8. The sensation of organisms can only be explained by ascribing a soul to them, an immaterial, immortal being that only dwells for a time in the body. After death this sj^irit liv^es an independent life. Ill MIRACLES Miracle and natural law — Belief in miracles of savages (fetich- ism), of semi-civilized (idolatry), of civilized (theism), and of educated people (dualism) — Religious belief in miracles — Apostles' Creed — Article relating to creation — Article relating to redemption — Article relating to im- mortality — Philosophic belief in miracles — Academic think- ers and Free-thinkers — Dualism of Plato and Kant — Belief in miracles in the nineteenth century, in modern meta« physics, theology, and politics. IN ordinary parlance the word "miracle " means a num- ber of different things. We say a phenomenon is miraculous or wonderful ^ when we cannot explain it and trace its causes. But we say a natural object or a work of art is wonderful when it is unusually beautiful and imposing — when it passes the ordinary limits of our experience. In this work I do not take the word in this relative sense, but in the absolute sense in which a phenomenon is said to transcend the limits of natural law and lie beyond the range of rational explanation. In this sense it means the same as "supernatural" or "transcendental." We can know natural phenomena by our reason and bring them within our cognizance. The miraculous can only be accepted on faith. * The German word wunder corresponds equally to the English "miracle" and "wonder." It has seemed necessary to translate it "wonder" in the title of the work, but frequently as "miracle" in this chapter. — Trans. 54 M I R A C L E wS The belief in supernatural miracles is in contradiction to pure reason, which lays the foundations of all science. Kant, who won so great a vogue for the term "pure reason," understood by this originally "reason as inde- pendent of experience." The phrase was used in a narrower sense subsequently to express independence of dogma and prejudice, as the base of pure and unprej- udiced science. In this sense we oppose pure reason to superstition. I have dealt in the sixteenth chapter of the Riddle with the important question of the relations of knowledge and faith. But I must return to the vsubject here, as what I said has given rise to a good deal of misunder- standing and criticism. I by no means claimed, as my opponents allege, to "know everything," or to have solved every problem. In fact, I said repeatedly that there are narrow limits to our knowledge, and always will be. I had also expressly stated that the irresistible impulse to learn in the intelligent man, or reason's constant demand to know causes, presses us to fill up the gaps in our knowledge by faith. But I had at the same time pointed out the contrast between scientific (natural) and religious (supernatural) faith. The one leads us to form hypotheses and theories; the other ends in myths and superstition. vScientific faith fills the gaps in our knowledge of natural law with temporary hypotheses; but mystic religious faith contradicts natural law, and transcends its limits in the form of a belief in miracles. The great triumph of the progress of science in the nineteenth century, its theoretical value in the formation of a rational philosophy of life, and its practical value on the various sides of modern civilization, consist, above all, in the absolute recognition of fixed natural laws. That relation of things to each other, which we call causation, makes it possible for us to understand and explain facts. We feel that our thirst for a knowledge 55 THE WONDERS OF LIFE of the causes of things is contented when science points out the "sufficient reason" of them. In the whole province of inorganic cosmology natural law is now generally recognized to be all-powerful; in astronomy, geology, physics, and chemistry all phenomena are reduced to fixed laws, and in the long-run to the all- embracing law of substance, the great law of the conser- vation of matter and force {Kiddle, chapter xii.). It is otherwise in biology, or the organic section of cosmology. Here we still find miracles set up in opposi- tion to the law of substance, and the transgression of natural laws by supernatural forces. The behef in miracles of this kind, which pure reason calls supersti- tion, is still very w^idespread — much more prevalent than is usuahy thought. For my part, I hold that superstition and unreason are the worst enemies of the human race, while science and reason are its greatest friends. Hence it is our duty and task to attack the belief in miiacles wherever we find it, in the interest of the race. We have to prove that the reign of natural law extends over the whole world of phenomena as far as we can reach it. A general survey of the his- tory of faith on the one hand and of science on the other clearly shows that the advance of the latter has always been accompanied by an increasing knowledge of fixed natural laws and the shrinking of superstition into Jan ever-lessening area. To-day we convince ourselves of this by an impartial examination of mental culture at the various stages of civilization. For this purpose I take the four chief stages of mental development which Fritz Schultze has given in his Physiology of Uncivilized Races, and Alexander Sutherland in his work, On the Origin and Growth of the Moral Instinct: i, savages; 2, barbarians; 3, civilized races; 4, ediicated races {cf. chapter i.). The mental life of savages rises Httle above that 56 MIRACLES of the higher mammals, especially the apes, with which they are genealogically connected. Their whole interest is restricted to the physiological functions of nutrition and reproduction, or the satisfaction of hunger and thirst in the crudest animal fashion. Without fixed habitation, constantly struggling for existence, they live on the raw produce of nature — fruits, the roots of wild plants, and the animals they fish in the water or catch on land. Their intelligence moves within the narrowest bounds, and one can no more (or no less) speak of their reason than of that of the more intelligent animals. Of art and science there is no question. Their impulse to dis- cover causes is satisfied with the simplest association of phenomena which have a merely external connection, but no intimate relation to each other. Thus arises their fetichisin, that irrational trust in fetiches which Fritz Schultze has traced to four distinct causes: their false estimate of the value of an object, their anthropo- morphic conception of nature, the imperfect association of their ideas, and the strength of their emotions, espe- cially hope and fear. Any favorite object, a stone or a bone, may work miracles as a fetich and exercise all kinds of good or evil influence, and is therefore honored, feared, and worshipped. At first the worship was paid to the invisible spirit that dwelt in the particular object; but it was often transferred afterwards to the dead object itself. Among the different savage races the belief in fetiches presents a number of stages, corresponding to the beginnings of reason. The lowest stage is found in the lowest races, such as the Veddahs of Ceylon, the Andaman Islanders, Bushmen, and Akkas (of New Guine). A somewhat higher stage is met in the middle races (Australian negroes, Tasmanians, Hottentots, and Tierra del Fuegians); and a still higher intellectual development is shown by the next group (most of the Indians of North and South America, the aboriginal 57 THE WONDERS OF LIFE inhabitants of India, etc.). Modern comparative ethnog- raphy and evolution and prehistoric and anthropo- logical research have shown us that our own ancestors, ten thousand and more years ago, were (like the pre- historic ancestors of all races of men) savages, and that their earliest belief in miracles was a crude fetichism. By barbarians we understand the races that are found between savage and civilized peoples. They show the first beginnings of civilization, and are superior to savages chiefly in the possession of agriculture and the keeping of cattle. They make a provident use of the productive forces of organic nature, artificially produce large quantities of food, and are thus enabled by the abundance of food to turn their minds to other interests. We find that they have the rudiments of art and science. Their religion does not at first rise much above fetichism, but soon reaches the stage of animism, lifeless objects in nature being credited with souls. Worship is no longer paid to favorite dead objects (stones, bones, etc.), but generally to living things, trees and animals, and especially to images of gods which have the form of animals or men, and are believed to possess souls. As demons or spirits, these have a great influence on the fortunes of men. At first this soul is conceived to be purely material; it disappears at the death of the body and lives apart. As the breathing and the beat of the pulse and heart cease when a man dies, the seat of the soul is thought to be the lungs, heart, or some other part of the body. The idea of the immortality of the soul takes on innumerable forms among them, like the belief in the miracles which are worked by the gods, demons, spirits, etc. Evolution again points out a long gradation of forms of faith, if we compare the lower, middle, and higher races. ^Civilized races are distinguished from barbaric by the formation of states with an extensive division of labor. 58 MIRACLES The social organism is not only larger and more power- ful, but is capable of a greater variety of achievements, the functions of the various states and classes of work- ers being more highly differentiated and mutually com- plementary (like the cells and tissues in the higher animal body of the metazoa). Nutrition is easier and more luxurious. Art and science are well developed. A great advance is seen in regard to reHgion, the numerous gods being generally conceived as manlike spirits, and finally subordinated to a chief god. The belief in miracles flourishes greatly in poetry; in philosophy it is more and more restricted. In the end, the working of mir- acles is limited monotheistically to one god, or to his priests and other men to whom he communicates the power. Modern civilization in the narrower sense, as a con- trast to the older civilization, opens, in my opinion, at the beginning of the sixteenth century. At that time took place some of the greatest achievements of human thought among civilized peoples, and these broke the chains of tradition and gave a fresh impetus to progress. Men's own mental outlook was widened by the system of Copernicus and the Reformation freed them from the yoke of the papacy. Shortly before, the discovery of the New World and the circumnavigation of the globe had convinced men of the rotundity of the earth; geography, natural history, medicine, and other sciences gained inspiration and independence; printing and engraving provided an important means of spreading the new knowledge. This fresh impetus was chiefly of service to philosophy, which now more and more rejected the dictation of the Church and superstition; though it was far from casting off the fetters altogether. This was not generally possible until the nineteenth century, when empirical science assumed an enormous importance, and in the ensuing period of speculation the physical con- 59 THE WONDERS OF LIFE ception of the world gained more and more on the metaphysical. Pure knowledge, thus grounded on science, entered into sharper conflict than ever with religious faith. If, as in the preceding caseS; we distin- guish three stages in the development of modern civilization, we recognize the progressive liberation from superstition by scientific knowledge. When we compare the higher forms of religion of civilized nations we find the same emotional cravings and thought-processes constantly recurring, and the belief in miracles developing in much the same way. The three founders of the great monotheistic Mediter- ranean religion — Moses, Christ, and Mohammed — were equally regarded as wonder-working prophets, having direct intercourse with God in virtue of their special gifts, and transmitting his commands to men in the shape of laws. The extraordinary authority they enjoy, which has given so much prestige to the religions they founded, is grounded for ordinary people on their mi- raculous powers — the healing of the sick, the raising of the dead, the expiilsion of devils, and so on. If we examine the miracles of Christ as they are given in the gospels, they run counter to the laws of nature and rational explanation just in the same way as the similar miracles of Buddha and Brahma in Hindoo mythology, or of Mohammed in the Koran. The same must be said of the belief in the miracle of the bread and wine in the Lord's supper, and the hke. The Creed which was probably drawn up by the leaders of the Christian .communities of the second century, and received its final and present form in the Church of South Gaul in the fourth and fifth centuries, has been obligatory for Christians for fifteen hundred years, and recognized by both Church and State as compulsory. This Apostles' Creed was also recognized in Luther's catechismi to be fundamental, and is taught in all Protestant and Roman 60 MIRACLES Catholic schools (though not in the Greek Catholic) as the foundation of religious instruction. This extraor- dinary prestige of the Apostles' Creed, and its great influence on the education of the young, no less than its glaring inconsistency with rational knowledge, compel us to devote a few pages to a critical examination of its three articles. The first article of the Creed deals with creation, and runs: "I believe in God, the Father Almighty, Creator of heaven and earth." The modern science of evolution has shown that there never Avas any such creation, but that the universe is eternal and the law of substance all- ruling. God himself is anthropomorphically conceived as an "Almighty Creator" and the Father of man; heaven (in the sense of the geocentric system) is imag- ined as a great blue vault spanning the earth. The no- tion of this "personal God" as an intelligent, immaterial being, creating the material world out of nothing, is wholly irrational and meaningless. That Luther accepted this childish and scientifically worthless idea is clear from his commentary on the first article — " What is that?" The second article of the Creed deals with the dogma of salvation in the following words: "I believe in Jesus Christ, his only son, our Lord, who was conceived of the Holy Ghost, born of the Virgin Mary, suffered under Pontius Pilate, was crucified, dead, and buried, descend- ed into hell, on the third day rose again from the dead, ascended into heaven, sitteth at the right hand of God, the Father Almighty, whence he will come to judge the living and the dead." As these dogmas of the second article contain the chief points of the redemption theory, and are still treasured by millions of educated people, it is necessary to point out their flagrant opposition to pure reason. The chief evil of such creeds is that children, who are yet incapable of reflecting, are forced to learn 6i THE WONDERS OF LIFE them by heart. They then remain unchallenged as re- vealed truths. The myth of the conception and birth of Jesus Christ is mere fiction, and is at the same stage of superstition as a hundred other myths of other religions. Of the three persons who are mysteriously blended in the triune God, the son Christ is supposed to be begotten by both Father and Holy Ghost, parthenogenetically through the Virgin Mary. I have dealt with the physiology of parthenogenesis in the seventeenth chapter of the Riddle. The curious adventures of Christ after his death, the descent into hell, resurrection, and ascension, are also fantastic myths due to the narrow geocentric ideas of an uneducated people. Troelslund has admirably explain- ed the strong influence they have had in his interesting book, The Idea of Heaven and of the World} The idea of the "last judgment," with Christ sitting on the right hand of the Father, as many famous mediaeval pictures represent (notably Michael Angelo's in the Sistine Chapel at the Vatican), is another outcome of a thoroughly childish and anthropomorphic attitude. It is remarkable that this second article of the Creed says nothing about "redemption," which forms its head- ing [in Germany]. Luther has dealt with it in his commentary. Christ is believed to have suffered a painful death, like many thousand other martyrs, for his conviction of the truth of his faith and teaching — which reminds one of the more than a hundred thousand men who were done to death by the Inquisition and in the religious wars of the Middle Ages; but not one of the ^ The English reader may usefully be reminded that Professor Loofs, Haeckel's chief critic, and one of the foremost German theologians, rejects these articles of the Creed no less than Haeckel does. A glance at the pertinent articles in the En- cyclopaedia Biblica will show how widely theologians now discard these beliefs. — Trans. 62 MIRACLES millions of ministers who preach on it every Sunday seems to have shown a rational causal connection of this death with the alleged redemption from sin and death. The whole of this story of redemption has sj^rung from the primitive, obscure, ethical ideas of uneducated races, especially the crude belief in the propitiatory power of human sacrifice. It has no practical moral value except for those who believe in personal immortality — a scien- tifically untenable dogma. Whoever builds on this empty promise of a better life beyond may soothe himself with this hope, and reconcile himself to the thousand ills and defects of this world. But the man who studies this life as it really is will not find that the belief in re- demption has brought any real improvement. Want and misery and sin are as prevalent as ever; indeed, our modern civilization has, in many respects, increased them. The third and last article of the Apostles' Creed runs: "I believe in the Holy Ghost, the holy Catholic Church, the communion of saints, the forgiveness of sins, the resurrection of the body, and life everlasting." In the curious commentary that Luther made on this article in his catechism, he said that "man cannot believe of his own reason in Jesus Christ " — which is very true — but the Holy Ghost must lead him thereto with his grace; but how the third person of the Trinity effects this enlighten- ment and sanctification he did not explain. What is meant by the "communion of saints" and the "holy Catholic Church" must be gathered in the light of their history — especially the history of Romanism. This most powerful and still influential section of the Christian Church, which especially claims the title of Catholic and "the one ark of salvation," is really a most pitiful caricature of pure primitive Christianity. It has, with consummate skill, succeeded in preaching the beneficent teaching of Christ in theory and doing just the opposite 63 THE WONDERS OF LIFE in practice; we need only recall the Inquisition, the dark history of the Middle Ages, and the political hierarchy which still dominates so much of civilization. However, by far the most important clause in the third article is the final expression of belief in "the resurrection of the body and life everlasting." That this greatest "wonder of life" was originally conceived in a purely material form is evident from thousands of pictures in which famous painters have realistically depicted the resurrection of the dead, the aerial flight of the happy souls of the blessed, and the torments of the damned in hell. It is thus conceived still by the majority of believers who take eternal life to be an "enlarged and improved edition" of life here below. This is equally true of Christian and Mohammedan pictures and of the athanatist ideas that prevailed in other religions long before Christ was born, even of the first rudiments of the belief in primitive races. As long as the geocentric theory prevailed, and the heavens were thought to be a sort of blue glass bell, illumined by thousands of little stars and the lamp of the sun, arching like a vault over the flat earth, and the fires of hell burned in the cellars below, this barbaric notion of a resurrection of the body and a last judgment could easily be maintained. But its roots were destroyed when Copernicus refuted the geocentric theory in 1545 ; and athanatism became quite untenable when Darwin shattered the dogmia of an- thropocentricism. Not only the crude older materialistic idea of eternal life, but also the refined new spiritualistic version, has been rendered untenable by the progress of science in the nineteenth century. I have shown this in the eleventh chapter of the Riddle, v/hich closes with the words: "If we take a comprehensive glance at all that modern anthropology, x^s^^chology, and cosmology teach with regard to athanatism, we are forced to this definite conclusion. The belief in the immortality of the human 64 MIRACLES soul is in hopeless contradiction with the most solid empirical truths of modern science."^ The great influence which has been exercised on civilized nations by the Christian beliefs, supported by the practical exigencies of the state, for thousands of years, was chiefly seen in the crude superstition of the mass of the people. Confessions of faith became as much a matter of routine as the latest fashion in dress or the latest custom, etc. But even the majority of the philosophers were more or less subordinated to the in- fluence. It is true that a few great thinkers freed them- selves by the use of pure reason at an early date from the prevalent superstition, and framed systems apart from tradition and the priests. But most philosophers could not rise to the altitude of these brave Free-thinkers ; they remained "school-men " in the literal sense, dependent on the dictation of authority, the traditions of the school, and the dogmas of the Church. Philosophy was the "handmaid" of theology and ecclesiasticism. If we examine the history of philosophy in this light, we find in it a struggle for twenty-five hundred years between two great tendencies — the dualism of the majority (with theological and mystic leanings) and the monism of the minority (with rationahstic and naturahstic disposition). Especially notable are those great Free-thinkers of classic antiquity who taught a monistic view of life in the sixth century before Christ — the Ionic natural philoso- phers, Thales, Anaximander, and Anaximenes; and a little later, Heraclitus, Empedocles, and Democritus. They made the first thorough attempt to explain the world on rational principles, independently of all mytho- logical tradition and theological dogmas. However, * Compare the opinion of the distinguished American psy- chologist, Mimsterberg " Science opposes to any doctrine of individual immortality an unbroken and impregnable barrier" {Psychology and Life, p. 85). — Trans. 5 65 THE WONDERS OF LIFE these remarkable efforts to found a primitive monism, which found so finished an expression in the De rerum natiira of the great poet-philosopher, Lucretius Carus (98-54 B.C.), were shortly thrust out by the spread — through Plato's curious dualism — of the belief in the immortality of the soul and the transcendental world of ideas. The Eleatics, Parmenides and Zeno, had foreshadowed in the fifth century the division of philosophy into two branches; but Plato and his pupil Aristotle (in the fourth century b.c.) succeeded in gaining general accept- ance for this dualism and antithesis of physics and meta- physics. Physics devoted itself on the ground of experi- ence to the study of the phenom.ena of things, leaving their real essences (or noumena) that lay behind the phenomena to metaphysics. These inner eSvSences are transcendental and inaccessible to empirical research; they form the metaphysical world of eternal ideas, which is independent of the real world, and has its highest unity in God, as the Absolute. The soul, an eternal idea that dwells for a time in the passing human body, is immortal. This consistent dualism of Plato's system, with its sharp antithesis of this world and the next, of body and soul, of world and God, is its chief character- istic. It became all the more influential when Plato's pupil Aristotle blended it with his empirical metaphysics, based on ample scientific experience, and pointed out the idea in the entelechy, or purposively acting principle, of every being; and especially when Christianity (three hundred years afterwards) found in this dualism a welcome philosophic support of its own transcendental tendency. In the course of the thousand vears which historians call the Middle Ages, and which are usually dated from the fall of the Roman Empire (476) to the discovery of America (1492), the superstition of civilized races 66 MIRACLES reached its highest development. The authority of Aristotle was paramount in philosophy; it was used by the dominant Church for its own purposes. But the influence of the Christian faith, with all the gay color- ing which the fairy - tales of the Bible added to its structure of dogmas, was seen much more in practical life. In the foreground of belief were the three central dogmas of metaphysics, to which Plato had first given complete expression — the personal God as creator of the world, the immortality of the soul, and the freedom of the human will. As Christianity laid the greatest theoretical stress on the first two dogmas and the greatest practical stress on the third, metaphysical dualism soon prevailed on all sides. Especially inimical to scientific inquiry was the Christian contempt of nature and its belittlement of earthly life in view of the eternal life to come. As long as the light of philosophical criticism in any form was extinguished, the flower- garden of religious poetry flourished exceedingly and the idea of miracle was taken as self-evident. We know what the practical result of this superstition was from the ghastly history of the Middle Ages, with its In- quisition, religious wars, instruments of torture, and drowning of witches. In the face of the current en- thusiasm for the romantic side of mediasvalism, the Crusades and Church art, we cannot lay too much stress on these dark and bloody pages of its chronicles. An impartial study of the immense progress made by science in the course of the nineteenth century shows convincingly that the three central metaphysical dogmas established by Plato have become untenable for pure reason. Our clear modern insight into the regularity and causative character of natural processes, and espe- cially our knowledge of the universal reign of the law of substance, are inconsistent with belief in a personal God, the immortality of the soul, and the freedom of the 67 THE WONDERS OF LIFE will. If we find this threefold superstition still widely prevalent, and even retained by academic philosophers as an unshakable consequence of "critical philosophy," we must trace this remarkable fact chiefly to the great prestige of Immanuel Kant. His so - called critical system — really a hybrid product of the crossing of pure reason with practical superstition — has enjoyed a greater popularity than any other philosophy, and we must stop to consider it for a moment. I have described in chapters xiv. and xx. of the Riddle the profound opposition between my monistic system and Kant's dualistic philosophy. In the appendix to the popular edition, especially, I have pointed out the glaring contradictions of his system, which other philos- ophers have often detected and criticised. Whenever there is question of his teaching one must ask: "Which Kant do you mean ? Kant I . , the founder of the raonistic cosmogony, the critical formulator of pure reason; or Kant II., the author of the dualistic criticism of judg- ment, the dogmatic discoverer of practical reason ?" These contradictions are partly due to the psychological meta- morphoses which Kant underwent (Riddle, chapter vi.), partly to the perennial conflict between his scientific bias towards a mechanical explanation of this world and his religious craving (an outcome of heredity and educa- tion) and mystic belief in a life beyond. This culminates in the distinction between the world of sense and the world of spirit. The sense world {mnndtis sensibilis) lies open to our senses and our intellect, and is em- pirically knowable within certain limits. But behind it there is the spiritual world (mundiis intelligihilis) of which we know, and can know, nothing; its existence (as the thing in itself) is, however, assured by our emotional needs. In this transcendental world dwells the power of mysticism. It is said to be the chief merit of Kant's system that 68 MIRACLES he first clearly stated the problem: "How is knowledge possible?" In trying to solve this jjroblem introspec- tively, by a subtle analysis of his own mental activity, he reached the conviction that the most important and soundest of all knowledge — namely, mathematical — con- sists of synthetic a priori judgments, and that pure science is only possible on condition that there are strict a priori ideas, independent of all experience, without a posteriori judgments. Kant regarded this highest faculty of the human mind as innate, and made no inquiry into its development, its physiological mech- anism, and its anatomic organ, the brain. Seeing the very imperfect knowledge which human anatomy had of the complicated structure of the brain at the beginning of the nineteenth century, it was impossible to have at that time a correct idea of its physiological function. What seems to us to-day to be an innate capacity, or an a priori quality, of our phronema, is really a phylo- genetic result of a long series of brain-adaptations, formed by a posteriori sense-perceptions and experi- ences. Kant's much-lauded critical theory of knowledge is therefore just as dogmatic as his idea of "the thing in itself," the unintelligible entity that lurks behind the phenomena. This dogma is erroneously built on the correct idea that our knowledge, obtained through the senses, is imperfect; it extends only so far as the specific energy of the senses and the structure of the phronema admit. But it by no means follows that it is a mere illusion, and least of all that the external world exists only in our ideas. All sound men believe, when they use their senses of touch and space, that the stone they feel fills a certain part of space, and this space does really exist. When all men who can see agree that the sun rises and sets every day, this proves a relative motion of the two heavenly bodies, and so the real 69 THE WONDERS OF LIFE existence of time. Space and time are not merely necessary forms of intuition for human knowledge, but real features of things, existing quite independently of perception. The increasing recognition of fixed natural laws which accompanied the growth of science in the nineteenth century was bound to restrict more and more the blind faith in miracles. There are three chief reasons why we find this, nevertheless, still so prevalent — the continued influence of dualistic metaphysics, the authority of the Christian Church, and the pressure of the modern state in allying itself with the Church. These three strong bulwarks of superstition are so hostile to pure reason and the truth it seeks that we must devote special attention to them. It is a question of the highest interests of humanity. The struggle against supers ti- ption and ignorance is a fight for civilization. Our modern civilization will only emerge from it in triumph, and we shall only eliminate the last barbaric features from our social and political life, when the light of true knowledge has driven out the belief in miracles and the prejudices of dualism. The remarkable history of philosophy in the nineteenth century, which has not yet been written with complete impartiality and knowledge, shows us in the first place an ever-increasing struggle between the rising young sciences and the paramount authority of tradition and dogma. In the first half of the century the various branches of biology made progress without coming into direct collision with natural philosophy. The great advance of comparative anatomy, physiolog}^ embry- ology, paleontology, the cell-theory, and classification, provided scientists with such ample material that they attached little importance to speculative metaphysics. It was otherwise in the second half of the nineteenth century. Soon after its commencement the contro- 70 MIRACLES versy about the immortality of the soul broke out, in which Moleschott (1852), Biichner, and Carl Vogt (1854) contended for tlie physiological dependence of the soul on the brain, while Rudolph Wagner endeavored to maintain the prevailing metaphysical idea of its super- natural character. Then Darwin especially initiated in 1859 that vast reform in biology which brought to light the natural origin of species and shattered the miracle of creation. When the application of the theory of descent and the biogenetic law to man was made by anthropogeny (1874), and his evolution from a series of other mammals was proved, the belief in the immortality of the soul, the freedom of the will, and an anthropomorphic deity lost its last support. Nevertheless, these three fundamental dogmas con- tinued to find favor in academic philosophy, which mostly followed the paths opened out by Kant. Most of the representatives of philosophy at the universities are narrow metaphysicians and idealists, who think more of the fiction of the "intelligible world " than of the truth of the world of sense. They ignore the vast prog- ress made by modern biology, especially in the science of evolution; and they endeavor to meet the difficulties which it creates for their transcendental idealism by a sort of verbal gymnastic and sophistry. Behind all these metaphysical struggles there is still the personal element — the desire to save one's immortality from the wreck. In this it comes into line with the prevailing theology, which again builds on Kant. The pitiful condition of modern psychology is a characteristic result of this state of things. While the empirical physiology and pathol- ogy of the brain have made the greatest discoveries, the comparative anatomy and histology of the brain have thrown light on the details of its elaborate structure, and the ontogeny and phylogeny of the brain have proved its natural origin, the speculative philosophy of the schools 71 THE WONDERS OF LIFE stands aside from it all, and in its introspective analysis of the functions of the brain will not hear a word about the brain itself. It would explain the working of a most complicated machine without paying any attention to its structure. It is, therefore, not surprising to find that the dualistic theories established by Kant flourish at our universities as they did in the Middle Ages. If the official philosophers, whose formal duty it is to study truth and natural law. still cling to the belief in miracles in spite of all the advance of empirical science, we shall not be surprised to find this in the case of official theology. Nevertheless, the sense of truth has prompted many unprejudiced and honorable theologians to look critically at the venerable stmcture of dogma, and open their minds to the streaming light of modem science. In the first third of the nineteenth century a rationalistic section of the Protestant Church attempted to rid itself of the fetters of dogma and reconcile its ideas with pure reason. Its chief leader, Schleiermacher, of Berlin, though an admirer of Plato and his dualist metaphysics, approached very close to modern pan- theism. Subsequent rationalistic theologians, especially those of the Tubingen school (Baur, Zeller, etc.), de- voted themselves to the historical study of the gospels and their sources and development, and thus more and more destroyed the base of Christian supersti- tion. Finally, the radical criticism of David Friedrich Strauss showed, in his Life of Jesus (1835), the mytho- logical character of the whole Christian system. In his famous work, The Old and Nciv Faith (1872), this honorable and gifted theologian finally abandoned the belief in miracles, and turned to natural knowledge and the monistic philosophy for the construction of a rational view of life on the basis of critical experience. This work has lately been continued by Albert Kalthoff. Moreover, many modern theologians (such as Savage, 72 MIRACLES Nippold, Pfleiderer, and other liberal Protestants) have endeavored in various ways to obtain a certain recogni- tion for the claims of progressive science, and reconcile them with theology, while discarding the belief in the miraculous. However, these rationalistic efforts, based on monistic or pantheistic views, are still isolated and apparently without effect. The great majority of modern theologians adhere to the traditional teaching of the Church, whose columns and windows are still everywhere adorned with miracles. While a few liberal Protestants restrict their faith to the three fundamental dogmas, most of them still believe in the myths and legends which fill the pages of the gospels. This ortho- doxy is, moreover, encouraged of late by the conserva- tive and reactionary attitude taken up by many govern- ments on political grounds. Most modern governments maintain the connection with the Church in the idea that the traditional belief in the miraculous is the best security for their own con- tinuance. Throne and altar must protect and support each other. However, this conservative-Christian policy meets two obstacles in an increasing measure. On the one hand, the ecclesiastical hierarchy is always trying to set its spiritual power above the seculai and make the state serve its own purposes; and, on the other hand, the modern right of popular representation affords an opportunity to make the voice of reason heard and oppose the reactionary conservatives with opportune reforms. The chief rulers and the ministers of public instruction, who have a great influence in this struggle, generally favor the teaching of the Church, not out of conviction of its truth, but because they think knowl- edge brings unrest, and because docile and ignorant subjects are easier to rule than educated and independent citizens. Hence it is that we now hear so much on every occasion, in speeches from the throne and at 73 THE WONDERS OF LIFE banquets, at the opening of churches and the unveiling of monuments, from able and influential speakers, of the value of faith. They would give the palm to faith in its struggle with knowledge. Thus we get this paradoxical situation in educated countries (such as Prussia), that encouragement is given at once to modern science and technical training and to the orthodox Church, which is its deadly enemy. As a rule, it is not stated in these florid orations to how many and what kind of miracles this precious faith must extend. Nevertheless, we may yet, in view of the spread of intellectual reaction in Germany, see it made obligatory for at least all priests, teachers, and other servants of the state to profess a belief in the three fundamental mysteries — the triune God of the catechism, the personal immortality of the soul, and the absolute freedom of the human will — and even in many of the other miracles which are found in the gospels, sacred legends, and religious journals of our time. The refined belief in the miraculous embodied in Kant's practical philosophy assumed many different forms among his followers, the Neo-Kantians, approach- ing sometimes more and sometimes less to the conven- tional beliefs. Through a long series of variations, which still continue to develop, it is gradually passing into the cruder form of superstition which we find popular to-day as spiritism, and which provides the basis for what is called occultism. Kant himself, in spite of his subtle and clear critical faculty, had a decided leaning to mysticism and positive dogmatism, which showed itself especially in his later years. He thought a good deal of Swedenborg's idea of the spirit world forming a universe apart, and compared this to his mundtis intelligihilis. Among the natural philosophers of the first half of the nineteenth century, Schelling (in his later writings), Schubert (in his History of the Soul 1Ar MIRACLES and Observations on the Dark Side of Science), and Perty (in his mystic anthropology) especially investigated the mysterious phenomena of mental action, and sought to connect them with the physiological functions of the brain on the one hand and supernatural spiritual agen- cies on the other. Modem spook-seeking has no more value than mediaeval magic, cabalism, astrology, necro- mancy, dream - interpretation, and invocation of the devil. We must put at the same stage of superstition the spiritism and occultism we find mentioned so much in modern literature. There are always thousands of credulous folk in educated countries who are taken in by the performances of the spiritists and their media, and are ready to believe the unbelievable. Spirit-rapping, table-turning, spirit -writing, the materialization and photographing of deceased souls, find credit, not only among the uneducated masses, but even among the most cultured, and sometimes among imaginative scientists. It has been proved without avail by numbers of impartial observations and experiments that these occultist per- formances depend partly on conscious fraud and partly on careless self-deception. Mttndns vidt decipi — "the world wishes to be taken in" — as the old saying has it. This spiritistic fraud is particularly dangerous when it clothes itself with the mantle of science, makes use of the physiological phenomena of hypnotism, and even as- sumes a monistic character. Thus, for instance, one of the best - known occultist writers, Karl du Prel, has written, not only a Philosophy of Mysticism and Studies of Scientific Subjects, but also (1888) a Monistic Psychol- ogy, which is dualistic from beginning to end. In these popular writings lively imagination and brilliant pres- entation are combined with a most flagrant lack of critical sense and of knowledge of the elements of biology {cf. chapter xvi. of the Riddle). It seems that the heredi- 75 THE WONDERS OF LIFE tary bias towards mysticism and superstition is not yet eliminated even from the educated mind of our time. It is to be explained phylogenetically by inheritance from pre-historic barbarians and savages, in whom the earliest religious ideas were wholly dominated by animism and fetichism. IV THE SCIENCE OF LIFE Object of biology — Relation to the other sciences — General and special biology — Natural philosophy — Monism: hylozoism, materialism, dynamism — Naturalism — Nature and spirit — Physics — Metaphysics — Dualism — Freedom and natural law — God in biolog}'- — Realism — Idealism — Branches of biology — Morphology and physiology — Anatomy and bi- ogeny — Ergology and perilogy. THE broad realm of science has been vastly extended in the course of the nineteenth century. Many new branches have established themselves independently; many new and most fruitful methods of research have been discovered, and have been applied with the great- est practical success in furthering the advance of mod- em thought. But this enormous expansion of the field of knowledge has its disadvantages. The extensive di- vision of labor it has involved has led to the growth of a narrow specialism in many small sections; and in this way the natural connection of the various provinces of knowledge, and their relation to the comprehensive whole, have been partly or wholly lost sight of. The importation of new terms which are used in different senses by one-sided workers in the various fields of science has caused a good deal of misunderstanding and confusion. The vast structure of science tends more and more to become a tower of Babel, in the lab3Tinthic passages of which few are at their ease and few any longer understand the language of other workers. In 77 THE WONDERS OF LIFE these circumstances, it seems advisable, at the com- mencement of our philosophic study of "the wonders of life," to form a clear idea of our task. We must carefully define the place of biology among the sciences, and the relation of its various branches to each other and to the different systems of philosophy. In the broadest sense in which we can take it, biolog}^ is the whole study of organisms or living beings. Hence not only botany (the science of plants) and zoology (the science of animals), but also anthropology (the science of man), fall within its domain. We then contiast with it all the sciences which deal with in- organic or lifeless bodies, which we may collectively call abiology (or anorganology) ; to this belong astronomy, geology, mineralogy, hydrology, etc. This division of the two great branches of science does not seem difficult in view of the fact that the idea of life is sharply defined physiologically by its metabolism and chemxically by its plasm; but when we comiC to study the question of abicgenesis (chapter xv.) we shall find that this division is not absolute, and that organic life has been evolved from inorganic nature. ^loreover, biology and abiology are connected branches of cosmology, or the science of the world. While the idea of biology is now usually taken in this broad sense in most scientific works and made to embrace the whole of living nature, we often find (especially in Germany) a narrower application of the term. Many authors (mostly physiologists) understand by it a section of physiology — namely, the science of the rela- tions of living organisms to the external world, their habitat, customs, enemies, parasites, etc. I proposed long ago to call this special part of biology oecology (the science of home-relations), or bionomy. Twenty A^ears later others suggested the name of ethology. To call this special study any longer biology in the narrower 78 THE SCIENCE OF LIFE sense is very undesirable, because it is the only name we have for the totality of the organic sciences. Like every other science, biology has a general and a special part. General biology contains general informa- tion about living nature ; this is the subject of the present study of the wonders of life. We might also describe it as biological philosophy, since the aim of true philos- ophy must be the comprehensive survey and rational interpretation of all the general results of scientific research. The innumerable discoveries of detailed facts which observation and experiment give us, and which are combined into a general view of life in philosophy, form the subject of empirical science. As the latter, on the side of the organic world, or as empirical biology, forms the first object of the science of life, and seeks to effect in the system of nature a logical arrangement and summary grouping of the countless special forms of life, this special biology is often wrongly called the science of classification. The first comprehensive attempt to reduce to order and unity the ample biological material which systematic research had accumulated in the eighteenth century was made by what we call "the older natural philosophy" at the beginning of the nineteenth century. Reinhold Treviranus (of Bremen) had made a suggestive effort to accomplish this difficult task on monistic principles in his Biology, or Philosophy of Living Nature (1802). Special importance attaches to the year 1809, in which Jean Lamarck (of Paris) published his PhilosopJiie Zoologique, and Lorentz Oken (of Jena) his Manual of Natural Philosophy. I have fully appreciated the service of Lamarck, the founder of the theory of descent, in my earlier writings. I have also recognized the great merit of Lorentz Oken, who not only aroused a very wide interest in this science by his General Natural History, but also put forward some general observations of great 79 THE WONDER vS OF LIFE value. His "infamous " theory of a primitive slime, and the development of infusoria out of it, is merely the fundamental idea of the theory of protoplasm and the cell which was long afterwards fully recognized. These and other services of the older natural philosophy were partly ignored and partly overlooked, because they went far beyond the scientific horizon of the time, and their authors to an extent lost themselves in airy and fantastic speculations. The more scientists confined themselves in the following half-century to empirical work and the observation and description of separate facts, the more it became the fashion to look down on all "natural philosophy." The most paradoxical feature of the situa- tion was that purely speculative philosophy and idealist metaphysics had a great inin at the samie time, and their castles in the air, utterly destitute of biological founda- tion, were much admired. The magnificent reform of biology which Darwin initiated in 1859 by his epoch-making Origin of Species gave a fresh impulse to natural philosophy. As this work not only used the rich collection of facts already made in proof of the theory of descent, but gave it a new foundation in the theory of selection (Darwinism prop- erly so called), everything seemed to call for the embodiment of the new conception of nature in a monistic system. I made the first effort to do this in my General Morphology (1866). As this found few supporters among my colleagues, I undertook in my History of Creation (1868) to make the chief points of the system accessible to the general reader. The remarkable success of this book (a tenth edition of it appearing in 1902) emboldened me at the end of the nineteenth century to state the general principles of my monistic philosophy in my Riddle of the Universe. About the same time (1899) there appeared the work of the Kiel botanist, Johannes Reinke, The World as Reality; and 80 THE SCIENCE OF LIFE two years afterwards he followed it up with a supple- mentary volume, Introduction to Theoretic Biology. As Reinke treats the general problenis of natural philos- ophy from a purely mystic and dualistic point of view, his ideas are diametrically opposed to my monistic and naturalistic principles. The history of philosophy describes for us the infinite variety of ideas that men have formulated during the last three thousand years on the nature of the world and its phenomena. Uberweg has given us, in his excellent History of Philosophy, a thorough and im^partial account of these various systems. Fritz Schultze has published a clear and compendious "tabulated outline" of them in thirty tables in his genealogical tree of philosophy, and at the same time shown the phylogeny of ideas. When we survey this enormxous mass of philosophic systems from the point of view of general biology, we find that we can divide them into two main groups. The first and smaller group contains the monistic philos- ophy, which traces all the phenomena of existence to one single common principle. The second and larger group, to which most philosophic systems belong, con- stitutes the dualistic philosophy, according to which theie are two totally distinct principles in the universe. These are sometimes expressed as God and the world, sometimes as the spiritual world and material world, sometimes as mind and matter, and so on. In my opinion, this antithesis of monism and dualism is the most important in the whole history of philosophy. All other svstems are onlv variations of one or the other of these, or a more or less obscure combination of the two. The form of monism which I take to be the most com- plete expression of the general truth, and which I have advocated in my writings for thirty-eight years, is now generally called hylozoism. This expresses the fact that all substance has two fundamental attributes ; as matter 6 8i THE WONDERS OF LIFE (hyle) it occupies space, and as force or energy it is endowed with sensation {cf. chapter xix.). Spinoza, who gave the most perfect expression to this idea in his "philosophy of identity," and most clearly treated the notion of substance (as the all-embracing essence of the world), clothes it with two general attributes — extension and thought. Extension is identical with real space, and thought with (unconscious) sensation. The latter must not be confused with conscious human thought; intelligence is not found in substance, but is a special property of the higher animals and man. Spinoza identifies his substance with nature and God, and his system is accordingly called pantheism; but it must be understood that he rejects the anthropomorphic, personal idea of deity. A good deal of the infinite confusion that characterizes the conflicts of philosophers over their systems is due to the obscurity and ambiguity of many of their funda- mental ideas. The words "substance" and "God," "soul" and "spirit," "sensation" and "matter," are used in the most different and changing senses. This is especially true of the word "materialism," which is often wrongly taken to be synonymous with monism. The moral bias of idealism against practical materialism (or pure selfishness and sensualism) is forthwith trans- ferred to theoretical materialism, which has nothing to do with it; and the strictures which are justly urged against the one are most unjustifiably applied to the other. Hence it is important to distinguish very care- fully between these two meanings of materialism. Theoretical materialism (or hylonism), as a realistic and monistic philosophy, is right in so far as it conceives matter and force to be inseparably connected, and denies the existence of immaterial forces. But it is wrong when it denies all sensation to matter, and regards actual energy as a function of dead matter. Thus, in ancient 82 THE SCIENCE OF LIFE times Democritus and Lucretius traced all phenomena to the movements of dead atoms, as did also Holbach and Lamettrie in the eighteenth century. This view is held to-day by most chemists and physicists. They regard gravitation and chemical affinity as a mere me- chanical movement of atoms, and this, in turn, as the general source of all phenomena ; but they will not allow that these movements necessarily presuppose a kind of (unconscious) sensation. In conversation with distin- guished physicists and chemists I have often found that they will not hear a word about a "soul" in the atom. In my opinion, however, this must necessarily be as- sumed to explain the simplest physical and chemical processes. Naturally I am not thinking of anything like the elaborate psychic action of man and the higher animals, which is often bound up with consciousness; we must rather descend the long scale of the develop- ment of consciousness until we reach the simplest pro- tists, the monera (chapter ix.). The psychic activity of these homogeneous particles of plasm (for instance, the chromacea) rises very little above that of crystals; as in the chemical synthesis in the moneron, so in crystalliza- tion we are bound to assume that there is a low degree of sensation (not of consciousness), in order to explain the orderly arrangement of the moving molecules in a defi- nite structure. The prejudice against theoretical materialism (or mate- rialistic monism) which still prevails so much is partly due to its rejection of the three central dogmas of dualist metaphysics, and partly to a confusion of it with hedonism. This practical materialism in its ex- treme forms (as Aristippus of Cyrene and the Cyrenaic school, and afterwards Epicurus, taught it) finds the chief end of life in pleasure — at one time crude, sensual pleasure, and at others spiritual pleasure. Up to a certain point, this thirst for happiness and a pleasant 83 THE WONDERS OF LIFE and enjoyable life is innate in every man and higher animal, and so far just; it only began to be censured as sinful when Christianity directed the thoughts of men to eternal life, and taught them that their life on earth was only a preparation for the future. We shall see afterwards, when we come to weigh the value of life (chapter xvii.), that this asceticism is unjustifiable and unnatural. But as every legitimate enjoyment can become wrong by excess, and every virtue be turned into vice, so a narrow hedonism is to be condemned, especially when it allies itself with egoism. However, we must point out that this excessive thirst for pleasure is in no way connected with materialism, but is often found among idealists. Many convinced supporters of theoretical materialism (many scientists and physicians, for instance) lead very simple, blameless lives, and are little disposed to material pleasures. On the other hand, many priests, theologians, and idealist philosophers, who preach theoretical idealism, are pronounced hedonists in practice. In olden times many temples served at one and the same time for the theoretic worship of the gods and for practical excesses in the way of wine and love; and even in our day the luxurious and often vicious lives of the higher clergy (at Rome, for instance) do not fall far short of the ancient models. This paradoxical situ- ation is due to the special attractiveness of everything that is forbidden. But it is utterly unjust to extend the natural feeling against excessive and egoistic hedonism to theoretical materialism and to monism. Equally unjust is the habit, still widely spread, of depreciating matter, as such, in favor of spirit. Impartial biology has taught us of late years that what we call "spirit" is — as Goethe said long ago — inseparably bound up with matter. Experience has never yet discovered any spirit apart from matter. On the other hand, pure dynamism, now often called 84 THE SCIENCE OF LIFE energism (and often spiritualism), is just as one-sided as pure materialism. Just as the latter takes one at- tribute of substance, matter, as the one chief cause of phenomena, dynamism takes its second attribute, force (dynantis). Leibnitz most consistently developed this system among the older German philosophers; and Fechner and Zollner have recently adopted it in part. The latest development of it is found in Wilhelm Ostwald's Natural PhilusopJiy (1902). This work isT) purely monistic, and very ingeniously endeavors to show that the same forces are at work in the whole of nature, organic and inorganic, and that these may all be comprised under the general head of energy. It is especially satisfactory that Ostwald has traced the highest functions of the human mind (consciousness, thought, feeling, and will), as well as the simplest physical and chemical processes (heat, electricity, chem- ical affinity, etc ), to special forms of energy, or natural force. However, he is wrong when he supposes that his energism is an entirely new system^ The chief points of it are found in Leibnitz; and other Leipzig scientists, especially Fechner and Zollner, had come very close to similar spiritualistic views — the latter going into out- right spiritism. Ostwald's chief mistake is to take the terms "energy" and "substance" to be synonymous. Certainly his universal, all -creating energy is, in the main, the same as the substance of Spinoza, which we have also adopted in our "law of substance." But Ostwald would deprive substance of the attribute of matter altogether, and boasts of his Rcjiitation of Materialism (1895). He would leave it only the one attribute, energy, and reduce all matter to immaterial jjoints of force. Nevertheless, as chemist and physicist, he never gets rid of space-filling substance — which is all we mean by "matter" — and has to treat it and its parts, the physical molecules and chemical atoms (even 85 THE WONDERS OF LIFE if only conceived as symbols), daily as "vehicles of energy." Ostwald would reject even these in his pur- suit of the illusion of a "science without hypotheses." As a fact, he is forced every day, like every other exact scientist, to assume and apply in practice the indis- pensable idea of matter, and its separate particles, the molecules and atoms. Knowledge is impossible with- ...out hypotheses. ' Monism is best expressed as hylozoism, in so far as this removes the antithesis of materialism and spiritualism (or mechanicism and dynamism), and unites them in a natural and harmonious system. Our monistic system has been charged with leading to pure naturalism; one of its miost vehement critics, Frederick Paulsen, attaches so much importance to this stricture that he thinks it as dangerous as dogmatic clericalism. We may, therefore, usefully consider the idea of naturalism, and point out in what sense we accept it and identify it with monism. The key to the position is in our monistic anthropogeny, our unprejudiced conviction, supported by every branch of anthropological research, of "mian's place in nature," as we have established it in the first section of the Riddle (chapters ii.-v.). Man is a purely natural being, a placental mammal of the order of primates. He was phylogenetically evolved in the course of the Tertiary Peiiod from a series of the lower primates (directly from the anthropoid apes, but earlier from the cynocephali and lemures). Savage man, as we have him to-day in the Veddah or Australian negro, is physiologically nearer to the apes than to highly civilized men. Anthropology (in the widest sense) is only a particular branch of zoology, to which we must assign a special position on account of its extreme importance. Hence all the sciences which relate to man and his psychic activity — especially what are called the moral sciences — must be regarded from our monistic point of view as 86 THE SCIENCE OF LIFE special branches of zoology and as natural sciences. Human psychology is inseparably connected with com- parative animal psychology, and this again with that of the plants and protists. Philology studies in human speech a complicated natural phenomenon, which de- pends on the combined action of the brain-cells of the phronema, the muscles of the tongue, and the vocal cords of the larynx, as much as the cry of mammals and the song of birds do. The history of mankind (which we, in our curious anthropocentric mood, call the history of the world), and its highest branch, the history of civilization, is connected by modern pre-historic science directly with the stem-history of the primates and the other mammals, and indirectly with the phylogeny of the lower vertebrates. Hence, when we consider the subject without prejudice, we do not find a single branch of human science that passes the limits of natural science (in the broadest sense), any more than we find nature herself to be supernatural. Just as monism, or naturalism, embraces the totality of science, so on our principles the idea of nature com- prises the whole scientifically knowable world. In the strict monistic sense of Spinoza the ideas of God and Nature are synonymous for us. Whether there is a realm of the supernatural and spiritual beyond nature we do not know. All that is said of it in religious myths and legends, or metaphysical speculations and dogmas, is mere poetry and an outcome of imagination. The^ imagination of civilized man is ever seeking to produce unified images in art and science, and when it meets with gaps in these in the association of ideas it en- deavors to fill them with its own creations. These creations of the phronema with which we fill the gaps in our knowledge are called hypotheses when they are in harmony with the empirically established facts, and myths when they contradict the facts: this is the casQ 87 J THE WONDERS OF LIFE with religious myths, miracles, etc. Even when people contrast mind with nature, this is only a result, as a rule, of similar superstitions (animism, spiritism, etc.). But when we speak of man's mind as a higher psychic function, we mean a special physiological function of the brain, or that particular part of the cortex of the brain which we call the phronema, or organ of thought. This higher psychic function is a natural phenomenon, sub- ject, like all other natural phenomena, to the law of substance. The old Latin word natura (from nasci, to be born) stands, like the corresponding Greek term physis (from phyo — to grow) , for the essence of the world as an eternal "being and becoming" — a profound thought! Hence physics, the science of the physis, is, in the broadest sense of the word, "natural science." The extensive division of labor which has taken place in science, on account of the enormous growth of our knowledge in the nineteenth century and the rise of many new disciplines, has very much altered their relations to each other and to the whole, and has even given a fresh meaning and connotation to the term. Hence by physics, as it is now taught at the universities, is usually understood only that part of inorganic science which deals with the molecular relations of substance and the mechanism of mass and ether, without regard to the qualitative differences of the elements, which are expressed in the atomic weight of their smallest particles, the atoms. The study of the atoms and their affinities and combinations belongs to chemistry. As this province is very extensive and has its special methods of research, it is usually put side by side with physics as of equal importance; in reality, however, it is only a branch of physics — chemistry is the physics of the atoms. Hence, when we speak of a physico - chemical inquiry or phe- nomenon, we might justly describe it briefly as physical (in the wider sense). Physiology, again, a particularly 88 THE SCIENCE OF LIFE important branch of it, is in this sense the physics of Hving things, or the physico-chemical study of the Uving body. Since Aristotle dealt with the eternal phenomena of nature in the first part of his works, and called this physics, and with their inner nature in the second part, to which he gave the name of metaphysics, the two terms have undergone many and considerable modifications. If we restrict the term "physics" to the empirical study of phenomena (by observation and experiment), we may give the name of metaphysics to every hypothesis and theory that is introduced to fill up the gaps in it. In this sense the indispensable theories of physics (such as the assumption that matter is made up of molecules and atoms and electrons) may be described as metaphysical ; such also is our assumption that all substance is endowed with sensation as well as extension (matter). This monistic metaphysics, which recognizes the absolute dominion of the law of substance in all phenomena, but confines itself to the study of nature and abandons inquiry into the supernatural, is, with all its theories and hypotheses, an indispensable part of any rational philosophy of life. To claim, as Ostwald does, that science must be free from hypotheses is to deprive it of its foundations. But it is very different with the current dualistic metaphysics, which holds that there are two distinct worlds, and which we find in a hundred forms as philosophic dualism. If we understand by metaphysics the science of the ultimate ground of things, springing from the rational demand for causes, it can only be regarded, from the physiological point of view, as a higher and late-devel- oped function of the phronema. It could only arise with the complete development of the brain in civilized man. It is completely lacking among savages, whose organ of thought rises very little above that of the most intelligent 89 THE WONDERS OF LIFE animals. The laws of the psychic life of the savage have been closely studied by modem ethnology. It teaches us tha-t the higher reason is not found in savages, and that their power of abstract thought and of forming concepts is at a very low level. Thus, for instance, the Veddahs, who live in the forests of Ceylon, have not the general idea of trees, though they know and give names to individual trees. Many savages cannot count up to five; they never reflect on the ground of their existence or think of the past or future. Hence it is a great error for Schopenhauer and other philosophers to define man as a "metaphysical animal," and to seek a profound distinction between man and the animal in the need for a metaphysic. This craving has only been awakened and developed by the progress of civilization. But even in civilized communities it (like consciousness) is not found in early youth, and only gradually emerges. The child has to learn to speak and think. In harmony with our biogenetic law, the child reproduces in the various stages of its mental development the whole of the gradations which lead from the savage to the barbarian, and from the barbarian to the half -civilized, and on to the fully educated man. If this historical development of the higher human faculties had always been properly appreciated, and psychology had been faithful to the comparative and genetic methods, many of the errors of the current metaphysical systems would have been avoided. Kant would not then have produced his theory of a priori knowledge, but would have seen that all that now seems to be a priori in civilized man was originally acquired by a posteriori experiences in the long evolution of civilization and science. Here we have the root of the errors which are distinctive of dualism and the prevail- ing metaphysical transcendentalism. Like all science, biology is realistic — that is to say, it regards its object, the organisms, as really existing 90 THE SCIENCE OF LIFE things, the features of which are to an extent knowable through our senses {sciisoriuni) and organ of thought {phronema). At the same time, we know that these cognitive organs, and the knowledge they bring us, are imperfect, and that there may be other features of organisms that he beyond our means of perception altogether. But it by no means follows from this that, as our idealist opponents say, the organisms (and all other things) exist only in our mind (in the images in our cortex). Our pure monism (or hylozoism) agrees with realism in recognizing the unity of being of each organism, and denying that there is any essential dis- tinction between its knowable phenomenon and its internal hidden essence (or noumenon), whether the latter be called, with Plato, the eternal "idea," or, with Kant, the "thing in itself." Realism is not identical with materialism, and may even be definitely connected with the very opposite, dynamism or energism. As realism generally coincides with monism, so ideal- ism is usually identical with dualism. The two most influential representatives of dualism, Plato and Kant, said that there were two totally distinct worlds. Nat- ure, or the empirical world, is alone accessible to our experience, while the spiritual or transcendental world is not. The existence of the latter is known to us only by the emotions or by practical reason ; but we can have no idea of its nature. The chief error of this theoretical idealism is the assumption that the soul is a peculiar, immaterial being, immortal and endowed with a priori knowledge. The physiology and ontogeny of the brain (together with the comparative anatomy and histology of the phronema) prove that the soul of man is, like that of all other vertebrates, a function of the brain, and inseparably bound up with this organ. Hence this idealist theory of knowledge is just as inconsist- ent with realistic biology as is the psycho - physical 9? THE WONDERS OF LIFE parallelism of Wundt or the psycho-monism of more recent physiologists, which in the end issues in a com- plete dualism of body and mind. It is otherwise with practical idealism. When this presents the sym- bols or ideals of a personal God, an immortal soul, and the free-will as ethical stimuli, and uses them for their pedagogical worth in the education of the young, it may have a good influence for a time, which is in- dependent of their theoretical untenability. The many branches of biology which have been developed independently in the course of the nineteenth century ought to remain in touch with one another, and co-operate with a clear apprehension of their task, if they are to attain their high purpose of framing a unified science embracing the whole field of organic life. Unfortunately, this common aim is often lost sight of in the specialization of study ; the philosophical task is neglected in favor of the empirical. The con- fusion that has ensued makes it desirable to determine the mutual positions of the various biological disciplines. I went into this somewhat fully in my academic speech on the development and aim of zoology in 1869. But as this essay is little known, I will briefly resume the chief points of it. In correspondence with the long-established distinc- tion between the plant and the animal, the two chief branches of biology, zoology and botany, have developed side by side, and are represented by two different chairs in the universities. Independently of these, there arose at the very beginning of scientific activity that field of inquiry which deals with human life in all its aspects — the anthropological disciplines and the so-called "mental sciences" (history, philology, psychology, etc.). Since the theory of descent has proved man's origin from vertebrate ancestors, and thus anthropology has been recognized as a part of zoology, we have begun to un- 92 THE SCIENCE OF LIFE derstand the inner historic connection between these various branches of anthropology, and to combine them in a comprehensive science of man. The immense ex- tent and the great importance of this science have justified the creation of late years of special chairs of anthropology. It seems desirable to do the same for the science of the protists, or unicellular organisms. The cell theory, or cytology, as an elementary part of anat- omy, has to be dealt with in both botany and zoology; but the lowest unicellular representatives of both kingdoms, the primitive plants (protophyta) and the primitive animals (protozoa), are so intimately con- nected, and throw so great a light, as independent rudi- mentary organisms, on the tissue cells in the histon, or multicellular organism, that we must regard as a sign of progress the recent proposal of Schaudinn to found a special institute and journal for the science of protists. One very important section of it is bacteriology. The practical division of biology, according to the extent of the organic kingdom, leads us to mark out four chief provinces of research: protistology (the science of the unicellulars) , botany (the science of plants), zoology (the science of animals), and anthropology (the science of man). In each of these four fields we may then distinguish morphology (the science of forms) and physiology (the science of functions) as the two chief divisions of scientific work. The special methods and means of observation differ entirely in the two sections. In morphology the work of description and comparison is the most important as regards both outer form and inner structure. In physiology the exact methods of physics and chemistry are especially demanded — the observation of vital activities and the attempt to dis- cover the physical laws that govern them. As a correct knowledge of human anatomy and physiology is indis- pensable for scientific medicine, and the work requires a 93 THE WONDERS OF LIFE particularly large apparatus, these two sciences have long been studied separately, and have been handed over to the medical faculty in the division of the academic curriculum. The broad field of morphology may be divided into anatomy and biogeny; the one deals with the fully developed, and the other with the developing, organism. Anatomy, the study of the foniied organism, studies both the external form and the inner structure. We may distinguish as its two branches the science of structures (tectology) and the science of fundamental forms (pro- morphology). Tectology investigates the features of the structure in the organic individual, and the composition of the body out of various parts (cells, tissues, and organs) . Promorphology describes the real form of these individual parts and of the whole body, and endeavors to reduce them mathematically to certain fundamental forms (chapter viii.). Biogeny, or the science of the evolution of organisms, is also divided into two parts — the science of the individual (ontogeny) and of the stem or species (phylogeny) ; each follows its own peculiar methods and aims, but they are most intimately con- nected by the biogenetic law. Ontogeny deals with the development of the individual organism from the begin- ning of its existence to death; as embryology it ob- serves the growth of the individual within the foetal membranes; and as metamorphology (or the science of metamorphoses) it follows the subsequent changes in post- foetal life (chapter xvi.). The task of phylogeny is to trace the evolution of the organic stem or species — that is to say, of the chief divisions in the animal and plant worlds, which we describe as classes, orders, etc. ; in other words, it traces the genealogy of species. It relies on the facts of paleontology, and fills up the gaps in this by comparative anatomy and ontogeny. The science of the vital phenomena, which we call 94 THE SCIENCE OF LIFE physiology, is for the most part the physiology of work, or ergology; it investigates the functions of the living organism, and has to reduce them as closely as possible to physical and chemical laws. Vegetable ergology deals with what are called the vegetative functions, nutrition and reproduction ; animal ergology studies the animal activities of movement and sensation. Psychology is directly connected with the latter. But the study of the relations of the organism to its environment, organic and inorganic, also belongs to physiology in the wider sense; we call this part of it perilogy, or the physiology of relations. To this belong chorology, or the science of distribution (also called biological geography, as it deals with geographical and topographical distribution), and oecology or bionomy (also recently called ethol- ogy), the science of the domestic side of organic life, of the life-needs of organisms and their relations to other organisms with which they live (biocenosis, symbiosis, parasitism) . / ON NO OO O o o pq CO 0) J3 o >, C hn a o u JQ o • ^^ «4-l XI o o o •4-> OS ;3 a o VM m >, a; ro J3 w fo u ^ . o ctf rt O (A O Lr org aphyt metaz ates. pq CJ 2; Hula met Is ( rim < ^ M H <^ l-l p^ W .- w C bo Q 1— ( pq X H II >< cells — u sue plan tissue ar — speakii o o _) o ingle 5 — tis als — man W m ^ c .5 o ffi °-^ ^ ^ H o , "4-1 C fo c o °.2i O en e sci ence ience he s l-H C/2 ^■g^; Oh O " 2^ >^ >.-S 13 bo ^11 II ^ I 111 «- O o G 1N< I— I 1— I s. HH I— I r\ V DEATH Life and death — Individual death — ImmortaHty of the uni- cellulars — Death of the protists and tissue-organisms — Causes of physiological death — Using up of the plasma — Regeneration — Biotonus — Perigenesis of the plastidulcs: memory of the biogens — Regeneration of protists and tissue-organisms — Senile debility — Disease — Necrobiosis — The lot of death — Providence — Chance and fate — Eternal life — Optimism and pessimism — Suicide and self-redemp- tion — Redemption from evil — Medicine and philosophy — Maintenance of life — Spartan selection. NOTHING is constant but change! All existence is a perpetual flux of "being and becoming"! That is the broad lesson of the evolution of the world, taken as a whole or in its various parts. Substance alone is eternal and unchangeable, whether we call this all-embracing world-being Nature, or Cosmos, or God, or World-spirit. The law of substance teaches us that it reveals itself to us in an infinite variety of forms, but that its essential attributes, matter and energy, are constant. All indi- vidual forms of substance are doomed to destruction. That will be the fate of the sun and its encircling planets, and of the organisms that now people the earth — the fate of the bacterium and of man. Just as the existence of every organic individual had a beginning, it will also undeniably have an end. Life and death are irrevocably united. However, philosophers and biolo- gists hold very different views as to the real causes of this destiny. Most of their opinions are at once out of court, because they have not a clear idea of the nature of 7 97 THE WONDERS OF LIFE life, and so can have no adequate idea of its termination — death. The inquiry into the nature of organic life which we instituted in the second chapter has shown us that it is, in the ultimate analysis, a chemical process. The " miracle of life " is in essence nothing but the metab- olism of the living matter, or of the plasm. Recent physiologists, especially Max Verworn and Max Kasso- witz, have pointed out, in opposition to modern vitalism, that " life consists in a continuous alternation between the upbuild and the decay of the highly complicated chemical unities of the protoplasm. And if this concep- tion is admitted, we may rightly say that we know what we mean by death. If death is the cessation of life, we must mean by that the cessation of the alternation between the upbuild and the dissolution of the mole- cules of protoplasm; and as each of the molecules of pro- toplasm must break up again shortly after its formation, we have in death to deal only with the definite cessation of reconstruction in the destroyed plasma-molecules. Hence a living thing is not finally dead — that is to say, absolutely incompetent to discharge any further vital function — until the whole of its plasma-molecules are destroyed." In the exhaustive justification with which Kassowitz follows up this definition in the fifteenth chapter of his General Biology, the natural causes of physiological death are fully described. Among the numerous and contradictory views of recent biologists on the nature of death we find many errors and misunderstandings, due to a lack of clear distinction between the duration of the living matter in general and that of the individual life-form. This is particularly noticeable in the contradictory views which have been elicited by August Weismann's theory (1882) of the immortality of the unicellulars. I have shown in the eleventh chapter of the Riddle that it is untenable. 98 DEATH But as the distinguished zoologist has again taken up his theory with energy in his instructive Lectures on the Theory of the Descent (1902), and has added to it er- roneous observations on the nature of death, I am obliged to return to the point. Precisely because this interesting work gives most valuable support to the theory of evolution, and maintains Darwin's theory of selection and its consequences with great effect, I feel it is necessary to point out considerable weaknesses and dangerous errors in it. The chief of these is the im- portant theory of the germ-plasm and the consequent opposition to the inheritance of acquired characteristics. Weismann deduces from this a radical distinction be- tween the unicellular and the multicellular organisms. The latter alone are mortal, the former immortal; "be- tween the unicellular and the multicellular lies the intro- duction of physiological — that is to say, normal — death." We must say, in opposition to this, that the physiological individuals (bionta) among the protista are just as limited in their duration as among the histona. But if the chief stress in the question is laid, not on the in- dividuality of the living matter, but on the continuity of the metabolic life-movement through a series of generations, it is just as correct to affirm a partial immortality of the plasm for the multicellulars as for the unicellulars. The immortality of the unicellulars, on which Weis- mann has laid so much stress, can only be sustained for a small part of the protists even in his own sense — namely, for those which simply propagate by cleavage, the chromacea and bacteria among the monera (chapter ix.) , the diatomes and paulotomes among the protophy ta, and a part of the infusoria and rhizopods among the protozoa. Strictly speaking, the individual life is destroyed when a cell splits into two daughter-cells. One might reply with Weismann that in this case the 99 THE WONDERS OF LIFE dividing unicellular organism lives on as a whole in its offspring, and that we have no corpse, no dead remains of the living matter, left behind. But that is not true of the majority of the protozoa. In the highly devel- oped ciliata the chief nucleus is lost, and there must be from time to time a conjugation of two cells and a mutual fertilization of their secondary nuclei, before there can be any further multiplication by simple cleavage. How- ever, in most of the sporozoa and rhizopoda, which generally propagate by spore formation, only one por- tion of the unicellular organism is used for this ; the other portion dies, and forms a "corpse." In the large rhizopods (thalamophora and radiolaria) the spore- forming inner part, which lives on in the offspring, is smaller than the decaying outer portion, which becomes the corpse. Weismann's view of the secondary "introduction of physiological death in the multicellulars" is just as untenable as his theory of the immortality of the unicellulars. According to this opinion, the death of the histona — both the metaphyta and metazoa — is a pur- posive outcome of adaptation, only introduced by se- lection when the multicellular organism has reached a certain stage of complexit}^ of structure, which is incom- patible with its original immortalit}^ Natural selection v\^ould thus kill the immortal and preserve only the mortal ; it would interfere with the multiplication of the immortals in the bloom of their years, and only use the mortal for rearing posterity. The curious conclusions which Weismann reached in developing this theory of death, and the striking contradictions to his own theory of the germ-plasm which he fell into, have been pointed out by Kassowitz in the forty-ninth chapter of his Gen- eral Biology. In my opinion, this paradoxical theory of death has no more basis than the germ-plasm theory he has ingeniously connected with it. We may admire the IOC DEATH subtlety and depth of the speculations with which Weismann has worked out his elaborate molecular theory. But the nearer we get to its foundations the less solid we find them. Moreover, not one of the many supporters of the theory of germ-plasm has been able to make profitable use of it in the twenty years since it was first published. On the other hand, it has had an evil influence in so far as it denied the inheriting of acquired characters, which I hold, with Lamarck and Darwin, to be one of the soundest and most indis- pensable supports of the theory of descent. In discussing the question of the real causes of death, we confine our attention to normal or physiological death without considering the innumerable causes of accidental or pathological death, by illness, parasites, mishaps, etc. Normal death takes place in all organisms when the limit of the hereditary term of life is reached. This limit varies enormously in different classes of organisms. Many of the unicellular protophyta and protozoa live only a few hours, others several months or years; many one-year plants and lower animals live only a summer in our temperate climate, and only a few weeks or months in the arctic circle or on the snow-covered Alps. On the other hand, the larger vertebrates are not uncommonly a hundred years old, and many trees live for a thousand years. The normal span of life has been determined in all species in the course of their evolution by adaptation to special conditions, and has then been transmitted to offspring by heredity. In the latter, however, it is often subject to considerable modifications. The organism has been compared, on the modem "machine theory" of life, to an artificially constructed mechanism, or an apparatus in which the human intelli- gence has put together various parts for the attainment of a certain end. This comparison is inapplicable to the lowest organisms, the monera, which are devoid of such 101 THE WONDERS OF LIFE a mechanical structure. In these primitive "organisms without organs" (chromacea and bacteria) the sole cause of life is the invisible chemical structure of the plasm and the metabolism effected by this. As soon as this ceases death takes place {cf. chapter ix.). In the case of all other organisms the comparison is useful in so far as the orderly co-operation of the various organs or parts accomplishes a certain task by the conversion of virtual into active force. But the great difference between the two is that in the case of the machine the regularity is due to the purposive and consciously acting will of man, whereas in the case of the organism it is produced by unconscious natural selection without any design. On the other hand, the two have another important feature in common in the limited span of life which is involved in their being used up. A locomotive, ship, telegraph, or piano, will last only a certain number of years. All their parts are worn out by long use, and, in spite of all repairing, become at last useless. So in the case of all organisms, the various parts are sooner or later worn out and rendered useless; this is equally true of the organella of the protist and the organs of the histon. It is true that the parts may be repaired or regenerated; but sooner or later they cease to be of service, and become the cause of death. When we take the idea of regeneration, or the re- cuperation of parts that have been rendered useless, in the widest sense, we find it to be a universal vital function of the greatest importance. The whole metab- olism of the living organism consists in the assimilation of plasm, or the replacing of the plasma-particles which are constantly used up by dissimilation {cf. chapter x.). Verworn has given the name of hiogens to the hypo- thetical molecules of living matter — which I regard with Hering as endowed with memory, and (1875) have called plastidules. He says: "The biogens are the real 102 DEATH vehicles of life. In their constant decay and recon- struction consists the process of life, which expresses itself in the great variety of vital phenomena." The relation of assimilation (the building-up of the biogens) to dissimilation (the decay of the biogens) may be ex- pressed by a fraction to which the name hiotoniis is given a|d. It is of radical importance in the various phenom- ena of life. The variations in the size of this fraction are the cause of all change in the life-expression of every organism. When the bio tone increases, and the metabolism quotient becomes more than one, we have growth; when, on the other hand, it falls below one, and the biotone decreases, we have atrophy, and finally death. New biogens are constructed in regeneration. In generation or reproduction groups of biogens (as germ- plasm) are released from the parent in consequence of redundant growth, and form the foundation of new individuals. The phenomena of regeneration are extremely varied, and have of late years been made the subject of a good deal of comprehensive experiment, especially on the side of what is called "mechanical embryology." Many of these experimental embryologists have drawn far-reach- ing conclusions from their somewhat narrow experiments, and have partly urged them as objections to Darwinism. They imagine that they have disproved the theory of selection. Most of these efforts betray a notable lack of general physiological and morphological knowledge. As they also generally ignore the biogenetic law, and take no account of the fundamental correlation of embry- ology and stem history, we can hardly wonder that they reach the most absurd and contradictory con- clusions. Many examples of this will be found in the Archiv fiir Ent'ivickeliingsniechanik. When, however, we make a comprehensive survey of the interesting field of regeneration processes, we discover a continuous series 103 THE WONDERS OF LIFE of development from the simplest repair of plasm in the unicellular protists to the sexual generation of the higher histona. The sperm-cells and ova of the latter are redundant growth-products, which have the power of regenerating the whole multicellular organism. But many of the higher histona have also the capacity to produce new individuals by regeneration from detached pieces of tissue, or even single cells. In the peculiar mode of metabolism and growth which accompanies these processes of regeneration, the memory of the plastidule, or the unconscious retentive power of the bio gens, plays the chief part (cf. my Perigenesis of the Plastidule, 1875). ^^ ^^^ most primitive kinds of the unicellular protists we find the phenomena of death and regeneration in the simplest form. When an unnu- cleated moneron (a chromaceum or bacterium) divides into two equal halves, the existence of the dividing individual comes to an end. Each half regenerates itself in the simplest conceivable way by assimilation and growth, until it, in turn, reaches the size of the parent organism. In the nucleated cells of most of the protophyta and protozoa it is more complicated, as the nucleus becomes active as the central organ and reg- ulator of the metabolism. If an infusorium is cut into two pieces, only one of which contains the nucleus, this one alone grows into a complete nucleated cell; the unnucleated portion dies, being unable to regenerate itself. In the multicellular body of the tissue-forming or- ganisms we must distinguish between the partial death of the various cells and the total death of the whole organism, or cell-state, which they make up. In many of the lower tissue-plants and tissue-animals the com- munal link is very loose and the centralization slight. Odd cells or groups of cells may be set loose, without any danger to the life of the whole histon, and grow into new 104 DEATH individuals. In many of the algaj and liverworts (even in the bryopJiylluin, closely related to the stone-crop, or scdiim) — as well as in the common fresh-water polyp, hydra, and other polyps — every bit that is cut off is capable of growing into a complete individual. But the higher the organization is developed and the closer the correlation of the parts and their co-operation in the life of the centralized stock or person, the slighter we find the regenerative faculty of the several organs. Even then, however, many used-up cells may be removed and replaced by regenerated new cells. In our own human organism, as in that of the higher animals, thousands of cells die every day, and are replaced by new cells of the same kind, as, for instance, epidermic cells at the surface of the skin, the cells of the salivary glands or the mucous lining of the stomach, the blood-cells, and so on. On the other hand, there are tissues that have little or noth- ing of this repairing power, such as many of the nerve- cells, sense-cells, muscle-cells, etc. In these cases a num- ber of constant cell-individuals remain with their nucleus throughout life, although a used-up portion of their cell- body may be replaced by regeneration from the cyto- plasm. Thus our human body, like that of all the higher animals and plants, is a "cell-state" in another sense. Every day, nay, every hour, thousands of its citizens, the tissue-cells, pass away, and are replaced by others that have arisen by cleavage of similar cells. Nevertheless, this uninterrupted change of our personal- ity is never complete or general. There is always a solid groundwork of conservative cells, the descendants of which secure the further regeneration. Most organisms meet their death through external or accidental causes — lack of sufficient food, isolation from their necessary environment, parasites and other enemies, accidents and disease. The few individuals who escape these accidental causes of death find the end of life in 105 THE WONDERS OF LIFE old age or senility, by the gradual decay of the organs and dwindling of their functions. The cause of this senility and the ensuing natural death is determined for each species of organisms by the specific nature of their plasm. As Kassowitz has lately pointed out, the senility of individuals consists in the inevitable increase in the decay of protoplasm and the metaplastic parts of the body which this produces. Each metaplasm in the body favors the inactive break-up of protoplasm, and so also the formation of new metaplasms. The death of the cells follows, because the chemical energy of the plasm gradually falls off from a certain height, the acme, of life. The plasm loses more and more the power to replace by regeneration the losses it sustains by the vital functions. As, in the mental life, the receptivity of the brain and the acuteness of the senses gradually decay, so the muscles lose their energy, the bones become fragile, the skin dry and withered, the elasticity and endurance of the movements decrease. All these normal processes of senile decay are caused by chemical changes in the plasm, in which dissimilation gains con- stantly on assimilation. In the end they inevitably lead to normal death. While the gradual decay of the bodily forces and the senile degeneration of the organs must necessarily cause the death of the soundest organism in the end, the great majority of men pass away through illness long before this normal term of life is reached. The external causes of this are the attacks of enemies and parasites, acci- dents, and unfavorable conditions of life. These cause changes in the tissues and their component cells, which first occasion the partial death of particular sections, and then the total death of the whole individual. The modi- fications of the living matter which produce disease and premature death are called necrobioses. They consist partly of histolyses — that is to say, degeneration of the io6 DEATH cells by atrophy, dissolution, withering (mortification), or colliquation; and partly of mctaplasmosisms, or meta- morphoses of the plasm — fatty, mucous, chalky, or amyloid metamorphoses of the cells. It was the great merit of Rudolph Virchow that he proved, in his epoch- making Cellular Pathology (1858), that all diseases in man and other organisms may be reduced to such modi- fications of the cells which make up the tissues. Hence disease, with its pain, is a physiological process, a life under injurious and dangerous conditions. As in all normal vital phenomena, so in abnormal or pathological, the ultimate ground must be sought in the physical and chemical processes in the plasm. Pathology is a part of physiology. This discovery has cut the ground from under the older notion of disease as a special entity, a devil, or a divine punishment. The natural physical explanation of death, which has been made possible by modern physiology and pathology, has shattered, not only all the old superstitious ideas about disease and death, but also a number of important metaphysical dogmas which built upon them. Such was, for instance, the naive belief in a conscious Provi- dence, controlling the fate of individuals and determining their death. I do not fail to appreciate the great sub- jective value which such a trust in a protecting Provi- dence has for men amid their countless dangers. We may envy the childish temper for the confidence and hope which it derives from this belief. But as we do not seek to have our emotions gratified by poetic fictions, we are bound to point out that reason cannot detect the shadow of a proof of the existence and action of this conscious Providence, or "loving Father in heaven." We read daily in our journals of accidents and crimes of all kinds that cause the unexpected death of happy human beings. Every year we read with horror the statistics of the thousands of deaths from shipwreck and railway acci- 107 THE WONDERS OF LIFE dents, earthquakes and landslips, wars and epidemics. And then we are asked to believe in a loving Providence that has decreed the death of each of these poor mortals! We are asked to console ourselves in face of the tragedy with the hollow phrases: "God's will be done," or "God's ways are wonderful." Simple children and dull believers may soothe themselves with such phrases. They no longer impose on educated people in the twentieth century, who prefer a full and fearless knowl- edge of the truth. When our monistic and rational conception of death is described as dreary and hopeless, we may answer that the prevalent dualistic view is merely an outcome of hereditary habits of thought and mystic training in early youth. When these are displaced by progressive culture and science, it will be clear that man has lost nothing, but gained much, as regards his life on earth. Con- vinced that there is no eternal life awaiting him, he will strive all the more to brighten his life on earth and rationally improve his condition in harmony with that of his fellows. If it is objected that then everything will depend on mere "chance," instead of being controlled by a conscious Providence or a moral order of the world, I must refer the reader for my reply to the close of the fourteenth chapter of the Riddle, where I have dealt with fate, providence, end, aim, and chance. And if it is further claimed that our realistic view of life leads to pessimism, there is no better ground for such an ac- cusation. I have given, in the eleventh chapter of the Riddle, the scientific reasons which forbid us to accept the personal immortality of the soul. But as the most vehement attacks have been made on this chapter by meta- physicians of the prevailing school and by Christian theologians, I must return to the question here. I am convinced, from numbers of letters I have received an4 io8 DEATH conversation with educated people of all classes, that no other dogma is so firmly established and highly valued as athanatism, or the belief in personal im- mortality. Most men will not give up at any price the hope that a better life awaits them beyond the grave, which will compensate them for all the pain and suffering they endure here. In the picturing of this future life the mediaeval geocentric idea still forms the chief feature. Troelslund has shown, in his Idea of Heaven and of the World, how this theory still dominates , the metaphysics of the majority of men; in spite of Copernicus and Laplace, heaven is still for most people the semicircular blue glass bell that overarches the earth. We still hear the praises of our life in this heaven sung daily in sermons and speeches and festive orations. The orator extends his right hand "upward" to the infinite starry space of heaven, forgetting that the radius of the direction he is pointing towards changes every second, and in twelve hours reaches the precisely op- posite direction, and becomes "downward." Other be- lievers endeavor to be still more concrete, and point out definite celestial bodies as the homes of immortal souls. Modern cosmology, astronomy, and geology entirely exclude these pretty fictions from science; and modern psychology, physiology, ontogeny, and phylogeny rigor- / ously refuse an inch of ground for athanatism. \ Optimism regards the world on its good and bright and admirable side: pessimism looks to the shades and tragedies of life. In some philosophic and religious systems one or other of these tendencies is consistently and exclusively worked out; but in most systems the two are mingled. Pure and consistent realism is I generally neither optimistic nor pessimistic. It takes the world as it is, a unified whole, the nature of which is neither good nor bad. Dualistic idealism, however, __ generally combines the two, and distributes them be- 109 THE WONDERS OF LIFE tween its two worlds ; it describes this world as a " vale of tears," and the next as a glorious city of joy and hap- piness. This view is a conspicuous feature in most of the dualistic religions, and has still a considerable influence, both practically and theoretically, on the minds of educated people. The founder of systematic optimism was Gottfried Leibnitz, whose philosophy sought to achieve an in- genious harmony between divergent systems, but is reall}^ a form of dynamism, or a monism somewhat akin to the energism of Ostwald. Leibnitz gave a compen- dious statement of his system in his Monadology {1^14.). He taught that the world consists of an infinite number of monads (which almost correspond to our psychic atoms) , but this pluralism was converted into a monism by making God, as the central monad, bind all to- gether in a substantial imity. In his Theodicy (17 10) he taught that God (the "all-wise, all-good, and al- mighty creator of the world") had with perfect con- sciousness created "the best of all possible worlds"; that his infinite goodness, w^isdom, and power are seen everywhere in the pre-established harmony of things; but that the individual human being, and humanity taken as a whole, have only a limited capacity for development. The man who knows the real features of the world, who has honestly confronted the tragic struggle for life that rules throughout living nature, who has sympathy for the infinite sum of misery and want of every kind in the life of men, can scarcely understand how an acute and informed thinker like Leibnitz could entertain such optimism as this. It would be more intelligible in the case of a one-sided and nebulous metaphysician like Hegel, who held that "all that is real is rational and all that is rational is real." Pessimism is the direct opposite of systematic opti- mism. While the one holds the universe to be the best, no DEATH the other regards it as the worst, of all possible worlds. This pessimistic conception has found expression in the oldest and most popular religions of Asia, Brahmanism and Buddhism. Both these Hindoo religions were orginally pessimistic, and at the same time atheistic and idealistic. Schopenhauer especially pointed out this, declaring that they were the most perfect of all religions, and importing their leading ideas into his own system. He considers it " a glaring absurdity to attempt to prove this miserable world the best of all possible ones — this cock-pit of tortured and suffering beings, who can only survive by destroying one another, in which the capacity for pain grows with knowledge, and so reaches its height in man. Truly optimism cuts so sorry a figure in this theatre of sin, suffering, and death that we should have to regard it as a piece of sarcasm if Hume had not given us an explanation of its origin (the wish to flatter God and hope for some result from it). To the palpable sophistry of Leibnitz, who would prove this world the best of all possible, we can oppose a strict and honest proof that it is the worst of all possible." However, neither Schopenhauer nor the most important of modem pessimists, Edward Hartmann, has drawn the strict practical conclusion from pessimism. That would be to deny the will to live, and put an end to suffering by suicide. The mention of suicide as the logical consequence of pessimism may serve as an occasion to glance at the curious and contradictory views that are expressed about it. There are few problems of life (apart from immor- tality and the freedom of the will) on which such absurd and contradictory things have been said even down to our own time. The theist who regards life as a gift of God may hesitate to reject or return it — although the offering of one's self as a victim for other men is consid- ered a high virtue. Most educated people still look upon III THE WONDERS OF LIFE suicide as a great sin, and in some countries (such as England) the attempt is punished by law. In the Middle Ages, when a hundred thousand men were burned alive for heresy or witchcraft, suicides were punished by a disgraceful burial. As Schopenhauer says: "Clearly there is nothing in the world to which a man has a plainer right than his own life and person. It is simply ridiculous for criminal justice to deal with suicide." The advance of embryology in the last thirty years has made it clear that the individual life of a man (and all other vertebrates) begins at the moment when the male sperm-cell and the maternal ovum coalesce. In this blind chance plays an important part, as in so many other important aspects of life — taking "chance" in the scientific sense, which I have explained in chapter xiv. of the Riddle. Hence, the real cause of personal existence is not the favor of the Almighty, but the sexual love of one's earthly parents; very often this consequence of the act of love has been anything but desired. If, then, the circumstances of life come to press too hard on the poor being who has thus developed, without any fault of his, from the fertilized ovum — if, instead of the hoped-for good, there come only care and need, sickness and misery of every kind — he has the unquestionable right to put an end to his sufferings by death. Every religion assents to this under certain conditions, even Christianity when it says: "If thine eye scandalize thee, cast it from thee." It is true that the conventional morality condemns suicide under any circumstances; but the reasons it alleges are ridiculously slight, and are not improved by having the mantle of religion wrapped about them. The voluntary death by which a man puts an end to intolerable suffering is really an act of redemption. We should, therefore, describe it as self -redemption, and look on it with Christian sympathy, not brand it pharisaically as "self-murder." As a fact, this contemptuous phrase 112 DEATH has no meaning, since murder is the taking away of a man's life against his will, while the suicide dies volun- tarily. Hence, he usually deserves our sympathy, not contempt, and certainly not punishment. Our conven- tional morality is, as so often happens, full of senseless contradictions. Modern states have introduced con- scription; they demand that every citizen shall give up his life for his country on command, and kill as many other men as he can (an admirable commentary on the Scriptural "Love your enemies") for some political reason or other. But they never secure to each citizen the means of honorable existence and free development of his personality — not even the right to work by which he may maintain himself and his family. I fully recognize the advance that social politics has made in improving the conditions of the poorer classes, the promotion of hygiene and education and the bodily and mental welfare of citizens ; but we are still very far from the attainable ideal of general prosperity and happi- ness which reason dictates to every civilized nation. Misery and want are increasing among the poor, as the division of labor and over-population increase. Thousands of strong and active men come to grief every year without any fault of theirs, often precisely because they were quiet and honest; thousands are hungry because, with the best will in the world, they cannot find work; thousands are sacrificed to the heartless demands of our iron age of machinery with its exacting technical and industrial requirements. On the other hand, we see thousands of contemptible characters prospering because they have been able to deceive their fellows by un- scrupulous speculations, or because they have flattered and served the higher authorities. It is no wonder that the statistics of suicide increase so much in the more civilized communities. No feeling man who has any real "Christian love of his neighbor" will grudge his 8 113 THE WONDERS OF LIFE suffering brother the eternal rest and the freedom from pain which he has obtained by his self -redemption. The seventh petition of the Lord's Prayer, which is repeated daily by millions of Christians, is: "Deliver us from evil." Luther explains this as a prayer to be saved "from all evil of body and soul" in this life and the next. When we consider this in the light of our monistic principles, we have naturally to set aside the superstitious ideas of the Middle Ages regarding the future life, and deal only with the petition as regards this life. The number and variety and gravity of these evils have grown in civilized communities in the nine- teenth century, notwithstanding all the progress we have made in art and science and the rational reform of our personal and social life. Civilization has gained in- finitely in value by the change we have made in our con- ceptions of time and space in this age of steam and electricity. We can make our domestic and public life much pleasanter, and avail ourselves of a far greater number of luxuries, than was possible to our grand- fathers a hundred years ago. But all this has caused a much greater expenditure of nerve-energy. The brain has to bear a much greater strain, and is worn out earlier, the body is more stimulated and overworked than it was a hundred years ago. Many diseases of modern civilization are making appalling progress; neurasthenia, especially, and other diseases of the nerves, carry off more victims every year. Our asylums grow bigger and more numerous every year, and we have sanatoria on every side in which the baited victim of modern civiliza- tion seeks refuge from his evils. Some of these evils are quite incurable, and the sufferers have to meet a certain death in terrible pain. Many of these poor creatures look forward to their redemption from evil and the end of their miserable lives. The important question arises whether, as compassionate men, we should be justified 114 DEATH in carrying out their wish and ending their sufferings by a painless death. This question is of great importance, both in practical philosophy and in juridical and medical practice, and, as opinions differ very much on the subject, it seems advisable to deal with it here. I start from my own personal opinion, that sympathy is not only one of the noblest and finest functions of the human brain, but also one of the first conditions of the social life of the higher animals. The precepts of Christian charity which the gospels rightly place in the very foreground of morality, were not first discovered by Christ, but they were successfully urged by him and his followers at a time when refined selfishness threatened the Roman civilization with decay. These natural principles of sympathy and altruism had arisen thousands of years before in human society, and are even found among all the higher animals that live a social life. They have their first roots in the sexual reproduction of the lower animals, the sexual love and the care of the young on which the maintenance of the species depends. Hence] the modern prophets of pure egoism, Friedrich Nietzsche, Max Stirner, etc., commit a biological error when they would substitute their morality of the strong for uni- versal charity, and when they ridicule sympathy as a weakness of character or an ethical blunder of Christian- ity. It is just in its insistence on sympathy that the Christian teaching is most valuable, and this part of its system will survive long after its dogmas have sunk into oblivion. However, this lofty duty must not be con- fined to men, but extended to "our relations," the higher vertebrates, and, in fact, to all animals whose brain-organization seems to point to the possession of sensation and a consciousness of pleasure and pain. Thus, for instance, in the case of the domestic animals which we use daily in our service, and which have an 115 THE WONDERS OF LIFE undoubted psychic affinity to ourselves, we must take care to increase their pleasures and mitigate their sufferings. Faithful dogs and noble horses, with which we have lived for years and which we love, are rightly put to death and relieved from pain when they fall hope- lessly ill in old age. In the same way we have the right, if not the duty, to put an end to the sufferings of our fellow-men. Some severe and incurable disease makes life unbearable for them, and they ask for re- demption from evil. However, medical men hold very different opinions on the matter, as I have found in conversation with them. Many experienced phy- sicians, who practise their profession in a spirit of sympathy and without dogmatic prejudice, have no scruple about cutting short the sufferings of the incura- ble by a dose of morphia or cyanide of potassium when they desire it; very often this painless end is a blessing both to the invalids and their families. However, other physicians and most jurists are of opinion that this act of sympathy is not right, or is even a crime; that it is the duty of the physician to maintain the life of his patients as long as he can in all circumstances. I should like to know why. While I am dealing with this important and — for the medical conscience — difficult question of social ethics, I may take the opportunity to consider the general attitude of physicians to the monistic philosophy. It is now half a century since I visited the wards in the Julius hospital at Wiirtzburg as a medical student. It is true that — happily for me and m}^ patients! — I practised the profes- sion only for a short time after I had passed my examina- tions in 1857; but the thorough acquaintance with the human organism, its anatomic structure and physio- logical functions, which I then obtained has been of in- calculable service to me. I owe to it not only the solid empirical foundation of the special study of my life, 116 DEATH zoology, but also the monistic tendency of my whole system. As the medical training in its widest sense in- cludes anthropology — and so should include psychol- ogy also — its value for speculative philosophy cannot be exaggerated. The scholastic metaphysicians who still regard the chairs of philosophy at our universities as their monopoly would have avoided most of their dualistic errors if they had had a thorough training in human anatomy, physiology, ontogeny, and phylogeny. Even pathology, the science of the diseased organism, is very instructive for the philosopher. The psychologist especially acquires, by the study of mental disease and the visiting of the asylum wards, a profound insight into the mental life which no speculative philosophy could give him. There are few experienced and thoughtful physicians who retain the conventional belief in the immortality of the soul and God. What would the immortal soul do on the other side of eternity when it is already utterly ruined in this life, or was even bom as an idiot? How can a just God condemn the criminal to the fires of hell when he himself has tainted the man with an hereditary bias, or has placed him in an environment in which, seeing the absence of free-will, crime was a necessity for him? And how can this all-loving God answer for the immeasurable sum of want and miser}^ and pain and unhappiness, which he sees accumulated before him every year in the lives of families and states, cities and hospitals? It is no wonder that the old saying ran: Ubi ires medici, duo stmt athei (Of three doctors two are sure to be atheists). One of my medical colleagues was an old, experienced, and sympathetic physician who had travelled all over the world, and had then, as director of a large hospital, been a close witness of the sufferings of humanity. Religiously educated by pious parents, and endowed with keen sensi- tiveness, he was, after long struggles, forced by his 117 THE WONDERS OF LIFE medical studies to part with the faith of his boyhood — like myself, in his twenty-first year. We were talking about the great mysteries of life shortly before his death, and he said to me: "I have been unable to reconcile belief in the immortality of the soul and the freedom of the will with my psychological experiences, and I have been just as unable to discover throughout the whole world a single trace of a moral order or a beneficent providence. If it is true that an intelligent Deity rules the world, he cannot be a God of love, but an all-power- ful demon, whose constant entertainment is an eternal and merciless play of being and becoming, building up and destroying." However, we do still find here and there informed and intelligent physicians who adhere to the three central dogmas of metaphysics — a proof of the immense power of dogmatic tradition and religious prejudice. We must class as a traditional dogma the widespread belief that man is bound under all circumstances to maintain and prolong life, even when it has become utterly useless — a source of pain to the incurable and of endless trouble to his friends. Hundreds of thousands of incurables — lunatics, lepers, people with cancer, etc. — are artificially kept alive in our modem communities, and their sufferings are carefully prolonged, without the slightest profit to themselves or the general body. We have a strong proof of this in the statistics of lunacy and the growth of asylums and nerve-sanatoria. In Prussia alone there were 5 1 ,048 lunatics cared for in the asylums (six thousand in Berlin) in 1890; more than one-tenth of them were quite incurable (four thousand of them suffering from paresis). In France, in 187 1, there were 49,589 in the asylums (or 1.38 per thousand of the population), and in 1888 there were 70,443 (or 1.82 per thousand) ; thus, in the course of seventeen years, the absolute number of the unsound rose nearly 30 per 118 DEATH cent. (29.6), while the total population only increased 5.6 per cent. In our day the number of lunatics in civilized countries is, on the average, five-sixths per thousand. If the total population of Europe is put at three hundred and ninety to four hundred millions, we have at least two million lunatics among them, and of these more than two hundred thousand are incurable. What an enormous mass of suffering these figures in- dicate for the invalids themselves, and what a vast amount of trouble and sorrow for their families, what a huge private and public expenditure! How much of this pain and expense could be spared if people could make up their minds to free the incurable from their indescribable torments by a dose of morphia! Naturally this act of kindness should not be left to the discretion of an individual physician, but be determined by a commission of competent and conscientious medical men. So, in the case of other incurables and great sufferers (from cancer, for instance), the "re- demption from evil" should only be accomplished by a dose of some painless and rapid poison when they have expressed a deliberate wish (to be afterwards juridically proved) for this, and under the control of an authoritative commission. The ancient Spartans owed a good deal of their famous bravery, their bodily strength and beauty, as well as their mental energy and capacity, to the old custom of doing away with new-born children who were bom weakly or crippled. We find the same custom to-day among many savage races. When I pointed out the advantages of this Spartan selection for the improve- ment of the race in 1868 (chapter vii. of the History of Creation) there was a storm of pious indignation in the religious journals, as always happens when pure reason ventures to oppose the current ]jrejudices and traditional beliefs. But I ask: What good does it do to humanity 119 THE WONDERS OF LIFE to maintain artificially and rear the thousands of cripples, deaf-mutes, idiots, etc., who are born every year with an hereditary burden of incurable disease? Is it not better and more rational to cut off from the first this unavoidable misery which their poor lives will bring to themselves and their families ? It is no use to reply that religion forbids it. Christianity also bids us give up our life for our brethren, and to cast it from us when it hurts us — that is to say, when it only causes useless pain to us and our friends. The truth is, the opposition is only due to sentiment and the power of conventional morality — that is to say, to the hereditary bias which is clothed in early youth with the mantle of religion, however irrational and superstitious be its foundation. Pious morality of this sort is often really the deepest immorality. "Laws and rights creep on like an eternal sickness;" this is equally true of the social customs and morals on which laws and rights are founded. Sentiment should never be allowed to usurp the place of reason in these weighty ethical questions. As I pointed out in the first chapter of the Riddle, sen- timent is a very amiable, but a very dangerous, function of the brain. It has no more to do with the attainment of the truth than what is called revelation. That is well seen in Kant's dualism, for his nmndtis intclligihilis is essentially an outcome of his religious sentimentality I PLASM Plasm is the universal living substance — Definition of proto- plasm, chemically and morpholoi^ically — Physical character — Viscous condition — Chemical analysis — Colloid character of albumin — Albuminoid molecules — Eleinentary structure of plasm — Work of plasm — Protoplasm and metaplasm — Structures of metaplasm — Frothy structure — Skeletal struct- ure — Fibrous structure — Granular structure — Molecular structure — Plasma molecules — Plastidules and biogens — Micella and biophora — Caryoplasm and cytoplasm — Nuclear matter — Chromatin and achromin — Nucleolus and centrosoma — Caryotheka and caryolymph — Cellular matter - — Plasma products — Internal plasma products — External plasma products — Cell membranes — Intercellular matter— Cuticular matter. BY plasm, in the widesJLseasc of the word, we mean the living_„matter,- or all bodies that are found to constitute the material foundations of the phenomena of life. It is usual to give this matter the name of proto- plasm; but this older and historically important designa- tion has suffered so many changes of meaning through the variety of its applications that it is better now to use it only in the narrower sense. Moreover, recent research on protoplasm has been greatly developed, and several new names have been invented, which are formed from the word "plasm" with a qualifying prefix. These are special varieties of the general idea of plasm, or special modifications of the general matter, such as metaplasm, archiplasm, and so on. The botanist, Hugo Mohl, who first introduced the 121 THE WONDERS OF LIFE name "protoplasm" in 1846, used it to designate a part of the contents of the ordinary plant-cell — namely, the viscous matter that Schleiden called ''cell-mucus," which is found on the inner surface of the cell-wall, and often forms a varying net-work or skeleton in the watery fluid in the cell, and exhibits characteristic movements. Mohl gave the name of "primordial skin" to this im- portant wall-layer (the chief element of the plant-cell), and called the material of it, as being chemically dif- ferent from the other parts of the cell, protoplasm — that is to say, the first (proton) or earliest formation of the organism. It is important to notice that Mohl, the author of the name, conceived it in a purely chemical, not a morphological, sense, like Oscar Hertwig and other recent cytologists. I intend to retain this early chemical idea of protoplasm — or, briefly, plasm. It was also taken in this sense by Max Schultze, who pointed out (in i860) its extreme significance and wide distribution in all living cells, and introduced an important reform of the cell-theory which we will see later. The raixing of the chemical and the morphological ideas of protoplasm has been very mischievous in recent biology, and has led to great confusion. It generally comes from a failure to formulate clearly the difference between the two essential elements of the modern notion of the cell — the anatomic distinction between the nucleus and the body of the cell. The internal nucleus (or car yon) had the appearance of a solid, definite, morpho- logically distinct constituent of the cell; the outer and softer mass which we now call the cell-body {cellctis or cytosoma) seemed to be a formless and only chemically definable protoplasm. It was only discovered at a later date that the chemical composition of the nucleus is closely akin to that of the cell-body, and that we may properly associate the caryoplasm of the one with the cytoplasm of the other under the general heading of 122 PLASM plasm. All the other materials that we find in the living organism are products or derivatives of the active plasm. In view of the extraordinary significance which we must assign to the plasm — as the universal vehicle of all the vital phenomena (or "the physical basis of life," as Huxley said) — it is very important to understand clearly all its properties, especially the chemical ones. This is rendered somewhat dilhcult from the circumstance that the plasm is, in most of the organic cells, closely bound up with other substances — the various plasma products; it can rarely be isolated in its purity, and can never be had pure in any quantity. Hence we are for the most part dependent on the imperfect, and often ambiguous, results of microscopic and microchemical research. In every case where we have with great difficulty succeeded in examining the plasm as far as possible and separating it from the plasma-products, it has the ap- pearance of a colorless, viscous substance, the chief physical property of which is its peculiar thickness and consistency. The physicist distinguishes three condi- tions of inorganic matter — solid, fluid, and gaseous. Active living protoplasm cannot strjctly be described as either fluid or solid in the physical sense. It presents an intermediate stage between the two which is best described as viscous; it is best compared to a cold jelly or solution of glue. Just as we find the latter substance in all stages between the solid and the fluid, so we find in the case of protoplasm. The cause of this softness is the quantity of water contained in the living matter, which generally amounts to a half of its volume and weight. The water is distributed between the plasma molecules, or the ultimate particles of living matter, in much the same way as it is in the crystals of salts, but with the important difference that it is very variable in J23 THE WONDERS OF LIFE quantity in the plasm. On this depends the capacity for absorption or imbibition in the plasm, and the mobility of its molecules, which is very important for the per- formance of the vital actions. However, this capacity of absorption has definite limits in each variety of plasm; living plasm is not soluble in water, but abso- lutely resists the penetration of any water beyond this limit. The chemistry of living matter is the most important and interesting, but at the same time the most difficult and obscure, part of the whole of biological chemistry. In spite of the innumerable and careful investigations which have been made of it by the ablest physiologists and chemists in the second half of the nineteenth century, we are still far from a satisfactory solution of this fundamental problem of biology. This is due partly to the extraordinary difficulty of isolating pure living plasm and subjecting it to chemical analysis, and partly to the many errors and misunderstandings that have arisen through one-sided treatment of the subject, and especially through confusion of the chemical and morphological features of plasm. We can thus under- stand the contradictory views that are still put forward by distinguished chemists and physiologists, zoologists and botanists. As I cannot deal here with the very extensive, elaborate, and contradictory literature of the subject, I must be content to give a brief summary of the conclusions I have reached by my reading and my own studies of plasm (begun in 1859). To begin with, we must clearly understand that proto- plasm — in the most general sense in which we here take it — is a chemical substance, not a "mixture of different substances," or a "mixture of a small quantity of solid matter with a good deal of fluid . " As Richard Neumeister very well observes: "We seek the nature of protoplasm in the peculiar processes which take place in its con- 124 PLASM stituent matter. Protoplasm is for us a chemical matter, so pronounced, in fact, that the highest chemical actions that we know of are embodied in it." I must, from my point of view, entirely reject Oscar Hertwig's conception of living matter as a "mixture " of a number of chemical elements; because chemistry applies this phrase to vari- ous gases and powdery substances which are completely indifferent to each other — a property which we certainly do not find in the constituents of protoplasm. When we speak of the living matter or protoplasm, the general phrase does not imply that the substance may not have a distinctive composition in each particular case. And when we find many biologists still conceiving proto- plasm as a mixture of various substances, the error is generally due to a confusion of the chemical idea with the morphological, and to a belief that certain structural features of the plasm are primary, whereas they are only secondary, products of the vital process itself in the cell-body. The older biologists who first introduced the name protoplasm and studied it carefully recognized that this living matter belonged to the albuminous (or proteid) group. The many characteristics which distinguish these nitrogenous carbon-compounds from all other chemical compounds — their behavior towards acids and bases, their peculiar color-reaction towards certain salts, their decomposition-products, etc — are found in all the plasma-substances, and in all the other allmminoids. This is quite in agreement with the results of quantita- tive analysis. However differently the various plasma- substances behave in detail, they always exhil)it the same general composition as the other albuminoids out of the five " organogenetic elements" — namely, in point of weight, fifty -one to fifty - four per cent, carbon, twenty-one fo twenty-three per cent, oxygen, fifteen to seventeen per cent, nitrogen, six to seven per cent. 125 / - V 'f Iff J -iA THE WONDERS OF LIFE ,'l M hydrogen, and one to two per cent, sulphur. However, " ' ' M there is a good deal of variety and complication in the ^1 j\ way in which the atoms of these five elements are com- ^r bined in albumin and their molecules are grouped. Hence the question of the chemical nature of the plasma-substances compels us now to look for a mo- ment at the larger group of albuminoids to which they belong. The carbon-compounds which we comprise under the chemical title of the albumins or proteids are the most remarkable, but also, unfortunately, the least known, of all bodies. The attempt to examine them closely encounters extraordinary difficulties, greater than in any other group of chemical compounds. Everybody is familiar with the appearance of ordinary albumm, from the transparent viscous albumin that surrounds the yolk in the hen's egg, and which becomes a white, opaque, and solid mass when it is cooked. However, this special form of albumin, which we can get so easily in any quantity from the eggs of birds and reptiles, is only one of the innumerable kinds of albumin, or species of protein, that are to be found in the bodies of the various animals and plants. Chemists have hitherto tried in vain to master the chemical structure of these obscure protein-compounds. They are only rarely to be found in chemically pure form as crystals. As a rule, they are in the colloid form, or uncrystallized jelly-like masses, which offer a much greater resistance than cr3^stals to the passage through a porous medium by diosmosis (see p. 39). However, although we have not yet succeeded in penetrating the molecular constitution of the al- bumins, the laborious research of chemists has yielded some general results which are of great importance for our purpose. We have, in the first place, a general idea of their molecular constitution. Molecules are the smallest homogeneous parts into 126 PLASM which a ^body c an be divided without altering its chemical character. Hence the molecules of every chemical com- pound are made up of two or more atoms of different kinds. The greater the number of atoms in each com- pound, the higher is its molecular weight. The space between the molecules and their component atoms is filled with imponderable and highly elastic ether. As even the largest molecules occupy only a very tiny space, and remain far below the range of the most power- ful microscope, all our ideas of their composition depend on general physical theories and special chemical hy- potheses. Nevertheless, stereochemistry, the modern science of the molecular structure of chemical com- pounds, is not only a perfectly legitimate section of nat- ural philosophy, but it yields the most important con- clusions as to the mutual attractions of the elements and the invisible movements of the atoms in combining. It further enables us to calculate approximately the relative size of the molecules and the number of atoms that are grouped together in them. However, the albuminoids present the greatest difficulty of all in this calculation, and their structural features are still very obscure. Nevertheless, science has reached certain general conclusions, which we may formulate in the following propositions: 1. The molecule of albumin is unusually large, and ( therefore its molecular weight is very high (higher than in most or all other compounds). 2. The number of atoms composing it is very large' (probably much more than a thousand). 3. The disposition of the atoms and groups of atoms in the albuminous molecule is very complicated, and at the same time very unstable — that is to say, very changeable and easily altered. These characters, which are ascribed to all albuminous bodies by modern chemistry, hold good of all plasma- 127 THE WONDERS OF LIFE substances; and, in fact, are true in a higher degree of these, as the metaboHsm of the Hving matter causes a constant displacement of the atoms. This is caused, according to the view of Franz Hofmeister and others, by the formation of ferments or enzyma — in other words, by catalysators of a colloidal structure. Verworn has, on physiological grounds, given the name of biogens to these plasma-molecules. The profound insight which comparative anatomy has given us into the significance and nature of organs, and comparative histology into those of the cells, has nat- urally excited a desire to penetrate in the same way the mystery of the elementary structure of the plasm, the chief active constituent of the cell. The improved meth- ods of modern cytology, and the great progress which this science of the cell owes to the microtome and to microchemistry with its delicate coloring processes, etc., have prompted many observers of the last three decades to study the finest structural features of the elementary organism, and on this foundation build hypotheses as to the elementary structure of protoplasm. In my opinion, all these theoretical ideas, in so far as they would explain the finer structure of pure plasm, have a very serious defect; they relate to microscopic structures which do not belong to the plasm as such (as a chemical body), but to the cell-body (or cytosoma), the chief active constituent of which is certainly the plasm. These microscopic structures are not the efficient causes of the life-process, but products of it. They are phylogenetic outcomes of the manifold differentiations which the originally homogeneous and structureless plasm has undergone in the course of many millions of years. Hence I regard all these "plasma-structures" (the comb, threads, granules, etc.), not as original and primary, but as acquired and secondary. In so far as these structures affect the plasm as such, it must take 128 P L A S M the name of metaplasm, or a differentiated plasm, modified by the Ufe-process itself. The true protoplasm, or viscous and at first chemically homogeneous sub- stance, cannot, in my opinion, have any anatomic structure. We shall see, when we come to consider the monera, that very simple specimens of such organisms without organs still actually exist. By far the greater part of the plasm that comes under investigation as active Uving matter in organisms is metaplasm, or secondary plasm, the originally homo- geneous substance of which has acquired definite structures by phyletic differentiations in the course of millions of years. To this modified plasm we must oppose the original simple primary plasm, from the modification of which it has arisen. The name "proto- plasm," in the narrower sense, could very properly be retained for this originally homogeneous form of struct- ureless plasm; but, as the term has now almost lost definite meaning and is used in many different senses, it is, perhaps, better to call this pure homogeneous primary plasm archiplasm. It is still found — firstly, in the body of many (but not all) of the monera, part of the chromacea and bacteria, and the protamoeba and protogenes; and, secondly, in the body of many very young protists and tissue-cells. In the latter case, how- ever, there is already a chemical differentiation of the inner caryoplasm and outer cytoplasm. When we examine these young cells under a high power of the microscope, with the aid of the modern coloring meth- ods, their protoplasm seems to be perfectly homo- geneous and structureless, or, at the most, there are merely very fine granules regularly distributed in it which are believed to be products of metabolism. This is best seen in many of the rhizopods, especially the amoebae, thalamophora, and mycetozoa. There are large amoebae, which thrust out strongly mobile feet from their 9 129 THE WONDERS OF LIFE unicellular body, broad, flaplike processes of the naked cell body which constantly change their form, size, and place. If they are killed and examined with the aid of the best methods of coloring, it is quite impossible to detect any structure in them ; and this is also true of the pseudopodia of the mycetozoa and many other rhizopods. Moreover, the slow flowing movement of the fluid proto- plasm shows clearly that there cannot be any composi- tion out of fine fixed elements in the body. This is particularly clear in those amoebae and mycetozoa in which a hyaline, firm, and non-granulated skin-layer (hyaloplasm) is more or less separated from a dark, softer, and granulated marrow-layer (polioplasm) ; as both of them are viscous and pass into each other without sharp limits, there cannot be any constant and fixed structural features in them. Organic life — in its lowest and simplest form — is nothing but a form of metabolism, and therefore a purely chemical process. The whole vital activity of the chromacea, the simplest and oldest organisms that we know, is confined to that process of metabolism which we call plasmodomism or carbon-assimilation. The homogeneous and structureless globules of protoplasm, which represent the whole frame of these primitive pro- tophyta (chroococcus, aphanocapsa, etc.) in the simplest conceivable way, expend their whole vital power in the process of self -maintenance. They maintain their indi- viduality by a simple metabolism; they grow by the addition of fresh plasm obtained by it, and they split up into two equal globules of plasm when the growth passes a certain limit — reproduction by clevage, maintenance of the species. Thus these chromacea have neither special organs, or organella, that we can distinguish in their simple plasma-bodies, nor different functions in their life-process; it is wholly taken up with the primitive work of their vegetal metabolism. We shall see later 130 PLASM on that this is a purely chemical process, something like catalysis in inorganic combinations; and for this neither special organs nor fine elementary structures in the plasm are needed. The "end" of their existence, self- maintenance, is attained just as simply as in the catalysis of any inorganic compound, or the formation of a crystal in its mother-water. If we compare this very rudimentary life-process of the monera with that of the highly differentiated protists (diatomes, desmidiacea, radiolaria, and infusoria), the biological distance between them seems to be immense; and it is, naturally, far greater when we extend the com- parison to the histona, the highly organized metaphyta and metazoa, in the bodies of which millions of cells co-operate in the work of the various tissues and organs. In the great majority of cells — either the autonomous cells of the protists or the tissue-cells of the histona — we can detect more or less definite and constant fine structures in the plasm. We must regard these always as phyletic, secondary products of the life-process, and so call the differentiated plasm by the name of meta- plasm. The very different interpretations of the micro- scopic pictures which this metaplasm affords have led to a good deal of controversy. In this the desire to discover in these secondary plasma-structures the first causes of vital action, or the real elementary organella of the cell, has played a great part. The most important of the theories that have been formulated are those of the frothy structure, the skeletal structure, the fibrous struct- ure, and the granulated structure of the plasm. All these theories of structure apply to plasm in general, but particularly to its two chief forms, thecaryoplasm of the nucleus and the cytoplasm of the cell-body. Among the many different attempts to discover a definite structure in living matter, the theory of the frothy structure (also called the honeycomb structure) 131 THE WONDERS OF LIFE has lately found the most favor. Otto Biitschli, of Heidelberg, especially, has endeavored, on the basis of many years of careful study and experiment, to make it the foundation of his view of the plasm. It is undeniable that the living matter of many cells shows a delicate structure which may best be compared with fine soap- suds ; innumerable globules are crowded close together in a fluid, and flatten each other by their pressure into polyhedrical shapes. In 1892 Butschli artificially pro- duced fine oil-suds by beating up cane sugar or potash in olive oil, and then put a small drop of the stuff in a drop of water under the microscope. The small particles of sugar then exercised an attractive action by diffusion on the particles of water; the latter penetrated into the oily matter, released the sugar, and formed tiny vesicles with it. As the vesicles of sugar do not mix with oil, they look like cavities isolated on all sides, and poly- hedrically flattened by mutual pressure. The striking resemblance of this artificially produced "oil soap-suds" to the natural and microscopically visible structures of many kinds of plasm is strengthened from the fact that Butschli, Georg Quincke, and others, have also observed similar flowing movements in both; and as these ap- parently spontaneous movements can be explained physically and reduced to adhesion, imbibition, and other mechanical causes, there seemed a prospect of re- ducing the "vital" movements of the living and flowing plasm to purely physical forces. Quite recently Ludwig Rhumbler, of Gottingen, an authority on the rhizopods, has endeavored to give in this sense a Physical analysis of the vital phenomena in the cell. To-day the froth theory is much the most popular of the many attempts to detect a fine plasm-structure as the essential ana- tomic foundation of an explanation of the physio- logical functions. It must be noted, however, that frequently very different phenomena are confused under 132 PLASM this name, especially the coarser froth-formation by taking up water in the living matter and the invisible hypothetical molecular structure. Both these must be distinguished from the finer plasma-structure which is visible under a powerful microscope; but the limit be- tween them is difficult to determine. A second view of the finer structure of the plasm, which had been greatly esteemed before the acceptance of the froth theory, was formulated in 1875 by Carl Frommann and Carl Heitzmann, and supported by Leydig, Schwitz, and others. It puts another interpre- tation on the net-like appearance of the microscopic plasma-structure. It assumes that the plasma consists of a skeleton of fine threads or fibrils combined in the form of a net, and that these spread and cross in the body of the cell which is filled with fluid. It is also compared to a sponge, and is said to have a spongy structure. We can artificially produce such a skeletal structure by, for instance, causing coagulation in a thick solution of glue or albumin by adding alcohol or chromic acid. It is unquestionable that there are these "plasma- skeletons" both in the nucleus and the body of the cell; but they are generally (if not always) secondary prod- ucts of organization in the elementary organism (or cell - organs), not primitive structures of its plasm. Moreover, an optical transverse action of a froth- structure or honeycomb, examined as a flat surface in the microscope, shows the same configuration as a fine skeleton. We can hardly see any difference between the two. We cannot accept the skeletal formation as a fundamental structure of the plasm. As we notice very fine threads in the plasm of many cells, both in the caryoplasm of the nucleus and the cytoplasm of the cell body, the cytologist Flemming, of Kiel (1882), believed it was possible to discover them in the plasm of all cells, and based on this his filar theory ^33 THE WONDERS OF LIFE of plasm. He says that we must distinguish two chemi- cally different kinds of plasm in living matter — the^ filar (threadlike) and the inter-filar matter. The fine threads of the former are of different lengths, and sometimes run separately, at other times are bound in a sort of net-work {mitoma and paramitomd). In certain conditions of cell-life, especially in indirect cell-division, these filar formations play a great part; and also in the functions of highly differentiated cells, such as the ganglionic cells. But in many cases these plasma threads may be merely parts of a skeletal or frothy structure (honeycomb walls in section). In any case, we cannot regard the thread formation as a general elementary structure of plasm; in my opinion, it is always a secondary phyletic product of living matter, and never a primary feature of it. Totally different from the three preceding theories of the finer structure of the plasm is the granular theory of Altmann (1890). He supposes that all living matter is originally made up of tiny round granules, and that these independently living hiohlgsts are the real "elementary organisms," the microscopic ultimate individuals; hence the cells which are formed by the combination of these granules must be looked on as individuals of the second order. Between the granules of the granulated substance (the real active living matter) there is always an inter-granular substance; the granules are regularly distributed and arranged in these. The granules them- selves, or the bioblasts, are homogeneous, sometimes globular, and sometimes oval, or of other shapes. However, the distinction between these substances is quite arbitrary, and neither chemically nor morphologi- cally well defined. Under the head of granules Altmann throws together the most different contents of the cell — fat granules, pigment granules, secretory granules, and other products of metabolism. Hence his granular 134 PLASM theory is now generally rejected. However, there was a sound idea at the bottom of it — namely, the idea of explaining the vital properties and functions of living matter by small separate constituents which make up the plasm, and move in a viscous medium. But these real elementary parts are not microscopically visible; they belong to the molecular world, which lies far below the limit of microscopic power. In my opinion, Alt- mann's visible granules, like Flemming's threads and Frommann's skeleton and Biitschli's honeycomb, are not primary structures, but secondary products of plasma differentiation. As the special properties and activities of any natural body depend on its chemical constitution, and this is, in the long-run, determined by the composition of its molecules, it is a matter of the greatest interest in biology to form as clear and distinct an idea as possible of the nature and properties of the molecules of plasm. Unfortunately, it is only possible to do this approximate- ly, and to a slight extent. As the hypotheses of modem structural chemistry on the molecular formation of com- plicated organic compounds are often very unsafe, this is bound to be the case in the highest degree as regards the albuminoids and, the most important of all, the living matter or plasm. We have as yet no knowledge of the fundamental features of its very variable chemical structure. The one thing that bio-chemists have told us about it is that the molecule of plasm is very large, and made up of a great number of atoms (over a thousand) ; and that these are combined in smaller or larger groups, and are in a state of very unstable equilibrium, so that the life process itself causes constant changes in them. Since the great problem of heredity was forced by Darwin in 1859 into the foreground of general biology, manv different hypotheses and theories of it have been framed. All these have in the end to trace it to molecular 135 THE WONDERS OF LIFE features in the plasm of the germ-cells; because it is this germ-plasm of the maternal ovum and the paternal sperm - cell that conveys the characteristics of the parents to the child. Hence the great progress that has been made recently in the study of conception and heredity, by means of a number of remarkable observa- tions and experiments, has been of service to our ideas on the molecular structure of the plasm. I have dealt with the chief of these theories in the ninth chapter of my History of Creation y and must refer the reader thereto. In chronological order we have: (i) the pangenesis theory of Darwin (1868), (2) the perigenesis theory of Haeckel(i875), (3) the idioplasm theory of NageH (1884), (4) the germ -plasm theory of Weismann (1885), and (5) the mutation-theory of De Bries (1889). None of these attempts, and none of the later theories of heredity, has given us a satisfactory and generally admitted idea of the plasma-structure. We are not even clear as to whether in the last resort life is to be traced to the several molecules, or to groups of molecules, in the plasm. With an eye to this latter difference, we may distinguish the plastidule and micellar theories as two different groups of relevant hypotheses. In my essay on "The Perigenesis of the Plastidules" (1875) I formulated the hypothesis that in the last instance the plastidules are the vehicles of heredity — that is to say, plasma-molecules which have the property of memory. In this I found support in the ingenious theory of the distinguished physiologist, Ewald Hering, who had declared in 1870 that "memory is a general property of organic matter." I do not see still how heredity can be explained without this assumption ! The very word "reproduction," which is common to both processes, expresses the common character of psychic memory (as a function of the brain). By plastidules I understand simple molecules; the homogeneous nature 136 PLASM of the plasm in the monera (both chromacea and bacteria and rhizomonera) and the primitive simplicity of their life-functions do not dispose us to think that special groups of molecules are to be distinguished in these cases. Max Verworn has recently (1903) formulated his biogen- hypothesis in the same sense, as a "critical-experimental study of the processes in the living matter." He also takes the active plasma-molecules, which he calls biogens, as the ultimate individual factors of the life-process, and is convinced that in the simplest cases the plasm consists of homogeneous biogen-molecules. The hypothesis of Nageli (1884) and Weismann (1885) is totally difi[erent from the hypothesis of the plastidules and biogens as simple molecules of the plasm. Accord- ing to this, the ultimate "vital unities" or individual vehicles of the life-process are not homogeneous plasma- molecules, but groups of molecules, made up of a number of dififerent molecules. Nageli calls them micella, and assigns them a crystalline structure. He supposes that these micella are combined chainwise into micellar ropes, and that the variety of the many forms and functions of plasm is due to the different configura- tion and arrangement of these. Weismann says: "Life can only arise by a definite combination of different kinds of molecules, and all living matter must be made up of these groups of molecules. A single molecule cannot live, can neither assimilate nor grow nor repro- duce." I do not see the justice of this observation. All the chemical and physiological properties which Weismann afterwards attributes to his hypothetical hiophora may be ascribed to a single molecule just as well as to a group of molecules. In the simplest forms of the monera (both the chromacea and the bacteria) the nature of their rudimentary life can be explained on the one supposition just as well as the other. Naturally, this does not exclude a very complicated chemical 137 THE WONDERS OF LIFE structure in the large plastidule or biogen as a single molecule. Verworn's biogen-hypothesis seems to me quite satisfactory when it represents the primitive molecule of living matter as really the ultimate factor of life. The chief process in the evolutionary history of the plasm is its separation into the inner nuclear matter (caryoplasm) and the outer cellular matter (cytoplasm). When both kinds of plasm arose by differentiation from the originally simple plasm of the monera, there also took place the morphological separation of the nucleus (caryon) and cell-body (cytosoma or celleus). As these two chief forms of living matter are chemically different but nearly related, and as they may in certain circum- stances (for instance, during indirect cell-division and the partial caryolysis connected therewith) enter into the closest mutual relations, we must suppose that the original severance of the two substances took place gradually and during a long period of time. It was not by a sudden bound or transformation, but by a gradual and progressive formation of the chemical antithesis of caryoplasm and cytoplasm, that the real nucleated cell (cytos) arose from the unnucleated cytode (or primitive cell). Both may correctly be comprised under the general head of plastids (or formative principles), as "ultimate individualities." I regard as the chief cause of this important differen- tiation of the plasm the accumulation of hereditary matter — that is to say, of the internal characteristics of the plastids acquired by ancestors and transmitted to their descendants — within the plastids while their outer portion continued to maintain the intercourse with the outer world. In this way the inner nucleus became the organ of heredity and reproduction, and the outer cell-body the organ of adaptation and nutri- tion. I put forward this hypothesis in 1866 in my 138 PLASM General Morplioloi^y: "The two functions of heredity and adaptation seem to be not yet distributed between differentiated substances in the unnucleated cytodes, but to inhere in the whole of the homogeneous mass of the plasm; while in the nucleated cell they are di- vided between the two active constituents of the cell, the inner nucleus taking over the transmission of hered- itary characters and the outer plasm undertaking adaptation, or the accommodation to the features of the environment." This hypothesis was afterwards (1873) confirmed by the discoveries of Strasburger, the brothers Hertwig, and others, with regard to cell-cleavage and fertilization ; it is particularly supported by the phenom- ena of caryokinesis (the movement of the nucleus) in sexual generation. Hence we can understand how it is that in the monera (chromacea and bacteria), which propagate by simple cleavage, there is no sexual genera- tion and no nucleus. The great significance of the nucleus in the life of the cell, as central organ of heredity, and also probably as "the soul of the cell," depends chiefly on the chemical properties of its albuminous matter, the caryoplasm. This one indispensable nuclear element is chemically akin to the cytoplasm of the cell-body, but differs from it in certain respects. The caryoplasm has a greater affinity for many coloring matters (carmine, haematoxy- lin, etc.) than the cytoplasm; and the former coagulates more quickly and firmly than the latter through acids (such as acetic and chromic acid). Hence we need only add a drop of diluted (two per cent.) acetic acid to cells that seem homogeneous to make perfectly clear the separation between the inner nucleus and outer body. As a rule, the firmer nucleus then stands out sharply as a globular or oval particle of plasm; occasionally it has other forms (cylindrical, conical, spiral, or branched). The caryoplasm seems to be originally quite homogene- 139 THE WONDERS OF LIFE ous and structureless, as we find in many of the protists and many young cells of histona (especially young embryos). But in the great majority of cells the caryo- plasm is divided into two or more different substances, the chief of them being chromatin and achromin. The most common division of the caryoplasm in the cells of the animal and plant body, and the one of chief significance for their vital activity, is that into two chemically different substances, which are usually called chromatin (or nuclein) and achromin (or linin). Chro- matin has a greater affinity for coloring (chromos) matter (carmine, haematoxylin, etc.), and so this "colorable nuclear matter" is particularly regarded as the vehicle of heredity. The achromin (or achro- matin, or linin) is either not at all or less easily color- able, and is akin to the cytoplasm; in direct cell-division it enters into close relations with the latter. Achromin is usually found in the form of slender threads, and hence called "nuclear thread-matter" (linin). Chro- matin is generally found in roundish or rod-shaped granules (chromosomata), which exhibit very charac- teristic changes of form (loop formation, etc.) in indirect cell-division. The chemical, physiological, and morpho- logical difference between chromatin and achromin must not be regarded as an original property of cell nuclei (as is wrongly stated sometimes), but is the outcome of a very early phylogenetic differentiation in the originally homogeneous caryoplasm; and this holds also of two other parts of the nucleus — the nucleolus and cen- trosoma. In a good many cells, but by no means universally, we find two other constituents of the nucleus, which owe their rise to a further differentiation of the caryoplasm. The nucleolus is a small globular or oval particle, which may be found singly or in numbers in the nucleus, and behaves somewhat differently towards coloring matter 140 P L A S M than the closely related chromatin. It has a special aflinity for acid aniline colors, gosin, etc. Its substance has, therefore, been distinguished as plastin or para- nnclcin. The nucleolus is especially found in the tissue- cells of the higher animals and plants as an independent constituent; it is wanting in many of the unicellular protists. The same may be said of the centrosoma, or "central body" of the cell. This is an extremely small granule, on the very limit of visibility, the chemical com- position of which is not known very well. We should have paid no attention to this constituent of the cell (distinguished in 1876) if it did not play an important, and perhaps leading, part in indirect cell-division. As the "polar body in the division of the nucleus," the centrosoma exercises a peculiar attraction on the granules distributed in the cytoplasm, which arrange themselves radially about this centre. The centrosomata grow independently and increase by cleavage, like the chromoplasts (chlorophyll particles, etc.). When they have split up, each of the daughter-microsomata acts in turn as a centre of attraction on its half of the cell. However, the great importance which modern cytologists have ascribed to it on this account is discounted by two circumstances. In the first place, we have not succeeded, in spite of all efforts, in discovering a centro- soma in the cells of the higher plants and many of the protists; and, in the second place, a number of recent chemical experiments have succeeded in producing centrosomata artificially (for instance, by the addition of magnesium chloride) in the cytoplasm. Hence many cytologists regard the centrosoma as a secondary product of differentiation in the cell-body, not the nucleus. Two other parts of the nucleus that we find very often, but by no means universally, in the cells of the animal and plant body are the nuclear membrane (caryotheca) and the nuclear sap (caryolymph). A large number of 141 THE WONDERS OF LIFE cells — but not all — have the appearance of vesicles, having a thin skin enclosing a liquid content, the nuclear sap. The achromin then usually forms a frame-work of threads, with chromatin granules in its meshes or knots, within this round vesicle. This very thin nuclear membrane (often only visible as its contour) or cary- otheca may be regarded as the result of surface-strain (at the planes of contact of caryoplasm and cytoplasm). The watery and usually clear and transparent nuclear sap (caryolymph) is formed by imbibition of watery fluid (like the frothy structure of the plasm in general). The separation of the nuclear membrane and nuclear sap is not a primary property of the nucleus, but is due to a secondary differentiation in the originally homo- geneous caryoplasm. Like the caryoplasm of the nucleus, the cytoplasm of the cell-body is originally a chemical modification of the simple and once homogeneous plasm (the archiplasm). This is clearly shown by the comparative biology of the protists, their unicellular organism presenting a much greater variety of stages of cell-organization than the subordinate tissue-cells in the bodies of the multicellular histona. However, in the great majority of cells the cytoplasm is separated into several, and frequently very numerous, parts, which have received diverse forms and functions in the division of labor. We then see very conspicuously the regularity of cell-organization, which is altogether wanting in the simple homogeneous plasma granules of the monera. As this great differentiation of the advanced elementary organism is incorrectly generalized by some recent cytologists and described as a universal feature of cells, it is necessary to insist explicitly that it is a secondary phylogenetic develop- ment, and is altogether wanting in the primitive or- ganisms. The complexity of the physiological division of labor and the accompanying morphological separation 142 PLASM of parts is extremely great in the cytoplasm. When we wish to arrange them in a few large groups from a general point of view, we may distinguish the active plasma-formations from the passive plasma-products; the former are due to a chemical metamorphosis of the living plasm, the latter lifeless excretions from it. Under the head of plasm-formations, or products of differentiation in the cytoplasm, we comprise all forma- tions that are due to partial metamorphosis of the living cell-body — not lifeless excretions from it, but living parts of its substance, undertaking special functions, and therefore chemically and morphologically differentiated from the primary cytoplasm. One of the commonest dif- ferentiations of this kind is the separation of the firm hyaline skin-layer (hyaloplasm) from the softer granular marrow-layer (polioplasm) ; though the two often pass into each other without clear limits. In most plant-cells special granules of plasm, mostly globular or roundish, are developed, called tropJioplasts, and these undertake the work of metabolism. To this class belong the amylo- plasts, which produce starch (amylum), the chloroplasts or chlorophyll-granules which form the green matter (chlorophyll) in the leaf, and the chromoplasts which form color-crystals of various sorts. In the cells of the higher animals the myoplasts form the special contractile tissue of the muscles, and the neuroplasts the psychic tissue of the nerve-matter. On the other hand, the dis- tinction between the body-plasm (somoplasma) and the germ-plasm (germoplasma), which serves as the base of Weismann's untenable theory of the germ-plasm (cj. chapter xvi.), is purely hypothetical and without direct observation to support it. The infinite variety of parts of the cell which arise as excretions of the living active cytoplasm, and so must be regarded as lifeless plasma-products, may be divided into two chief groups — internal and external. The former 143 THE WONDERS OF LIFE are stored within the living cytoplasm, the latter thrust out from it. Internal plasma-products of common occurrence are the microsomata, very small and opaque particles which are generally regarded as products of metabolism. They consist sometimes of fat, sometimes of derivatives of albumin, sometimes of other substances of which we do not know the chemical composition. The same may be said of the large and variously-colored pigment-granules, which are very common and determine the color of tissues. Also very common in the cytoplasm are large accumulations of fat in the shape of oil-globules, fat- crystals, etc., besides other crystals of a very different sort, partly organic crystals (for instance, albuminous crystals in the aleuron - granules of plants), partly inorganic crystals (for instance, of oxalic-acid salts in many plant-cells, of calcareous salts in many animal- cells). The watery cell-sap (cytolymph) plays an impor- tant part in many of the larger cells. It is formed by the accumulation of fluid in the cytoplasm, and is found in its frothy structure. The large empty spaces which it forms are called vacuoles, with very regularly disposed alveoles. When the cell-sap gathers in great abundance within the cell, we get the large vesicular cells which are found in the tissues of the higher plants, the carti- lages, etc. As external excretions of the living cytoplasm that have acquired some importance, especially as protective organs, in the majority of cells, we have first of all the cell -membranes, the firm capsules or protective skins which enclose the soft cell-body, like a snail in its house. In the first period of the cell-theory (i 838-1 859) such an integument was ascribed to all cells, and often regarded as their chief constituent; but it was discovered after- wards that this protective skin is altogether wanting in many (especially animal) cells, and that it is not found 144 PLASM in many when they are young, but grows subsequently. We now distinguish between naked cells (gymnocytes) and covered cells (thecocytes). As examples of naked cells we have the amoebae, and many of the infusoria, the spores of algae, the spermatozoa, and many animal tissue-cells. The cell-covering (cytotheca) varies very much in size, shape, composition, and chemical character, especially in the rhizopods among the unicellular protists. The tlint shells of the radiolaria and diatomes, the chalky cells of the thalamophora and calcocytea, the cellulose shells of the desmidiacea and syphonea, show the ex- traordinary plasticity of the constructive cytoplasm {cf. chapter viii.). Among the histona the tissue-plants are remarkable for the infinite variety of shape and differ- entiation of their cellulose capsules. The familiar prop- erties of wood, cork, bast, the hard shells of fruit, etc., are due to the manifold chemical modification and mor- phological differentiation which the cellulose membrane undergoes in the tissues of plants. This is less fre- quently seen in the tissues of animals; but, on the other hand, the intercellular and the cuticular matter play a greater part in these. The intercellular matter, an important external plasma-product, is formed by the social cells in the tissues of the histona thrusting out in common firm protective membranes. These protective structures are very common among communities of protists, in the form of masses of jelly, in which a number of cells of the same kind are united ; such are the zoogloea of many of the bacteria and chromacea, the common jelly-like envelope of the volvocina and many diatomes, and the globular cell-communities of the polycyttaria (or social radiolaria). The chief part is played by intercellular matter in the body of the higher animals, in the form of mesenchyma-tissue ; the connecting tissue, cartilages, lo 145 THE WONDERS OF LIFE and bones owe their peculiar property to the amount and quality of the intercellular matter that is deposited between the social cells. When the socially joined epidermic cells at the surface of the tissue-bod}" thrust forth in common a protective covering, we get the cuticles, which are often thick and solid armor-plates. In many of the metaphyta wax and flinty matter are deposited in the cellulose cuticles. The strongest formation is found in the invertebrate animals, where the cuticle often determines the whole shape and articulation, as in the calcareous shells of mollusks (mussel-shells, snail-shells, cockle-shells, etc.); and especially the coats of the articulata (the crab's coat of mail, and the skins of spiders and insects). VII UNITIES OF LIFE Units of life — Simple and complex organisms — Morphological and physiological individuals — Morphonta and bionta — Stages of individuality: cell, person, stem — Actual and virtual bionta — Partial and genealogical bionta — Meta- physical individuals — Cells (elementary organisms) — Cell membranes — Unnucleated cells — Plastids (cytodes and cells) — Primitive cells and nucleated cells — Organella (cell organs) — Cell communities (coenobia) — Tissues of histona — Systems of organs — Organic apparatus — Histonal indi- viduals (sprouts and persons) — Articulation of the histona (metamerism) — Stems of the histona — Animal states. THE dissection of the body of the higher animal and plant into its various organs soon prompted com- parative anatomists to draw a distinction between sim- ple and complex organisms. Then, when the cell-the- ory developed in the course of the last half -century, the common anatomic groundwork of all living forms was recognized in the cell; and the conception of the cell as the elementary organism led to the further belief that our own frame, like that of all the higher animals and plants, is a cell-state, composed of millions of micro- scopic citizens, the individual cells, which work more or less independently therein, and co-operate for the com- mon purposes of the entire community. This funda- mental principle of the modern cell-theory was applied with great success by Rudolph Virchow to the diseased organism, and led to most important reforms in medi- cine. The cells are, in his view, independent "life-uni- U7 THE WONDERS OF LIFE ties or individual life-centres," and the unified life of the whole man is the combined result of the work of his component cells. In this way the c^ls are the real life- unities of the organism. Their individual independence is at once seen in the permanently unicellular protists, of which several thousand species are already known to us. On the other hand, we find among the lower animals and the higher plants a composition of homogeneous parts, which represents a higher stage of life-unity. The tree is an individual, but it is made up of a number of branches or individual sprouts, each of which consists in like manner of an axial stem with leaves attached. If we detach such a branch and plant it in the ground, it takes root and grows into an independent plant. So the coral-stem is made up of a number of individual animals or persons, each of which has its own stomach and mouth with a crown of tentacles. Each several coral-individual is equivalent to a single living polyp (actinia). Thus the stem (cormus) is a higher unity, both in the animal and the plant world. Even the herds of gregarious animals, the swarms of bees and ants, and the communities of human beings, are similar unities; with the difference that the individual persons or citizens are not physically connected, but held together by com- mon interests. We can, therefore, distinguish three stages of organic individuality, one building upon the other — the cell, the person (or sprout), and the stejn or state (cormus). Each higher unity represents an inti- mate union of lower individuals. Morphologically, in relation to their anatomic structure, the latter are in- dependent; but physiologically, in respect of the life- unity of the whole, they are subordinated to the former. — This relation is quite clear in the familiar examples I have quoted. But there are other organisms in which this is not so, and where the question of the real individ- 148 UNITIES OF LIFE uality is very difficult to answer. Thus, fifty years ago, we came to recognize floating animal-stems in the re- markable siphonophora, or social medusc'c, which had hitherto been regarded as individual animals, or medusa; with a multiplicity of organs; further study proved that each of these apparent organs is really a modified me- dusa, and the whole united structure a stem. This example throws a good deal of light on the important question of association and division of labor. The whole floating siphonophoron is, physiologically considered (in respect of its vital activity), a harmoniously organized animal with a number of different organs ; but from the morphological point of view (in respect of form and structure) each dependent organ is really an indepen- dent medusa. It is clear, from these few illustrations, that the ques- tion of organic individuality is by no means so simple as it seems at first sight, and that it receives different answers according as we look at the form and structure (morphologically) or the vital and psychic activity (physiologically). We must, therefore, distinguish at once between morphological (niorphonta) and physio- logical (bionta) individuals. The tree and the siphono- phoron are bionta, or individuals of the highest order, made up of a number of similar branches or persons, the social morphonta. But, when we further dissect the latter anatomically into their various organs, and these again into their microscopic elements, the cells, each branch or person seems to be a bion, and their ^cells to be morphonta. Each multicellular organism 1 is, however, developed in the beginning from a single cell, the stem-cell (cytula) or fertilized ovum; this is at once a morphon and a bion, a simple individual both morphologically and physiologically. The whole proc- ess of its development into a multicellular organism con- sists in a repeated cleavage of the stem-cell, the resultant 149 THE WONDERS OF LIFE I cells being joined in a higher unity, and assuming dif- I 1 ferent forms in consequence of the division of work. — The complicated modern state, with its remarkable achievements, may be regarded as the highest stage of individual perfection which is known to us in organic nature. But we can only understand the structure of this extremely complex "organism of the highest order," and its social forms and functions, when we have a sociological knowledge of the various classes that com- pose it, and the laws of their association and division of labor; and when we have made an anthropological study of the nature of the persons who have united, under the same laws, for the formation of a community and are distributed in its various classes. The familiar arrangement of these classes, and the settling of the rank in the mass and the governing body, show us how this complex social organism is built up step by step. But we have to look in the same way on the cell-state, which is made up from the separate individualities in human society or in the kingdom of the tissue-animals, or the branches in the kingdom of the tissue-plants. Their complex organism, composed of various organs and tissues, can only be understood when we are ac- quainted with their constituent elements, the cells, and the laws according to which these elementary organ- isms unite to form cell-communities and tissues, and are in turn modified in the divers organs in the division of labor. We must, therefore, first establish the scale of the morphonta, and the laws of their association and ergonomy, according to which the several stages or con- ditions of morphological individuality build on each other. Three such stages may be at once distinguished: (i) the cell (or, more correctly, the plastid), (2) the person (anim^al) or branch (vegetal), and (3) the stem or cormus. But we shall find that there are further subordinate stages under each of these three. It is only in the case 150 UNITIES OF LIFE of the protists that the morphological unity is bound up with the physiological. In the case of the histona, the multicellular, tissue-forming organisms, this is only so at the beginning of individual existence (at the stage of the stem-cell). As soon as the multicellular body arises from this cytula by repeated segmentation, it is raised to the stage of a higher individuality, the cell- state. Our own human frame is, in its mature condition, like that of all the higher animals, a very complete cell-state, but a single cell at the beginning of its existence. We speak of the life-unity of the former as an actual bion, and that of the latter as a virtual bion; in other words, the physiological individual or the life-unity has in the first case reached the highest stage of individual develop- ment that pertains to its species, while in the second case it remains at the lowest stage of virtual formation, and has only the capacity of rising to the higher stage. In the higher plants and animals only one cell of the organism, or the two combined sexual cells (ovum and spermium), are the potential bion which may develop into an actual one. There are, however, exceptions. In the fresh-water polyp (hydra) and cognate cnidaria each piece of the body-wall, in the bath-sponge (euspongia) and similar sponges each piece of tissue, and in many plants (for instance, marchantia among the crytogams and bryophyllum among the phanerogams) each portion of a branch or leaf, has the power to develop into a mature organism, and is, therefore, a virtual bion. From these virtual bionta (parts of the body that may grow into whole organisms) we must distinguish the partial bionta which have not this property. These are separated parts of the body that live for a time after being cut off from the whole organism, but then die off. Thus, for instance, the heart of a tortoise beats for a long time after being cut out. A flower that has been THE WONDERS OF LIFE plucked may, if put in water, keep fresh and alive for many days. In some highly organized cephalopods one of the eight arms of the male develops into an inde- pendent body, swims about, and accomplishes the fertilization of the female {hcctocotylus among the argonaiita, pkilonexis, etc.). It was at first thought to be an independent animal parasite. The samie thing happens with the remarkable foldlike dorsal append- ages of a large naked snail (thetys), which get detached and creep about. The body of many of the lower animals may be cut in pieces and yet may live for weeks. The life-properties of these partial bionta are important in view of the general question of the nature of life and its apparent unity in most of the higher organisms. As a fact, even here the cells and organs lead their separate individual life, though they are subordinate to and dependent on the whole. It has been attempted to answer this question of organic individuality in the sense of counting all or- ganisms individuals which develop from a single fer- tilized ovum. Thus, the Italian botanist Gallesio, in 1816, regarded all plants that arise by asexual generation (budding or segmentation) — sprouts, branches, slips, bulbs, etc. — as merely portions of a single individual that came from an egg (the seed). So also Huxley, in 1855, considered the sum of all the animals that have been produced by asexual propagation, but from a single sexually generated animal, to be parts of one individual. In practice, however, this principle is useless. We should have to say that the millions of plant-hce which arise parthenogenetically from unfertilized germ-cells, but are originally descended from one impregnated ovum, are one single individual; so also all the weeping- willows in Europe, because they all came from shoots of one single sexually-produced tree. Many attempts have been made in the course of the UNITIES OF L I 1" E nineteenth century to give a generally satisfactory an- swer to this ditticult question of the coni£;nt and CDja- notation of the idea^of the organic individua l. None of these has found general favoi\ I have compared and criticised them in the third book of my General Mor- pJwlogy. I there paid special attention to the views of Goethe, Alexander Braun, and Nageli among the bota- nists, and Johannes Miiller, Leuckart, and Victor Carus among the zoologists. When we consider the striking divergence of the views of such distinguished scientists and thinkers on so important a biological question, we can understand that opinions are still very divided to- day. Hence we must not be too hard on the meta- physical philosophers when — in complete ignorance of the real facts — they rear the most extraordinary theories in their airy speculations on "the principle of individuation " Compare, for instance, the opinions of the school-men and those of recent thinkers such as Arthur Schopenhauer and Edward Hartmann. As a rule, the psychological side of the problem — the question of the individual soul — is very promiinent, without much attention being paid to its material substratum — the anatomic basis of the organism. Many meta- physicians, who, in their one-sided anthropism, make man here also the measure of all things, would assign personal consciousness as the basis of the idea of in- dividuality. It is obvious that this is not a practicable test even for the higher animals, to say nothing of the lower animals and plants. In these we have a far greater variety of individuality on the one hand, and a far greater simplicity of construction on the other. I have tried to show, in my essay on " The Individuality of the Animal Body" (1878), the easiest way to answer these complicated tectological questions, and to support it by the science of structure. It suffices to distinguish the three chief stages I have mentioned, and to explain 153 THE WONDERS OF LIFE clearly their physiological significance on the one hand and morphological on the other. We will therefore consider the cell first, then the person (or sprout), and, finally, the stock (or cornius). Ever since the middle of the nineteenth century the cell theory has been generally and rightly considered one of the most important theories in biology. Every anatomical, histological, physiological, and ontogenetic work must build on the idea of the cell as the elementary organism. Nevertheless, we are still very far from having a general and clear agreement as to this univer- sal and fundamental idea. On the contrary, the ablest biologists still difi;er considerably as to the nature of the cell or the elementary individual, its relation to the whole of the multicellular organism, and so on. This divergence of views is partly due to the intricacy of the phenomena we find in the life of the cell, and partly to the many and extensive changes that have been made in the meaning of the term in the course of its employ- ment. Let us first cast a glance at the various stages of its history. When in the last third of the seventeenth century a V number of scientists, especially Malpighi in Italy and ^ Crew in England, used the microscope for the first time in the anatomic study of plant structure, they notjced a certain build of the tissue that closely resembled the honeycomb. The closely packed wax cells, filled with honey, of the hive, which show a hexagonal appearance in section, are like the wood cells that contain the sap in /" the plant. It was the great merit of Schleiden, the real founder of the cell theory, to prove that all the different tissues of plants are originally composed of such cells V(i838). Theodor Schwann soon afterwards proved the same for the animal tissues; in 1839 he extended the theory to the whole organic world. Both these scientists regarded the cell as essentially a vesicle, the firm mem- 154 UNITIES OF LIFE brane of which enclosed a fluid content, and a soHd smaller body inside this, which R. Brown had recognized as the nucleus in 1833. They compared the cell, as a microscopic individual, to an organic crystal, and thought it aro^e by aTsort of crystallization in an organic medium (cytoblastema) ; in this the central nucleus would serve as starting-point like the nucleus of the crystal. In the first twenty years (1839-59) of the cell theory it was a fixed principle that there were three essential parts, of the cell. Firstly, there was the strong outer (ii membrane, which was not only regard^ed as a protective covering, but also credited with a great deal of impor- tance as an element in the building of the organism. In . the second place, there was the fluid or semi-fluid con- tent (the sap); and, thirdly, the firm nucleus enclosed A^ in the sap. In order to give a clearer idea of the rela- tive thickness and disposition of these parts, the cell was compared to a cherry or a plum. The soft flesh of this fruit (corresponding to the cell sap) can, with diffi- culty, be separated from the external firm skin or from the hard stone within. A great step in advance was made in i860, when Max Sch\iJtze showed that the external mernbrane was an unessential and secondarily formed part of the cell. It is, as a fact, altogether wanting in many, especially young, cells of the animal body. They are naked cells without any membrane. The distinguished anatomist also proved that the co-called "cell sap" — the real body of the cell — is n^t a simple fluid, but a viscous, albuminous substance, the inde- pendent movements of which had long been known in the rhizopods, and which the first to study it carefully, Felix Dujardin, had described as sarcodc in 1835. ^^^^^ Schultze further showed that this '*sarcode" was iden- tical with the "cell mucus" of the ])lant cells which Hugo Mohl had designated "proto^sm" in 1846, and ~ 155 THE WONDERS OF LIFE that this Hving matter must be regarded as the real vehicle of the phenomena of Hfe. As the membrane was now recognized to be non-essential, of secondary growth, and completely w^ an ting in some cases, there remained only two essential parts of the cell — the outer soft cell body, consisting of protoplasm, and the inner firm nucleus, consisting of a similar substance called nuclein. The original naked cell was now like a cherry or plum without the skin. This new idea of the cell, formulated forty years ago, which I endeavored to con- firm in my monograph on the radiolaria (1862), is now generally accepted, and the cell is defined as a granule or particle of protoplasm (= cytoplasm) enclosing a firm and definite nucleus (or caryon, consisting of caryoplasm). This would be a good occasion to glance at the errors to which microscopic investigation and the conclusions based on it are liable. Although Kolliker in 1845, ^^^ Remak in 185 1, had drawn attention to the existence of naked cells, and had compared their movements (for instance, in lymph-cells) to those of the protoplasm in plant-cells, the majority of the leading microscopists clung for twenty years to the dogma that every cell must have a membrane ; the definite outline which even a naked cell must show in a different refxacting medium was taken to be the sign of a special and anatomically separable membrane. It would be just as correct to talk of a protective membrane on a homogeneous glass ball; its outline is sharply defined. In the long contro- versy that "exact" observers sustained as to the pres- ence or absence of a membrane, this optical error — the false interpretation of a sharp contour — counted for a good deal. It is much the same with other conflicts of "exact " observers who give their "certain observations " as facts, whereas they are really inferences from imper- fect observations on which different interpretations may be put. 156 U N 1 T 1 r: S OF LIFE Forty years ago (1S64) I tried in vain to detect a nucleus in the naked, living, mobile protoplasm of a few small rhizopod-like protists (protamocba and proto- genes). Other observers, who afterwards studied simi- lar unnucleated cells (Gruber, Cienkowski, and others), were no more successful. On the ground of these ob- servations, which were often repeated afterwards, I formed the class of the ni oncr a — the simplest unnucleated organjsms — in my General Morphology in 1866, and pointed out their great importance in solving some of the chief problems of biology. This importance has been much enhanced of late, since the chromacea and bacteria have also been recognized as unnucleated cells. Biitschli has, it is true, raised the objection that their homogeneous plasma-body behaves, not as cytoplasm, but as caryoplasm (or nuclein), and so that these sim- plest plastids correspond, not to the cell-body, but to the nucleus of other cells. On this view the bacteria and chromacea are not cells without nuclei, but nuclei without cell-bodies. This idea agrees with my own in conceiving the plasma-body of the monera (apart from its molecular structure) as homogeneous and not yet ad- vanced as far as the characteristic differentiation of in- ner nucleus and outer cell-body. Bearing in mind that these essential parts of the cell (in the view of most cytologists) are chemically related yet different from each other, we have three possible cases of the original formation of the nucleated cell from the unnucleated cytode: (i) The nucleus and cell-body have arisen by dififerentiation of a homogeneous plasm (monera); (2) the cell-body is a secondary growth from the primary nucleus; (3) the nucleus is a secondary development from the cell-body. On the first view, which I hold, the plaspa. or living matter, of the earliest organisms on the earth (which can only be conceived as archigonous monera) was a 157 THE WONDERS OF LIFE homogeneous plasson or archiplasm — that is tc say, a plasma -compound that was not yet differentiated into outer cytoplasm and inner caryoplasm. The rise of this chemical distinction — and the accompanying morpho- logical division of cell-body and nucleus — was due to a phyletic differentiation; it was the outcome of a very early and most important division of labor. The hered- itary matter gathered in the nucleus, the outer cell- matter controlling the intercourse with the external world. Thus, by this first ergonomy, the nucleus be- came the vehicle of heredity and the cell-body the organ of adaptation. Opposed to this view is the second, the hypothesis which the founder of the cell-theory, Schlei- den, had put forward — that the nucleus is the original base of the cell, and the cell-body a secondary develop- ment from it. This opinion (which, in the main, cor- responds to that of Biitschli) raises a number of difficulties; as does also the third hypothesis, that the unnucleated "protoplasm-body" (the outer cytoplasm- body) is the original formation, and that the nucleus arose secondarily by condensation and chemical modi- fication of it. At the bottom, however, the difference between the three hypotheses on the primary cytogene- sis is not as great as it seems at first sight. However, I am more inclined to adhere to the first ; it supposes that the physiological and chemical differences between nucleus and cell-body, which afterwards became so im- portant, were not originally present. The phenomena of caryolysis in indirect cell-division show us still how close are the relations of the two substances. If the organic population of our planet has arisen naturally, and not by a miracle, as Reinke and other vitalists suppose, the earliest elementary organisms, produced by the chemical process of archigony (spon- taneous generation), could not be real nucleated cells, but unnucleated cytodes of the type of the chromacea 158 UNITIES OF LIFE (cf. chapter ii.). The nucleated real cell, as Oscar Hert- wig and others define it to-day, can only have arisen by phylogenetic differentiation of nucleus and cell-body from the simple cytode of the monera. In that case it is a matter of simy^le logic to distinguish the older cytode from the later cell. The two may then best be com- prised (as I proposed in vain in 1866) under the name of "plastids" (formative principles) — that is, the ele- mentary organism in the broader sense. But if it is preferred to call the latter cells (in the broader sense), the wrong modern idea of the cell must be altered, and the nucleus-feature omitted from it. The cell is then simply the living particle of plasm, and its two stages of development must be described by other names. The unnucleated plastid might be called primitive cell (protocytos), and the ordinary nucleated one the nuclear cell (caryocytos). A long gradation of cellular organization leads from the simplest primitive cells (monera) to the highest developed protists. While no morphological organiza- tion whatever is discoverable in the homogeneous plasma-body of the chromacea and bacteria, we find a composition from different parts in the highly differen- tiated body of the advanced protophyta (diatomes, siphonea) and protozoa (radiolaria, infusoria). The manifold j^arts of the unicellular organism, developed by division of work in the plasm, discharge various functions, and behave physiologically like the organs of the multicellular histona. But as the idea of "organ" in the latter is morphologically fixed as a multicellular part of the body, made up of numerous tissues, we can- not call these similarly functioning parts "organs of the cell," and had better describe them as organella (or organoids). The great majority of the protists are, in the devel- oped condition, as actual individuals, equivalent mor- 159 THE WONDERS OF LIFE pliologically to real nucleated cells. By means of adap- tation to the most varied conditions and the inheritance of the properties thus acquired such a variety of uni- cellular forms has been evolved in the course of millions of years that we can distinguish thousands of living species, both of plasmodomous protophyta and plas- mophagous protozoa. The number of known and named species is already as high as this in several dis- tinct classes, as, for instance, in the diatomes of the primitive plants and the radiolaria of the primitive ani- mals. These solitary living unicellulars, or "hermit- cells," may be called monohia. Many other protists have abandoned this original solitary life; they follow their social instincts and form communities or colonies of cells (ccFnobia). These are usually formed by the daughter-cells which arise from the cleavage of a mother-cell remaining united after the division, and so on with the succeeding generations which come from their repeated segmentation. The following are the chief forms of these coenobia : 1. Gelatinous Ccenobia. — The social cells secrete a structureless mass of jelly, and remain associated in the common gelatinous mass, without actual contact. Sometimes they are regularly, at other times irregular- ly, distributed in it. We find coenobia of this kind even among the monera, such as the zoogloea of many bacteria and chromacea. They are common among the proto- phyta and protozoa. 2. Spherical Ccenobia. — The cell-community forms a sort of ball, the cells lying close together at its surface, touching each other or even forming a continuous layer ; such are holosphcura and volvox among the protophyta, magosphcera and synura among the protozoa. The lat- ter are particularly interesting because they resemble the blastiila, an important embryological stage of the metazoa, of which the simple, epithelial cell-layer at i6o UNITIES OF LIFE the surface of the hollow sphere is called the blastoderm (or germinal membrane). 3. Arboreal Ccenobia. — The cell-community takes the form of a small tree or shrub, the fixed cells secret- ing jelly-like stalks at their base and these forming branches. At the top of each stalk or branch is an in- dependent cell; so in the case of the gomphoncma and many other diatomes, the codonocladium among the flagellata, and the carchcsinm among the ciliata. 4. Catenal Ccenobia. — The cell-community forms a chain, the links of which (the individual cells) are joined in a row. We find chainlike cell-communities of this sort, or "articulated threads," even among the monera {oscillaria and nostic among the chromacea, leptothrix among the bacteria). Among the diatomes we have the bacillaria, among the thalamophora nodosaria, as ex- amples. Many of the lower protophyta (algaria and algetta) form the direct transition to the true alga^ among the metaphyta, as the threadlike layer of the latter (for instance, ciadophora) is only a higher develop- ment of the catenal coenobium, with polymorphism of the co-ordinated cells. We may also regard these ar- ticulated multicellular threads as the first sketch for the formation of tissues in the metaphyta. The stable communities of cells which make up the body of the histona, or multicellular plants and animals, are called tissues (tela or hista). They differ from the ccenobia of the protists in that the social cells give up their independence, assume different forms in the divi- sion of labor, and subordinate themselves to the higher unity of the organ. However, it would be just as diffi- cult to lay down a sharp limit between the ccenobia and the tissues as between the protists and the histona which possess them; the latter have been developed phylo- genetically from the former. The original physiological independence of the cells which have combined to form II t6i THE WONDERS OF LIFE tissues is more completely lost in proportion to the closeness of their combination, the complexity of their division of labor, and the differentiation and centraliza- tion of the tissue-organism. Hence the various kinds of tissue in the body of the histona behave like the va- rious classes and professions in a state. The higher the civilization and the more varied the classes of workers, the more they are dependent on each other, and the state is centralized. In the lower tissue-forming plants, the algae and fungi, the plant-body has the appearance of a layer of cells, the tissues of which show little or no division of labor. In these thallophyta there are none of the conducting or vascular fibres, the formation of which is of great im- portance in the higher plants in connection with their physiological function of circulation of the sap. These more advanced vascular plants comprehend the two great groups of ferns (pteridophyta) and flowering plants {anthophyta, or phanerogams). Their body is always composed of two chief organs, the axial stem and the lateral leaves. This is also the case with the mosses (bryophyta), which have no vascular fibres; they lie be- tween the two chief groups of the non-vascular thal- lophyta and the vascular cormophyta. However, this histological and organological division of the two great groups of tissue-plants must not be pressed; there are many exceptions and intermediate forms. In general their manifold tissue-forms may be brought under two chief groups, which we may call primary and secondary. The primary tissues are the phylogenetically older and histologically simple "cell-tissues," such as we have in the thallophyta (algae, fungi, and mosses) ; in these there are no conducting fibres, or, at least, only rudimentary ones. The secondary tissues are a later development from these; they form conducting and vascular fibres and other highly differentiated forms of tissue (cam- 162 UNITIES OF LIFE bium, wood, etc.). They make up the bodies of the more complex vascular plants, the ferns and flowering plants. In the bodies of the tissue-animals we may similarly distinguish two chief groups of tissues, the primary and secondary. The former are phylogenetically and onto- genetically older than the latter. The primary tissues of the metazoa are the cpitclia, simple layers of cells or forms of tissue directly derived from such (glands, etc.). Secondary tissues, evolved from the former by physio- logical change of work and morphological differentia- tion, are the apotclia; of these "derivative tissues" we may distinguish the three leading groups of connective tissue, muscular tissue, and nerve tissue. These three great groups of tissue in the animal world may be sub- divided, like the plant groups, into lower and higher sub-sections. The coelenteria (gastraeads, sponges, cni- daria) are predominantly built up of epitelia, as are also the phyletically older group of the coelomaria ; in the vast majority of the latter, however, the great mass of the body is formed of apotelia, and they are subject to the most extensive differentiation. The embryo of all the metazoa consists solely of epitelia (the germ-layers) at first; apotelia are developed from these afterwards by differentiation of the tissues. Comparative anatomy distinguishes in the multi- cellular body of the tissue-forming organisms a great number of different parts, which are regularly adapted to discharge definite vital functions, and have been most intricately developed in virtue of the division of labor. They are called "organs" in the stricter sense in opposition to the organella (or organoids) of the pro- tists; the latter have, it is true, a similar physiological purport, but are not (being parts of a cell) equal to the former morphologically. The remarkable efficiency that we find in the structure of the various organs in 163 THE WONDERS OF LIFE view of the functions they have to discharge, and the regularity of their construction in the unity of the his- ton — in other words, their adaptive organization — is explained mechanically by the theory of selection, while the teleological hypotheses of dualistic biology (for in- stance, the "intelligent dominants" of Reinke) com- pletely fail to account for their origin. The gradual advance of the organs and their physiological division of labor have many analogies in the two kingdoms of the histona. While at the lowest stages the simple organ represents only a separate individual piece of primitive tissue, we find special systems of organs and organic apparatus in the higher stages. The idea of a particular system of organs is deter- mined by the unity of one tissue which forms the char- acteristic element in the totality of the organs that be- long to it. Of such systems in the kingdom of the metaphyta we have: the skin-system (with the tissue of the epidermis), the vascular system (with its con- ducting and vascular fibres), and the complementary tissue system (with the basic tissue). In the kingdom of the metazoa we may similarly distinguish: the skin- system (integument of the epidermis), the vascular sys- tem (with the mesenchyma-tissue of the blood and blood-vessels), the muscular system (with the muscle- tissue), and the nervous system (with the neurona of the nerve-tissue). In contrast with the histological idea of a system of organs, we have the physiological conception of an ap- paratus of organs. This is not determined by the unity of the constituent tissue, but by the unity of the life- work that is accomplished by the particular group of organs in the histona. Such an apparatus of organs is, for instance, the flowers and the fruit developing there- from in the phanerogams, or the eye or the gut of an animal. In these apparatus the most diverse organs 164 UNITIES OF LIFE and systems of organs may be associated for the fulfil- ment of a definite physiological task. In the higher animals and plants we usually regard as the "real individual" (in the wider sense of the word) the tissue-forming organism made up of various organs ; and we may here briefly and instructively call this the histonal individual (or, more briefly, the "histonal"). Botanists call this individual phenomenon among the metaphyta a sprout (blastiis). Zoologists give the title of "person" {prosopon) to the corresponding unity among the animals. The two forms agree very much in their general features, and may be called "individuals of the second order," if we take the cells to be the first and the stock the third stage in the hierarchy of or- ganic individuality. In comprising them here under the general head of histonals, or histonal individuals, I mean by this to designate the definite physiological unity of the multicellular and tissue-forming organism, as con- trasted with the unicellular protist on the one hand, and the higher stem, made up of several histonals, on the other. The plant-histonal, which Alexander Braun especially clearly marked out and described as the sprout, is found in two principal forms in the kingdom of the metaphyta — the lower form of the layer-sprout {thalliis) and the higher form of the stalk-sprout {cnlniiis). The thallus predominates in the lower and older sub-kingdom of the layer-plants {thallo phyta) , in the classes of the algas and fungi; the culmus in the higher and younger sub-king- dom of the stalk-plants UoruiopJiyta), in the classes of the mosses, ferns, and flowering plants. The culmus presents in general the characteristic form of an axial central organ, the stalk, with lateral organs, the leaves, attached to this at the sides, the former having an un- limited vertical growth and the latter an unlimited basal growth. The thallus does not yet show this important 165 THE WONDERS OF LIFE morphological division. There are, however, exceptions in both groups of the metaphyta. The large and highly- developed fucoidea among the algae exhibit similar differ- entiations of organs to those we distinguish as stalk and leaves in the higher cormophyta. On the other hand, they are wanting in the lower liverworts, which form a thallus like many of the algae; thus, for instance, the liverwort riccia fluitans is just like the brown alga dictyota dichotoma. Other primitive livei^worts (such as the antkoceros) have also a very simple thallus; but most of them have a separation of the thallus into an axial organ (stalk) and several lateral organs (leaves). In the distribution of labor among the leaves there then emerge the differences between the lower leaves, foliage leaves, higher leaves, and flower leaves. A sim- ple poppy-plant (papaver) or a single-flowered gentiana ciliata, which has only one bloom at the top of its branchless stalk, is a good example of a highly developed culmus. To the plant-sprout corresponds in the animal world the person. All the tissue-animals pass in the course of their embryonic development through the important stage of the gastrida, or "cup-shaped embryo." The whole body of the tissue-animal at this stage forms at first a simple gut-sac or gastric sac (the primitive gut), the cavity of which opens outward by a primitive mouth. The thin wall of the sac is formed by two super- imposed layers of cells, the two primary germinal layers. This gastrula is the simplest form of the "person," and the two germinal layers are its sole organs. The diverse animal forms which develop along differ- ent lines from this common embryonic form of the gas- trula may be grouped into two sub-kingdoms, the lower (ca'lcnteria) and the upper (ccelomaria) animals. The former correspond in the simplicity of their structure in many respects to the thallophyta, and the latter to the i66 UNITIES OF LIFE cormophyta. Of the four stems of the coelenteria (which have only a ventral opening and no gut-cavity) the gastrasads remain at the gastrula stage, and the sponges are formed by multiplication of the same stems of gastraeads. On the other hand, the cnidaria develop into higher radial (star-shaped) persons, and the platodes into lower bilateral persons. From the latter are derived the worms {vcrnialia), the common stem-groups of the five higher animal stems, the unarticulated moUusks, echinoderms, and tunicates, and the limb-forming artic- ulates and vertebrates. A large part of the physiological advantages and mor- phological perfection which the higher histona have, as contrasted with the lower, may be traced to the circum- stance that the tissue-forming organism articulates — that is to say, divides on its long axis into several sections. With this multiplication of groups of organs there goes, as a rule, a more or less extensive division of work among them, a leading factor of higher development. In this point also we see the biogenetic parallelism between the two great groups of the tissue-plants and tissue-animals. In the kingdom of the tissue-plants the articulated cormophyta rise high above the unarticulated thal- lophyta. While the articulation of the stem of the former proceeds and leaves are developed at the knots {nodi) between each two sections of the stalk, far greater play is offered to polymorphic differentiation than in the thallophyta, which are generally without this meta- merism. The formation of the bloom in the flowering plants or phanerogams consists in a sexual division of labor among the thickly gathered leaves in a short section of a stem. To the two groups of unarticulated and articulated sprouts in the kingdom of the tissue-plants correspond, in many respects, the two sections of the tissue-animals, the unarticulated and the articulate. The two stems of 167 THE WONDERS OF LIFE the articulates and vertebrates rise above all the other metazoa by the perfection of their organism and the variety of their functions. In the articulates the meta- merism is chiefly external — an articulation of the body wall. In the vertebrates it mainly affects the internal organs, the skeleton, and the muscular system. The vertebration (articulation) of the vertebrates is not out- wardly visible like that of the articulates. In both stems the articulation is similar in the lower and upper forms, as we find in the annelids and myriapods, the acrania and cyclostoma. On the other hand, the higher the organi- zation the greater is the unlikeness of the members or articulated parts, as in the arachnida and insects, the amphibia and amniotes. The same antithesis is found in the lower and higher Crustacea. This metamerism of the higher metazoa is of a motor character, having been acquired through the manner of movement of the lengthened body; but we find in some groups of the lower, and usually unarticulated, metazoa a propagative metamerism, determined by budding at the end; such is the strobilation of the chain-worms and the scyphostoma polyps. The individual metamera (parts) that are released from the end of the chain in these cases im- mediately show their individuality. This is also the case with many of the annelids, in which every member that is separated has the power to reproduce the whole chain of metamera. The third and highest stage of individuality to which the multicellular organism attains is the stock or colony {cormiis). It is usually formed by a permanent associa- tion of histonals that are produced by cleavage (imper- fect segmentation or budding) from one histonal indi- vidual. The great majority of the metaphyta form complex plants in this sense. But among the metazoa we find this form of individuality only in the lower (and generally stationary) stages of development. Here also i68 UNITIES OF LIFE there is a striking parallelism of development between the two chief groups of the histona. At the lower stages of stock-formation there is equality of the social histonals. But in the higher grades they become unequally develop- ed in the division of labor; and the greater the differences between them become, the greater is the centralization of the whole stock (as in the case of the siphonophora). We may therefore distinguish two principal forms of stocks — the homonomous and heteronomous, the one without, and the other with, division of labor among the histonals. The history of civilization teaches us that its gradual evolution is bound up with three different processes: (i) Association of individuals in a community; (2) division of labor (ergonomy) among the social elements, and a consequent differentiation of structure (poly- morphism); (3) centralization or integration of the unified whole, or rigid organization of the community. The same fundamental laws of sociology hold good for association throughout the entire organic world; and also for the gradual evolution of the several organs out of the tissues and cell-communities. The formation of human societies is directly connected with the gregariousness of the nearest related mammals. The herds of apes and ungulates, the packs of wolves, the flocks of birds, often controlled by a single leader, exhibit various stages of social formation; as also the swarms of the higher articulates (insects, Crustacea), especially communities of ants and termites, swarms of bees, etc. These organized communities of free individ- uals are distinguished from the stationary colonies ot the lower animals chiefly by the circumstance that the social elements are not bodily connected, but held together by the ideal link of common interest. VIII FORMS OF LIFE Morphology — Laws of symmetry — Fundamental forms of animals and plants — Fundamental forms of protists and histona — Four chief classes of fundamental forms: (i) Cen- trostigma : vesicles (smooth vesicle and tabular vesicle) ; (2) Centraxonia: typical forms with central axis — Uniaxial (monaxonia, equipolar and un-equipolar) — Transverse-axial (stauraxonia, double-pyramidal and pyramidal) ; (3) Cen- troplana: fundamental forms with central plane — Bilateral symmetry — Bilateral-radial and bilateral-symmetrical fun- damental forms — Asymmetrical fundamental forms; (4) Anaxonia: irregular fundamental forms — Causes of form- construction — Fundamental forms of monera, protists, and histona — Fundamental form and mode of life — Beauty of natural forms — /Esthetics of organic forms — Art forms in nature. THE infinite variety of forms which we observe in the realm of organic life not only delight our senses with their beauty and diversity, but also excite our curiosity, in suggesting the problem of their origin and connection. While the aesthetic study of the forms of life provides inexhaustible material for the plastic arts, the scientific study of their relations, their structures, their origin and evolution, forms a special branch of biology, the science of forms or morphology. I expounded the principles of ^this science in my General Morphology thirty-eight years ago. They are so remote from the ordinary curriculum of education, and are so difficult to explain without the aid of numerous illustrations, that I cannot think of 170 FORMS OF LIFE going fully into them here. In the present chapter I will only briefly describe those features of living things which relate to the difficult question of their ideal funda- mental forms, the laws of their symmetry, and their rela- tion to crystal -formation. I have treated these intricate questions somewhat fully in the last (eleventh) part of Art-forms in Nature. The hundred plates contained in this work may serve as illustrations of morphological relations. In the following pages the respective plates are indicated by the letters A-f, with the number of each. The unity of the organic structure, which expresses itself everywhere in the fundamental features of living things and in the chemical composition and constructive power of their plasm, is also seen in the laws of symmetry in their typical forms. The infinite variety of the species may, both in the animal and plant worlds, be reduced to a few principal groups or classes of funda- mental forms, and these show no difference in the two kingdoms (cf. plate 6). The lily has the same regular typical form as the hexaradial coral or anemone (A-f, 9, 49), and the bilateral-radial form is the same in the violet and the sea-urchin (clypeaster, A-f, 30). The dorsiventral or bilateral-symmetrical form of most green leaves is repeated in the frame of most of the higher animals (the coelomaria) ; the distinction of right and left determines in each the characteristic antithesis of back and belly. The distinction between protists and histons is much more important than the familiar division of organisms into plants and animals, in respect of their fundamental forms and their configuration. For the protists, the unicellular organisms (without tissue) exhibit a much greater freedom and variety in the development of their fundamental forms than the histons, the multicellular tissue-forming organisms. In the protists (both pro- 171 THE WONDERS OF LIFE tophyta and protozoa) the constructive force of the elementary organism, the individual cell, determines the symmetry of the typical form and the special form of its supplementation; but in the histons (both metaphyta and metazoa) it is the plasticity of the tissue, made up of a number of socially combined cells, that determines this. On the ground of this tectological distinction we may divide the whole organic world into four kingdoms (or sub-kingdoms), as the morphological system in the seventh table shows. In respect of the general science of fundamental forms (promorphology), the most interesting and varied group of living things is the class of the radiolaria. All the various fundamental forms that can be distinguished and defined mathematically are found realized in the graceful flinty skeletons of these unicellular sea-dwelling protozoa. I have distinguished more than four thou- sand forms of them, and illustrated by one hundred and forty plates, in my monograph on the Challenger radio- laria [translated]. Only a very few organic forms seem to be quite irregular, without any trace of symmetry, or constantly changing their formless shape, as we find, for instance, in the amoebae and the similar amoeboid cells of the Plasmodia. The great majority of organic bodies show a certain regularity both in their outer configuration and the construction of their various parts, which we may call "symmetry" in the wider sense of the word. The regularity of this symmetrical construction often ex- presses itself at first sight in the arrangement side by side of similar parts in a certain number and of a certain size, and in the possibility of distinguishing certain ideal axes and planes cutting each other at measurable angles. In this respect many organic forms are like inorganic crystals. The important branch of mineralogy that describes these crystalline forms, and gives therr^ 173 FORMS OF LIFE mathematical formuke, is called crystallography. There is a parallel branch of the science of biological forms, promorphology, which has been greatly neglected. These two branches of investigation have the common aim of detecting an ideal law of symmetry in the bodies they deal with and expressing this in a definite mathe- matical formula. The number of ideal fundamental forms, to which we / may reduce the symmetries of the innumerable living organisms, is comparatively small. Formerly it was thought sufficient to distinguish two or three chief groups: (i) radial (or actinomorphic) types, (2) bilateral (or zygomorphic) types, and (3) irregular (or amorphic) types. But when we study the distinctive marks and differences of these types more closely, and take due account of the relations of the ideal axes and their poles, we are led to distinguish the nine groups or types which are found in the sixth table. In this promorphological system the determining factor is the disposition of the parts to the natural middle of the body. On this basis we make a first distinction into four classes or types: (i) the centrostigma have a point as the natural middle of the body; (2) the centraxonia a straight line (axis); (3) the centroplana a plane (median plane); and (4) the centraporia (acentra or anaxonia), the wholly irregular forms, have no distinguishable middle or symmetry. , I. Centrostigmatic Types. — The natural middle of the \ body is a mathematical point. Properly speaking, only one form is of this type, and that is the most regular of all, the sphere or ball. We may, however, distinguish two sub- classes, the smooth sphere and the flattened sphere. The smooth sphere {holospJia'ra) is a mathematically pure sphere, in which all points at the surface are equally distant from the centre, and all axes drawn through the centre are of equal length. We find this realized in its purity in the ovum of many animals (for instance, that of man and the mammals) and the pollen cells of many plants; also cells that develop freely 173 r THE WONDERS OF LIFE floating in a liquid, the simplest forms of the radiolaria (actissa), the spherical coenobia of the volvocina and catallacta, and the corresponding pure embryonic form of the hlastula. The smooth sphere is particularly important, because it is the only absolutely regular type, the sole form with a perfectly stable equilibrium, and at the same time the sole organic form which is susceptible of direct physical explanation. Inorganic fluids (drops of quicksilver, water, etc.) similarly assume the purely spherical form, as drops of oil do, for instance, when put in a watery fluid of the same specific weight (as a mixture of alcohol and water). The flattened sphere, or facetted sphere {platnosphcBra) , is known as an endospherical polyhedron; that is to say, a many- surfaced body, all the corners of which fall in the surface of a sphere. The axes or the diameters, which are drawn through the angles and the centre, are all unequal, and larger than all other axes (drawn through the facets). These facetted spheres are frequently found in the globular silicious skeletons of many of the radiolaria; the globular central capsule of many spheroidea is enclosed in a concentric gelatine envelope, on the round surface of which we find a net-work of fine silicious threads. The meshes of this net are sometimes regular (generally trian- gular or hexagonal), sometimes irregular; frequently starlike silicious needles rise from the knots of the net- work (A-f, i, 51, 91). The pollen bodies in the flower-dust of many flowering plants also often assume the form of facetted spheres. II. Centraxonia Types. — The natural middle of the body is a straight line, the principal axis. This large group of funda- mental forms consists of two classes, according as each axis is the sole fixed ideal axis of the body, or other fixed transverse axes may also be distinguished, cutting the first at right angles. We call the former uniaxial {monaxonia) , and the latter trans- verse-axial {staiiraxonia) . The horizontal section (vertically to the chief axis) is round in the uniaxials and polygonal in the transverse-axial. In the monaxonia the form is determined by a single fixed axis, the principal axis; the two poles may be either equal {isopold) or unequal {allopola). To the isopola belong the familiar simple forms which are distinguished in geometry as spheroids, biconvex, ellipsoids, double cones, cylinders, etc. A horizontal section, passing through the middle of the vertical chief axis, divides the body into two corresponding halves. On the other hand, many of the parts are unequal in size and shape in the allopola. The upper pole or vertex differs from 174 FORMS OF LIFE the basal pole or ground surface; as we find in the oval form, the planoconvex lens, the hemisphere, the cone, etc. Both sub-classes of the monaxonia, the allopola (conoidal) and the isopola (spheroidal) , are found realized frequently in organic forms, both in the tissue -cells of the histona and the inde- pendently living protists (A-f, 4, 84). In the stauraxonia the vertical imaginary principal axis is cut by two or more horizontal cross-axes or radial-axes. This is the case in the forms which were formerly generally classed as regular or radial. Here also, as with the inonaxonia, we may distinguish two sub-classes, isopola and allopola, according as the poles of the principal axis are eaual or unequal. Of the stauraxonia isopola we have, for instance, the double pyramids, one of the simplest forms of the octahedron. This form is exhibited very typically by most of the acantharia, the radiolaria in which twenty radial needles (consisting of silicated chalk) shoot out from the centre of the vertical chief axis. These twenty rays are (if we imagine the figure of the earth with its vertical axis) distributed in fiv^e horizontal zones, with four needles each, in this wise: two pairs cross at right angles in the equatorial zone, but on each side (in north and south hemi- spheres) the points of four needles fall in the tropical zone, and the points of four polar needles in the polar circles; twelve needles (the four equatorial and eight polar) lie in two meridian planes that are vertical to each other; and the eight tropical needles lie in two other meridian planes which cross the former at an angle of forty-five degrees. In most of the acantharia (the radial acanthometra and the mailed acanthophracta) — there are few exceptions — this remarkable structural law of twenty radial needles is faithfully maintained by heredity. Its origin is explained by adaptation to a regular attitude which the sea-dwelling unicellular body assumes in a certain stage of equilibrium (A-f, 21, 41). If the points of the real needles are connected by imaginary lines, we get a polyhedrical body, which may be reduced to the form of a regular double pyramid. This typical form of the equipolar stauraxonia is also found in other protists with a plastic skeleton, as in many diatomes and desmidiacea (A-f, 24"). It is more rarely found embodied in the tissue-cells of the histona. Unequipolar stauraxonia are the pyramids, a fundamental form that plays an important part in the configuration of organic bodies. They were formerly described as regular or fundamental forms. Such are the regular blooms of flowering plants, the regular echinoderms, medusae, corals, etc. Wc may 175 THE WONDERS OF LIFE distinguish several groups of them according to the number of the horizontal transverse axes that cut the vertical main axis in the middle. Two totally different divisions of the pyramidal types are the regular and the amphithecta pyramids. In the regular pyra- mids the transverse axes are equal, and the ground-surface (or base) is a regular polygon, as in the three- rayed blooms of the iris and crocus, the four-rayed medusas (A-f, i6, 28, 47, 48, etc.), the five-rayed "regular echinoderms," most of the star-fish, sea-urchins, etc. (A-f, 10, 40, 60), and the six-rayed "regular corals" (A-f, 9, 69). The amphithecta (or two-edged) pyramids, a special group of pyramidal types, are characterized by having as their basis a rhombus instead of a regular polygon. We may, therefore, draw two imaginary transverse axes, vertical to each other, through the ground-surface, both equipolar, but of unequal length. One of the two may be called the sagittal axis (with dorsal and ventral pole), and the other the transverse axis (with right and left pole) ; but the distinction is arbitrary, as the two are equipolar. In this lies the chief difference from the cen- troplane and dorsi ventral forms, in which only the lateral axis is equipolar, the sagittal axis being unequipolar. We find the bisected pyramid in a very perfect form in the class of the ctenophora (or comb-medusae, A-f, 27), where it is quite general. The striking typical form of these pelagic cnidaria is sometimes called biradial, sometimes four- rayed and bilateral, and some- times eight-rayed-symmetrical. Closer study shows it to be a rhombus-pyramid. The originally four-rayed type, which it inherited from craspedote medusfe, has become bilateral by the development of different organs to the right and left from those before and behind. Similar rhombo-pyramidal forms to those of the ctenophora are also found in some of the medusae and siphonophora, many of the corals and other cnidaria, and many flowers. The name "two-edged" which is given to this special type is taken from the ancient two-edged sword. Its chief axis is unequipolar, the handle being at the basic pole and the point at the verticel pole; but the two edges left and right are equal (poles of the lateral axis), and also the two broad surfaces (dorsal and ventral, joined by the sagittal axis). III. Centroplane Types. — The natural middle of the body is a plane, the median or chief plane {planum medmmim or sagittale) ; it divides the bilateral body into two symmetrical halves, the right and the left. With this is associated the 176 FORMS OF LIFE characteristic antithesis of back (dorsum) and belly (venter) ; hence, in botany this type (found, for instance, in most green leaves) is called the dorsiventral, and in zoology the bilateral in the narrower sense. One characteristic of this important and wide-spread type is the relation of three different axes, vertical to each other, of these three straight axes (enthynt) two are unequipolar and the third equipolar. Hence, the centroplanes may also be called tri-axial (triaxonia) . In most of the higher animals (as in our own frame) the longest of the three axes is the principal one (axon principalis) ; its fore pole is the oral or mouth pole, and its hinder pole is the aboral or caudal (tail) pole. The shortest of the three enthyni is, in our body, the sagittal (arrow) or dorsiventral axis; its upper pole is at the back and its lower pole at the belly. The third axis — the transverse or lateral axis — is equipolar, one pole being called the right and the other the left. The various parts which make up the two halves of the body have relatively the same dis- position in each half; but absolutely speaking (namely, in relation to the middle plane) they are oppositely arranged. Further, the centroplane or bilateral forms are also charac- terized by three vertical axes which may be drawn through each of the normal axes. The first of these normal planes is the median plane; it is defined by the chief axis and the sagittal axis, and divides the body into cwo symmetrical halves, the right and left. The second normal plane is the frontal plane; this passes through the chief axis and the transverse axis (which is parallel to the frontal surface in our body), and divides the dorsal half from the ventral half. The third normal plane is the cingular (waist) plane; this is defined by the sagittal and transverse axes. It divides the head half (or the vertical part) from the tail half (or the basal part). The name "bilateral symmetry," which is especially applied to the centroplane and dorsiventral types, is ambiguous, as I pointed out in 1866 in an exhaustive analysis and criticism of these fundamental forms in the fourth book of the General Morphology. It is used in five different senses. For our present general purpose it suffices to distinguish two orders of centro- plane types, the bilateral-radial and the bilateral-symmetrical; in the former the radial (pyramidal) form is combined with the bilateral, but not in the latter. The bilateral-radial type comprises those forms in which the radial structure is combined in a very characteristic fashion with the bilateral. We have striking examples in the three-rayed flowers of the orchids (A-f, 74), the five-rayed blooms of the 177 THE WONDERS OF LIFE labiate and papilionaceous flowers, etc., in the plant world: and in the five-rayed "irregular" echinoderms, the bilateral sea-urchins (spatangida, clypeastrida, A-f. 30) in the animal world. In these cases the bilateral symmetry is recognizable at the first glance, as is also the radial structure, or the composition from three to five or more raylike parts (parainera), which are arranged bilaterally round a common central plane. The bilateral-symmetrical type is general among the higher animals which move about freely. The body consists of two antithetic parts {antitnera) , and has no trace of radial structure. In the free moving, creeping, or swimming animals (vertebrates, articulates, mollusks, annelids, etc.) the ventral side is under- neath, against the ground, and the dorsal side upward. This form is clearly the most useful and practical of all conceivable types for the movement of the body in a definite direction and position. The burden is equally distributed between the two sides (right and left) ; the head (with the sense organs, the brain, and the mouth) faces frontward and the tail behind. For thousands of years all artificial vehicles (carts on land and ships in water) have been built on this type. Selection has recognized it to be the best and preserved it, while it has dis- carded the rest. There are, however, other causes that have produced the predominance of this type in green leaves — the relation to the supporting stalk, to the sun-light that falls from above, etc. Special notice must be taken of those bilateral forms which were originally symmetrical (by heredity), but have subsequently become asymmetrical (or of unequal halves), by adaptation to special conditions of life. The most familiar example among the vertebrates are the flat-fishes (plciironectides), soles, flounders, turbots, etc. These high and narrow and flattened boney-fishes have a perfect bilateral symmetry when young, like ordinary fishes. Afterwards they form the habit of laying on one side (right or left) at the bottom of the sea; and in consequence the upper side, exposed to the light, is dark colored, and often marked with a design (sometimes very like the stony floor of the ocean — a protective coloring), while the side the flat-fish lies on remains without color. But, what is more curious, the eye 178 FORMS OF LIFE from the under side travels to the upper side, and the two eyes Ue together on one side (tlie right or left); while the bones of the skull and the softer parts of each side of the head grow quite crooked. Naturally, this ontogenetic process, in which a striking lack of symmetry succeeds to the early complete symmetry of each indi- vidual, can only be explained by our biogenetic law; it is a rapid and brief recapitulation (determined by heredity) of the long and slow phyletic process which the flat-fish has undergone for thousands of years in its ancestral history to bring about its gradual modification. At the same time, this interesting metamorphosis of the pleuroncctidcs gives us an excellent instance of the inheritance of acquired characteristics, as a consequence of constant oecological habit. It is quite impossible to explain it on Weismann's theory of the germ-plasm. We have another striking example among the inverte- brates in the snails {gasteropoda). The great majority of these moUusks are characterized by the spiral shape of their shells. This variously shaped, and often prettily colored and marked, snail's house is in essence a spirally coiled tube, closed at the upper end and open at the lower (or mouth) : the moUusk can at any moment withdraw into its tube. The comparative anatomy and ontogeny of the snails teach us that this spiral shell came originally from a simple discoid or cylindrical dorsal covering of the once bilateral-symmet- rical moUusk, by the two sides of the body having an unequal growth. The cause of it was a purely me- chanical factor — the sinking of the growing visceral sac, covered with the shell, to one side; one part of the viscera contained in it (the heart, kidneys, liver, etc.) grew more stronglv on one side than the other in conse- quence of this; and this was accompanied by consider- able displacement and modification of the neighboring parts, especially the gills. In most snails one of the 179 THE WONDERS OF LIFE gills and kidneys and the ventricle of the heart corre- sponding to these have disappeared altogether, only those of the opposite side remaining; and the latter have moved from the right side to the left, or vice versa. The conspicuous lack of symmetry between the two halves of the body which resulted from this finds ex- pression in the spiral form of the snail's shell. This re- markable ontogenetic metamorphosis also can be fully explained by a corresponding phylogenetic process, and affords a very fine instance of the inheritance of acquired characters. There are also many examples of this asymmetry of bilateral forms in the plant world, such as the green foliage-leaves of the familiar begonia and the blooms of canna. IV. The Centraporia. — Few organic forms are com- pletely irregular and without axes, as usually the attrac- tion to the earth (geotaxis) or to the nearest object determines the special direction of growth, and so the formation of an axis in some direction or other. Never- theless, we may instance as quite irregular the soft and ever-changing plasma-bodies of many rhizopods, the amoebinae, mycetozoa, etc. Most of the sponges also — which we regard as stocks of gastraeads — are completely irregular in structure; the most familiar example is the common bath-sponge. An impartial and thorough study of organic forms has convinced me that their actual, infinitely varied con- figurations may all be reduced to the few typical forms I have described. Comparative anatomy and ontogeny further teach us that the countless modifying processes which have led to the appearance of the various species have acted by adaptation to different environments, habits, and customs, and give us, in conjunction with heredity, a physiological explanation of this morpho- logical transformation. But the question arises as to 1 80 FORMwS OF LIFE the origin of these few geometrically definable types, and the cause of their divergence. In this important and ditlicult question we find a great variety of opinions and a strong leaning to dualistic and mystic theories. Educated laymen, who have only a partial and imperfect acquaintance with the biological facts, think that they are justified here in appealing to a supernatural creation of forms. They contend that only a wise creator, following a rational and conscious design, could produce such structures. Even distinguished and informed scientists lean in this matter towards mystic and transcendental ideas ; they believe that the ordinary natural forces do not suffice to explain these phenomena, and that at least for the first construction of these fundamental types we must postulate a deliberate creative thought, a design, or some such teleological cause, and therefore consciously acting final causes. So say Nageli and Alexander Braun. In direct opposition to this, I have ever maintained the view that the action of familiar physical forces — mechanical efficient causes — fully suffices to explain the origin and transformation of these fundamental types, as well as for all other biological and inorganic processes. In order to understand this monistic position thoroughly, and to meet the errors of duahsm, we must bear in mind always the radical processes of growth which control all organic and inorganic configuration, and also the long chain of advancing stages of development, which lead us from the simplest protists, the monera, to the most advanced organisms. The unicellular organisms exhibit the greatest variety from the promorphological point of view. In the single class of the radiolaria we find all imaginable geometrical types represented. This is seen in a glance at the one hundred and forty plates on which I have depicted thousands of these graceful little protozoa in my mono- i8i THE WONDERS OF LIFE graph (Challenger Report, vol. xviii.). On the other hand, the monera, at the lowest stage of organic life, the structureless organisms without organs that live on the very frontier of the inorganic world, are very simple. Especially interesting in this connection are the chromacea, which have hitherto been so unde- servedly and so incomprehensibly neglected. Among the well-known and widely distributed chroococcacea, the chroococcus, coelosphaerium, and aphanocapsa are quite the most primitive of all organisms known to us — and at the same time the organisms that enable us best to understand the origin of life by spontaneous generation (archigony). The whole organism is merely a tiny, bluish-green globule of plasm, without any struct- ure, or only surrounded by a thin membrane; its funda- mental form is the simplest of all, the centraxial smooth sphere. Next to these are the oscillaria and nostochina, social chromacea, which have the appearance of thin, bluish-green threads. They consist of simple primitive (unnucleated) cells joined to each other; they seem often to be flattened into a discoid shape as a result of close conjunction. Many protists are found in two conditions, one mobile with very varied and changeable forms, and one stationary with a globular shape. But when the separate living cell begins to form a firm skeleton or pro- tective cover for itself, it may assume the most varied and often most complicated forms. In this respect the class of the radiolaria among the protozoa, and the class of the diatomes among the protophyta (both of which have flinty shells), surpass all the other groups of the diversified realm of the protists. In my Art-forms in Nature I have given a selection of their most beautiful forms (diatomes, A-f, 4, 84; radiolaria, A-f, i, 11, 21, 22, 31, 41, 51, 61, 71, 95). The most remarkable and most important fact about them is that the artistic builders of these wonderful and often very ingenious and 182 FORMS OF LIFE intricate flinty structures are merely the plastidulcs or micella, the molecular and microscopically invisible con- stituents of the soft viscous plasm (sarcode). The configuration of the histona differs essentially from that of the protists, since in the case of the latter the simple unicellular body produces for itself alone the whole form and vital action of the organism, while in the histona this is done by the cell state, or the social combination of a number of different cells, which make up the tissue body. Hence the ideal type which we can always define in the actual histonal form has quite a different significance from that in the unicellular pro- tists. In the latter we find the utmost diversity in the configuration of the independent living cells and the protective cover it forms ; among the histona the number of fundamental forms is limited. It is true that the cells themselves which make up the tissues may exhibit a great variety in form and structure; but the number of the different tissues which they make up is small, and so is the number of ideal types exhibited by the organism they combine to form — the sprout (cnlmus) in the plant kingdom and the person in the animal kingdom. The same may be said of the stock (cormtis) in both king- doms — that is to say, of the higher individual unity which is constituted by the union of several sprouts or persons. The two classes of fundamental forms which are espe- cially found in the plant sprouts or the animal persons are the radial and bilateral. The one is determined by the stationary life, the other by free movement in a cer- tain attitude and direction (swimming in water or creep- ing on the ground). Hence we find the radial form (as pyramidal) predominant in the blooms and fruits of the metaphyta, and the persons of the polyps, corals, and regular echinoderms. On the other hand, the bilateral or dorsiventral form preponderates in most free-moving •83 THE WONDERS OF LIFE animals ; though it is also found in many flowers (papil- ionaceous and labial flowers, orchids, and others that are fertilized by insects). Here we have to seek the cause of the bilateralism in different features, in the re- lations with the insects, in the mode of their fastening to and distribution on the stalk (for the green foliage leaves), and so on. The complex individuals of the first order, the stocks (cormi), are more dependent in their growth on the spatial conditions of their environment than the sprouts or per- sons; hence their typical form is generally more or less irregular, and rarely bilateral. The interest which we take in natural and artistic forms, and which has for thousands of years prompted men to reproduce the former in the latter, depends for the most part, if not altogether, on their beauty — that is to say, on the feeling of pleasure we experience in look- ing at them. The causes of this pleasure and joy in the beautiful and the naturalness of its development are explained in aesthetics. When we combine this science with the results of modern cerebral physiology, we may distinguish two classes of beauty — direct and indirect. In direct or sensible beauty the internal sense-organs, or the aesthetic neurona or sense-cells of the brain, are im- mediately affected with pleasure. But in indirect or associational beauty these impressions are combined with an excitement of the phronetic neurona — the rational brain — cells which effect presentation and thought. Direct or sensible beauty (the subject of sensual aesthetics) is the direct perception of agreeable stimuli by the sense-organs. We may distinguish the following stages of its perfection: i. Simple beauty (the subject of primordial aesthetics) ; the pleasure is evoked by the direct sense-impression of a simple form or color. Thus, for instance, a wooden sphere makes an agreeable im- 184 FORMS OF LIFE pression as compared with a shapeless piece of wood, a crystal as compared with a stone, a sky-blue or golden- yellow spot as compared with a greenish-blue or dull- yellow one (in music a simple pure bell-tone as com- pared with a shrill whistle). 2. Rhythmic beauty (the subject of linear aesthetics) ; the aesthetic sensation is caused by the serial repetition of some simple form — for instance, a pearl necklace, a chainlike community of monera (nostoc) or of cells (diatomes, A.-f, 84, figs. 7 and 9): in music a tasteful series of simple notes. 3. Actinal beauty (the subject of radial aesthetics); the pleasure is excited by the orderly arrangement of three or more homogeneous .simple forms about a common centre, from which they radiate; for instance, a regular cross or a radiating star, the three counter-pieces in the iris-bloom, the four paramera in the body of the medusa, the five radial-pieces in the star-fish. The familiar ex- perience of the kaleidoscope shows how amply the simple radial constellation of three or more simple figures may delight our aesthetic sense (in music we have the simple harmony of several simultaneous notes). 4. Symmet- rical beauty (the subject of bilateral aesthetics) ; the pleasure is caused by the relation of a simple object to its like, the mutual completion of two similar halves (the right and left parts). When we fold a piece of paper over an ink-stain in such a way that it is equally im- pressed on both halves of the fold, we get a symmetrical figure which makes an agreeable impression on our nat- ural sense of space or equilibrium. The aesthetic impressions in indirect associational beauty (the subject of associative or symbolical aesthet- ics) are not only much more varied and complex than those we have described, but they also play a much more important part in the life of man and the higher animals. The anatomic condition for this higher physiological function is the elaborate construction of the brain in the i8s THE WONDERS OF LIFE higher animals and man, and particularly the develop- ment of the special association-centres (thought-centres, reason-sphere) and their differentiation from the inter- nal sense-centres. In this millions of different neurona or psychic cells co-operate, the sensual aestheta acting in conjunction with the rational phroneta, and thus, by complex associations of ideas, much higher and more valuable functions arise. We may indicate four chief groups of this associational or indirect beauty. 5. Bio- logical beauty (the subject of botanical and zoological aesthetics) : the various forms of organisms and their organs (for instance, a flower, a butterfly) excite our aesthetic interest by association with their physiological significance, their movements, their bionomic relations, their practical use, and so on. 6. Anthropistic beauty (the subject of anthropomorphic aesthetics): man, as "the measure of all things," regards his own organism as the chief object of beauty, either morphologically considered (beauty of the whole body and its various organs — the eyes, mouth, hair, flesh-tint, etc.), or physi- ologically (beauty of movements or positions), or psycho- logically (the expression of the emotions in the physi- ognomy). As man transfers to the objective world this personal gratification he experiences from self -considera- tion, and anthropomorphically regards other beings in the light of them, this anthropistic aesthetic obtains a far-reaching significance. 7. Sexual beauty (the subject of erotic aesthetics) : the pleasure is caused by the mutual attraction of the sexes. The supreme importance of love in the life of man and most other organisms, the powerful influence of the passions, the sexual selection that is associated with reproduction, have evoked an infinite number of aesthetic creations in every branch of art relating to the antithesis of man and woman. The special pleasure which is caused by the bodily and mental affinities of the sexes can be traced phylogenetically to 186 FORMS OF LIFE the cell-love of the two sexual cells, or the attraction of the sperm-cell to ovum. 8. Landscape beauty (the sub- ject of regional aesthetics) : the pleasure which is caused by the sight of a fine landscape, and that finds satisfac- tion in modern landscape-painting, is more comprehen- sive than that of any other aesthetic sensations. In point of space the object is larger and richer than any of the individual objects in nature which are beautiful and in- teresting in themselves. The varying forms of the clouds and the water, the outline of the blue mountains in the background, the woods and meadows in the mid- dle-distance, and the living figures in the foreground, excite in the mind of the spectator a number of differ- ent impressions which are woven together into a har- monious whole by a most elaborate association of ideas. The physiological functions of the nerve-cells in the cor- tex which effect these aesthetic pleasures, and the inter- action of the sensual aestheta with the rational phroneta, are among the most perfect achievements of organic life. This "regional aesthetics," which has to establish scientifically the laws of landscape beauty, is much younger than the other branches of the science of the beautiful. It is very remarkable that absolute irregu- larity, the absence of symmetry and mathematical forms, is the first condition for the beauty of a landscape (as contrasted with architecture, and the beauty of separate objects in nature). Symmetrical arrangement of things (such as a double row of poplars or houses) or radial figures (a flower-bed or artificial wood) do not please the finer taste for landscape; they seem tedious. A comparative survey of these eight kinds of beauty in natural forms discovers a connected development, rising from the simple to the complex, from the lower to the higher. This scale corresponds to the evolution of the sense of beauty in man, ontogenetically from the child to the adult, phylogenetically from the savage to 187 THE WONDERS OF LIFE the civilized man and the art critic. The stem-history of man and his organs, which explains to us in anthro- pogeny the gradual rise from lower to higher forms by the interaction of heredity and adaptation, also finds an application in the history of aesthetics and ornamenta- tion. It teaches us how feeling, taste, emotion, and art have been gradually evolved. On the other hand, we have corresponding to this evolutionary series the scale of the typical forms which lie at the root of the real forms of bodies both in nature and art. S-3g p 3 c ?;• in X^ •5' £-S g S3 -1 • 1^^ > Per. TO o 3 S-'^ "3 ^ <^ O ,. !» 3 "^W ri 2 «• p:2 ^ Sa ^3 >-i iJ ?*5 ^q?3 ;? p o o 3 C o c o TS p "1 rr ►-•• o 11 rn R c v> -1 I/) o p 1 '' o- o (-»■ 3 3* 3 O ° ^ 2 p 5*" P (/I rD So 3 "^ ►T3 r > H p p p ^ p o o S' -I p r» ► fD - P en ► 3" : S-d ; •■ O ' O •P ■-1 p .1) ^ o o n n n p ^-( D. I— ( 1— 1 P a. 5« 3- rT3 N p n o cr <-^ T) o O O p N o p p 2-3 3 o o P C+ 3 ft) (H 3 "^ p£ '^^ »3 to ^ Ol P ^ W -1 o re o 2 OpP •-I p ?;• 3.3* 3 O f8 5. •-« o o N o ■ 5 5-3 o o S-3 £^ §§§ P W P 3 .. P ^ -0 ^ 3Qg •O P o TO S- P O O) >- d 'I i/i ■ • p (/I p C/1 > 3 <-^ 5-3- w *T3 > 3 f. fo .r r, ^ 3 CO e cr H (il o •<: K '.i 3 -I in c+ O •-I TO P 3 3- -0 ^^ - 3 TO D- O 3 3" o <-»■ P •-t ■-* P ;3 *" ST* 0-2 p C p <-f t) a 3 -, 3 TO D- O 3 01 r+ P 3* < n p <^ TO " O o-g 3 ^ p o 3-?i • r+ (O ^ P o • c TO 3* O C 52 2.0 5 "^ "1 <« a> p ^X.3 iirt 3 O 3 o-o tfl V5 ft) o o 3 C cr ^p V- fD TO P 3 !^ r*!r' 3 TO CI. O 3 3- ft) 3* (-*■ O 3 P P P 32, a o' 3 3 3 TO P 3 P 3 P 3 C — • H W o O r O C/3 Q w p s 3 ^ c 2 o « v: o ' =} c •-I fD o > H H LJ P ^ P 71 o o- J^ 3* Q en > O ►1 :^ P ►—I o 3 a* Oq ►i O c 3 3- f3 O n C/3 C/3 IX MONERA The simplest forms of life — Cell theory and cell dogma — Precellu- lar organisms: monera, cytodes, and cells — Actual monera — Chromacea (cyanophyceae) — Chromatophora — Coenobia of chromacea: vital phenomena — Bacteria — Relations of the bacteria to the chromacea, the fungi, and the pro- tozoa — Rhizomonera (protamoeba, protogenes, protomyxa, bathybius) — Problematic monera — Phytomonera (plasmo- doma) and zoomonera (plasmophaga) — Transition between the two classes. IN the study and explanation of all complex phenom- ena the first thing to do is to understand the simple parts, the manner of their combination, and the develop- ment of the compound from the simple. This principle applies generally to inorganic objects, such as minerals, artificially constructed machines, etc. It is also of gen- eral application in biological work. The efforts of com- parative anatomy are directed to the comprehension of the intricate structure of the higher organisms from the rising scale of organization and life in the lower, and the origin of the former by historical development from the latter. The modern science of the cell (cytology), which has in a short time attained a considerable rank, pursues a method in opposition to this principle. The intricate composition of the unicellular organism, in many of the higher protists (such as the ciliata and infusoria) and many of the higher tissue-cells (such as the neurona) has led to the erroneous ascription of a 190 MONERA highly complex organization to the cell in general. One would be justified in saying that of late the cell-theory has established itself in the dangerous and misleading position of a cell-dogma. The modern treatment of the science, as we find it in numbers of recent works, even in some of the most dis- tinguished manuals, and which we must resent on ac- count of its dogmatism, culminates in something like the following theses: 1. The nucleated cell is the general elementary or- ganism; all living things are either unicellular, or made up of a number of cells and tissues. 2. This elementary organism consists of at least two different organs (or, more correctly, organella), the in- ternal nucleus and the outer cell-body (or cytoplasm). 3. The matter in each of these cell-organs — the caryo- plasm of the nucleus and the cytoplasm of the body — is never homogeneous (or consisting of a chemical substra- tum), but always "organized," or made up of several chemically and anatomically different elementary con- stituents. 4. The plasm (or protoplasm) is, therefore, a morpho- logical, not a chemical, unity. 5. Every cell comes (and has come) only from a mother-cell, and every nucleus from a mother-nucleus {oninis celliila e cellula — omnis nucleus e niiclco). These five theses of the modem cell-dogma are by no means sound; they are incompatible with the theor^^ of evolution. I have, therefore, consistently resisted them for thirty -eight years, and consider them to be so dan- gerous that I will briefly give my reasons. First, let us clearly understand the modern definition of the cell. It is now generally defined (in accordance with the second thesis) as being composed of two essentially different parts, the nucleus and the cell-body, and it is added that these organella differ constantly both in 191 THE WONDERS OF LIFE respect of chemistry, morphology, and physiology. If that is really so, the cell cannot possibly be the primitive organism; if it were, we should have a miracle at the beginning of organic life on the earth. The theory of natural evolution clearly and distinctly demands that the cell (in this sense) is a secondary development from a simpler, primary, elementary organism, a homogene- ous cytode. There are still living to-day very simple protists which do not tally with this definition, and which I designated monera in 1866. As they must necessarily have preceded the real cells, they may also be called " precellular organisms." The earliest organisms to live on the earth, with which the wonderful drama of life began, can, in the present condition of biological science, only be conceived as homogeneous particles of plasm — biogens or groups of biogens, in which there was not yet the division of nucleus and cell-body which characterizes the real cell. I gave the name " cytodes " to these unnucleated cells in 1866, and joined them with the real nucleated cells under the general head of "plastids." I also endeavored to prove that such cytodes still exist in the form of indepen- dent monera, and in 1870 I described in my Monograph on the Monera a number of protists which do not tally with the above definition. Fifty years ago I made the first careful observations of living monera {protama^ha and protogcnes), and described theminmy General Morphology {vol. i., pp. 133-5; vol.ii., p. xxii.) as structureless organisms without organs and the real beginnings of organic life. Soon afterwards, during a stay in the Canary Islands, I succeeded in following the continuous life-history of a related organ- ism of the rhizopod type, which behaved like a very simple mycetozoon, but differed in having no nucleus; I have reproduced the picture of it in the first plate of my History of Creation. The description of this orange-red 1Q2 MONERA globule of plasm {protomyxa aurantiaca) appeared first in my Monograph on the Moncra. Most of the organisms whicli I comprised under this name exhibited the same movements as true rhizopods (or sarcodina). It was afterwards proved of some of them that there was a nucleus hidden within the homogeneous particle of plasm, and that, therefore, they must be regarded as real cells. But this discovery was wrongly extended to the whole of the monera, and the existence of unnucleated organisms was denied altogether. Nevertheless, there are living to-day several kinds of these organisms without organs, some of them being very widely distributed. The chief examples are the chromacea and the bacteria, the former with vegetal and the latter with animal metabolism (or the former plasmodomous = plasma-forming, and the latter plasmophagous=:plasma-feeding). On the ground of this important chemical difference, I distinguished two principal groups of the monera in my Systematic Phy- togeny twenty years ago — the phytomonera and the zoomonera, the former being unnucleated protophyta and the latter unnucleated protozoa. Among living organisms the chromacea are certainly the most primitive and the nearest to the oldest inhabi- tants of the earth. Their simplest forms, the chroococ- cacea, are nothing but small structureless particles of plasm, growing by plasmodomism (formation of plasm) and multiplying by simple cleavage as soon as their growth passes a certain limit of individual size. Many of them are surrounded by a thin membrane or some- what thicker gelatinous covering, and this circumstance had prevented me for some time from counting the chromacea as monera. However, I became convinced afterwards that the formation of a protective cover of this kind around the homogeneous particle of plasm may indeed be regarded from the physiological stand-point as a "purposive" structure, but at the same time may be 13 193 THE WONDERS OF LIFE looked upon, from the purely physical stand-point, as a result of superficial strain. On the other hand, the physiological character of these plasmodomous monera is especially important, as it gives us the simple key to the solution of the great question of spontaneous generation (or archigony, c/. chapter xv.). The chromacea are to-day found in every part of the earth, living sometimes in fresh water and sometimes in the sea. Many species form blue-green, violet, or reddish deposits on rocks, stones, wood, and other objects. In these thin gelatinous plates millions of small homogeneous cytodes are packed close together. Their tint is due to a peculiar coloring matter (phyco- cyan), which is chemically connected with the substance of the plasma-particle. The shade of this color differs a good deal in the various species of chromacea (of which more than eight hundred have been distinguished) ; in the native species it is generally blue-green or sage- green, sometimes blue, cyanine blue, or violet. Hence the common name cyanophyceas {i.e., blue algae). It is incorrect, for two reasons; firstly, because only a part of these protophyta are blue, and, secondly, because they (as simple, primitive plants without tissue) must be distinguished from the real algae (phyceae), which are multicellular, tissue-forming plants. Other chromacea are red, orange, or yellow in color, as the interesting trichodesmium erythrcutim, for instance, the flaky masses of which, gathering in enormous quantities, cause at certain times the yellow or red coloring of the sea-water in the tropics; it is these that are responsible for the name "Red Sea" on the Arabian and "Yellow Sea" on the Chinese coast. When I passed the equator in the Sunda Straits on March lo, 1901, the boat sailed through colossal accumulations, several miles in width, of this trichodesmium. The yellow or reddish surface of the water looked as if it were strewn with sawdust. 194 MONERA In the same way, the surface of the Arctic Ocean is often colored brown or reddish-brown by masses of the brown procytclla prhnordialis (formerly described as protococciis niarinus). It is clearly quite illogical to regard the chromacea as a class or family of the algae, as is still done in most manuals of botany. The real algae — excluding the unicellular diatomes and paulotomes, which belong to the protophyta — are multicellular plants that form a thallus or bed of a certain form and characteristic tissue. The chromacea, which have not advanced as far as the real nucleated cell, are unnucleated cytodes of a lower and earlier stage of plant-life. If one would compare the chromacea with algae or other plants at all, the comparison cannot be with their constituent cells, but merely with the chromatophora or chromatella, which are found in all green plant-cells, and form part of their contents. To be more precise, these green granules of chlorophyll must be regarded as organella of the plant-cell, or separated plasma-formations which arise beside the nucleus in the cytoplasm. In the embryonic cells of the germs of plants and in their vegetation points the chromatophora are as yet colorless, and are developed, as solid, very refractive, globular, or roundish granules, from the firm layer of plasm which imme- diately surrounds the nucleus. Afterwards they are converted, by a chemical process, into the green chloro- phyll granules or chloroplasts, which have the most important function in the plasmodomism or carbon- assimilation of the plant. The fact that the green chlorophyll granules grow independently within the living plant-cell and multiply by segmentation is very important and interesting. The globular chloroplasts are constricted in the middle, and split into two equal daughter-globules. These daughter- plastids grow, and multiply in turn in the same way. 195 THE WONDERS OF LIFE Hence they behave within the plant-cell just like the free-living chromacea in the water. On the strength of this significant comparison, one of our ablest and most open-minded scientists, Fritz Muller-Desterro, of Brazil, pointed out in 1893 that we may see in every green vegetal cell a symbiosis between plasmodomous green and plasmophagous not - green companions {cf. my Anthropogeny, figs. 277 and 278, and in the text). Many species of the simplest chromacea live as monobia (individually). When the tiny plasma globules have split into two equal halves by simple segmentation, they separate, and live their lives apart. This is the case with the common, ubiquitous chroococcus. How- ever, most species live in common, the plasma granules forming more or less thick coenobia, or communities or colonies of cells. In the simplest case (aphanocapsa) the social cytodes secrete a structureless gelatinous mass, in which numbers of blue-green plasma globules are irregu- larly distributed. In the glceocapsa, which forms a thin blue-green gelatinous deposit on damp walls and rocks, the constituent cytodes cover themselves immediately after cleavage with a fresh gelatinous envelope, and these run together into large masses. But the majority of the chromacea form firm, threadlike cell communities or chains of plastids (catenal coenobia.) As the transverse cleavage of the rapidly multiplying cytodes always follows the same direction, and the new daughter-cytodes remain joined at the cleavage surfaces, and are flattened into discoid shape, we get stringlike formations or articulated threads of considerable length, as in the oscillaria and nostochina. When a number of these threads are joined together in gelatinous masses, we often get large, irregular, jelly-like bodies, as in the common " shooting - star jellies" (nostoc communis). They attain the size of a plum. In view of the extreme importance which I attach to 196 M O N E R A the chromacea as the earUest and snnplest of all or- ganisms, it is necessary to put clearly the following facts with regard to .their anatomic structure and physio- logical activity: 1. The organism of the simplest chromacea is not composed of different organella or organs; and it shows no trace of purposive construction or definite archi- tecture. 2. The homogeneous tinted plasma granule which makes up the entire organism in the simplest case (chroococcus) exhibits no plasma structure (honeycomb, threads, etc.) whatever. 3. The original globular form of the plasma particle is the simplest of all fundamental types, and is also that assumed by the inorganic body (such as a drop of rain) in a condition of stable equilibrium. 4. The formation of a thin membrane at the surface of the structureless plasma granule may be explained as a purely physical process — that of surface strain. 5. The gelatinous envelope which is secreted by many of the chromacea is also formed by a simple physical (or chemical) process. 6. The sole essential vital function that is common to all the chromacea is self-maintenance, and growth by means of their vegetal metabolism, or plasmodomism ( = carbon assimilation); this purely chemical process is on a level with the catalysis of inorganic compounds (chapter x.). 7. The growth of the cytodes, in virtue of their con- tinuous plasmodomism, is on a level with the physical process of crystal growth. 8. The reproduction of the chromacea by simple cleavage is merely the continuation of this simple growth process, when it passes the limit of individual size. 9. All the other vital phenomena which are to be seen in some of the chromacea can also be explained by 197 THE WONDERS OF LIFE physical or chemical causes on mechanical principles. Not a single fact compels us to assume a "vital force." Especially noteworthy in regard to the physiological character of these lowest organisms are their bionomic peculiarities, especially the indifference to external in- fluences, higher and lower temperatures, etc. Many of the chromacea live in hot springs, with a temperature of fifty to eighty degrees centigrade, in which no other organism is found. Other species may remain for a long time frozen in ice, and resume their vital activity as soon as it thaws. Many chromacea may be com- pletely dried up, and then resume their life if put in water after several years. Next in order to the chromacea we have the bacteria, the remarkable little organisms which have been well known in the last few decades as the causes of fatal diseases, and the agents of fermentation, putrefaction, etc. The special science which is concerned with them — modern bacteriology — has attained so important a posi- tion in a short period — especially as regards practical and theoretical medicine — that it is now represented by separate chairs at most of the universities. We may admire the penetration and the perseverance with which scientists have succeeded, with the aid of the best modern microscopes and methods of preparation and coloring, in making so close a study of the organism of the bacteria, determining their physiological properties, and explaining their great importance for organic life by careful experiments and methods of culture. The bionomic or economic position of the bacteria in nature's household has thus secured for these tiny organisms the greatest scientific and practical interest. However, we find that certain general views have been maintained by specialists in bacteriology up to our own time which are in curious contrast with these brilliant results. The biologist who studies the systematic 198 M N E R A relations of the bacteria from the modern point of view of the theory of descent is bewildered at the extraor- dinary views as to the place of the bacteria in the plant-world (as segmentation-fungi), their relations to other classes of plants, and the formation of their species. When we carefully consider the morphological properties that are common to all true bacteria and compare them with other organisms, we are forced to the conclusion that I urged years ago in various writings: the bacteria are not real (nucleated) cells, but un- nucleated cytodes of the rank of the monera; they are not real (tissue-forming) fungi, but simple protists; their nearest relatives are the chromacea. The individual organisms of the simplest kind, which bacteriologists call "bacteria-cells," are not real nucle- ated cells. That is the clear negative result of a number of most careful investigations which have been made up to date with the object of finding a nucleus in the plasma- body of the bacteria. Among recent exact investigations we must especially note those of the botanist Reinke, of Kiel, who sought in vain to detect a nucleus in one of the largest and most easily studied genera of the bacteria, the beggiatoa, using every modern technical aid. His conviction that this important cell-structure is really lacking is the more valuable, as it is very prejudicial to his own theory of "dominants." Other scientists (especially Schaudinn) have recently claimed, as equivalent to a nucleus in some of the larger bacteria, a number of very small granules, which are irregularly distributed in the plasm, and are strongly tinted under certain coloring processes. But even if the chemical identity of these substances which take the same color were proved — which is certainly not the case — and even if the appearance of scattered nuclein-granules in the plasm could be regarded as a preliminary to, or a beginning of, the differentiation of an individual, 199 THE WONDERS OF LIFE morphologically distinct nucleus, we should not yet have shown its independence as an organellum of the cell. Nor is this any more proved from the circumstance that in some bacteria (not all) we find a severance of the plasm into an inner and outer layer, or a frothy structure with vacuole-formation, or a special sharply outlined membrane on the plastid. Many bacteria (but not all) have such a membrane, like the nearly related chromacea, and also the secretion of a gelatine envelope. Both classes have also in common an exclusively monogenetic reproduction. The bacteria multiply, like the chromacea, by simple segmentation; as soon as the structureless plasma-granule has reached a certain size by simple growth, it is constricted and splits into two halves. In the long-bodied bacteria (the rod-shaped bacilli) the constriction always goes through the middle of the long axis, and is, therefore, simple transverse cleavage. Many bacteria have also been said to multiply by the forma- tion of spores. But these so-called "spores" are really permanent quiescent forms (without any multiplication of individuals) ; the central part of the plastid (endo- plasm) condenses, separates from the peripheral part (exoplasm), and undergoes a chemical change which makes it very indifferent to external influences (such as a high temperature). The great majority of the bacteria differ so little mor- phologically from the chromacea that we can only dis- tinguish these two classes of monera by the difference in their metabolism. The chromacea, as protophyta, are plasmodomous. They form new plasm by synthesis and reduction from simple inorganic compounds — water, carbonic acid, ammonia, nitric acid, etc. But the bacteria, as protozoa, are plasmophagous. They cannot, as a rule, form new plasm, but have to take it from other organisms (as parasites, saprophytes, etc.); they decompose it by analysis and oxydation. Hence the 200 MONERA colorless bacteria are without the important green, blue, or red coloring matter (phycocyan) which tints the plastids of the chromacea, and is the real instrument of the carbon-assimilation. However, there are excep- tions in this respect: bacillus virens is tinted green with chlorophyll, micrococcus prodigiosus is blood-red, other bacteria purple, and so on. Certain earth-dwelling bacteria {nitrobacteria) have the vegetal property of plasmodomism ; they convert ammonia by oxydation into nitrous acid, and this into nitric acid, using as their source of carbon the carbonic acid gas in the atmosphere. They are thus quite independent of organic substances, and feed, like the chromacea, on simple inorganic com- pounds. Hence the ai^nity between the plasmodomous chro- macea and plasmophagous bacteria is so close that it is impossible to give a single safe criterion that will effect- ually separate the two classes. Many botanists accord- ingly combine both groups in a single class with the name of schizophyta, and within this distinguish as "orders" the blue-green chromacea as schizophyccce (cleavage - algae) and the colorless bacteria as scJiizo- mycetes (cleavage-fungi). However, we must not take this division too rigidly; and the absolute lack of a nu- cleus and tissue-formation separates the chromacea just as widely from the multicellular tissue-forming algae as the bacteria from the fungi. The simple multiplication by the halving of the cell, which is expressed in the name "cleavage-plants" {schizophyta), is also found in many other protists. The number of forms that can be distinguished as species in the technical sense is very great in the case of the bacteria, in spite of the extreme simplicity of their outward appearance; many biologists speak of several hundred, and even of more than a thousand, species. But when we look solely to the outer form of the living 20I THE WONDERS OF LIFE plasma-granule, we can only distinguish three funda- mental types: (i) Micrococci, or spherobacteria (briefly, cocci), globular or ellipsoid; (2) bacilli, or rhabdo-bac- teria (also called eubacteria, or bacteria in the narrower sense), rod-shaped, cylindrical, and often twisted like worms (comma-bacilli) ; (3) spirilla, or spirobacteria, screw-shaped rods (vibriones when the screw is slight, and spirochaeta when it has many coils). Besides this threefold difference in the forms of the cytodes, we have a ground of distinction in many bacilli and spirilla in the possession of one or more very thin lashes (fla- gella), which proceed from one of both poles of the lengthened plastid. The construction and vibration of these serves for locomotion in the swimming bacteria; but they are only found for a time in many species, and in many others are altogether wanting. Since, then, neither the simple outer form of the bacterium - cytodes nor their homogeneous internal structure provides a satisfactory ground for the sys- tematic distinction of the numerous species, their physio- logical properties are generally used for the purpose, especially their different behavior towards organic foods (albumin, gelatine, etc.), their chemical actions, and the various effects of poisoning and decomposition which they produce in the living organism. No bacteriologist now doubts that all the vital activities of the bacteria are of a chemical nature, and precisely on this account these microbes are of extreme importance. When we bear in mind how complicated are the relations of the various species of bacteria to the tissues of the human body, in which they cause the diseases of typhus, hypo- chondriasis, cholera, and tuberculosis, we are bound to admit that the real cause of these maladies must be sought in the peculiar molecular structure of the bac- terium-plasm, or the particular arrangement of its mole- cules and the innumerable atoms (more than a thousand) 202 M O N E R A which are, in a very loose way, made up into special groups of molecules. The chemical products of their mutual action are what we call ptomaines, which are partly very virulent poisons (toxins). We have suc- ceeded in producing several of these poisonous matters in large quantities by artificial culture, and isolating them and experimentally ascertaining their nature; as, for instance, tetanin, which causes tetanus, typhotoxin, the poison of typhus, etc. In thus declaring the action of bacteria to be purely chemical and analogous to that of well-known inorganic poisons, I would particularly point out that this very justifiable statement is a pure hypothesis; it is an excel- lent illustration of the fact that we cannot get on in the explanation of the most important natural phenomena without hypotheses. We can see nothing whatever of the chemical molecular structure of the plasm, even under the highest power of the microscope; it lies far below the limit of microscopic perception. Neverthe- less, no expert scientist has the slightest doubt of its existence, or that the complicated movements of the sensitive atoms and the molecules and groups of mole- cules they make up are the causes of the vast changes which these tiny organisms effect in the tissues of the human and the higher animal body. Moreover, the distinction of the many species of bac- teria is of interest in connection with the general ques- tion of the nature and constancy of a species. Whereas formerly in biological classification only definite mor- phological characters, or definable differences in outer form or inner structure, were regarded as of any moment in the distinction of species, here, in view of the vague- ness or total lack of these characters, we have to look mainly to the physiological properties, and these are based on the chemical differences in their hypothetical molecular structure. But even these are not absolutely 203 THE WONDERS OF LIFE constant; on the contrary, many bacteria lose their specific qualities by progressive culture under changed food-conditions. By a change in the temperature and the nutritive field in which a number of poisonous bac- teria have been reared, or by the action of certain chemicals, not only the growth and multiplication are altered, but also the injurious effect they have on other organisms by the generation of poisons. This poisonous effect is weakened, and — what is most important — the weakening is transmitted by heredity to the following generations. On this is based the familiar process of inoculation, an admirable example of the inheritance of acquired characteristics. As the bacteria are still often described as "cleavage- fungi" and classified along with the real fungi, we must particularly point out the wide gulf that separates the two groups. The real fungi (or mycetes) are metaphyta, their multicellular body (thallus) forming a very char- acteristic sort of tissue, the mycelium; this is composed of a number of interlaced and interwoven threads (or hyphens). Each fungus-thread consists of a row of lengthened cells, which have a thin membrane and en- close a number of small nuclei in the colorless plasm. Moreover, the two sub-classes of the real fungi, the ascomycetes and basimycetes, form peculiar fruit-bodies which generate spores (ascodia and basidia). There is no trace whatever of these real characteristics of the true fungus in the bacteria. Nor is it less incorrect to class them with the fungilli, the so-called unicellular fungi or phycomycetes (ovomycetes and zygomycetes) ; these form a special class of protists which has the closest affinity to the gregarinae. Like the closely related chromacea, many of the bac- teria show a marked tendency to form communities or cell-colonies. These cell-communities arise, as else- where, from the fact that the individuals, which multi- 204 M O N E R A ply rapidly by continuous cleavage, remain joined to- gether. This may hap])en in two ways. When the social bacteria secrete large quantities of gelatine, and remain distributed in this, we have the zoogloca (as in the case of the aphanocapsa and glceocapsa among the chro- macea). If, on the other hand, the long-bodied bacilli remain fastened together in rows, we get the knotted threads of Icptoihrix and heggiatoa (which may be com- pared with the oscillaria). And, if these threads go into branches, we have cladothrix. Other coenobia of bac- teria have the appearance of disks, the cytodes dividing in a plane, usually in groups of four (as in mcrismopcdia), or of cube-shaped packets when they are in all three directions of space (sarcina). The two classes of bacteria and chromacea seem, in the present condition of our knowledge, on account of their simple organization, to be the simplest of all living things, real monera, or organisms without organs. Hence we have to put them at the lowest stage of the protist kingdom, and must regard the difference between them and the most highly differentiated unicellular beings (such as the radiolaria, ciliated infusoria, dia- tomes, or siphonea) as no smaller than the difference (in the realm of the histona) between a lower polyp (hydra) and a vertebrate, or between a simple alga (ulva) and a palm. But if the kingdom of the pirotists is badly divided, on the older rule, into a plant kingdom and an animal kingdom, the only discriminating mark we have left is the difference in metabolism ; in that case we have to include the plasmophagous bacteria in the animal kingdom (as Ehrenberg did in 1838) and the plasmo- domous chromacea in the plant kingdom. The remark- able class of the fiagellata, which includes ciliated uni- cellulars of both groups, contains several forms which are only distinguished from the typical bacterium by the possession of a nucleus. If it is true that in some of 205 THE WONDERS OF LIFE the protists which were counted as bacteria a real nu- cleus has been detected, these must be separated from the others (unnucleated) and included in the nucleated flagellata. The monera which I described in 1866, and on which I based the theory of the monera in my monograph, belong to a different division of the protists from the classes of bacteria and chromacea. These are the forms which I described as protamceba, protogenes, protomyxa, etc. Their naked mobile plasma -bodies thrust out pseudopodia, or variable "false feet," from their surface, like the (nucleated) real rhizopods ( = sarcodinae); but they differ essentially from the latter in the absence of a nucleus. Afterwards (in my Systematic Phylogeny) I proposed to separate these unnucleated rhizopods from the others, giving the name of lobomonera (protamceba) to the amoeba-like monera with flap-shaped feet, and the name of rhizomonera {protomyxa, pontomyxa, bio- myxa, arachmda, etc.) to the gromia-like, root-feet form- ing monera. However, of late years, real nuclei have been detected in each of these large monera, and so they have been proved to be true cells. This discovery was made possible by the improved modern methods of col- oring the nucleus which I had not the use of thirty years ago in my first observations. On the strength of these recent discoveries many scientists claim that all the monera I described are true cells, and must have nuclei, This baseless assertion is much employed by the op- ponents of the theory of evolution in order to deny the existence of the monera altogether. Of the genus of monera which we call protamoeba I have given an illustration in my History of Creation (tenth edition), which has been frequently reproduced. Several species (at least two or three) of this genus still exist, and are distinguished by the shape of their flap- formation and their method of motion. They resemble 206 M O N E R A ordinary simple amoebae, and only differ from these to any extent in the absence of a nucleus. The protamocha primitiva seems to be pretty widely distributed; it has been found repeatedly by observers (Gruber, Cienkow- ski, Leidy, etc.) in inland waters. In the zoological demonstrations which I have given at the University of Jena for forty years, and in the course of which the low- ly inhabitants of our fresh water are regularly examined with the microscope, the protamccha primitiva has been found four or five times. It always had the same form, as I described it, moved about by the slow formation of flaps at its surface, multiplied by simple cleavage, and showed no trace of a nucleus in its homogeneous plasma- body even with the most careful application of the modern methods of tinting the nucleus. A larger num- ber of very fine granules (microsoma) that were irregu- larly distributed in the plasm, and were more or less colored by nucleus-reagents, cannot be reckoned as clear equivalents of the nucleus in this or in similar cases; they are probably products of metabolism. The same may be said of the larger marine form of rhizomoneron, which A. Gruber has recently called pclomyxa pallida. The large marine form of rhizomoneron to which Huxley gave the name of hathyhius Hccckclii in 1868, and as to the real nature of which many opinions have been expressed, seems, according to the latest investi- gation, not to have the significance ascribed to it. How- ever, the much-discussed question of the bathybius is superfluous as far as our monera theory and the as- sociated hypothesis of archigony (chapter xv.) are con- cerned, since we have now a better knowledge of the much more important monera-forms of the chromacea and bacteria. In the case of some of the protists I described in my Monograph on the Monera, it is at present doubtful whether their plasma-body contains a nucleus or not, 207 THE WONDERS OF LIFE and, therefore, whether they are to be classed as true cells or cytodes. This applies especially to the forms which only happened to come under observation once, such as protomyxa and niyxastrmn. In these obscure cases we must wait for fresh investigations and the ap- plication of the modern methods of tinting the nucleus. I may, however, point out, in passing, that these famous methods of nucleus-coloring give by no means the abso- lute certainty which is ascribed to them ; there are other substances which take color in the same way as chro- matin. As far as my monera theory is concerned, or the great general importance which I attach to these unnucleated living granules of plasm, it does not matter whether a nucleus is detected in these problematic monera or not. The chromacea alone — the most im- portant of all monera — completely suffice to provide a base for the far-reaching theoretical conclusions which I draw from it. At the close of these observations on the monera I will briefly recapitulate the weighty inferences which we can deduce from their simple organization. They serve as a solid foundation for the chief theses of our monistic biology; and they are inconsistent with the dualistic views of modern vitalists. In the first place, I empha- size the fact that the structureless plasm-body of the simple monera has no sort of organization and no com- position from dissimilar parts co-operating for definite vital aims. Reinke's conscious "dominant" — as well as Weismann's mechanical "determinants" — have noth- ing to do here. The whole vital activity of the simplest monera, especially of the chromacea, is confined to their metabolism, and is therefore a purely chemical process, that may be compared to the catalysis of inorganic com- pounds. The simple formation of individuals in this primitive living matter is merely a question of the cleav- age of plasma globules of a certain size (chroococcus) ; 208 MONERA and their primitive multiplication (by simple self -di- vision) is only a continued growth (analogous to that of the crystal). When this simple growth passes a certain limit, that is fixed by the chemical constitution, it leads to the independent existence of the redundant growth- products. 14 X NUTRITION Functions of nutrition — Assimilation and disassimilation — Plasmodoma and plasmophaga — Phytoplasm and zooplasm — Plasmodomism of plants — Chlorophyll granules and nitro- bacteria — Plasmophagism of fungi and animals — Metasi- tism (conversion of metabolism) — Nutrition of the monera (chromacea, bacteria, rhizomonera) — Nutrition of the protophyta and metaphyta (cell-plants and tissue-plants) — Nutrition of the metazoa — Gastraea theory — Gastro-canal system of the coelenteria (gastraeads, sponges, cnidaria, platodes) — Nutrition of the coelomaria (digestion, circula- tion, respiration, evacuation) — Saprositism — Parasitism — Symbiosis. THE wonder of life which we call, in the wildest sense of the word, "nutrition" is the chief factor in the self-maintenance of the organic individual. It is always bound up with a chemical modification of the living matter, an organic metabolism (circulation of matter), and a corresponding circulation of force. In this chemical process plasm is used up, built up afresh, and once more disintegrated. The metabolism which lies at the root of this chemistry of food is the essential feature in the manifold processes of nutrition. A large part of the several nutritive processes are explained without further trouble by the known physical and chemical properties of inorganic bodies; for another part of them we have not yet succeeded in doing this. Nevertheless, all impartial physiologists now agree that it is possible in principle, and that we have no reason to introduce 2lO NUTRITION a special vital principle. All the trophic (nutritive) processes, without exception, are subject to the law of substance. In all the higher plants and animals the chemical' process of metabolism, with the stream of energy that accompanies it, is a very complex vital activity, in which many different functions and organs co-operate with the common aim of self-maintenance. As a rule, they are distributed in four groups — namely : ( i ) Intussuscep- tion of food and digestion: (2) distribution of the food in the body, or circulation; (3) respiration, or exchange of gases; and (4) excretion of unusable matter. In most of the histona, either tissue-plants or tissue- animals, a number of organs are differentiated for the accompHshment of these tasks. At the lower stages of life this division of labor is not found, the entire proc- ess of nutrition being accomplished by a single layer of cells (lower algae, gastra^ads, sponges, lower polyps). In the protists, again, it is the single cell that does all these things itself; in the simplest cases, the monera, a homogeneous plasma-globule. As a long gradation uninterruptedly unites these lowest forms of nutrition with the more complicated forms, we must regard the latter no less than the former as physico-chemical processes. When we take the whole of the metabolic functions in organisms together, we may look upon them as the out- come of two opposite chemical processes — on the one hand the building-up of living matter by taking in food (assimilation), and on the other the breaking-down of it in consequence of its vital activity (disassimilation). As in every case the plasm is the active living matter, we may say: Assimilation (or plasma-production) consists in the conversion within the organism into the special plasm of the particular species of food that has been received from without; disassimilation (or plasma- 211 THE WONDERS OF LIFE destruction) is the result of the work done by the plasm, which is the cause of its partial decomposition or break- down. In both respects there is a striking difference between the two great kingdoms of organic nature. The plant kingdom is, on the whole, the agent of assimilation, forming new plasm by synthesis and reduction from inorganic matter. In the animal world, on the contrary, disassimilation preponderates, the plasm received being resolved by oxydation, and the actual energy taken out of it by analysis being converted into heat and motion. Plants are plasmodomous ; animals, plasmophagous. Of all the chemical processes the miost important, because the most indispensable, for the origin and maintenance of organic life is the constant reconstruc- tion of plasm. We give it the name of plasmodomism {domeo =. to build up), or carbon-assimilation. Botanists have the habit of late of calling it briefly assimilation, and have thus caused a good deal of misunderstanding. The more common and older meaning of assimilation in animal physiology is, in the widest sense, the intussus- ception and preparation of the food received. But the carbon - assimilation in plants — what I call plasmo- domism — is only the first and original form of plasma- production. It means that the plant is able, under the influence of sunlight, to form carbo-hydrates, and from these new plasm, out of simple inorganic compounds (water, carbonic acid, nitric acid, and ammonia) by synthesis and reduction. The animal is unable to do this. It has to take its plasm in its food from other organisms — plant-eaters directly, and animal-eaters in- directly. We therefore give the title of plasmophagous to these animal "plasma-eaters." In working up the foreign plasm it has eaten, and converting it into its own specific form of plasm, the animal also accomplishes assimilation; but this animal albumin-assimilation is totally different from the vegetal carbon-assimilation. 212 NUTRITION The fresh-formed animal plasm is then broken up by oxydation, and by this analysis the energy needed for the vital movements is obtained. The physiological contrast which we thus find between the two principal forms of living matter, the synthetic plasm of the plant and the analytic plasm of the animal, is of great importance for the lasting maintenance of the whole organic world. It depends on a reversal of the molecular movement in the plasm, the intimate nature of which is just as little known to us as the chemical constitution of the albumins in general, and that of living albumin, the plasm, in particular. As I mentioned in chapter v., modern physiological chemistry has good reason to believe that the invisible albumin- molecule is, comparatively speaking, gigantic, and is composed of more than a thousand atoms. These are in such an unstable equilibrium, so complicated and impermanent an arrangement, that the slightest push or stimulus suffices to alter them and form a new kind of plasm. As a fact, the number and variety of kinds of plasm are immense. This is seen at once from the ontogenetic fact that the ovum and sperm-cell of each species (and each variety) have a specific chemical constitution. In reproduction this is transmitted to the offspring. But, setting aside these countless finer modifications, we may distinguish two chief groups of kinds of plasm: the phytoplasm of the plant, with the synthetic property of plasmodomism, and the zooplasm of the animal, which is destitute of this property, and so confined to plasmophagy. The remarkable synthetic process of building up the plasm, to which we give the name of plasmodomism, or carbon-assimilation, usually needs as its first condition the radiant energy of sunlight. Every green plant-cell contains in its chlorophyll-granules so many tiny labora- tories, their green plasm being able to form new plasm 213 THE WONDERS OF LIFE out of inorganic compounds under the influence of light. The water that is needed for this, besides nitrogenous compounds (nitric acid, ammonia), is drawn from the earth by the roots; the carbonic acid is taken from the atmosphere by the green leaves. The immediate prod- ucts of the synthesis, due to the separation of the carbonic acid, is, as a rule, a non-nitrogenous starch-flour (amylum). This is further used for the composition of the nitrogenous albumin by an as yet unknown synthetic process, with the aid of nitrogenous mineral compounds. In this process of reduction the separated free oxygen is returned to the atmosphere. The carbo- hydrates that chiefly co-operate in this are glucoses and maltoses : the mineral substances, especially salts of potassium and magnesium, and compounds of these elements with nitric acid, sulphuric acid, and phosphoric acid. Iron is also found to be an important element in the process, though in a very small quantity. As a rule, the ferruginous chlorophyll can only form new plasm with the help of light-waves. The most important part of the spectrum for this fjurpose is that containing the red, orange, and yellow waves. The chief factor in plasma-formation in the organic world is the photo -synthesis, or ordinary carbon- assimilation by chlorophyll, the wonderful green matter that amounts to only a very small percentage (about one- tenth) of the weight of the chlorophyll-granules, and can be separated from their plasmatic substance by certain methods. Even when the plant has some other color than green the chlorophyll is still the real plasmodomous substance. Its green color is then masked by some other color — diatomin in the yellow diatomes, phy- corhodin in the red rhodophyceae, phycophaein in the brown phasophyceae, and phyocyan in the blue-green chromacea or cyanophyceae. The latter have an especial interest for us, because in the simplest specimens the 214 NUTRITION entire organism is merely a globular bluish-green granule of plasm. Moreover, in the simplest forms of nucleated primitive plants {ali^aricc) — many of the so-called uni- cellular algaj — the metabolism is effected by a single grain of chlorophyll. There is usually a large number of them in the plasm of the plant-cells. Another kind of plasm-synthesis, quite different from the ordinary plasmodomism by chlorophyll and sunlight has lately been discovered in some of the lowest organ- isms (by Heraeus, Winogradsky, and others). The nitro- bacteria (or nitromonades) are tiny monera (unnucle- ated cells) that live in complete darkness underground. Their globular colorless plasma-bodies contain neither chlorophyll nor nucleus. They have the remarkable capacity of forming carbo-hydrates, and from these plasm, by a peculiar synthesis out of purely inorganic compounds — water, carbonic acid, ammonia, and nitric acid. Pfeffer has called this carbon-assimilation, on account of its purely chemical nature, "chemosyn- thesis," in opposition to the ordinary photosynthesis by means of sunlight. There are also other bacteria (sulphur -bacteria, purple -bacteria, etc.) that show various peculiarities of metabolism. The nitro-bacteria must belong to the oldest monera, and represent a transition from the vegetal chromacea to the animal bacteria. The extensive class of the fungi (or niyccics) resembles a part of the bacteria in regard to metabolism. These organisms are, it is true, generally regarded as plants, but they have not the capacity of the green, chlorophyll- bearing plants to supply themselves with carbon from the carbonic acid in the atmosphere. They have to take it from organic substances, such as albumin, carbo- hydrates, etc., like the animals. But while the animals have to derive their nitrogen from the latter, the fungi can obtain it from inorganic matter in the earth. Fungi 215 THE WONDERS OF LIFE cannot support life without the addition of organic compounds; but we can make them grow in a food solution consisting of sugar and purely inorganic nitrog- enous salts. Thus they are on the border that separates the plasmodomous plants from the plasmophagous animals. Like the latter, the fungi have evolved from the plants through changed food conditions. We find this process even among the unicellular protists in the phycomycetes, which descend from the siphonea. In the same way the real multicellular fungi (ascomycetes and basimycetes) may be traced to the tissue-forming algce. All true animals have to derive their food from the plant kingdom, the vegetal feeders directly, and the flesh feeders indirectly, when they consume vegetal feeders. Hence the animals are, in a certain sense, as the older natural philosophy put it four hundred years ago, ''parasites of the plant world." From the point of view of phylogeny, the animal kingdom is, therefore, clearly much younger than the plant kingdom. The develop- ment of the animals from the plants was determined originally by a change in the method of nutrition which we call metasitism. The chemical modification of the living matter which is connected with the loss of plasmodomism — in other words, the conversion of the reducing phytoplasm into oxidizing zooplasm — must be regarded as one of the most important changes in the history of organic life. This "reversal of metabolism" is polyphyletic ; it has been repeated many times in the course of biological history, and has taken place independently in very different groups of the organic world — whenever a plasmodomous cell or group of cells ( = tissue) had occasion to feed directly on ready-made plasm, instead of giving itself the trouble of building it up out of inorganic compounds. We see this particularly among 216 NUTRITION the unicellular protists in the independent ciliated cells. The longer plasmophagous flagellata, which are color- less, and have no chlorophyll (monodina, conoflagellata), closely resemble in form and movement the older plasma- domous and chlorophyll-bearing mastigota, from which they are descended (volvocina, peridinia) ; they only differ in the manner of nutrition. The colorless flagel- lata feed on ready -formed plasm, which they obtain either by means of their lashes or by a special cell mouth in their cell body. On the other hand, their ancestors, the green or yellow mastigota, form new plasm by photosynthesis like true cells. But there are also complete intermediate forms between the two groups — for instance, the chrysomonades and the gymnodinia; these may behave alternately as protozoa or protophyta. In the same way we can derive the phycomycetes by metasitism from the siphonea, the fungi from the algae; and, finally, the process is also found in many of the higher parasitic plants (orchids, orobanches, etc.). (See under "Parasitism.") As is the case with every other vital function, so for the function of metabolism we find a starting-point in the lowest and simplest group of the protophyta, the chromacea. In their oldest forms, the chroococcacea, the whole body is merely a blue-green, structureless, globular plasma particle, growing by means of its plasmodomous power, and splitting up as soon as it reaches a certain stage of growth. There the miracle of life consists merely of the chemical process of plasmo- domism by photosynthesis. The sunlight enables the blue-green phytoplasm to form new plasm of the same kind out of inorganic compounds (water, carbonic acid, ammonia, and nitric acid). We may look upon this process as a special kind of catalysis. In this case there is absolutely nothing to be done by Reinke's "dominants," or conscious and purposive vital forces. 217 THE WONDER vS OF LIFE There are, as yet, no differentiated physiological func- tions in these organisms without organs, and no ana- tomically distinct members; and so their one vital activity, growth, may very well be compared to the simple growth of inorganic crystals. It has been pointed out repeatedly that the remarkable monera which now play so important a part in biology as bacteria stand, in many respects, quite apart from the ordinary vital phenomena of the higher organisms. This is especially true of their metabolism, which has the most striking peculiarities. Morphologically, many of the bacteria cannot be distinguished from their near- est relatives and direct ancestors, the chromacea, differ- ing from them only in the absence of coloring matter in the plasm. Many of them are simple, globular, ellipsoid, or rod-shaped plasma particles, without any visible or- ganization or movement. Others move about by means of one or more very fine lashes (like the flagellata). No real nucleus can be discovered in the structureless plas- ma body. The very fine granules which are found in some species, and the vacuole-formation that we see in others, may be regarded as products of metabolism; and the same may be said of the thin membrane or the thicker gelatinous envelope which many of the bacteria secrete. This makes all the more remarkable the pe- culiarity of their chemical constitution and the metab- olism determined thereby. The nitro-bacteria we have mentioned previously are plasmodomous ; the anaerobe bacteria (of butyric acid and tetanus) only flourish where oxygen is excluded ; the sulphur bacteria (beggia- toa) secrete — by the oxydation of sulphuretted hydro- gen — pure regulation sulphur in the form of round gran- ules. The ferruginous bacteria {leptothrix ochrocea) store up oxyhydrate of iron (by the oxydation of carbonic protoxide of iron). The saprogenetic bacteria cause putrefaction, and the zymogenetic fermentation. Final- 218 NUTRITION ly, we have the very interesting pathogenetic bacteria which cause the most dangerous diseases Vjy the secretion of special poisons — toxins — festering, small-pox, teta- nus, diphtheria, typus, tuberculosis, cholera, etc. On ac- count of their great practical importance, these bacteria have of late been taken over by a special branch of biol- ogy, bacteriology. But only a few of the many experts in this department have pointed out the extreme theo- retical significance which these zoomonera have for the important questions of general biology. These struct- ureless plasma bodies show unmistakably that their vital activity is a purely chemical phenomenon. Their great variety proves how manifold and complicated must be the molecular composition of the plasm, even in these simplest organisms. The unicellular protophyta exhibit the same form of metabolism and plasmodomism as the familiar green cells of the tissue-plants ; but in most of the protozoa we find special features of nutrition and plasmophagy. The great class of the rhizopods is distinguished by the fact that their naked plasma body can take in ready-fonned solid food at any point of its surface. On the other hand, most of the infusoria have a definite mouth-open- ing in the outer wall of their unicellular body, and some- times a gullet-tube as well. Besides this cell-mouth (cytostoma) we usually find also a second opening for the discharge of indigestible matter, a cell-anus {cyto- pyge). Metabolism in the tissue plants (metaphyta) forms a long gradation from very simple to very complicated arrangements. The lowest and oldest thallophyta, es- pecially the simplest algae, are not far removed from the communities of protophyta, and, like these, are merely definitely grouped colonies of cells. The social cells which form their most rudimentary tissue are quite homogeneous, with no differentiation beyond that of sex. 219 THE WONDERS OF LIFE The thallus or bed-formation consists in the simplest specimens of plain or branched fine threads, consisting of rows or chains of homogeneous cells (so conferva among the green, ectocarpus among the brown, and cal- lithamnion among the red algae). Other algse (such as the iilva) form thin leaf -shaped forms of the thallus, a number of homogeneous cells lying side by side along a level. In the larger algs compact tissue-bodies are formed, in which frequently firmer rows of cells exhibit the rudiments of fibres; and the thallus divides, as in the cormophyta, into root, stalk, and leaves. There is also a trophic differentiation, the fibres undertaking special functions of nutrition (the conduction of the sap). The same must be said of the mosses (bryophyta). Their lowest forms {ricciadincB) are close akin to the algae; the highest mosses (the mnium and polytrichum, for in- stance) approach the cormophyta. Many botanists comprise these lower plants — algae, fungi, and mosses — under the title of "cell-plants" (cytophyta), and oppose the higher plants — ferns and flowering-plants — to them as "vascular plants" (angiophyta), because they have complex fibres or sap vessels. This distinction has a phylogenetic significance similar to the division between coelenteria and coelomaria in the animal kingdom. While most of the cell-plants either live in the water (algae) or are very simply organized on account of their saprophytic or parasitic habits (fungi), the vascular plants mostly live on land, and have to adapt themselves to much more complicated conditions. Their nutrition is accordingly distributed among different functions, and special organs have been evolved to discharge them. This is equally true of the crytogam ferns (pteridophyta) and the phanerogam flowering plants (anthophyta). The most important later acquisition which distinguishes both groups from the lower cell-plants is the possession of vascular or conducting fibres. These organs for con- 220 NUTRITION ducting water pass through the entire body of the vas- cular plant in the shape of long tubes, formed by the combination of rows of cells ; the cells themselves die ofif, and their plasma content disappears. The stream of water that rises constantly in these tubes is taken up by the roots, conducted by the fibres to all parts, and given of? (transpiration) by the pores of the leaves. But these pores also serve for the breathing of plants, being connected with the air-containing intercellular passages; through these air-spaces, which serve for the aeration of the higher plant-body, air and moisture can enter, and oxygen be given off in respiration. Finally, many of the vascular plants have special glands that serve for secretion (of oil, resin, etc.). In the higher flowering plants this division of work among the various digestive organs gives rise to a very complicated apparatus for nutrition. Among the many remarkable structures that have been developed in this way by adaptation to special conditions we may particularly note the organs for catching and digesting insects in the insect-eating plants, the European drosera and titricalaria, and the tropical nepcnthas and dioncea. The long scale of evolutionary forms which we find in the tissue animals (metazoa) leads up uninterrupted- ly from the simplest to the most elaborate physiological functions and a corresponding morphological complex- ity of organs. The two principal divisions of the meta- zoa are chiefly distinguished by the circumstance that in the co^lenteria one single system of organs, the gastro- canal system, discharges the whole (or most part) of the partial functions of nutrition; while in the coelomaria they are usually distributed among four different sys- tems of organs, each of which is made up of a number of organs. To an extent, we find once more in each great division characteristic types of organization. How- ever, comparative ontogeny teaches us that all these 221 THE WONDERS OF LIFE various structures have been developed from one simple fundamental form, as I have shown in my theory of the gastrsea (1872). The older research into the origin of the nutritive apparatus in the metazoa — especially its chief part, the alimentary or gastric canal — had led to the erroneous belief that in several groups of the metazoa it owed its origin to very different growth-processes, and that particularly in the higher vertebrates (the amniotes) it was a comparatively late product of evolution. On the other hand, the comparative study of the embryology of the lower and higher animals led me thirty-four years ago to the opposite conclusion, that a simple gastric sac was the first and oldest organ of all the metazoa, and that all the different forms of it had been developed from this primitive type. I gave this view in my Biology of the Sponges in 1872; and I developed and established it in my Studies of the Gastrcea Theory in 1873. In the latter book I also worked out the important conclusions that follow from this monistic reform of the theory of germinal layers for the phylogenetic natural classifica- tion of the animal kingdom. I began with the con- sideration of the simplest sponges (olynthtis) and cnidaria {hydra). The whole body of these lowest and oldest of the coelenteria is in essence nothing but a round, oval, or cylindrical gastric vesicle, a digestive sac, the thin wall of which consists of two simple layers of cells. The outer layer (the ectoderm or skin-layer) is the covering layer of the external skin (epidermis) ; it is the instru- ment of sensation and movement. The inner layer of cells (entoderm or gastric layer) serves for nutrition; it clothes the simple cavity of the sac, which admits the food by its opening and digests it. This opening is the primitive mouth (prostoma or blastoporus), the inner cavity itself the primitive gut (progaster or archenteron) . I proved that there was the same composition in the 222 NUTRITION young embryos or larvae of many of the lower animals, and showed that the manifold and apparently very different embryonic form of all the higher animals may be reduced to the same common type. To this I gave the name of the "cup-embryo" or gastric larvae (gastrula), and concluded, in virtue of the biogenetic law, that it is the palingenetic reproduction of a cor- responding ancestral form (the gastrcca) maintained until the present by heredity. It was not until much later (1895) that Monticelli discovered a modern gas- traead (pcmmatodiscus) which corresponds completely to this hypothetical ancestor (see the last edition of my Anthropogcny, fig. 287). The simplest living forms of the sponges (olynthus) and the cnidaria (hydra) only differ from this hypothetical primitive form of the gastraea by a few secondary and subsequently acquired features. The classes of the lower animals which we comprise under the name coelenteria (or coslenterata in the widest sense) generally agree in having all the functions of nutrition accomplished exclusively (or for the most part) by a single system of organs, the gastro-canal or gastro- vascular system. From their common stem-group, the gastra^ads, three different stems have been evolved — the sponges, cnidaria, and platodes. All these coelenteria have three features in common: (i) The gastric canal or tube has only one opening — the primitive mouth, which serves at once for admitting food and ejecting indigestible matter; there is no anus; (2) there is no special body-cavity (cooloma) distinct from the gastric tube; (3) there is also no trace of a vascular system. All cavities that are found in these lower animals be- sides the digestive gut-cavity are direct processes from it (with the exception of the nephridia in the platodes). While the simple digestive gut is the sole organ of nutrition in the stem-group of the gastraeads, we find 223 THE WONDERS OF LIFE other structures co-operating in the rest of the coelenteria. The characteristic stem of the sponges is distinguished by the piercing of the wall of the gastric vesicle with several holes. Through these water pours into the body, bringing with it the small particles of food which are received and digested by the ciliated cells of the entoderm ; the water emerges again by the mouth-opening {osculmn). The best-known of the sponges is the common bath- sponge (euspongia officinalis), the horny skeleton of which we use daily in washing. In these and most other sponges the large, unshapely body is traversed by a number of branching canals, on which there are thou- sands of tiny vesicles, produced by the multiplication of a simple gastric vesicle of the primitive sponge (olynthus). Each of these ciliated chambers is really a tiny gastraea, a "person" of the simplest character {cf. chapter vii.)- Hence we may regard the whole sponge- body as a gastraead-stock {cormus). The large group of the cnidaria offers a long series of evolutionary stages, from very small and simple to very large and elaborate forms. Some of them remain at a very low stage, as does our common green fresh-water polyp {hydra viridis), which only differs from the gastraea by a few variations in tissue and the formation of a crown of feelers about the mouth. Most of the polyps form stocks (cormi), the individuals shooting out buds which remain joined to the mother animal. In these and all the other stock-forming animals the nutrition is communistic ; all the food that the individuals get and digest is conducted by tubes to the common fund and equally distributed. In all the larger cnidaria the body- wall becomes thicker, and is traversed by branching gastro-canals ; these convey the nutritive fluid to all parts of the body. While the fundamental type in the cnidaria is radial (determined by the crown of radiating feelers or tentacles 224 NUTRITION that surrounds the mouth), it is bilateral-symmetrical in the platodes or "flat-worms" {plathchiiinthcs). In this animal-stem, moreover, the lowest forms, the platodaria (also called cryptocccla and accela) come very close to the gastrsea. But most of the platodes are distinguished from the rest of the ca'lenteria by the formation of a pair of nephridia (renal canals or water-vessels), thin tubes which, as excretory organs, remove from the body the unusable products of metabolism, the urine. Here we have a second organ of nutrition, the gut tube, added to the first. In the lower platodes this remains very simple. As a rule, a gullet tube (pharynx) is formed by the hollowing out of the mouth, as in the corals; and as in the case of the latter branched canals, which conduct the nutritive sap from the stomach to distant parts of the body, grow out of the stomach, in the larger coil-worms (turbcllaria) and suction-worms {trcmatodcs). On the other hand, the gut atrophies in the tape-worms {ccs- todes) ; as these parasites live in the intestines or other organs of animals, they can obtain their nutritive sap directly from them through the surface of the skin. The more highly organized coclomaria differ from the simpler coelenteria chiefly by the greater complexity in the structure and functions of their apparatus of nu- trition. As a rule, these functions are divided between four groups of organs, which are not yet differentiated in the coelenteria — namely : i , organs of digestion (gastric system); 2, organs of circulation (vascular system); 3, organs of breathing (respiratory system); and 4, organs of excretion (renal system). Moreover, in the coclomaria the gastric canal has usually two openings, the mouth and the anus. Finally, they all have a special body-cavity (cccloma) ; this is quite separate from the gastric canal, which is suspended in it, and serves for the formation of the sexual cells. It is formed in the embryo by the hollowing out and cutting IS 225 THE WONDERS OF LIFE off of a pair of sacs (coelom-pouches) from the gut near the mouth; the pouches touch, and then coalesce, as their division - walls break down. If a part of the dividing wall remains, it serves as mesentery to fasten the gut to the body-wall. The action of the four groups of alimentary organs remains very simple in the lowest and oldest coelomaria, the worms {vernialia)\ but in the other higher animals, which have been evolved from these, they have very varied and often complicated features. In the great majority of the coelomaria the gastric system forms a highly differentiated apparatus, com- posed, as in man, of a number of different organs. The food is usually taken in by the mouth, ground up by the jaws or the teeth, and softened with saliva, which the salivary glands pour into the cavity of the mouth. From the mouth the pulpy food passes in swallowing into the gullet, which often has glandular appendages, and from this through the narrow esophagus into the stomach. This most important part of the alimentary apparatus is often divided into several sections, one of which (the masticating stomach) is armed with teeth and prepared for a further triturition of solid pieces, while the other (the glandular stomach) produces the dissolving gastric juice. The liquefied food (chylus) then passes into the small intestine {ileum), which has to absorb it, and is as a rule the longest section of the alimentary canal. A number of different digestive glands open into this intestine, the most important of them being the liver. The small intestine is often sharply distinguished from the large intestine (colon), the last large section of the alimentary canal; into this also a number of glands and blind intestines open. The last portion of it is called the recttmi, and this removes the indigestible remnants of the food (fcEces) through the anus. 226 NUTRITION This general plan of the alimentary system, which is common to most of the coclomaria in its chief features, is very much modified in the various groups of these animals and adapted to their several conditions of nu- trition. The simplest structures are found in many of the vermalia; the lowest forms of these, the rotifers, and especially the gastrotricha, still closely resemble their platode ancestors, the turbellaria. The higher type of animal-stems which have been evolved from them are partly distinguished by special structures. Thus the mollusks have a characteristic masticating apparatus; on their tongue there is a hard plate (radiila) armed with a number of teeth, which grinds against a hard up- per jaw, and so breaks up the food. In most of the ar- ticulates this work is done by side-jaws, which consist of hard rods and represent modified bones. The verte- brates and the closely related tunicates are distinguished by the conversion of the first sections of the alimentary canal into a characteristic respiratory apparatus (gills). But the construction of the various sections of the gastro- canal also varies a good deal in the small groups of the coelomaria, as it depends to a great extent on the nature of the food and the conditions in which it is got and prepared. The largest expenditure of mechanical and chemical energy is needed for a voluminous solid vege- tal diet. Hence the alimentary canal and its many appendages are longest and most complicated in the plant-eating snails, leaf-eating insects, and grass-eating ruminants. On the other hand, they are shortest and simplest in parasitic coelomaria, which derive their fluid food already prepared from the contents of another ani- mal's intestines. In these cases the gut may altogether atrophy; as in the acanthoccphala among the vermalia, the entoconcha among the mollusks, and the saccidina among the Crustacea. The greater the extent of the body, and the more 227 THE WONDERS OF LIFE complex the organization of the higher animals, the more necessary it is to have an orderly and regular dis- tribution of the nutritive fluid to all parts. In the coelenteria this work is accomplished by the gastric canals (side branches from the gut, opening into its cavity) but in the coelomaria it is done much better by means of blood-vessels {vasa sanguijera) . These canals do not communicate directly with the gastro-canal, but are formed independently of it in the surrounding par- enchyma of the mesoderm. They take up the filtered and chemically improved food-fluid, which transudes through the intestinal walls, and conduct it in the form of blood to all parts of the body. This blood generally contains millions of cells, which are of great importance in metabolism. The blood-cells of the lower coelomaria are usually colorless (leucocytes), while those of the vertebrates are mostly red (rhodocytes). The circulation of the blood in most of the coelomaria is effected by a heart, a contractile tube, formed by the local thickening of a skin-vessel, which contracts and beats regularly by means of its muscular bands. Origi- nally two of these skin-vessels were developed in the abdominal wall — a dorsal vessel in the upper and ven- tral vessel in the lower wall (as in many of the ver- malia). The heart is formed from the dorsal vessel in the moUusks and articulates, but from the ventral in the tunicates and vertebrates. The arteries are the vessels which conduct the blood from the heart; those which conduct it from the body to the heart are the veins. The finest branchlets of both kinds of vessels, which form the connecting link between them, are called capillaries; these immediately effect the inter- change of matter in the tissues by osmosis. The blood- vessels co-operate very closely with the respiratory organs. The interchange of gases in the organism, which we 228 NUTRITION call breathing or respiration — the taking in of oxygen and giving out of carbonic-acid gas — does not require special organs in the lower animals. In these it is ac- complished by epithelial cells, which clothe the surface of the body — the ectoderm of the outer skin layer and the entoderm of the inner gut-covering. As nearly all these coelenteria live in the water, or (as parasites) in some fluid that contains air, and as these fluids are con- stantly pouring in and out of the body, the exchange of gases is accomplished at the same time. But in the higher animals this is rarely found, only in the small animals of simple construction (such as the rotifers and other vermalia, and the smallest specimens of the mol- lusca and articulata). The majority of these coelomaria attain a considerable size, and so require special organs; these afford a larger surface for the exchange of gases in the limited space, and accomplish a very peculiar chemi- cal work as the localized organs of respiration. They fall into two groups according to the nature of the en- vironment; gills for breathing in water and lungs for breathing on land. The latter take the oxygen directly from the atmosphere, and the former from the water, in which atmosphere air is contained in solution. The instruments of water-respiration which we call gills (branchicu) are generally attenuated parts or proc- esses of the outer skin or the inner gastric skin ; hence we distinguish the two chief forms, external and inter- nal gills. Both are richly provided with blood-vessels which bring the blood from the body for the purpose of aeration. Cutaneous or external gills are especially found in the vertebrates, in the form of threads, combs, leaves, pencils, tufts of feathers, etc., which are drawn out from the entoderm as local processes of the outer skin, and afford a wide surface for the interchange of gases between the body and the water. In the mollusca there are usually a pair of comb-shaped gills near the 229 THE WONDERS OF LIFE heart; in the articulates there are several pairs, repeated in the different segments of the body. Gastric or in- ternal gills are peculiar to the vertebrates and the next- related tunicates, with a small group of the vermalia, the enteropneusta. In these the fore-gut or head-gut is converted into a gill-organ, the wall of which is pierced with gill-fissures; the water that has been taken in by the mouth passes away through the outer openings of these fissures. In the lower aquatic vertebrates (acrania, cyclostoma, and fishes) the gills are the sole organs of breathing; in the higher animals, that live in the air, they fall into disuse, and their place is taken by lungs. Nevertheless, heredity is so tenacious that we find from three to five pairs of rudimentary gill-clefts in the em- bryo right up to man, though they have long since ceased to have any function. This is one of the most interesting of the palingenetic facts that prove the de- scent of the amniotes (including man) from the fishes. The group of the aquatic echinoderms has some very peculiar features of respiration. Their body possesses an extensive water-duct, which takes in the sea-water and returns it by special openings (skin-pores or madre- porites). The many branches of these water-vessels or ambulacral vessels fill with water, especially the tiny feelers or feet, which extend from the skin in thousands; they serve at once for movement, feeling, and breathing. But many of the echinoderms have also special gills — the star-fish have small finger-shaped cutaneous gills on the back, the sea-urchins special leaf -shaped ambulacral gills, the sea-cucumbers internal gastric gills (tree-shaped branching internal folds of the rectum). The organs of air-breathing are called, in general, lungs (pulmones). Like the organs of water-breathing, they are formed sometimes from the external and some- times from the internal covering of the body. Cutaneous or external lungs are found in several groups of the 230 NUTRITION vertebrates. Among the mollusks the land - dwelling lung-snails have acquired a lung-sac by change in the work of the gill cavity: among the articulata the lung- spiders and scorpions have two or more trachea-lungs; that is to say, cutaneous sacs, in which are enclosed fan- wise a number of trachea-leaves. In the other air- breathing articulates (tracheata) we find, instead of these simple or branched, and often bushlike, air-tubes (trachecu), which spread through the whole body and conduct the air direct to the tissues. They take the air from without by special air-holes in the skin {stigmata and spiracida). The myriapods and insects generally have numbers of air-holes; the spiders only one or two, more rarely four, pairs. When these air-tube animals return to an aquatic life (as happens with the larvae of various groups of insects), the outer air-holes close up, and new thread-shaped or leaf-shaped trachea-gills are formed, which take the air from the surrounding water by osmosis. The oldest and lowest tracheata are the primitive air-tube animals, or protracheata, and form the link between the older annelids and the myriapods. They have a number of clusters of short air-tubes dis- tributed over the whole skin, and it is clear that these have been evolved from simple skin-glands by change of function. Gastric or internal lungs are only found in the higher animals, to which we give the name of quadrupeds (or tetrapoda), the amphibia and amniotes, and their fish- like ancestors, the dipneusta. These internal lungs are sac-shaped folds of the fore-gut, formed originally from the swimming-bladder (jiectocystis) of the fishes by change of function. This air-filled bladder, a sac-shaped appendage of the gullet, merely serves the purpose of a hydrostatic organ, by varying the specific weight, in the fishes. When the fish wishes to descend it contracts the bladder and becomes heavier; it rises to the top by 231 THE WONDERS OF LIFE inflating it again. The lungs were formed by the adapta- tion of the blood-vessels in the wall of the swimming- bladder to the interchange of gases. In the oldest living lung-fishes {ceratodtis) it is still a simple sac {mono- pneumones = onQ-hingQ6.) ; in the others the simple gullet- cavity divides early into a pair of sacs {dipnenmoncs, two-lunged). The wind-pipe {trachea — not to be con- fused with the organ of the same name in the tracheata) is formed by the lengthening of their stalk and strength- ening of it with cartilaginous rings. At the anterior end of the trachea we find already formed in the amphibia the larynx, the important organ of voice and speech. The function of removing unusable matter is not less important to the organism than breathing. Just as breathing gets rid of the poisonous carbonic acid, so the kidneys remove fluid and solid excreta in the shape of urine; these are partly acid (uric acid, hippuric acid, etc.), partly alkaline (urea, guanine, etc.). In most of the coelomaria special organs for removing these would be superfluous, as this is accomplished (like breathing) by the stream of water that is constantly passing through the whole body. But with the platodes we be- gin to find important excretory organs in the nephridia, a pair of simple and ramified canals which lie on either side of the gut, and open outward. These primitive renal canals are transmitted by the platodes to the vermalia, and by these to the higher stems of the coelomaria. In the latter they generally open by special funnels into the inner body-cavity, which serves as first receptacle for the urine. Their outer opening sometimes (primarily) goes through the outer skin at the back (excretory pores), sometimes (second- arily) to the rectum, and so out through the anus. The oldest articulates, the annelids, have a pair of nephridia in each segment of the body; each renal canal, or segmental canal, consists of three sections, an 232 NUTRITION inner funnel which opens into the body-cavity, a middle glandular section, and an external bladder that ejects the urine by contraction. The disposition of the renal system in the internally articulated vertebrates is very similar to this; but now complicated structures begin to appear, a pair of compact kidneys (roics), which are made up of a number of branching nephridia. Three gen- erations of kidneys succeed each other, as phylogenetic stages of evolution — first the primary fore-kidneys {protonc pJiros) , in the middle the secondary primitive kidneys {niesonephros), and last the tertiary after- kidneys {metanephros). The latter are only reached in the three highest classes of vertebrates, reptiles, birds, and mammals. Mollusks also have a couple of compact kidneys. They are developed from a pair of nephridia, the funnels of which open internally into the heart- pouch (the remainder of the reduced body-cavity); at the back they open outward. The Crustacea also have generally a pair of renal canals. On the other hand, the protracheata (the stem-forms of the air-tube animals) have segmental nephridia, a pair to each joint inherited from their annelid ancestors. The rest of the tracheata, the myriapods, spiders, and insects, have, instead of these, Malpighi tubes, funnel-shaped glands that arise from the entodermal rectum, sometimes one pair or less, sometimes a number in a cluster. While most plants are purely plasmodomous, and most animals plasmophagous, there are nevertheless in both organic kingdoms a number of species (especially the lower) whose metabolism has assumed peculiar forms by their relations to other organisms. To this class belong especially the saprosites and parasites. By saprosites are understood those plants and animals which feed entirely or mostly on the corpses of other animals, or the decomposed matter which is unfit for the food of higher animals. Among the unicellular 233 THE WONDERS OF LIFE protists many of the bacteria, especially, belong to this class, and also many fungilla (pJiycomycetes); among the metaphyta the fungi (mycetes), and among the metazoa the sponges. I have already spoken of the many peculiarities of metabolism in the ubiquitous bacteria; while many of them cause putrefaction, they at the same time feed on the parts of other organisms which have died. The fungi feed for the most part on the decayed remains of plants and the products of putre- faction which accumulate on the ground. In this character of scavengers they play the same important part on land as the sponges do at the bottom of the sea. But a number of small groups of the higher plants and animals have, as a secondary habit, turned to sapro- sitism. Among the metaphyta we have especially the monotropea (to which our native asparagus, nionotropa hypopitys, belongs) and many orchids (neottia, coral- lorhiza). As they find their plasm directly in the decayed matter in the woods, they have lost their chlorophyll and green leaves. Among the metazoa many of the vermalia, and some of the higher animals, such as the rain-worm and many tube-dwelling annelids (the mud-eaters, limicolcE), etc., live on putrid matter. The organs which their nearest relatives use for obtain- ing, breaking up, and digesting food (eyes, jaws, teeth, digestive glands) have been entirely or mostly lost by these saprosites. Many of them form a transitional type to the parasites. By parasites, in the narrower sense, we understand, in modern biology, only those organisms which live on others and derive their nourishment from them. They are numerous in all the chief divisions of the plant and animal kingdoms, and their modifications are of great interest in connection with evolution. No other circum- stance has so profound an influence on the organism as adaptation to a parasitic existence. Moreover, there is 234 NUTRITION no other section in which we can follow, step by step, the course of the degeneration which is caused, and show clearly the mechanical nature of the process. Hence the science of parasites — parasitology — is one of the soundest supports of the theory of descent, and provides an abundance of the most striking proofs of the much- contested inheritance of acquired characteristics. Among the unicellular organisms, the bacteria are the most conspicuous instances of manifold adaptation to parasitic habits. As we count these unnucleated protozoa among the oldest and simplest organisms, and trace them directly by metasitism to the plasmodomous chromacea, it is very probable that they turned to para- sitism very early in the history of life. Even a part of the monera (in which group we must place the bacteria on account of their lack of a nucleus) found it conven- ient and advantageous to prey on other protists and as- similate their plasm directly, instead of going through the laborious process of carbon assimilation themselves in the hereditary fashion. This is also true of the large class of the sporozoa or fungilla {gregarince, coccidia, etc.), real nucleated cells, which have adapted themselves in various ways to parasitic habits. Many of them live in the rectum, the coelum, or other organs of the higher animals (the gregarinae, especially in the articulates) ; others in the tissues (for instance, the sarcosporidia in the muscles of mammals, the coccidia and myxosporidia in the liver of vertebrates). A good many of them are "cell-parasites," and live inside the cells of other ani- mals, which they destroy; such are the hoemosporidia, which destroy the blood-cells in man, and so cause inter- mittent fever. Among the multicellular metaphyta it is particularly the fungi that have taken to parasitism in various ways. Many of them are, as is known, the most dangerous enemies of the higher animals and plants. The various 235 THE WONDERS OF LIFE species of fungi cause certain diseases by their poison- ous (chemical) action on the tissues of their host. It is well known how our most important cultivated plants, the vine, potato, corn, coffee, etc., are threatened by fungoid diseases; and this is also true of many of the lower and higher animals. It is probable that the fungi have been evolved polyphyletically by metasitism from the algas. Among the higher metaphyta we find parasitism in many different families, especially orchids, rhinantha- cea {orobranche, lathraca), convolvulacea {citsciUa), aris- tolochiacea, loranthacea (visctim, loranthus), rafffesiacea, etc. These various kinds of flowering-plants often grow to resemble each other by convergence (that is to say, by their common adaptation to parasitic life) ; they lose their green leaves, the plasmodomous chlorophyll of which is of no further use to them. Frequently rudi- mentary leaves are left on them in the form of colorless scales. For the purpose of clinging to the plants they live on, and penetrating into their tissues, they evolve special clinging apparatus (haustoria, suctorial cups, creepers). Their stalks and roots are also modified in a characteristic way. The whole productive force of these parasites is expended on their sexual organs; rafflesia has the largest flowers there are, more than a yard in diameter. Parasitism in the metazoa (in all groups) is even more frequent and interesting than in the metaphyta. The mollusks and echinoderms show the least disposition for it, and the platodes, vermalia, and articulates the most. Even among the gastrasada, the common ancestral group of the metaphyta, we find parasites (kyemaria and gas- tremaria). The protection they find inside their hosts is probably the reason why these oldest of the metazoa have remained unchanged to the present day. Real parasites are not numerous among the sponges and 236 / NUTRITION cnidaria. But they are very numerous among the platodes. The suctorial worms {trcmatodcs) Uve partly externally (as ectoparasites) on other animals and part- ly inside them (as endoparasites), and produce serious diseases in them. They have lost the vibratory coat of their free-living ancestors, the turbellaria, and acquired clinging apparatus instead. The tape-worms (ccstodes), which live entirely in the interior of other animals, and are descended from the suctorial worms, have lost their gastro-canal ; they are nourished by imbibition through the skin. The same degeneration is found in the itch- worms (acanthocephala) among the vermalia, the para- sitic snails {entoconcha) among the moUusks, and the root-crabs {rhizocephala) amon'g the Crustacea. The class of Crustacea affords the most numerous and most instructive examples of degeneration through parasitism, because in this class it is found polyphyleti- cally in very different orders and families, and because their highly organized body shows every stage of de- generation together in the different organs. The free- living Crustacea generally move about very rapidly and ingeniously; their numerous bones are well jointed and excellently adapted for the most varied methods of loco- motion (running, swimming, climbing, digging, etc.); their organs of sense are highly developed. As these are no longer used when they take to parasitism, they atrophy and gradually disappear. The younger Crustacea all proceed from the same characteristic form of the nauplhis, and swim freely about; later, when they settle down to parasitic habits, their organs of sense and loco- motion atrophy. As Fritz MiiUer-Desterro showed in his famous little work, For Dancin (1864), forty years ago, the Crustacea afford most luminous proofs of the theory of descent and selection, and of progressive heredity and the biogenetic law. These facts are the more important as the crab undergoes the same de- 237 THE WONDERS OF LIFE generation by parasitic habits in a number of different orders and families. From parasitism we must entirely distinguish that intimate life-union of two different organisms which we called symbiosis or mutualism. Here we have an as- sociation of two living things for their mutual benefit, while the parasite lives entirely at the expense of his host. Symbiosis is found among the protists, being very wide-spread among the radiolaria. In the gelati- nous envelope (calymma) which encloses the central cap- sule of their unicellular bodies we find a number of motionless yellow cells {zooxanthella) scattered. These are protophyta or (as it is said) "unicellular algae" of the class of paulotomea {palmcllacea). They receive protection and a home from the radiolaria, grow plas- modomously, and multiply by rapid segmentation. A large part of the starch-flour and the plasm which they form by carbon - assimilation goes as food directly to the radiolarium-host; the other part of the xanthella goes on growing and multiplying. Similar yellow zoo- xanthella or green zoochlorella are found as symbionta in the tissues of many animals. Our common fresh- water polyp {hydra viridis) owes its green color to the zoochlorella which live in great numbers on the ciliated cells of its entoderm (the digestive gut-epithelium). In general, however symbiosis is rarer in the metazoa than in the metaphyta. In the latter case it is the fundamental feature of a whole class of plants, the lichens. Each lichen consists of a plasmodomous plant (sometimes a protophyte, sometimes an alga) and a plasmophagous fungus. The latter affords a home, protection, and water to the green alga, which repays the service by providing food. REPRODUCTION Reproduction and generation — Sexual and asexual reproduction — Superfluous growth — Monogony — Self-cleavage — Bud- ding — Formation of spores — Amphigony — Ovum and sperm- cell — Hermaphrodite formation and separation of the sexes — Hermaphrodism and gonochorism of the cells — Monoclinism and diclinism — Monoecism and dioecism — - Alternation of sex-division — Sexual glands of the histona — Hermaphroditic glands — Sexual ducts — Generative organs — Parthenogenesis — Picdogenesis — Metagenesis — Hetero- genesis — Strophogenesis — Hypogenesis — Hybridism — Gen- eration of hybrids and the species — Graduation of forms of reproduction. WHILE nutrition secures the maintenance of the or- ganic individual, reproduction insures that of the organic species, or the group of definite forms which we distinguish from others by the name "species." All individuals are more or less restricted in the duration of their lives, and die off after the lapse of a certain time. The succession of individuals, connected by reproduc- tion and belonging to a species, makes it possible for the specific form itself to last for ages. In the end, how- ever, the species is temporary; it has no "eternal life." After existing for a certain period, it either dies or is converted by modification into other forms. The rise of new individuals by reproduction from parent organisms is a natural phenomenon with definite time-restriction. It cannot have continued from eter- nity on our planet, as the earth itself is not eternal, and 239 THE WONDERS OF LIFE even long after its formation was incapable of support- ing organic life on its surface. This only became pos- sible when the surface of the glowing planet had suffi- ciently cooled for liquid water to settle on it. Until this stage carbon could not enter into those combina- tions with other elements (oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen, and sulphur) which led to the formation of plasm. As I intend to deal with this process of archigoiiy, or spon- taneous generation, in a special chapter, I leave it for the present, and confine myself to the study of tocogony, or parental generation. The various forms of tocogony, or the reproduction of living things, are generally divided into two large groups ; on the one hand there is the simple form of asexual gen- eration (monogony), and on the other the complex form of sexual generation (amphigony). In asexual genera- tion the action of one individual only is needed, this providing a product of transgressive (redundant) growth which develops into a new organism. In sexual genera- tion it is necessary for two different individuals to unite in order to produce a new being from themselves. This amphigony (or generatio digenea) is the sole form of re- production in man and most of the higher animals. But in many of the lower animals and most of the plants we find also asexual multiplication, or monogony, by cleav- age or budding. In the lowest organisms, the monera and many of the protists, fungi, etc., the latter is the only form of propagation. Strictly speaking, monogony is a universal life-proc- ess; even the ordinary cell-cleavage, on which depends the growth of the histona, is a cellular monogony. Hence historical biology must say that monogony is the older and more primitive form of parental generation, and that amphigony was secondarily developed from it. It is important to emphasize this because, not only 240 REPRODUCTION some of the older writers, but even some recent ones, regard sexual generation as a universal function of or- ganisms, and declare that it dates from the very begin- ning of organic life. The complex and frequently very intricate phenomena of sexual generation, as we hnd them in the higher organ- isms, become intelligible to us when we compare them with the simpler forms of asexual generation at the low- est stages of life. We then learn that they are by no means unintelligible and supernatural marvels, but nat- ural physiological processes, which, like all others, may be traced to the action of simple physical forces. The form of energy which lies at the root of all tocogony is growth (crescentia). And as this phenomenon is also the cause, in the form of gravitation, of the formation of crystals and other inorganic individuals, we do away with another of the boundaries which people would es- tablish between organic and inorganic nature. Repro- duction is a kind of nutrition and growth of the organ- ism beyond the individual standard, building up a part of it into a whole. This limit of individual size is deter- mined for each species by two factors — the inner con- stitution of the plasm, which is inherited, and the de- pendence on the outer environment, which controls adaptation. When this limit has been passed, the trans- gressive growth takes the form of reproduction. Every species of crystal has also a definite limit of growth; when this is passed, new crystal-individuals are formed in the mother-water on the old individual, which grows no further. Asexual or monogenetic tocogony (also called "vegeta- tive multiplication") is always effected by a single or- ganic individual, and so must be traced to its transgres- sive growth. When this affects the entire body as a total growth, the whole dividing into two or more equal parts, we call the monogenetic process division (or scg- i6 241 THE WONDERS OF LIFE mentation). But when the growth is partial, and af- fects only a part of the individual, or when this special part separates from the generating organism in the form of a bud (gemma), the process is called budding or gemmation {gemmatio). Hence the essential difference between the two forms of generation is that in division the parent disappears in its partial products (children) ; these are of the same age and form. But in budding the generating parent retains its individuality; it is larger and older than the young bud. This important difference between division and gemmation, which is often overlooked, holds good both for protists (uni- cellulars) and histona (multicellulars). The fact that in division the individual as such is destroyed is a sufficient refutation of Weismann's theory of the immortality of the unicellulars. (See above, and also the Riddle, chapter xi.) Reproduction by division is by far the most common of all forms of propagation. It is the normal form of monogony, not only in many of the protists, but also in the tissue-cells which compose the tissues of the histona. It is, moreover, the sole method of propagation for most of the monera, both chromacea and bacteria, which are in consequence often comprised under the title of "cleavage-plants" (schizophyta). Self -cleavage is also found among the higher multicellular organisms — namely, the cnidaria (polyps, medusae). It usually takes the form of division into two parts (dimidiatio or hemit- omy), the body splitting into two equal halves. The plane of division is sometimes indefinite (fragmentary- cleavage), sometimes coincident with the long axis (length-cleavage), sometimes with the transverse axis, vertical to the long axis (transverse-cleavage), and less frequently with a diagonal axis (oblique-cleavage). When the segmentation of a cell proceeds so rapidly that the transverse-cleavage follows immediately on 242 REPRODUCTION the length-cleavage, and the two are at length made to coincide, twofold division is changed into fourfold division. And when the process is repeated in quick succession, and tlie body falls at last into a number of small and equal pieces, we have manifold division (polyt- omy) ; as in the spore - formation of the sporozoa and rhizopoda, and in the embryonic sac of the phanerogams. Asexual propagation by budding is chiefly distin- guished from segmentation by the fact that the deter- mining transgressive growth is only partial in the one and total in the other. The bud produced is, therefore, younger and smaller than the parent from which it issues; the latter may replace the lost part by regenera- tion and produce a number of buds simultaneously or successively without losing its individuality (whereas this is destroyed in division). Propagation by budding is rare among the protists, and more common among the histona — that is, with most of the tissue-plants and the lower, stock-forming, tissue-animals (coelenteria and vermalia). Most stocks (cormi) are formed by a sprout or person shooting out buds which remain united to it. The layer and shoots of tissue-plants are detached buds. The two chief kinds of gemmation are terminal and lateral. Terminal budding takes place at the end of the long axis, and is not far removed from transverse division (for instance, the strobilation of the acraspedae medusae and the chain tape-worms). Lateral budding is much more common; it determines the branching of trees and generally of complex plants, and also of the tree-shaped stocks of sponges, cnidaria (polyps, corals), bryozop, etc. A third form of asexual reproduction is the formation of spores or "germ-cells," which are usually produced in great numbers inside the organism, then detached from it, and developed into new organisms without needing fertilization. The spores are sometimes motion- 24.3 THE WONDERS OF LIFE less (rest-spores or paulospores) ; sometimes they have one or more lashes which enable them to swim about (rambling - spores or planospores). This monogenetic propagation is very common among the protists, both protophyta and protozoa. Among the latter the sporozoa (gregarinae, coccidia, etc.) are remarkable for the passing away of the whole unicellular organism in the formation of spores; in this case and in many of the rhizopods {mycetozoa) the process coincides with manifold cell- division. In other cases (radiolaria, thalamophora) only a portion of the parental cells is used for the production of spores Spore-formation is very common among the cryptogams ; here it usually alternates with sexual prop- agation. The spores are generally formed in special spore-capsules (sporangia). In the flowering plants (anthophyta) sporogony has disappeared. It is found at times in the tissue-animals (in the fresh-water sponges) ; in this case the sporangia are called gemmulcB. The essential feature of sexual generation is the coa- lescence of two different cells, a female ovum (egg-cell) and a male sperm-cell. The simple new cell which arises from the blending of these is the stem-cell (cytida) , the stem-mother of all the cells that make up the tissues of the histon. But even among the unicellular protists we find in many places the beginnings of sexual differen- tiation ; it is foreshadowed in the blending or copulation of two homogeneous cells, the gameta. We may con- ceive this process, or zygosis, as a peculiar and very favorable kind of growth, that is connected with a rejuvenescence of the plasm; the latter is enabled to propagate by repeated cleavage through the mixing of the two different plasma-bodies on either side (am- phimixis) . When these two gameta become unequal and differ in size and shape, the larger female body is called the macrogameton or macrogonidion, and the smaller, male part, the microgameton or microgonidion. Among 244 REPRODUCTION the histona the first is called the egg-cell {ovttlum), and the latter the sperm-cell {spcrmiiwi, or spermatozoon). As a rule the latter is a very mobile ciliated cell, the former an inert or amoeboid cell. The vibratory move- ments of the sperm-cells serve for approaching the ovulum in order to fertilize it. The qualitative difference between the two copulating sexual cells (goiwcyta), or the chemical difference be- tween the ovoplasm of the female and the sperm-plasm of the male cell, is the first (and often the only) condition of amphigony; subsequently we find in addition (in the higher histona) a very elaborate apparatus of secondary structures. With this chemical difference is associated a peculiar double form of sensitive perception and an attraction based thereon, which is called sexual chemo- taxis or erotic chemotropism. This "sex-sense" of the two gonocyta, or elective affinity of the male androplasm and the female gynoplasm, is the cause of mutual attrac- tion and union. It is very probable that this sexual sense-function, akin to smell or taste, and the movements it stimulates, are located in the cytoplasm of the two sex- cells, while heredity is the function of the caryoplasm of the nucleus. (Cf. the Antliropogeny, chapters vi. and vii.) The sexual difference between the two forms of gono- plasm, the ovoplasm of the female and spermoplasm of the male cell, is noticeable at the very beginning of sexual differentiation in the different sizes of the cop- ulating gameta, and later in their increasing diver- gence as to shape, composition, movement, etc. It leads further to the distribution of the germmal regions (in which the sex-cells are formed) into two different in- dividuals. When the ovum and the sperm-cell are pro- duced in one and the same individual, we call this an hermaphrodite; and when they are formed in two dif- ferent individuals (male and female), we call them monosexual, or gonochorists. In accordance with the 245 THE WONDERS OF LIFE various stages of individuality which we distinguished above (chapter vii.), we may indicate the following stages of hermaphrodism and gonochorism. Some groups of protists, especially the highly or- ganized ciliated infusoria (ciliata), are distinguished by having a separation of male and female plasm within the unicellular organism. The ciliata propagate, as a rule, in large numbers by repeated division (by indirect cell- cleavage). But this monogony has its limits, and has to be interrupted from time to time by amphigony, a rejuvenation of the plasm, which is effected by the conjugation of two different cells and the partial de- struction of their nuclear matter. By conjugation is meant the partial and momentary union of two different unicellulars, while copulation is a total and permanent coalescence. When two ciliated infusoria conjugate they place themselves side by side, and connect for a time by means of a bridge of plasm. A part of the nucleus of each has already divided into two portions, one of which functions as the female standing-nucleus (paulocaryon) and the other as the male travelling-nucleus (piano- caryon). The two mobile nuclei enter the plasm-bridge, and move through it, pushing against each other, into the body of the opposite cell ; they then coalesce with the deeper lying standing-nucleus. When a fresh nucleus has been thus formed (by amphimixis) in each of the copulating cells, they again separate. The two re- juvenated cells have once more acquired the power to propagate for a long time by division. This peculiar hermaphroditic formation of the cells, which distinguishes the ciliated infusoria and some other protists, and which we now know in its smallest details through the investigations of Richard Hertwig, Maupas, and others, is especially interesting because it proves that the chemical difference between the female gyno- plasm and the male androplasm can be found within a 246 REPRODUCTION single cell. This erotic division of labor is so impor- tant that formerly it was universally ascribed to two different cells. Recent accurate research, penetrating into the smallest visible processes of fertilization, has shown that the essential feature in the formation of a fresh individual (the stem-cell) is the blending of equal portions (hereditary parts) of the male and female nuclei ; the caryoplasm of the two copulating cells is the vehicle of heredity from the parents. The cytoplasm of the cell-body, on the other hand, serves the purposes of adaptation and nutrition. As a rule the cell-body of the ovulum is very large, and is, as a food-store, very richly provided with albumin, fat, and other nutritive matter (food-yolk); while the cytoplasm of the sperm-cell is very small, and generally forms a vibrating lash, with which it moves along and seeks the ovum. In most of the plants the female and male cells are produced by the same sprout, and in many of the lower animals by one and the same person. This kind of hermaphrodism in "individuals of the second order" is called monoclinism ("one-beddedness"). In many of the higher plants (monoecic stocks) and most of the higher animals we have diclinism (" two-beddedness") — in other words, the one sprout or person has only male, and the other sprout or person only female, organs — this is gonochorism of individuals of the second order. Mono- clinism is generally associated with sedentary life (and often necessary for it), and diclinism with free movement. Adaptation to parasitic habits also favors monoclinism; thus, the crabs, for instance, are for the most part gonochoristic individuals, but the creeping crabs {cirri- pedia), which have adopted sedentary (and to an extent parasitic) habits, have become hermaphrodites in con- sequence. Many intestinal parasites among the lower animals (such as tape-worms, suctorial worms, wonder- snails), which live isolated lives inside other animals, 247 THE WONDERS OF LIFE have to be hermaphroditic and able to fertilize themselves if the species is to be maintained. On the other hand, many hermaphroditic flowers, although they have both sorts of sex-organs, are incapable of fertilizing them- selves and have to receive this from insect visitors which carry the pollen from one flower to another. Individuals of the third order, which we call stocks cormi) in both the plant and animal worlds, also exhibit varying features in the sex-persons which compose them. When male and female diclinic sprouts or persons are found side by side on the same stock, we call this her- maphrodism of the cormi mo;za?aa ("one-housedness "); this is the case with most of the siphonophora and some of the corals. Dicecia (" two-housedness") is less com- mon : in this one stock has only male and the other only female sprouts or persons, as in poplars and osiers, most of the corals, and some of the siphonophora. The phys- iological advantages of crossing — the union of sex-cells of different individuals — favor progressive sex-division in the higher organisms. A comparative study of the features of hermaphro- dism and sex-division in the plant and animal worlds teaches us that both forms of sex-activity are often found in closely related organisms of one and the same group, sometimes even in different individuals of the same species. Thus, for instance, the oyster is usually gonochoristic, but sometimes hermaphroditic; and so with many other moUusks, vermalia, and articulata. Hence, the question often raised, which of the two forms of sex-division is original, is hardly susceptible of a general answer, or without relation to the stage of in- dividuality and the place in classification of the group under discussion. It is certain that in many cases her- maphrodism represents the original feature; for instance, in most of the lower plants and many of the stationary animals (sponges, polyps, platodes, tunicates, etc.). 248 REPRODUCTION Where we find exceptions in these groups, they are of secondary origin. It is equally certain, on the other hand, that in other cases the separation of the sexes is the primitive arrangement; as in siphonophorae, cteno- phorae, bryozoa, cirripedia, and mollusks. In these cases the hermaphrodism is clearly secondary in the sense that the hermaphrodites descend originally from gonochorists. It is only in a few sections of the lowest histona that the two kinds of sex-cells arise without a definite loca- tion in different parts of the simple tissue, as in a few groups of the lower algae and in the sj^onges. As a rule they are formed only at definite positions and in a special layer of the tissue-body, and mostly in groups, in the shape of sexual glands (gonadcs). These bear special names in different groups of the histona. The female glands are called archegonia in the crytogams, nnccllus (formed from the macrosporangia of the pteridophyta) in the phanerogams, and ovaries in the metazoa. The male glands are called antheridia in the crytogams, pollen-sacs (formed from the microsporangia of the ferns) in the phanerogams, and testicles (as spcrmaria) in the metazoa. In many cases, especially in aquatic lower animals, the ovula (as products of the ovaries) are discharged directly outward. But, in most of the higher organisms, special sexual ducts (i^onodnctus) have been formed to conduct both kinds of the gonocyta out of the organism. While the two kinds of sexual glands are usually located in different parts of the generating organism, there are, nevertheless, a few cases in which the sex-cells are formed directly and together from one and the same gland. These glands are called hermaphroditic glands. Such structures are very notable in several highly dif- ferentiated groups of the metazoa, and have clearly been developed from gonochoristic structures in lower 249 THE WONDERS OF LIFE forms. The class of crested medusae, or ribbed medusae (ctenophorae), contains glasslike, sea-dwelling cnidaria of a peculiar and complicated build, which probably descend from hydromedusae (or craspedota). But where- as the latter have very simple gonochoristic structures (four or eight monosexual glands in the course of the radial canals or in the gastric wall), in the ctenophorae the eight hermaphroditic canals run in a meridian arch from one pole of the cucumber-shaped body to the other. Each canal corresponds to a ciliary streamer, and forms ovaries at one border and testicles at the other; and these are so arranged that the eight intercostal fields (the spaces between the eight streamers) are alternately male and female. Still more curious are the hermaph- roditic glands of the highly organized, land - dwelling, and air-breathing lung-snails (pulnionata) , to which our common garden snail (arion) and vineyard snail (helix) belong. Here we have a hermaphroditic gland with a number of tubes, each of which forms ovaries in its outer part and sperma in the inner. Still the two kinds of sex-cells lead separately outward. In most of the lower and aquatic histona both kinds of sex-cells, when they are ripe, fall directly into the water, and come together there. But in most of the higher, and especially the terrestrial, organisms special exits or conducting canals have been formed for the sex- products, the sexual ducts (gonodtictus) ; in the metazoa the female have the general name of oviducts and the male spermaducts (or vasa deferentia). In the vivipa- rous histona special canals serve for the conveyance of the sperm to the ovum, which remains inside the moth- er's body; such are the neck of the archegonium in the cryptogams , the pistil in the phanerogams , and the vagina in the metazoa. At the outer opening of these conduct- ing canals special copulative organs are developed, as a rule. 250 REPRODUCTION When the ejected sex-cells do not directly encounter each other (as in many aquatic organisms), special structures have to be formed to convey the fertilizing sperm from the male to the female body. This process of copulation becomes important, as it is associated with characteristic feelings of pleasure, which may cause ex- treme psychic excitement; as sexual love it becomes, in man and the higher animals, one of the most powerful springs of vital activity. In many of the higher ani- mals (namely, vertebrates, articulates, and mollusks) there are also formed a number of glands and other auxiliary organs which co-operate in the copulation. The manifold and intimate relations which exist, in man and the higher animals (especially vertebrates and articulates), between their sexual life and their higher psychic activity, have given rise to plenty of "wonders of life." Wilhelm Bolsche has so ably described them in his famous and popular work, TJie Life of Love in Nature, that I need only refer the reader to it. I will only mention the great significance of what are called "secondary sexual characters." These characteristics of one sex that are wanting in the other, and that are not directly connected with the sexual organs — such as the man's beard, the woman's breasts, the lion's mane, or the goat's horns — have also an aesthetic interest; they have, as Darwin showed, been acquired by sexual selec- tion, as weapons of the male in the struggle for the female, and vice versa. The feeling of beauty plays a great part in this, especially in birds and insects; the beautiful colors and forms which we admire in the male bird of paradise, the humming-bird, the pheasant, the butterfly, etc., have been formed by sexual selection {of. the History of Creation). In various groups of the histona the male sex has become superfluous in the course of time; the ovula develop without the need of fertilization. That is par- 251 THE WONDERS OF LIFE ticularly the case in many of the platodes (trematodes) and articulates (crustacea and insects). In the bees we have the remarkable feature that it is only decided at the moment of laying the egg whether it is to be fertil- ized or not ; in the one event a female and in the other a male bee is formed from it. When Siebold proved at Munich tiiese facts of miraculous conception in various insects, he was visited by the Catholic archbishop of the city, who expressed his gratification that there was now a scientific explanation possible of the conception of the Virgin Mary. Siebold had, unfortunately, to point out to him that the inference from the parthenogenesis of the articulate to that of the vertebrate was not valid, and that all mammals, like all other vertebrates, repro- duce exclusively from impregnated ova. We also find parthenogenesis among the metaphyta, as in the chara crinita among the algae, the antennaria alpina and the alchemilla vulgaris among the flowering plants. We are, as yet, ignorant for the most part of the causes of this lapse of fertilization. Some light has been thrown on it, however, by recent chemical experiments (the effect of sugar and other water-absorbing solutions), in which we have succeeded in parthenogenetically developing unfertilized ova. In the higher animals the complete maturity and development of the specific form are requisite for repro- duction, but in many of the lower animals it has been observed recently that ovula and sperm-cells are even formed by the younger specimens in the larva stage. If impregnation takes place under these conditions, larvae of the same form are born. And when these larvae have afterwards reached maturity and reproduced in this form, we call the process dissogony ("double-genera- tion"). It is found in many of the cnidaria, especially the medusae. But if larvae propagate by unfertilized ova, and so reproduce their kind parthenogenetically, the 252 REPRODUCTION process is known as pccdogcncsis ("young-generation"). It is found particularly in the platodes (treniatodcs) and some of the insects (larva) of cccidomyca and other flies). In a large number of lower animals and plants sexual and asexual generation regularly alternate. Among the protists we find this alternation of generation in the sporozoa; among the metaphyta in the mosses and ferns; and among the metazoa in the cnidaria, platodes, tunicates, etc. Often the two generations differ con- siderably in shape and degree of organization. Thus, in the mosses the asexual generation is the spore-forming moss capsule {s porogoniiini) , while the sexual is the moss plant with stalk and leaves {cithnns). In the case of the ferns, on the other hand, the latter is spore-forming and monogenetic, while the thallus-formed, simple, and small fore-germ {protJialliiim) is sexually differentiated. In most of the cnidaria a small stationary polyp is devel- oped out of the ovum of the free-swimming medusa, and this polyp, in turn, generates by budding medusas, which reach sexual maturity. In the tunicates (salpa) a sexual social form alternates with an asexual solitary form; the chain-salpa of the former are smaller and differently shaped than the large individual salpa of the latter, which again generate chains by budding. This special form of metagenesis was the first to be observed, as it was in 1819 by the poet Chamisso, when he sailed round the world. In other cases (for instance, in the closely related doliolmn) a sexual generation alternates with two (or more) neutral ones. The explanation of these various forms of alternating generations is given in the laws of latent heredity (atavism), division of labor, and metamorphosis, and especially by the bio- genetic law. While in real metagenesis (alternation of generations in the strict sense) the asexual generation propagates by budding or spore-formation, this is done partheno- 253 THE WONDERS OF LIFE genetically in the cognate process of heterogenesis. This it is which, especially in many of the articulates, causes an immense increase of the species in a short time. Among the insects we have the leaf -lice (aphides), and among the Crustacea the water-fleas (daphnides), that propagate in great numbers during warm weather by unfertilized "summer-ova." It is not until the autumn that males appear and fertilize the large "winter-ova"; in the following spring the first parthenogenetic genera- tion issues from the winter eggs. The two heterogenetic generations are very different in the parasitic suctorial worms (trematodes). From the fertilized ovum of the hermaphrodite distoma we get simply constructed nurses (paedogenetic larvae), inside which cercaria are generated from unfertilized ova; these travel, and are afterwards converted (inside another animal) into distoma once more. I have given {General Morphology, chap, ii., p. 104) the name of strophogenesis to the complicated process of cell-reproduction, which we find in the ontogeny of most of the higher histona, both phanerogams and ccelomaria. In these there is not a real alternation of generations, as the multicellular tissue-forming organism develops direct- ly from the impregnated ovum. But the process resem- bles metagenesis in so far as the ontogenetic construction consists itself in a repeated division of the cells. Many generations of cells proceed by cleavage from the one stem-cell (the impregnated ovum) before two of these cells become sexually differentiated, and form a genera- tion of sexual cells. However, the essential difference consists in the fact that all these generations of cells — in the body of both the higher animals and the flowering plants — remain joined together as parts of a single bion (a unified physiological individual); but in the alternation of generations each group produced is made up of a number of bionta, which live as independent 254 REPRODUCTION forms — often so different from each other that they were formerly thought to be animals of separate classes, such as the polyps and medusae. Hence we must not describe the reproductive circle of the phanerogams as an al- ternation of generations, although it has started from the fern (by abbreviated heredity). All simple forms of sexual reproduction without alter- nation of generations are comprised under the title of hypogenesis. The generative cycle proceeds from ovum to ovum in one and the same bion or physiological individual. This form of development is usual with most of the higher animals and plants; it may proceed with or without metamorphosis. The younger forms which arise temporarily in the latter case, and are distin- guished from the sexually ripe form by the possession of the provisional (and subsequently disappearing) organs — larva organs (for instance, the tadpole or the pupa), are comprised under the general head of larvas. As a rule, only organisms of the same species seem to have sexual union and generate fertile progeny. This was formerly a rigid dogma, and served the purpose of defining the loose idea of the species. It was said: "When two animals or plants can have fertile offspring they belong to the same real species." This principle, which once afforded support to the dogma of the con- stancy of species, has long been discarded. We now know by numbers of sound experiments that not only two closely related species, but even two species of different genera, may have sexual intercourse in certain circumstances, and that the hybrids thus generated can have fertile offspring, either by union among themselves or with one of the parents. However, the disposition to hybridism varies considerably, and depends on the un- known laws of sexual affinity. This sexual affinity must be based on the chemical properties of the plasm of the copulating cells, but it seems to show a good deal of 255 THE WONDERS OF LIFE vagueness in its effect. As a rule, hybrids exhibit a combination of the features of both parents. It has been proved by many recent experiments that hybrids have a more powerful build and can repro- duce more strongly than pure offspring, whereas pure selection has generally in time an injurious effect. A freshening by the introduction of new blood seems to be good from time to time. Hence, it is just the reverse of what the former dogma of the constancy of species affirmed. The question of hybridism has, generally speaking, no value in defining the species. Probably many so-called "true species," which have relatively constant features, are really only permanent hybrids. This applies especially to lower sea-dwelling animals, the sexual products of which are poured into the water and swarm together in millions. As we know of various species of fishes, crabs, sea-urchins, and vermalia, that their hybrids are very easily produced and maintained by artificial impregnation, there is nothing to prevent us from believing that such hybrids are also maintained in the natural state. The short survey we have made of the manifold varieties of reproduction is sufficient to give an idea of the extraordinary wealth of this world of wonders. When we go more closely into details we find hundreds of other remarkable variations of the process on which the main- tenance of the species depends. But the most im- portant point of all is the fact that all the different forms of tocogony may be regarded as connected links of a chain. The steps of this long ladder extend uninter- ruptedly from the simple cell-division of the protists to the monogony of the histona, and from this to the com- plicated amphigony of the higher organisms. In the simplest case, the cell-cleavage of the monera, prop- agation (by simple transverse division) is clearly noth- ing more than transgressive growth. But even the pre- 256 REPRODUCTION liminary stage of sexual differentiation, the copulation of two equal cells (gamcta), is really nothing but a special form of growth. Then, when the two gameta become unequal in the division of labor, when the larger inert macrogameton stores up food in itself, and the smaller, mobile microgameton swims in search of it, we have already expressed the difference between the female ovum and the male sperm-cell. And in this we have the most essential feature of sexual reproduction. The reproduction of the organism is often regarded as a perfect mystery of life, and as the vital function which most strikingly separates the living from the lifeless. The error of this dualistic notion is clear the moment one impartially considers the whole gradation of forms of reproduction, from the simplest cell-division to the most elaborate form of sexual generation, in phylogenetic connection. It is obvious all through that transgressive growth is the starting-point in the formation of new individuals. But the same must be said of the multipli- cation of inorganic bodies — the cosmic bodies on the larger scale, crystals on the smaller scale. When a rotating sun passes a certain limit of growth by the constant accession of falling meteorites, nebulous rings are detached at its equator by centrifugal force, and form into new planets. Every inorganic crystal, too, has a certain limit of individual growth (determined by its chemical and molecular constitution). However much mother-water you add, this is never passed, but new crystals (daughter-crystals) form on the mother- crystal. In other words, growing crystals propagate. 17 XII MOVEMENT Mechanics as the science of motion (kinematics and phoron- omism) — Chemistry of vital movement — Active and passive movements — Undulatory movement — Mechanism of imbibition — Autonomous and reflex movements — Will and willing — Mixed movements — Movements of growth — Direction of the vital movement — Direction of the crystal- lizing force — Direction of cosmic motion — Movements of protists — Amoeboid, myophenous, hydrostatic, secretory, vibratory movements: cilia and lashes — Movements of histona, metaphyta, and metazoa — Locomotion of tissue animals : ciliary motion and muscular movements — Muscles of the skin — Active and passive organs of movement — Radiata, articulata, vertebrata, mammalia — Human move- ments. ALL things in the world are in perpetual motion. L The universe is a perpetuunt mobile. There is no real rest anywhere; it is always only apparent or relative. Heat itself, which constantly changes, is merely motion. In the eternal play of cosmic bodies countless suns and planets rush hither and thither in infinite space. In every chemical composition and decomposition the atoms, or smallest particles of matter, are in motion, and so are the molecules they compose. The incessant metabolism of the living substance is associated with a constant movement of its particles, with the building up and decay of plasma-molecules. But here we must disregard all these elementary kinds of movement, and be content with a brief consideration of those forms of 258 MOVEMENT motion which are peculiar to organic Hfe, and a com- parison of them with the corresponding motions of in- organic bodies. The science of motion, or mechanics, is now taken in very different senses: (i) in the widest sense as a phi- losophy of life [generally called mechanism or mechanic- ism in England], equivalent to either monism or ma- terialism; (2) in the stricter sense as the physical science of motion, or of the laws of equilibrium and movement in the whole of nature (organic and inorganic); (3) in the narrowest sense as part of physics, or dynamics, the science of moving forces (in opposition to statics, the science of equilibrium; (4) in the purely mathemat- ical sense as a part of geometry, for the mathematical definition of magnitudes of movement; and (5) in the biological sense as phoronomy, the science of the movements of organisms in space. However, these definitions are not yet universally adopted, and there is a good deal of confusion. It would be best to follow the lead of Johannes Miiller, as we are going to do here, and restrict the name phoronomy to the science of the vital movements which are peculiar to organisms, in contrast to kinematics, the exact science of the inorganic movements of all bodies. The real material object of phoronomy is the plasm, the living matter that forms the material substratum of all active vital movements. On our monistic principles the inner nature of organic life consists in a chemical process, and this is deter- mined by continuous movements of the plasma-mole- cules and their constituent atoms. As we have already considered this metabolism in the tenth chapter, we need do no more here than point out that both the gen- eral phenomena of molecular plasma-movement and their special direction in the various species of plants and animals can be reduced in principle to chemical laws, and are subject to the same laws of mechanics as all 259 THE WONDERS OF LIFE chemical processes in organic and inorganic bodies. In this we emphasize our opposition to vitaUsm, which sees in the direction of plasma-movement the supernatural influence of a mystical vital force or of some ghostly "dominant" (Reinke). We agree with Ostwald, who also reduces these complex movements to the play of energy in the plasm — that is to say, in the last instance to modifications of chemical energy. In regard to the visible movements of the living things which concern us at present, we must first distinguish passive and ac- tive, and subdivide the latter into reflex and autonomous. Many movements of the living organism which the inexpert are inclined to attribute to life itself are purely passive; they are due either to external causes which do not proceed from the living plasm, or to the physical composition of the organic but no longer living sub- stance. Purely passive movements, which play an im- portant part in bionomy and chorology, comprise such as the flow of water and the rush of the wind; they cause considerable changes of locality and "passive" migra- tions of animals and plants. Purely physical, again, is what is known as the Brownian molecular movement which we observe with a powerful microscope in the plasm of both dead and living cells. When very fine granules (for instance, of ground charcoal) are equally distributed in a liquid of a certain consistency, they are found to be in a constant shaking or dancing movement. This movement of the solid particles is passive, and is due to the shocks of the invisible molecules of the fluid which are continually impinging upon each other. In the rhizopods — the remarkable protozoa whose unicellu- lar organism sheds so much light on the obscure wonders of life — we notice a curious streaming of the granules in the living plasm. Within the cytoplasm of the amoebae particles travel up and down in all directions. On the long thin plasma-threads or pseudopodia which 260 MOVEMENT stream out from the unicellular body of the radiolaria and thalamophora, thousands of fine particles move about, like promenaders in a street. This movement does not come from the passive granules, but from the active invisible molecules of the plasm, which are always changing their relative positions. Thus also the move- ments of the blood-cells which we can see with the micro- scope in the circulation of a young transparent fish, or in the tail of a frog-larva, are not due to the action of the blood-cells themselves, but to the flow of the blood caused by the beat of the heart. An important factor in the life of many organisms, especially the higher plants, is the physical phenomenon called imbibition; it consists in the penetration of water between the molecules of solid bodies (drawn to them by molecular attraction), and the consequent displace- ment of the molecules by the fluid. In this way the volume of the solid body is increased, and movements are produced which may have the appearance of vital processes. The energy of these imbibitional bodies is notoriously very powerful; we can, for instance, split large blocks of stone by the insertion of a piece of wood dipped in water. As the cellulose membrane of plant- cells has this property of imbibition in a high degree (either in the living or the dead cell), the movements it causes are of great physiological importance. This is especially the case when the imbibition of the cell wall is one-sided, and causes a bending of the cell. In con- sequence of the unequal strain in the drying of many fruits, they split open and project their seeds to some distance (as do the poppy, snap-dragon, etc.). The moss-capsules also empty their spores as a result of im- bibition-curving (in the teeth of the openings of the spore-cases). The hygroscopic points of the heron-bill {crodiiim) curl up in the dry state and stretch out when moist; hence they are used as hygrometers in the con- 261 THE WONDERS OF LIFE stniction of meteorological huts. The so-called "resur- rection plants" {anastatica, the rose of Jericho, and selaginella lepidophylla), which close up like a fist when dry, spread their leaves out flat when moistened (the leaves imbibing strongly on the inner side). There is no more real case of "resuscitation" (as many believe) in these cases than in the mythological resurrection of the body. However, these phenomena of imbibition are not active vital processes; they are independent of the living plasm, and due solely to the physical constitu- tion of the dead cell-membranes. In contrast with these passive movements of organ- isms, we have the active movements which proceed from the living plasm. In the ultimate analysis, it is true, these may be reduced to the action of physical laws just as well as the passive movements. But the causes of them are not so clear and obvious; they are connected with the complicated chemical molecular processes of the living plasm, of the physical regularity of which we are now fully convinced, though their complicated mech- anism is not yet understood. We may divide into two groups the many different movements, which are called vital in this stricter sense, and were formerly regarded as evidences of the presence of a mystic vital force, according as the stimulus — the sensation of which is caused by the movement — is directly perceptible or not. In the first case, we have stimulated (or reflex or para- tonic) movements, and in the second voluntary (auton- omous or spontaneous) movements. As the will ap- pears to be free in the latter, they have been left out of consideration by many physiologists, and handed over to the treatment of the metaphysical psychologist. On our monistic principles this is a grave error; nor is it improved when " psychonomism " appeals to a false theory of knowledge. On the contrary, the conscious will (and conscious sensation) is itself a physical and 262 MOVEMENT chemical process like unconscious and involuntary move- ment (and unconscious feeling). They are both equally subject to the law of substance. However, only the external stimuli which cause reflex movements are known to us to any great extent and experimentally recognizable; the internal stimuli, which affect the will, are mostly unknown, and are not directly accessible to investigation. They are determined by the compHcated structure of the psychoplasm, which has been gradually acquired by phylogenetic processes in the course of millions of years. The great problem of the will and its freedom — the seventh and last of Dubois-Reymond's world-riddles — has been dealt with fully in the Riddle (chapter vii.). But as we still meet with the most glaring contradictions and confusion in regard to this difficult psychological question, I must touch upon it briefly once more. In the first place, I would remind the reader that it is best to restrict the name "will" to the purposive and con- scious movements in the central nervous system of man and the higher animals, and to give the name of impulses (tropisms) to the corresponding unconscious processes in the psychoplasm of the lower animals, as well as of the plants and protists. For it is only the complicated mechanism of the advanced brain structure in the higher animals, in conjunction with the differentiated sense- organs on the one side and the muscles on the other, that accomplishes the purposive and deliberate actions which we are accustomed to call acts of will. But the distinction between voluntary (autonomous) and involuntary (reflex) movements is as difficult to carry out in practice as it is clear in theory. We can easily see that the two forms of movement pass into each other without any sharp boundary (like conscious and unconscious sensation). The same action, which seems at first a conscious act of the will (for instance, in 263 THE WONDERS OF LIFE walking, speaking, etc.), may be repeated the next moment as an unconscious reflex action. Again, there are many important mixed or instinctive movements, the impulse to which comes partly from internal and partly from external stimuli. To this class belong especially the movements of growth. Every natural body that grows increases its extent, fills a larger part of space, and so causes certain move- ments of its particles; this is equally true of inorganic crystals and the living organism. But there are im- portant differences between the growth in the two cases. In the first place, crystals grow by the external ap- position of fresh matter, while cells grow by the intus- susception of fresh particles within the plasm (cf. chapter X.). In the second case, in growth, which determines the whole shape of the organism, two important factors always co-operate, the inner stimulus, which depends on the specific chemical constitution of the species, and is transmitted by heredity, and the external stimulus which is due to the direct action of light, heat, gravity, and other physical conditions of the environment, and is determined by adaptation (phototaxis, thermotaxis, geotropism, etc.). A peculiar property of many vital movements (but by no means all) is the definite direction they exhibit; these are generally called purposive movements. For the teleologist they afford one of the chief and most welcome proofs of the dualistic theory of the older and the modern vitalism. Baer, especially, has laid stress on the purposiveness of all vital movement. It has been given a more precise expression recently by Reinke. His "dominants" are "intelligent directive forces," es- sentially different from all forms of energy or natural forces, and not subject to the law of substance. These metaphysical "vital spirits" are much the same as the immortal soul of dualistic psychology or the divine 264 MOVEMENT emanations of ancient theosophy. They are supposed not only to regulate the special development and con- struction of every species of animal and plant, and direct it to a predetermined end, but also to control all the various movements of the organism and its organs down to the cells. These " hyperenergetic forces " are equiva- lent to the "organizing principle" and the "unconscious will" of Edward Hartmann, the "arranging and con- trolling protoplasmic forces" of Hanstein and others. All these metaphysical, supernatural, and teleological ideas, like the older mystic notion of a special vital force, rest on a perversion of judgment by the apparent freedom of will and purposiveness of organization in the higher organisms. These thinkers overlook the fact that this purposiveness can be traced phylogenetically to simple physical movements in the lower organisms. Moreover, they overlook or deny the definite direction of inorganic forms of energy, though this is just as clear in the origin of a crystal as in the composition of the whole world-structure, in the direction of the mind as in the orbit of a planet. Hence it is important to bear in mmd always these two forms of mechanical energy, and emphasize their identity with the direction of vital movement. The force of gravitation which is at work in crystal- formation in the simple chemical body exhibits just as definite a direction as that which appears in the plasm in cell-construction. In this and other respects the comparison of the cell with the crystal, which was made even by the founders of the cell-theory, Schleiden and Schwann, in 1838, is thoroughly justified, though it is not correct in some other aspects. When the crystal is formed in the mother-water, the homogeneous particles of the chemical substance arrange themselves in a per- fectly definite direction and order, so that mathematical planes of symmetry and axes arise within, and definite 265 THE WONDERS OF LIFE angles at the surface. On the strength of this, modern crystallography distinguishes six different systems of crystals. But, in different conditions, the same sub- stance may crystallize in two or even three different systems (dimorphism and trimorphism of the crystal) ; thus, for instance, carbonate of lime crystallizes as calc- spar in the hexagonal, and as arragonite in the rhombic system. If Reinke would be consistent, he ought to postulate a "dominant" for every crystal, to control the order and direction of the particles in its formation. He makes the curious statement (in 1899) that direction "is not a measurable magnitude" like energy, and so is not subject, like it, to the law of substance. We can mathematically determine the direction of the con- structive force in the crystal just as well as in the cell. If we comprise under the head of cosmokinesis the whole of the movements of the heavenly bodies in space, we cannot deny that they have a definite direction in detail, although our knowledge of this is still very incomplete. We can calculate the distances and speeds and movements of the planets round the sun with mathematical accuracy; and we gather from our astro- nomical observations and calculations that a similar regularity prevails in the movements of the other count- less bodies in infinite space. But we do not know either the first impulse to these complex movements or their final goal. We can only conclude from the great dis- coveries of modern physics, supported by spectrum analysis and celestial photography, that the universal law of substance on the one side and the law of evolution on the other control the gigantic movements of the heavenly bodies just as they do the living swarm of tiny organisms that have inhabited our little planet for milHons of years. Reinke ought, consistently, to admire the cosmic intelligence of the Supreme Being in these movements of the cosmic masses and its emanations, 266 MOVEMENT the "dominants," in the actual direction of their move- ments, as much as he does in the plasma-flow in the tiny organism. The manifold gradation of vital movement which we find everywhere in the higher organisms is not without expression even in the protist realm. In this respect the chromacea, the simplest forms of vegetal monera, and the bacteria, which we regard as corresponding animal forms, developed from the former by metasitism, are of great interest. As microscopic scrutiny fails to detect any purposive organization in these unnucleated cells, and it is impossible to discover different organs in their homogeneous plasma-body, we have to look upon their movements as direct effects of their chemical molecular structure. But the same must be said also of a number of nucleated cells, both among the protoph- yta and the protozoa; only in this case the structure is less simple, in so far as both the nucleus itself and the surrounding cell-body exhibit, in indirect division, com- plicated movements in the plasm (caryokinesis). Apart from these, however, there is nothing to be seen in many unicellular beings (e.g., paulotomea, or calcocytea) that we need call "vital movement." On the border between the organic and inorganic worlds we have, as regards movement, the simplest forms of the chromacea, chroo- coccacea. We can see no vital movement in these structureless particles of plasm except slight changes of form, which occur when they multiply by cleavage. The internal molecular movements of the living matter, which effect their simple plasmodomous metabolism and growth, lie beyond our vision. The reproduction itself, in its simplest form of self -cleavage, seems to be merely a redundant growth, exceeding the limit of individual size for the homogeneous plasma - globule {cf. chapters ix. and x.). The great majority of the protists have the appear- 267 THE WONDERS OF LIFE ance of real, nucleated cells. Hence we have to distin- guish two different forms of movement in the unicellular organism — the inner movement in the caryoplasm of the nucleus and the outer in the cytoplasm of the cell-body; the two enter into close mutual relations during the remarkable process of partial resolution of the nucleus (caryolysis). In this modification and partial dissolution of their constituents we observe, during indirect cell- division, certain complicated movements (the signifi- cance of which is as yet entirely unknown), that are accomplished by both the granules of chromatin and the threads of achromin, and which are comprised under the head of nuclear movements (caryokinesis). It has lately been attempted to explain them on purely physical principles. The same may be said of the internal flow of the plasm which we find in the plasmodia of the amoebae and mycetozoa, and in the endoplasm of many of the protophyta and protozoa The slow displacement of the molecules of plasm which is at the bottom of these plasma-movements also causes a variety of external changes of form in simple naked cells. Variable processes like folds or fingers (the "fold-feet," lobopodia) appear on their surface. As they are best observed in the common amoebae (naked nucleated cells of the simplest kind), they are called amoeboid movements. With these is connected the variable movement of the larger rhizopods, the radiolaria and thalamophora, in which hundreds of fine threads radiate from the surface of the naked plasma-body. A number of recent experts on the rhizopods, such as Biitschli, Richard Hertwig, Rhumbler, and others, have attempted to trace to purely physical causes this vary- ing formation of pseudopodia, and their branching and netlike structure (without definite direction). It is more difficult to do this in the case of the most highly differentiated of the protozoa, the infusoria. 268 MOVEMENT With these the free movement of the unicellular pro- tozoon is farther advanced through the formation of permanent hairlike processes (long single lashes in the flagellata, and a number of short lashes in the ciliata) on the cell-surface and the movement of these by con- traction and expansion, like the limbs, tentacles, and bones of the higher animals. The apparent spontaneity and various modulation in the ever-changing move- ments of these cell-feet is, in many of the infusoria, so like the autonomous voluntary movements in the metazoa that several experts on the infusoria have been moved on this account to ascribe individual (and even conscious) souls to them. Hence the difference be- tween the various kinds of living movement is already very considerable before we leave the kingdom of the protists. On the one hand, the lowest monera (chro- macea) join on directly to inorganic phenomena. On the other hand, the highly differentiated infusoria (ciliata) show so great a resemblance to the higher animals in their dift'erentiated and autonomous move- ments that they have been credited with the possession of "free-will." There is no such thing as a sharp division. In a large section of the higher protozoa differentiated organs of movement are developed, which may be com- pared to the muscles of the metazoa. In the cytoplasm threadlike, contractile structures are formed, and these have, like the muscular fibres of the metazoa, the power to contract and expand again in definite directions. These myophaena or myonema form, in many of the infusoria, both ciliata and flagellata, a special thin layer of parallel or crossed fibres underneath the exo- plasm or the hyaline skin-layer of the cell. The metab- olic body of the infusorium may be altered in various ways by the autonomous contraction of these. Special instances of these myophaena are the myopJirisca of the acantharia — contractile threads which surround the 269 THE WONDERS OF LIFE radial needles of these radiolaria like a crown. They are found in their outer gelatine envelope, the calymma, and by their contraction extend it, and so lessen the specific gravity. Many of the aquatic protophyta and protozoa have the power of autonomous and independent locomotion, and this often has the appearance of being voluntary. Among the simplest fresh-water protozoa are the arcel- lina or thecolobosa {difjittgia, arcella), little rhizopods that are distinguished from the naked amoebae by the possession of a firm envelope. They usually creep about in the slime at the bottom, but in certain circumstances rise to the surface of the water. As Wilhelm Engel- mann has shown, they accomplish this hydrostatic move- ment by means of a small vesicle of carbonic acid, which expands their unicellular body like an air-balloon; the specific weight of the cell-body, which is of itself heavier than water, is sufficiently lowered by this. The same method is followed by the pretty radiolaria which live floating (as plankton) at various depths of the sea. Their unicellular (originally globular) body is divided by a membrane into a firm inner central capsule and a soft outer gelatine covering. The latter, known as the calymma, is traversed by a number of water- vesicles or vacuoles. As a result of an osmotic process, carbonic acid may be secreted or pure water (without the salt of the sea-water) be imbibed in these vacuoles; by this means the specific gravity of the cell is lessened, and it rises to the surface. When it desires to make itself heavier and sink, the vacuoles discharge their lighter contents. These hydrostatic movements of the radio- laria (for which the myophrisca, still more complicated structures, have been developed in the acantharia) at- tain by simple means the same end that is accomplished in the siphonophora and fishes by air-filled and volun- tarily contractile swimming-bladders. 270 MOVEMENT Numbers of the unicellulars alter their position very characteristically by secreting a thick mucus at one side of their body and fastening this to the ground. If the secretion continues, a longish jelly-like stalk is produced by which the cell slowly pushes itself along, like a boat with a rowing-pole. This secretory locomotion is found, among the protophyta, in the desmidiacea and diatomes, and in some of the gregarinae and rhizopods among the protozoa. The peculiar rolling movements of the os- cillaria (threadlike chains of blueish-green unnucleated cells, closely related to the chromacea) are also effected by the secretion of mucus. On the other hand, it is probable that the sliding movements of many of the diatomes are due to fine processes (vibratory hairs?) in the plasm, which proceed either out of the seams (raphe) of the bivalvular silicious shells or through the fine pores in them. Especially important in the easy and rapid locomotion of many unicellulars is the formation of fine hairlike processes at the surface of the body; in the broadest sense, they are called vibratory hairs. If only a few whiplike threads are formed, they are called whips (flagella); if many short ones, lashes (cilia). Flagelli- form movement is found in some of the bacteria, but especially in the mastigophorous "whip-infusoria," in the mastigota among the protophyta, and the flagellata among the protozoa. As a rule, we have in these cases one or two (rarely more) long and very thin whip- shaped processes, starting from one pole of the long axis of the oval, round, or long cell-body. These whips (flagella) are set in vibratory motion (apparently often voluntary) in various ways, and serve not only for swim- ming or creeping, but also for feeling and securing food. Similar whip-cells (cclluhc flagcllatcc) are also found very commonly in the body of tissue-animals, usually packed together in an extensive layer at the inner or outer sur- 271 THE WONDERS OF LIFE face (ciliated epithelium). If single cells are released from the group, they may live independently for some time, continuing their movements and resembling free infusoria. The same may be said of the travelling spores of many of the algae, and of the most remarkable of all ciliated cells — the spermia or spermatozoa of plants and animals. As a rule they are cone-shaped, having an oval or pear-shaped (though often also rod-shaped) head, which tapers into a long and thin thread. When their lively movements were first noticed in the male seminal fluid (each drop of which contains millions of them) two hun- dred years ago, they were thought to be real indepen- dent animalcules, like the infusoria, and so obtained their name of seed-animals (spermatozoa). It was a long time (sixty years ago) before we learned that they are de- tached glandular cells, which have the function of fer- tilizing the ovum. It was discovered at the same time that similar vibratory cells are found in many of the plants (algae, mosses, and ferns). Many of the latter (for instance, the spermatozoids of the cycadea) have, instead of a few long whips, a number of short lashes (cilia), and resemble the more highly developed ciliated infusoria (ciliata). The ciliary movement of the infusoria is held to be a more perfect form of vibratory movement, because the many short lashes found on them are used for different purposes, and have accordingly assumed different forms in the division of labor. Some of the cilia are used for running or swimming, others for grasping or touching, and so on. In social combinations we have the ciliated cells of the ciliated epithelium of the higher animals — for instance, in the lungs, nostrils, and oviducts of verte- brates. In the unicellular, non-tissue forming protists, all the vital movements seem to be active functions of the plasm 272 MOVEMENT of the single cell; but in the histona, the multicellular tissue-forming organisms, they are the outcome of the combined movements of the many cells which compose the tissue. Careful anatomic study and experimental physiological scrutiny of the motor processes are, there- fore, first directed, in the case of the histona, to clearing up the nature and activity of the special cells which com- pose the tissue, and then the structure and functions of the tissue itself. When we start from this point, and survey the manifold active motor phenomena of the histona as a whole, we see at once an essential agree- ment in the phoronomy of the two kingdoms of the metaphyta and metazoa, in the sense that at the lower stages the chemical and physical character of the motor processes can be clearly shown and can be traced to an interchange of energy in the plasm of the cells that make up the tissue. In the higher stages, however, we find striking differences, the voluntary character of many autonomous movements being very conspicuous in the higher animals, and thus the great problem of the free- dom of the will is added to the purely physiological questions of stimulated movement, growth-movement, etc. Moreover, the movements of the metazoa are much more varied and complicated than those of the metaph- yta, in consequence of the higher differentiation of their sense-organs and the centralization of their ner- vous system. The former have generally free locomotion and the latter not. The special mechanism of the or- gans of movement is also very different in the two groups. In most of the metazoa the chief motor organs are the muscles, which have developed in the highest degree the power of definitely directed contraction and expansion. In most of the metaphyta, on the other hand, the chief part of the movements depend on the strain of the living plasm, or what is called the turgor z8 273 THE WONDERS OF LIFE or expansibility of the plant-cells. This is effected by the osmotic pressure of the internal cell-fluid and the elasticity of the cellulose wall, which is thus expanded. Nevertheless, in both cases — and in all "vital" phenom- ena — the real cause of the process is, in the ultimate analysis, the chemical play of energy in the active plasm. The metaphyta, with few exceptions, are fixed in one spot for life, or only mobile for a short time when they are young. In this they resemble the lower metazoa, the sponges, polyps, corals, bryozoa, etc. They have not free locomotion. The motor phenomena which we find in them affect only special parts or organs. They are mostly reflex or paratonic, and due to external stimuli. Only a few of the higher plants exhibit autono- mous or spontaneous movement, the stimulating cause of which is unknown to us, and which may be compared to the apparently voluntary actions of the higher ani- mals. The lateral feather-leaves of an Indian butter- fly flower {hedysarmn gyrans) move in circles through the air, like a pair of arms swinging, without any exter- nal cause ; they complete a circle in a couple of minutes. Variations in the intensity of light have no effect on them. Similar spontaneous movements of the leaves of several species of clover (trifolium) and sorrel {oxalis) are performed only in the dark, not in the light. The terminal leaf of the meadow-clover repeats its rotation, which describes more than one hundred and twenty de- grees of an arc, every two to four hours. The mechani- cal cause of these spontaneous "variation movements" seems to lie in variations of expansibility. Voluntary and autonomous turgescence-movements of this kind are only observed in a few of the higher plants, but stimulated movements that are accomplish- ed by the same mechanism are very common in the vegetal world. We have, especially, the well - known "sleep," or nyktitropic movements, of many plants. 274 MOVEMENT Many leaves and flowers hold themselves vertically to the streaming rays of the sun. When darkness comes on they contract, and the calices of the flowers close. Many flowers are open for only a few hours a day. The mechanism of turgescence, which effects these swelling movements, consists in the co-operation of the osmotic pressure of the internal cell-fluid and the elasticity of the strained cell-membrane enclosing the cytoplasm. The strain of the outer cellulose membrane on the plas- matic primordial sac within it grows so much on the accession of osmotically active matter that the internal pressure is equal to several atmospheres, and the elastic strained membrane stretches from ten to twenty per cent. When water is withdrawn again from one of these swollen or turgescent cells, the membrane con- tracts; the cell becomes smaller, and the tissue looser. Other stimuli besides light (heat, pressure, electricity) may produce these expansional variations, and, as a consequence of it, certain reflex movements (or para- tonic variational movements). The most striking and famihar examples are the flesh-eating fly-trap {dioncea musciptila) and the sensitive plant {mimosa pudica); their contraction is caused by mechanical stimuli, shak- ing, pressure, or the touching of the leaves. Most of the higher animals have the power of free and voluntary locomotion. It is, however, wanting in some of the lower classes, which spend the greater part of their life at the bottom of the water, like plants. Hence these were formerly held to be vegetable — thus the sponges, polyps, and corals among the coelenteria. A number of classes of the coelomaria have also adopted the stationary life, such as the bryozoa and the spiro- branchia among the vermalia, many mussels (oysters, etc.), the actinia among the tunicates, the sea-lilies (crinoidea) among the echinoderms, and even higlily organized articulata, such as the tube-worms (tubicolcu), 275 THE WONDERS OF LIFE among the annelids, and the crawHng crabs {cirripedia), among the Crustacea. All these stationary metazoa move freely in their youth, and swim about in the water as gastruke, or in some other larva form. They have taken only gradually to stationary habits, and have been considerably modified, and often greatly degenerated, in consequence; for instance, in the loss of the higher sense-organs, the bones, and even of the whole head. Arnold Lang has shown this very clearly in his excellent work on the influence of stationary life on animals. The study of these retrogressive metamorphoses is very important for the theory of progressive heredity and selection; it also shows the great value of free locomo- tion for the higher sensitive and intellectual develop- ment of the animals and man. In many of the lower aquatic metazoa the surface of the body is covered with vibratory epithelium — that is to say, with a layer of skin-cells which bear either one long whip (fiagellum) or several short lashes (cilia). Flagellated epithelium is especially found in the cnidaria and platodes ; ciliated epithelium mostly in the vermalia and mollusca. As the lashing motion of these hairlike processes brings a constant stream of fresh water to the surface of the body, they first of all effect respiration through the skin. But in many of the smaller metazoa they also serve the purpose of locomotion, as in the gastraeads, the turbellaria, the rotifera, the nemertina, and the young larvae of many other metazoa. The vibratory apparatus reaches its highest development in the ctenophora. The extremely delicate and soft body of these gherkin-shaped cnidaria swims slowly in the water by means of the strokes of thousands of tiny oar-blades. They are arranged in eight longitudinal rows which stretch from the mouth to the opposite pole. Each oar- blade consists of the long hair-lashes of a group of epithelial cells glued together. 276 MOVEMENT The chief motor organs in the metazoa are the muscles which constitute the "flesh" of the body. Muscular tissue consists of contractile cells — that is to say, of cells with the sole property of contraction. When the muscular cell contracts, it becomes shorter and its diam- eter increases. This brings nearer together the two parts of the body to which its ends are attached. In the lower metazoa the muscle-cells have, as a rule, no particular structure; but in the higher animals the con- tractile plasm undergoes a peculiar differentiation, which has the appearance under the microscope of a transverse streaking of the long cells. On this ground a distinction is drawn between striated muscles and simple non- striated or smooth muscles. The more vigorous, rapid, and definite is the contraction of the muscle, the more marked is the streaky character, and the more pro- nounced the difference between the doubly refractive muscular particles from the simple refractive. The striated muscle is "the most perfect dynamo we know of" (Verworn). The normal heart of a man accomplish- es every day, according to Zuntz, a work of about twenty thousand kilogrammetres — in other words, an energy that would suffice to lift to a height of one metre a weight of twenty thousand kilogrammes. In many fly- ing insects (gnats, for instance) the flying muscles make three hundred to four hundred contractions a second. In the lower and higher classes of the metazoa the muscle amounts to no more than a thin layer of flesh underneath the skin. This layer consists of muscular cells, which come originally from the ectoderm in the form of internal contractile processes of the skin-cells themselves, as in the polyps. In other cases the muscle- cells are developed from the connective-tissue cells of the mesoderm, the middle skin-layer, as in the cteno- phora. This mesenchymic muscle is less common than epithelial muscle. In most of the askeletal vermalia the 277 THE WONDERS OF LIFE subdermal muscle divides into two layers — an outer deposit of concentric muscles and an inner layer of longitudinal muscles; in the cylindrical worms (nema- todes, sagittae, etc.) the latter fall into four longitudinal bands, one pair of upper (dorsal) and a pair of lower (ventral) muscular bands. At those parts of the body which are especially used for locomotion the muscle is more strongly developed, as in the belly-side of the crawling worms and mollusks. This muscular surface develops into a kind of fleshy "foot" {podium)] it assumes a great variety of forms in the various classes of mollusks. In most of the snails which creep on the solid ground it grows into a muscular "flat-foot" (gasteropoda) ; in the mussels which cut like a plough through the soft slime it forms a sharp "hatchet-foot" (pelecypoda) . The keel - snails (heteropoda) swim by means of a "keel-foot," which works like the screw of a ship ; the floating - snails (pteropoda) swim un- steadily (like butterflies flying) by means of a pair of head-folds, which develop from the side of the anterior foot-section. In the highest mollusks, the cuttle-fishes (cephalopoda), this fore-foot divides into four or five pairs of folds, which grow into long and very muscular "head-arms"; the numbers of strong suckers on the latter have also special muscles. In all these non- articulate mollusks and vermalia hard skeletons are either altogether wanting or (like the external shells of the mollusks) they have no functional relation to the motor muscles. It is otherwise in the higher animals, in which we find this relation to a solid jointed skeleton that becomes a passive motor apparatus. The higher groups of the animal kingdom in which a characteristic solid skeleton is developed and forms an important starting-point for the muscles, as well as a support and protection for the whole body, are the three stems of the echinoderms, articulates, and vertebrates. 278 MOVEMENT All three groups are very rich in forms, and far surpass all the other stems of the animal world in the perfection of their locomotive apparatus. However, the disposition and development of the skeleton as a passive support, and the correlation of the muscles to it as active pulling- organs, differ very much in the three classes, and are the chief factors in determining their characteristic types; they show clearly (even apart from other radical differences) that the three stems have arisen indepen- dently of each other from three different roots in the vermalia - stem. In the echinoderms the calcareous skeleton is formed from chalky deposits in the corium, in the articulates from chitine secretions of the epidermis, and in the vertebrates from cartilage of an internal chord-sheath {cf. Anthropogcny, chapter xxvi.). The remarkable stem of the sea-dwelling echinoderms or "prickly skins" is distinguished from all the other animal groups by a number of striking pecu iarities ; prominent among these are the special formation of their active and passive motor organs and the curious form of their individual development. In this onto- genesis two totally different forms appear successively — the simple astrolarva and the elaborately organized and sexually mature astrozoon. The small, free-swim- ming astrolarva has the general structural features of the rotatoria, and so shows, in accordance with the biogenetic law, that the original stem-form of the echinoderms (the amphoridea) belonged to this group of the vermalia. I have briefly explained these struct- ures in the History of Creation (chapter xxii.), and more fully in my essay on the amphoridea and cystoidea (1896). The little astrolarva has no muscles, and no water-vessels or blood-vessels. It moves by means of vibratory lashes or bands, which are attached to special armlike processes at the surface. These arms are regularly developed to the right and left of the bilateral 279 THE WONDERS OF LIFE symmetrical larva (which as yet shows no trace of the five-rayed structure). By a very curious modifica- tion the small bilateral astrolarva is transformed into the totally different pentaradial astrozoon, the large sexually mature echinoderm with a pronounced five- rayed structure. (See Art-forms in Nature, plates lo, 20, 30, 40, 60, 70, 80, 90, and 95.) It has a most elab- orate organization, with muscles and cuticular skeleton, blood-vessels and water-vessels, etc. A section of the astrozoa — the living crinoidea, or sea-lilies, and the extinct classes of blastoidea (sea-buds), cystoidea (sea- apples), and amphoridea (sea-urns) — grow in stationary fashion at the bottom of the sea. The other four extant classes creep about in the sea — the sea-gherkins (holo- thuria), the star-fish (asteridea and ophoidea), and the sea-urchins (echinidea). Their creeping motion is accom- plished by two kinds of organs — water-feet and skin- muscles. The latter find their support and attachment in solid calcareous needles, which develop from chalky deposits in the corium. As these calcareous needles (which are particularly conspicuous in the sea-urchin) are set movably in special protuberances of the cal- careous plates of the cuticular skeleton, and moved by little muscular needles, the echinoderms walk on them as if they were stilts Between these, however, a num- ber of water-feet arise from inside — thin tubes like the fingers of a glove, which are filled with water by an in- ternal conduit-system (the so-called ambulacral system) and become stiff. These very extensible ambulacral feet, often provided with a suctorial plate at the closed outer end, serve for creeping, sucking, touching, and grasping. As these distinctive motor organs of the echinoderms — both the ambulacral feet with their complicated water- tubes and the movable needles with their joints and muscles — are found in hundreds, often in thousands, on every individual five-rayed astrozoon, we might say that 280 MOVEMENT the echinoderms have the most advanced and com- pUcated motor organs of all animals. Their historical development is perfectly understood from its earliest stages, since Richard Semon found, in his ingenious pentactaea theory (1888), the correct phylogenetic mean- ing of the curious embryology of the echinoderms dis- covered in 1845 by Johannes Miiller. I endeavored in 1896 to establish it in detail, in relation to paleontological discoveries, in the essay I have mentioned. The large stem of the articulata (the richest in forms of all the animal stems) comprises three chief classes — the annelids, Crustacea, and tracheata. All three groups agree in the essential features of their organization, especially in the external articulation or metamerism of the long bilateral body, and also in the repetition of the internal organs in each joint or segment. In each joint there is originally a knot of the ventral nervous system (the ventral marrow), a chamber of the dorsal heart, a chitine-ring of the cutaneous skeleton, and a corre- sponding group of muscles. Of the three great classes of the articulates the annelids are developed directly from the vermalia, of which both the nematoda and nemertinae approach very closely to them. The two other and more highly organized classes, the Crustacea and tracheata, are younger groups, inde- pendently evolved from two different stems of the annelids. The annelids, or "ringed-worms" (to which, e.g., the rain-worms belong), have mostly a very homo- geneous articulation ; their segments or metamera repeat the same structure to a great extent, especially the subdermal muscles. In a transverse section we see in every joint underneath the layer of concentric muscles a pair of dorsal and a pair of ventral muscles. Their epidermis has secreted a thin covering of chitine, in the tubular worms a leather-like or calcified tube. There are no bones in the oldest annelids; in the younger 281 THE WONDERS OF LIFE bristle-worms (polychcFta) one or two pairs of short unjointed feet {parapodia) are found in every joint. The other two chief classes of the articulates develop long and jointed feet of very varied forms, and at the same time assume different shapes of limbs in the divi- sion of labor. This heterogeneous articulation (heter- onomy) is the more pronounced the higher the whole organization. This is equally true of the aquatic, gill- breathing Crustacea (crabs, etc.) and the tracheata (terrestrial animals breathing through a trachea, the myriopods, spiders, and insects). In the higher groups of both classes the number of limbs is usually not high- er than fifteen to twenty ; and they are distributed in three principal sections — head, breast, and posterior part of the body. The firm covering of chitine, which was deli- cate and thin in most of the annelids, is much thicker in most of the crustacea and tracheata, and often hardened by a calcareous deposit ; it forms a solid ring of chitine in each segment, inside which the motor muscles are at- tached. The successive hard rings are connected by thin, mobile, intermediate rings, so that the whole body combines firmness, elasticity, and mobility in a high degree. The structure of the long jointed legs, which are fixed in pairs on each segment, is very similar. Hence the typical character of the motor organs of the Crustacea lies in the circumstance that both in the body and the limbs the muscles are attached to the interior of hollow chitine tubes, and go in these from member to member. The vertebrates are just the reverse in structure. In their case a solid internal skeleton is formed in the longitudinal axis of the body, and the muscles are ex- ternal to these supporting organs. The articulation or metamerism itself is not visible externally in the verte- brates; it is only seen in the muscular system when the non-articulated skin has been removed. Then, even in 382 MOVEMENT the lowest skull-less vertebrates, the acrania, the in- ternal skeleton of which consists merely of a cylindrical, solid, and elastic axial rod {chorda), we see on each side a row of muscular plates (fifty to eighty in the amphi- oxus). In this case there are not pairs of limbs, and it is the same with the oldest craniate animals, the cvclostoma (myxinoida and petromyzonta). It is only with the third class of the vertebrates, the true fishes {pisccs), that two pairs of lateral limbs appear — the breast-fins and belly-fins. From these, in their terrestrial descend- ants, the oldest amphibia of the Carboniferous Period, the two pairs of jointed legs — fore-legs (carpomela) and hind-legs (tarsomela) — are derived. These four lateral five-toed legs have a very characteristic and compli- cated articulation, both in the internal bony skeleton and the muscular system that encloses this and is at- tached to it. From the amphibia, the earliest quadru- peds, this locomotive apparatus is transmitted by hered- ity to their descendants, the three higher classes of the vertebrates, reptiles, birds, and mammals. As I have dealt with these important structures fully in my .4;/- thropogeny (chapter xxvi.), and given a number of illus- trations of them, I must refer the reader to that work,' and will only make a few observations on the mam- mals. Both parts of the motor apparatus, the internal bony skeleton (the passive supporting apparatus) and the external muscular system (the active motor), exhibit a great variety of construction within the mammal class, in consequence of adaptation to the most different habits and functions. We have only to compare the running * A translation of the latest edition of \y\e Anthropogenic, with the full number of frrsh illustrations (thirty plates and five hun- dred and twelve wood-cuts), will be issued very shortly by the Rationalist Press Association, under the title of The Evolution of Man. 283 THE WONDERS OF LIFE carnivora and ungulata, the leaping kangaroos and jerboas, the burrowing moles and hyperdaei, the flying cheiroptera and bats, the fishlike swiraming sirens and whales, and climbing lemures and apes. In all these and the remaining orders of the mammals the whole regular structure of the motor apparatus is strikingly adapted to the habits of Hfe which have been formed by this adaptation itself. Nevertheless, we see that the essential character of the inner organization which dis- tinguishes the mammals as a class is not affected by this adaptation, but constantly maintained by heredity. These recognized facts of comparative anatomy and ontogeny, and the concordant results of paleontology, prove convincingly that all living and fossil mammals, from the lowest ungulates and marsupials to the ape and man, have descended from one common stem-form, a pro-mammal, that lived in the Triassic Period; its earlier ancestors in the Permian Period were reptiles, and, in the Carboniferous Period, amphibia. Among the characters of the locomotive apparatus which are peculiar to mammals we have, on the one hand, the structure of the vertebral column and the skull, and, on the other hand, the formation of the muscles which are attached to these supporting organs. In the skull we particularly notice the formation of the lower jaw and the joint by which it is connected with the temporal bone. This joint is temporal, and so distinguished from the square joint of the other vertebrates. The latter is found in the mammals in the tympanic cavity of the middle-ear, between the hammer (the modified joint of the lower jaw, articulare) and the anvil (the original quadraUmi). In harmony with this remarkable modifi- cation of the maxillary joint, the corresponding muscles have naturally also undergone a considerable trans- formation. A distinctive muscle that is only found in the mammals and regulates their respiration is the dia- 284 MOVEMENT phragm, which completely divides the abdominal and thoracic cavities; the various muscles, from the blending of which it has been formed, still remain separate in the other vertebrates. The many organs by means of which our human or- ganism accomplishes its manifold movements are just the same as in the apes, and the mechanism of their action is in no way different. The same two hundred bones, in the same order and composition, form our in- ternal bony skeleton; the same three hundred muscles effect our movements. The differences we find in the form and size of the various muscles and bones (and which are, as is well known, also found between lower and higher races of men) are due to differences in growth in consequence of divergent adaptation. On the other hand, the complete agreement in the con- struction of the whole motor apparatus is explained by heredity from the common stem-form of the apes and men. The most striking difference between the movements of the two is due to man's adaptation to the erect posture, while the climbing of trees is the normal habit of the ape. However, it is unquestion- able that the former is an evolution from the latter. A double parallel to this modification is seen in the jerboa among the ungulates, and in the kangaroo among the marsupials. Both these, in springing, use only the strong hinder extremities, and not the weaker fore-limbs; as a result of this their posture has become more or less erect. Among the birds we have an analo- gous case in the penguins (aptoiodytcs)] as they no longer use their atrophied wings for flight, but only in swimming, they have developed an erect posture when on land. The human will is also not specifically different from that of the ape or any other mammal; and its micro- scopic organs, the neurona in the brain and the muscular 2«5 THE WONDERS OF LIFE cells in the flesh, work with the same forms of energy, and are similarly subject to the law of substance. Hence it is immaterial for the moment whether one believes in the freedom of the will according to the antiquated creed of indeterminism, or whether one holds it to be refuted scientifically by the arguments of modern de- terminists; in either case the acts of the will and vol- untary movements follow the same laws in man as in the ape. The high development of the function in civ- ilized man, the ample differentiation of speech and mo- rality, art and science — in a word, the ethical significance of the will for higher culture — is in no way discordant to this monistic and zoologically grounded conception. In the lower races these privileges of the civilized will are only found in a slight degree, and some of them are wholly wanting among the lowest races. The distance between the lowest savage and the most civilized human being is greater, in this respect also, than that which separates the savage from the anthropoid ape. How- ever, I refer the reader to the remarks I made at the close of the seventh chapter of the Riddle on the prob- lem of the freedom of the will and the infinite literature relating thereto. The reader who desires to go further into this subject will find it well treated in the works of Traugott Trunk (.1902) and Paul Ree (1903) [also in Dr. Stout's recent little manual of psychology and Mr. W. H. Mallock's Religion as a Credible Doctrine']. XIII SENSATION Sensation and consciousness — Unconscious and conscious sensa- tion — Sensibility and irritability — Reflex sensation and perception of stimuli — Sensation and living force — Re- action to stimuli — Resolution of stimuli — External and internal stimuli — Conveyance of stimuli — Sensation and striving — Sensation and feeling — Inorganic and organic sensation — Light sensation, phototaxis, sight — Sensation of warmth, thermotaxis — Sensation of matter, chemotaxis — Taste and smell — Erotic chemicotropism— Organic sen- sations — Sensation of pressure — Geotaxis — Sensation of sound — Electric sensation. SENSATION is one of those general terms that have at all times been liable to the most varied inter- pretations. Like the cognate idea of the "soul," it is still extremely ambiguous. During the eighteenth cen- tury it was generally believed that the function of sensation was peculiar to animals, and was not present in plants. This opinion found its most important ex- pression in the well-known principle in Linnd's System a Natiircu: "Stones grow: plants grow and live: animals grow, live, and feel." Albrecht Haller, who gathered up all the knowledge of his time relating to organic life in his Elemcnta Physiologic^ (1766), distinguished as its two chief characters "sensibility" and "irritability." The one he ascribed exclusively to the nerves, and the other to the muscles. This erroneous idea was sub- sequently refuted, and in our own time irritability is conceived to be a general property of all living matter. 287 THE WONDERS OF LIFE The great advance made by the comparative anatomy and experimental physiology of animals and plants in the first half of the nineteenth century brought to light the fact that irritability or sensibility is a common quality of all organisms, and that it is one of the princi- pal characteristics of vital force {cf. chapter ii.). The greatest merit in connection with its experimental study attaches to the famous Johannes Miiller. In his classi- cal Manual of Human Physiology (1840) he established his theory of the specific energy of the nerves and their dependence on the sense-organs on the one hand and the mental life on the other. He devoted the fifth chap- ter of his book to the former and the sixth to the latter, approaching particularly to Spinoza in his general psy- chological views; he treated psychology as a part of physiology, and thus put on a sound scientific basis that naturalistic conception of the place of psychology in the biological system which we now regard as the correct view. At the same time he proved that sensation is a function of the organism as much as movement or nutrition. The view of sensation that prevailed in the second half of the nineteenth century was very different. On the one hand the experimental and comparative physiology of the sense-organs and the nervous system immensely enriched our exact knowledge by the invention of in- genious methods of research and the use of the great advance made by physics and chemistry. The famous investigations of Helmholtz and Hertwig on the physics of the senses, of Matteucci and Dubois-Revmond on the electricity of the muscles and nerves, and the great progress made in vegetal physiology by Sachs and Pfeffer, and in physiological chemistry by Moleschott and Bunge, enabled us to realize that even the most mysterious of the wonders of life depend on physical and chemical processes. By the application of the dif- 288 SENSATION ferent stimuli — light, heat, electricity, and chemical action — to the various sensitive or irritable organs un- der definitely controlled conditions, scientists succeeded in subjecting with exactness a great part of the phe- nomena of stimulation to mathematical measurements and formulae. The science of the stimuli and their effects acquired a strictly physical character. On the other hand, in most striking contradiction to the immense advance of experimental physiology, we see that the general conception of the various vital proc- esses, and especially of the inner nerve-action that con- verts the functions of the senses into mental life, is most curiously neglected. Even the fundamental idea of sensation, which plays the chief part in it, is disregarded more and more. In many of the most valuable modern manuals of physiology, containing long chapters on stimuli and stimulation, there is little or no mention of sensation as such. This is chiefly due to the mischiev- ous and unjustifiable gulf that has once more been arti- ficially created between physiology and psychology. As the "exact" physiologists found the study of the inner psychic processes which take p ace in sense-action and sensation inconvenient and unprofitable, they gladly handed over this difficult and obscure field to the "psy- chologists proper" — in other words, to the metaphysi- cians, who had for the starting - point of their airy speculations the belief in an immortal soul and divine consciousness. The psychologists readily abandoned the inconvenient V)urden of experience and a posteriori knowledge, to which the modern anatomic physiology of the brain laid special claim. The greatest and most fatal error committed by modern physiology in this was the admission of the baseless dogma that all sensation must be accompanied by consciousness. As most physiologists share the view of Dubois-Reymond, that consciousness is not a natural 19 289 THE WONDERS OF LIFE phenomenon, but a hyperphysical problem, they leave it and this inconvenient "sensation" outside the range of their researches. This decision is, naturally, very agreeable to the prevalent metaphysics; it has just as much interest in the transcendental character of sensa- tion as in the liberty of the will, and thus the whole of psychology passes from the empirical province of nat- ural science into the mystical province of mental science. For its foundation they then take the "critical theory of knowledge," which ignores the results of the real physiological organs — the senses, nerves, and brain — and draws its "superior wisdom" from the inner mirror- ing of self by the introspective analysis of presentations and their associations. It is extraordinary that even distinguished monistic physiologists suffer themselves to be taken in with this sort of metaphysical jugglery, and dismiss the whole of psychology from their prov- ince ; their psychomonism readmits the soul as a super- natural entity, and delivers it, in contrast with the "world of bodies," from the yoke of the law of sub- stance. Impartial reflection on our personal experience during sensation and consciousness will soon convince us that these are two different physiological functions, which are by no means necessarily associated ; and the same may be said of the third principal function of the soul — the will. When we learn an art — for instance, painting or playing the piano — we need months of daily practice in order to become expert at it. In this we experience every day hundreds of thousands of sensations and movements which are learned and repeated with full consciousness. The longer we continue the practice and the more we adapt and accustom ourselves to the function, the easier and less conscious it becomes. And when we have practised the art for some years, we paint our picture or play our piano unconsciously; we think 290 SENSATION no longer of all the small, subtle shades of sensation and acts of will which were necessary in learning. The mere impulse of the will to paint the picture once more or play the piece again suffices to release the whole chain of complicated movements and accompanying sensations which had originally to be learned slowly, laboriously, and with full consciousness. An experienced pianist plays the most difficult piece — if he has learned it and repeated it thousands of times — "half in a dream." But it needs only a slight accident, such as a mistake or a sudden interruption, to bring back the wandering attention to the work. The piece is now played with clear consciousness. The same may be said of thousands of sensations and movements which we learned at first consciously in childhood, and then repeat daily after- wards without noticing — such as in walking, eating, speaking, and so on. These familiar facts prove of them- selves that consciousness is a complicated function of the brain, by no means necessarily connected with sensation or will. To bind up the ideas of consciousness and sensa- tion inseparably is the more absurd, as the mechanism or the real nature of consciousness seems very obscure to us, while the idea of it is perfectly clear: we know that we know, feel, and will. The word "irritability" is generally taken by modem physiology to mean that the living matter has the property of reacting on stimuli — that is to say, of responding by changes in itself to changes in its en- vironment. The stimulus, or action of a foreign energy, must, however, be felt by the plasm before the cor- responding stimulated movement (in the form of va- rious manifestations of energy) will be produced. Hence the question whether this sensation is (in certain cases) associated with consciousness or (generally) remains unconscious is of a subordinate interest. The plant that is caused to open its floral calyx by the 291 THE WONDERS OP LIFE stimulus of light acts just as unconsciously in this as the coral that spreads out its crown of tentacles under the same influence; and when the sensitive carnivorous plant {dioncea or drosera) closes its leaves in order to catch and destroy the insect sitting on them, it acts in the same way as the sensitive actinia or coral when it draws in its crown of tentacles for the same object — in both cases without consciousness! We call these uncon- scious movements "reflex actions." I have dealt some- what fully with these reflex movements in the seventh chapter of the Riddle, and must refer the reader thereto. This elementary psychic function always depends on a conjunction of sensation and movement (in the widest sense). The movement that the stimulus provokes is always preceded by a sensation of the influence exerted. Modern physiology makes desperate efforts to avoid the~use of the word "sensation" and substitute for it "perception of "stimulus." The chief blame for this misleading expressioii^is due to the arbitrary and un- justified separation of psychology from physiology. The latter is supposed to occupy itself with the material phenomena and physical changes, leaving to psychology the privilege of dealing with the higher mental phe- nomena and metaphysical problems. As we reject this distinction altogether on monistic principles, we cannot consent to separate sensation from the perception of stimuli — whether this sensation be accompanied with consciousness or not. Moreover, modern physiology, in spite of its desire to keep clear of psychology, sees itself compelled in a thousand ways to use the words "sensa- tion" and "sensitive," especially in the science of the organs of sense. What we call sensation or perception of stimuli may be regarded as a special form of the living force or actual energy (Ostwald). Sensitiveness or irritability, on the other hand, is a form of virtual or potential 292 SENSATION energy. The living substance at rest, which is sensitive or irritable, is in a state of equilibrium and indifTerence to its environment. But the active plasm, that receives and feels a stimulus, has its equilibrium disturbed, and corresponds to the change in its environment and its internal condition. This response of the organism to a stimulus is called "reaction" — a term that is also used (in the same sense) in chemistry to express the inter- action of bodies on each other. At each stimulation the virtual energy of the plasm (sensitiveness) is converted into living or kinetic force (sensation). The share of the stimulus in this conversion is described as a "release" of energy. The term "reaction" stands in general for the change which any body experiences from the action of an- other body. Thus, for instance, to take the simplest case, the interaction of two substances in chemistry is called a reaction. In chemical analysis the word is used in a narrower sense to denote that action of one body on another which serves to reveal its nature. Even here we must assume that the two bodies feel their different characters ; otherwise they could not act on each other. Hence every chemist speaks of a more or less "sensitive reaction." But this process is not different in principle from the reaction of the living organism to outer stimuli, whatever be their chemical or physical nature. And there is no more essential difference in psychological reaction, which is always bound up with corresponding changes in the psychoplasm, and so with a chemical conversion of energy. In this case, however, the process of reaction is much more complicated, and we can distinguish several parts or phases of it: i, the outer excitation; 2, the reaction of the sense-organ; 3, the conducting of the modified impression to the central organ; 4, the internal sensation of the conducted impression; and, 5, consciousness of the impression. 293 THE WONDERS OF LIFE The important idea of a release of energy — the term we give to the effect of the stimulus — is also used in physics. If we put a piece of burning wood in a barrel of powder, the flame causes an explosion. In the case of dynamite a simple mechanical shock is enough to pro- duce the most enormous expenditure of force in the ex- plosive matter. When we discharge a bow the slight pressure of the finger on the tense cord suffices to send out the arrow or bolt on its deadly mission. So also a sound or a ray of light that strikes the ear or eye suffices to bring about a number of complex effects by means of the nervous system. In the fertilization of the ovum by the male sperm the chemical conjunction of the two forma- tive principles is sufficient to cause the growth of a new human being out of the microscopic plasma-globule, the stem-cell (cytula). In these and thousands of other reactions a very slight shock suffices to provoke the largest effects in the stimulated substance. This shock, which we call a release of energy, is not the direct cause of the considerable result, but merely the occasion for bringing it about. In these cases we have always a vast accumulation of virtual energy converted into living force or work. The magnitude of the two forces has no relation at all to the smallness of the shock which led to the conversion. In this we have the difference between stimulated action and the simple mechanical action of two bodies on each other, in which the quantity of the energy expended is equal on both sides, and there is no stimulus. The immediate effect of a stimulus on living matter can best be followed in external physical or chemical stimuli, such as light, heat, pressure, sound, electricity, and chemical action. In these cases physical science is often able to reduce the life-process to the laws of inorganic nature. This is more difficult with the internal stimuli within the organism itself, which are only partly 294 SENSATION exposed to physiological investigation. It is true that here also the task of science is to reduce all the bio- logical phenomena to physical and chemical laws. But it can only discharge a part of this difficult task, as the phenomena are too complicated, and their conditions too little known in detail, to say nothing of the crudeness and imperfectness of our methods of research. Yet, in spite of all this, comparative and phylogenetic physiology convinces us that even the most complicated of our internal excitations, and particularly the mental activity of the brain, depend just as much as the outer stimula- tions on physical processes, and are equally subject to the law of substance. This is, in fact, true of reason and consciousness. In man and all the higher animals the stimuli are received by the organs of sense and conducted by their nerves to the central organ. In the brain they are either converted into specific sensations in the sense-centres, or conveyed to the motor region, where they provoke movements. The conduction of stimuli is simpler in the lower animals and the plants; the tissue-cells either directly affect each other or are connected by fine threads of plasm. In the unicellular protists the stimulus which strikes one particular spot of the surface may be imme- diately communicated to the other parts of the unified plasmic body. We shall see in the course of our inquiry that the simplest form of sensation (in the widest sense) is common to inorganic and organic bodies, and thus that sensitiveness is really a fundamental property of all matter, or, more correctly, all substance. We may, therefore, ascribe sensation to the constituent atoms of matter. This fundamental thought of hvlozoism, ex- pressed long ago by Empedocles, has lately been very definitely urged, especially by Fechner. However, the able founder of psycho-physics {cf. the Riddle, p. 35) 295 THE WONDERS OF LIFE assumes that consciousness (or thought, in the Spinozis- tic sense) always accompanies this universal property of sensation. In my opinion, consciousness is a secondary psychic function, only found in man and the higher animals, and bound up with the centralization of the nervous system. Hence it is better to speak of the un- conscious sensation of the atoms as feeling (cDstJtesis) , and their unconscious will as inclination {tropesis). It finds expression in the one-sided action of a stimulus as a "directed movement" or "stimulated movement" {tropismus or taxis). The familiar ideas of sensation and feeling are often confused, and employed in very different ways in both physiology and psychology. The metaphysical tendency which so completely separates the two sciences, and the physiological tendency which agrees with it, regard feeling as a purely psychic or spiritual function, whereas in the case of sensation they have to admit the connec- tion with bodily functions, especially sense-action. In my opinion, the two ideas are purely physiological and can- not be sharply separated, or only in the sense that sensation relates more to the external (objective) part of the sensory nerve-process, and feeling to the internal (subjective) part. Hence we may define the difference in a general way by saying that sensation perceives the different qualities of the stimuli, and feeling only the quantity, the positive or negative action of the stimulus (pleasure or pain). In this last and widest sense we may ascribe the feeling of pleasure and pain (in the contact with qualitatively differing atoms) to all atoms, and so explain the elective affinity in chemistry (syn- thesis of loving atoms, inclination; analysis of hating atoms, disinclination). Our monistic system (whether it be taken as energism or materialism, or more correctly as hylozoism) regards all substance as having "soul" — that is to say, endowed 296 SENSATION with energy. In the chemical analysis of organisms we do not find any elements that are not found in inorganic nature; we find that the movements in organisms obey the same laws of mechanics as the latter ; we believe that the conversion of energ}.- in the living matter occurs in the same way, and is provoked by the same stimuli, as in inorganic matter. We are forced to conclude from these experiences that the perception of stimuli — sensa- tion in the objective and feeling in the subjective sense — is also generally present in the two. All bodies are in a certain sense "sensitive." It is just in this dynamic conception of substance that monism differs essentially from the materialistic system, which regards one part of matter as "dead" and insensitive. In this we have the best means of joining consistent materialism or realism with consistent spiritualism or idealism. But, as a first condition of such a union, we must demand a recognition that organic life is subject to the same general laws as inorganic nature. In both cases the outer world acts alike as a stimulus on the inner world of the body. We can easily see this if we glance at the various kinds of sensation which correspond to the various kinds of stimuli. Light and heat, external and internal chemical stimuli, pressure and electricity, cause analogous sensations and modifications in their effect on organic and inorganic bodies. The effect which the light - stimulus has on living matter, the sensation of light that results, and the chemical changes of energy that follow, are of great physiological importance in all organisms. We might even say that sunlight is the first, oldest, and chief source of organic life; all other exertions of force depend in the long run on the radiant energy of sunlight. The oldest and most important function of plasm — one which is at the same time a cause of its formation — is carbon- assimilation ; and this plasmodomism is directly de- 297 THE WONDERS OF LIFE pendent on sunlight. If it acts in a one-sided way, it causes the particular form of stimulation which we call phototaxis or heliotropism. This is of a positive character — that is to say, they turn towards the source of the light — in the great majority of organisms, both protists and histona. Everybody knows that flowers that are growing in the window of a room turn to the light. However, many organisms which have grown accustomed to living in the dark are heliotropically nega- tive; they shun the light and seek darkness, such as the fungi, many lucifugous mosses and ferns, and many deep-sea animals. The principal organs of light-sensation in the higher animals are the eyes; they are wanting in many of the lower animals as well as the plants. The essential difference between the real eye and a part of the skin that is merely sensitive to light is that the eye can form a picture of objects in the outer world. This faculty of vision begins with the formation of a small convergent lens, a bi-convex refracting body at a certain spot on the surface. Dark pigment-cells which surround it absorb the light-rays. From this first phylogenetic form of the organ of vision up to the elaborate human eye there is a long scale of evolutionary stages — not less extensive and remarkable than the historical succession of artificial optical instruments from the simple lens to the com- plicated modem telescope or microscope. This great "wonder of life" — the long scale of the evolution of the eye — has an interesting bearing on many important questions of general physiology and phylogeny. We can, in this case, see clearly how a very complicated and purposive apparatus can arise in a purely mechanical way, without any preconceived design or plan. In other words, we can see how an entirely new function — and one of its principal functions, vision — has arisen in the organism by mechanical means. 298 SENSATION The advanced vision of the higher animals is made up of a great number of different functions, with a corre- sponding complexity of detail in the anatomic structure of the eye. No other organ, after the brain, is so neces- sary as the eye for the multifarious vital activities of the higher animals, and especially for the mental life of civilized man and the progress of art and science. What would the human mind be if we could not read, write, and draw, and have a direct knowledge through the eye of the forms and colors of the outer world ? Yet this in- valuable structure is only the highest and most perfect stage in the long chain of evolutionary processes which has its starting-point in the general sensitiveness to light, or the photic irritability of plasm. However, we find a number of varieties and grades of this even among the unicellular protists, and, indeed, the very lowest and oldest of the protists, the monera. Various species of both the chromacea and the bacteria are heliotropic to different degrees, and have a fine sensitiveness to the strength of the light stimulus. The stimulating effect which light has on the homo- geneous plasm of the monera is also found in a number of inorganic bodies. In these cases the photic stimulus produces partly chemical and partly mechanical changes. Every chemist speaks of substances that are more or less "sensitive" to light; the photographer speaks of his "sensitive plates," the painter of his "sensitive colors." Many chemical compounds are so sensitive to light that they are destroyed at once in sunlight, and so have to be kept in the dark. There is no other word but "sen- sation" to express the attitude of the atoms towards each other which becomes so conspicuous in these cases under the influence of sunlight. It seems to me that this phenomenon is a clear justification of our hylozoic monism when it affirms that all matter is psychic. In metaphys- ics sensation is held to be an essential property of the soul. 299 THE WONDERS OF LIFE In the same general way as light the heat-stimulus acts on organisms, and causes the sensations, sometimes pleasant and sometimes unpleasant, which we call the subjective feeling of heat, warmth, coolness, or cold. The sense-organ that receives these impressions of temperature is the surface of the unicellular plasmic body in the protists, and the skin (epidermis) that protects the surface from the outer world in the histona. In all living things the temperature of the surrounding medium (water or air) has a great influence in regulating the life-processes; in the stationary animals and plants it is the temperature of the ground to which they are attached. This temperature must always be between the freezing-point and boiling-point of water, as fluid water is indispensable for the imbibition of the living matter and the molecular movements within the plasm. At the same time, some of the lower protists (chromacea, bacteria) can endure very high and very low temperatures, but only for a short time. Some protists (monera and diatomes) can stand a temperature of 200° C. for several days, and others can be heated above boiling-point without being killed. Arctic and High-Alpine plants and animals may be in a frozen condition for several months, yet live again when they are thawed. How- ever, the resistance to these extremes of cold lasts for only a limited time, and in the frozen state all vital functions are at a standstill. In the great majority of living things the vital activity is confined within narrow limits of temperature. Many plants and animals in the tropics which have been accustomed for thousands of years to the constancy of the hot equatorial climate can endure only very restricted variations of temperature. On the other hand, many of the inhabitants of Central Siberia, where the climate is very hot in the short summer and very cold in the long winter, can stand great variations, Thus the living 300 SENSATION plasm has experienced considerable changes in its sense of warmth through adaptation to different environments; not only the maximum and the minimum, but the opti- mum (most agreeable point), is subject to very great variations. This can easily be observed and followed experimentally in the phenomena of thermotaxis or thermotropism — that is to say, the effect that follows from a one - sided action of the heat - stimulus. The organism that falls below the minimum of temperature is said to be stiff with cold, while the organism that rises above the maximum is stiff with heat. The heat-stimulus acts on inorganic as well as organic bodies, like the light-stimulus. The law holds good in both cases that higher temperatures increase sensation, while lower ones paralyze it. There is a minimum, an optimum, and a maximum, for many chemical and physical processes in the inorganic world. As far as the melting effect of water is concerned, freezing is the minimum of the heat stimulus and boiling the maximum. As the various chemical compounds meet in water at very different temperatures, we have an optimum for many substances — that is to say, a degree of warmth which is most favorable to the solution of a given quantity of a solid body in water. On the whole, the law holds for chemical processes that they are accelerated by high temperatures and retarded by low ones (like the human passions!); the former have a stimulating and the lat- ter a benumbing effect. As the action of the various chemical compounds on each other is determined by the nature of the elements and their affinities, we must trace the variations in their conduct towards thermic stimuli to a sensation of temperature in the constituent atoms; increase of temperature stimulates it, while de- crease lessens or paralyzes it. Here, again, the simple inorganic processes have a general resemblance to the complicated vital phenomena in the organic body. 301 THE WONDERS OF LIFE Since we regard the whole of organic life as, in the ultimate analysis, merely a very elaborate chemical process, we shall quite expect that chemical stimuli are the most important factors in sensation. And this is so in point of fact; from the simplest moneron up to the most highly differentiated cell and on to the flower in the plant and the mental life of man, the vital processes are dominated by chemical forces and conversions of energy, which are set in play by external or internal chemical stimuli. The excitation which they produce is called, in a general way, "sensation of matter" or chemaesthesis ; the basis of it is the mutual relation of the chemical elements which we describe as chemical affinity. In this affinity we have the play of attractive forces which lie in the nature of the elements them- selves, especially in the peculiar properties of their con- stituent atoms; and this cannot be explained unless we ascribe unconscious sensation (in the widest sense) to the atoms, an inherent feeling of pleasure and the reverse, which they experience in the contact of other atoms (the "loves and hatreds of the elements" of Empedocles). The numbers of different stimuli that act chemically on the plasm and excite its "sensation of matter" may be divided into two groups — external and internal stimuli. The latter lie within the organism itself, and cause the internal "organic sensations"; the former are in the outer world, and are felt as taste, smell, sex- impulse, etc. In the higher animals special chemical sense-organs have been developed for these chemical stimuli. As these are well known to us from our own human experience, and comparative physiology shows us the same structures in the higher animals, we will deal first with them. In general the same law holds for these external chemical stimuli as for optical and thermic stimuli; we can recognize a maximum limit of 302 SENSATION their action, a minimum below which they fail to stimulate, and an optimum or stage in which their influence is strongest. The important part played in human life by taste and the pleasure associated with it is well known. The careful choice and preparation of savory food — which has be- come an art in gastronomy and a branch of practical phi- losophy in gastrosophy — was just as important two thou- sand years ago with the Greeks and Romans as it is to-day in royal banquets or the Lucullic dinners of millionaires. The excitement that we see associated with this refined combination of rich foods and drinks, and that finds expression in so many speeches and toasts, has its philo- sophic root in the harmony of gustatory sensations and the varying play of stimuli that the delicate dishes and wines exercise on the organs of taste, the tongue and palate. The microscopic organs of these parts of the mouth are the gustatory papillae — cup-shaped structures, covered with spindle-shaped "taste-cells," and having a narrow opening into the cavity of the mouth. When sapid matters, drinks and fluid or loose particles of food, touch the taste-cells, they excite the fine terminal branchlets of the gustatory nerve which enters the cells. As we find that there are similar structures in most of the higher animals, and that they also choose their food with some care, we may confidently assume that they have sensa- tions of taste like man. However, no trace of this is found in many of the lower animals; in these cases it is impossible to lay down a line of demarcation between taste and smell. In man and the higher air-breathing vertebrates the seat of the sense of smell is in the nostrils; in man it is especially that part of the mucous lining of the nasal cavity which we call the "olfactory region" (the upper- most part of the nasal dividing wall, the superior and middle meatus). It is necessary for a sensation of smell 3^^ THE WONDERS OF LIFE that the odorous matter, or olfactory stimuH, be brought in a finely divided condition over the moist olfactory membranes. When they touch the olfactory cells — slender, rod-shaped cells with very fine hairs at the free end — they excite the ends of the olfactory nerve which are connected with the cells. In many animals, especially mammals, the sense of smell has a much more important part in life than it has in man, in whom it is relatively feeble. It is well known that dogs and other carnivora, and even ungulates, have a much keener smell. In these cases the nasal cavity, which is the seat of the sense, is much larger, and the muscles in it are much stronger. The nostrils of the air-breathing vertebrates have been developed from a pair of open nasal depressions in the skin of the fish's head. But in these aquatic vertebrates the chemical action of the olfactory stimuli must be of a different character, like the sensation of taste. The odorous matter is, in these cases, brought into contact with the olfactory membrane in a liquid form (in which condition it is not perceptible to man). In fact, the division between the senses of smell and taste disappears altogether in the lower animals. These two "chemical senses" are closely related, and have a common feature in the direct chemical action of the stimulus on the sensitive part of the skin. A chemical sensation of matter that corresponds completely to the real taste-sensation in the higher animals is found in some of the higher carnivorous plants. The leaves of the sun-dew (drosera rotundifolia) are very sensitive insect-traps, and are armed at the edge with knob-like tentacles, sticky hairs that secrete an acid, flesh-digesting juice. When a solid body (but not a raindrop) touches the surface of the leaf the stimulus acts in such a way on the tentacle heads as to contract the leaf. But the acid fluid which serves for 304 SENSATION digestion, and corresponds to the gastric juice in the animal, is only secreted by the corpuscles if the solid foreign body is nitrogenous (flesh or cheese). Hence the leaves of these insectivorous plants taste their meat diet, and distinguish it from other solids, to which they are indifferent. In the broader sense, in fact, we may describe the points of the roots of plants as organs of taste; they plunge into the richer parts of the earth which yield more nourishment, and avoid the poor parts. In unicellular plants and animals the action of chemical stimuli is especially conspicuous when it is one-sided, and provokes definite movements in one particular direction (chcmotaxis). The movements of unicellular organisms that are provoked by chemical stimuli and are known as chemo- tropism (more recently as chcmotaxis) are particularly interesting because they show the existence of a chemical sensitiveness, somewhat resembling taste or smell, in the lowest organisms, and even in the homogeneous plasm of the monera. Repeated experiments of Wilhelm Engelmann, Max Verworn, and others, have shown that many bacteria, diatomes, infusoria, rhizopods, and other protists, have a similar sense of taste; they move towards certain acids (for instance, a drop of malic acid) or a bubble of oxygen that lies on one side of the drop of water in which the protists are under the microscope. Many pathogenetic bacteria secrete poisonous sub- stances which are very injurious to the human frame. The active white blood-cells, leucocytes, in the human blood have a special "taste" for these bacteria-poisons, and concentrate in large quantities, by means of their amoeboid movements, at those parts of the body where they are secreted. If the leucocytes prove the stronger in their struggle with the bacteria, they destroy them, and in this way they act as sanitary officers in keeping poisonous infection out of our organism. But if the ao 305 THE WONDERS OF LIFE bacteria win the battle, they are transported into other parts of the body by the leucocytes; they dis- tinguish their plasm by taste, and may cause a deadly infection. We have a particularly interesting and important species of chemical irritation in the mutual attraction of the two sex-cells, to which I gave the name of chemo- tropism thirty years ago, and which I described as the earliest phylogenetic source of sexual love (see the Anthropogeny, chapters vii. and xxix.). The remarkable phenomena of impregnation, the most important of all the processes of sexual generation, consist in the coales- cence of the female ovum and the male sperm-cell. This could not take place if the two cells had not a sensation of their respective chemical constitution and disposition for union; they come together under this impulse. This sexual affinity is found at the lowest stages of plant life, in the protophyta and algae. With these both cells — the smaller male microgameta and the larger female macrogameta — are often mobile, and swim about in order to effect a union. In the higher plants and animals only the small male cell is mobile as a rule, and swims towards the large immobile ovum in order to blend with it. The sensation that impels it is of a chemical nature, alHed to taste and smell. This has been proved by the splendid experiments of Pfeffer, who showed that the male ciliated cells of ferns are attracted by malic acid, and those of the mosses by cane-sugar, just in the same way as by the exhalation from the female ovum. Conception depends on exactly the same erotic chemotropism in the fertilization of all the higher organisms. Erotic chemotropism must be regarded as a general sense-function of the sexual cells in all amphigonous organisms, but in the higher organisms special forms of the sex -sense, connected with specific organs, are 306 SENSATION developed ; as the source of sexual love they play a most important part in the life of many of the histona. In man and most of the higher animals these feelings of love are associated with the highest features of psychic life, and have led to the formation of some most remark- able customs, instincts, and passions. Wilhelm Bolsche has given us an admirable selection from this infinitely rich and attractive realm in his famous Lijc of Love in Nature (1903). It is well known that this sexual sense as we have it in man has been developed from the nearest related mammals, the apes. But while it offers a shame- less and repulsive spectacle in many of the apes, it has been greatly ennobled and refined in man in the develop- ment of civilization. However, the sexual sense-organs and their specific energy have remained the same. In the vertebrates and the articulates and many other metazoa the copulative organs are equipped with special cell-forms (voluptuous particles), which are the seat of intensely pleasurable feelings (see the Anthropogciiy, chapter xxix., plate 30). The pubic hairs which clothe the JUGus Veneris are also delicate organs of the sex-sense, and so are the tactile hairs about the mouth. In these cases the correlation between the sensitive forms of energy in the copulative organs and the psychic functions of the central nervous system has been remarkably developed. Moreover, a large part of the rest of the skin may co-operate as a secondary organ of the sex-sense, as is seen in the effect of caressing, stroking, embracing, kissing, etc. Goethe, at once the greatest lyric poet and the subtlest and profoundest monistic philosopher of Germanv, has given unrivalled expression to this sensual, yet supersensual, basis of sexual love. Ontogeny teaches unmistakably that its elementary organs, the epideniiic cells, develop entirely from the ectoderm. By "organic sensations" modem physiology- under- stands the perception of certain internal bodily states, 307 THE WONDERS OF LIFE which are mostly brought about by chemical stimuli (to a small extent by mechanical and other irritation) in the organs themselves. As subjective feelings of the or- ganism itself these states are most aptly called "feelings" — the positive states, pleasure, comfort, delight; the negative, discomfort, pain, etc. These organic sensa- tions (also called common sensations or feelings) are of great importance for the self-regulation of the complicat- ed organism. To the positive organic sensations belong not only the bodily feeling of satiety, repose, or comfort, but also the psychic feelings of joy, good humor, mental rest, etc. Among negative common feelings we have not only hunger and thirst, bodily fatigue, bodily pain, sea-sickness, etc., but also mental strain, vertigo, bad humor, and so on. Between the two groups we have the third category of neutral organic sensations, which involve neither pleasure nor pain, but merely the perception of certain internal conditions, such as mus- cular strain (in lifting heavy objects), the disposal of the limbs (in crossing the legs), and so on. Chemical sensation is just as general and important in organic nature as in the life of organisms. In this case it is nothing less than the basis of chemical affinity. No chemical process can be thoroughly understood unless we attribute a mutual sensation to the atoms, and explain their combination as due to a feeling of pleasure and their separation to a feeling of displeasure. The great Empedocles (fifth century b.c.) explained the origin of all things long ago by the various combination of pure elements, the interaction of love (attraction) and hate (repulsion). This attraction or repulsion is, of course, unconscious, just as in the instincts of plants and animals. If one prefers to avoid the term "sensation," it may be called "feeling" (cssthesis), while the (involun- tary) movement it provokes may be called "inclination " {tropesis), and the capacity for the latter "tropism" 308 SENSATION (more recently taxis, cf. chapter xii. of the Riddle). We may illustrate it from the simplest case of chemical com- bination. When we rub together sulphur and mer- cury, two totally different elements, the atoms of the finely divided matter combine and form a third and different chemical body, cinnabar. How would this simple synthesis be possible unless the two elements feel each other, move towards each other, and then unite ? We find universally distributed in nature the sensation of the mechanical stimulus of gravitation, the most comprehensive statement of wdiich is given in Newton's law of gravity. According to this fundamental and all- ruling law, any two particles of matter are attracted in direct proportion to their mass and inverse proportion to the square of their distance. This form of attraction, also, can be traced to a "sensation of matter" in the mutually attracting atoms. The local sensation that any body provokes by contact with the surface of an organism is felt as pressure (baros). A stimulus that causes this pressure alone brings about a counter-press- ure as a reaction, and an effort to neutralize it, the pressure-movement {harotaxis or barotropism). Sensi- tiveness to pressure or the contact of solid bodies is found throughout the organic world; it can be proved experimentally among the protists as well as the histona. Special sense-organs have been developed in the skin of the higher animals as the instruments of this pressure- sense (baraesthesis) in the form of tactile corpuscles; they are most numerous at the finger-tips and other particularly sensitive parts. In many of the higher animals there is a fine sense of touch in the feelers or tentacles, or (in the higher articulates) in the horns or antennae. Moreover, these tactile and prehensile organs are also very widely found among the higher plants, especially the climbing plants (vines, bryony, etc.). Their slender creepers, which roll out spirally, have a 309 THE WONDERS OF LIFE very delicate feeling for the nature of the supports which they embrace; they distinguish between smooth and rough, thick and thin supports, and prefer the latter. Many of the higher plants, which are particularly sensi- tive to pressure, have, to an extent, special organs of touch (tentacles), and reveal this by the movements of their leaves (the sensitive plants, mimosa, dionasa, oxalis). But even among the unicellular protists we find that the contact of solid bodies has an irritating effect, the per- ception of which provokes corresponding movements {thigmotaxis or thigmotropismiis). A peculiar form of pressure-sensation is produced in many organisms by the flow of liquids; in the mycetozoa, for instance, it provokes counter-movements {rheotaxis, rheotropismus) , as Ernst Strahl showed by his experiments on cBthelium septicum. We have an interesting analogy to the thigmotaxis of the viscous living plasm in the elasticity of solid inor- ganic bodies, such as an elastic steel-rod. In virtue of its springy nature, the elastic rod reacts on the pressure of force that has bent it, and endeavors to regain its former position. The spiral spring sets the works of the clock in motion in virtue of its elasticity. A very important part is played in botany by the action of gravitation on the growth of plants. The attraction towards the centre of the earth causes the positively geotropic roots to grow vertically into the earth, while the negatively geotropic stalk pushes out in the opposite direction. This applies also to a number of stationary animals which are attached to the ground by roots, such as polyps, corals, bryozoa, etc. And even the locomotion of free animals, the disposition of their bodies to the ground, the position and posture of their limbs, etc., is determined partly by the feeling of gravitation, and partly by adaptation to certain functions which resist this, as in running, swimming, and so on. 310 SENSATION All these geotropic sensations belong to the same group of barotactile phenomena, as the fall of a stone or any other effect of gravitation that depends on an inorganic feeling of attraction. As a result of these adaptations, we find a distinct sense of space developed in the higher, free-moving animals. The feeling of the three dimensions of space becomes an important means of orientation, and in the vertebrates, from the fishes up to man, the three spiral canals in the inner ear are developed as special organs of this. These three semicircular canals, which lie vertically to each other in the three dimensions of space, are the organs of the sensation that guides the move- ments of the head, and, in relation to this, for the normal posture of the body and the feeling of equilibrium. If the three spiral canals are destroyed, the equilibrium is lost; the body totters and falls. Hence, these organs are not of an acoustic, but a static or geotactic charac- ter; and the same may be said of the so-called "auditory vesicles" of many of the lower animals — round vesicles which contain a liquid and a solid body, the otolith. When this body changes its position with the change of posture of the whole frame, it presses on the fine auditory hairs, or delicate terminations of the auscultory nerve, which enters the vesicle. In fact, the sense of equilibrium is often combined with the sense of hearing. The perception of noises and tones, which we call hearing, is restricted to a section of the higher, free- moving animals; if, that is to say, the above-mentioned "auditory vesicles" in the lower animals do not have acoustic as well as static sensations. The specific sensa- tion of hearing is due to vibration of the medium in which the animal lives (air or water), or to vibrations of solid bodies (such as tuning-forks) which are brought into touch with them. If the vibrations are irregular, they are felt as "noises"; if regular, they are heard as THE WONDERS OF LIFE "tones" or notes; when a number of tones together (fundamental and over-tones) excite a complex sensa- tion, we have "timbre." The vibrations of the sounding body are borne to the auditory cells, which represent the terminal extensions of the auscultory nerve. The specific sensation of hearing can, therefore, be traced originally to the sense of pressure, from which it has been evolved. As the organ of hearing is, like the eye, one of the principal instruments of the higher mental life, and as the refined musical hearing of civilized man is often taken to be a metaphysical power of the soul, it is important to note that here again the starting-point was purely physical — that is to say, it can be traced to the sense of pressure of matter, or gravitation. The great importance of electricity as an agency in nature, both organic and inorganic, has only lately been fully appreciated. Electric changes are connected with many (if not, as is now supposed, with all) chemical and optical processes. Man himself and most of the higher animals have no electric organs (apart from the eye), and no sense-organs that experience a specific electric sensation. It is probably otherwise with many of the lower animals, especially those that develop free elec- tricity, such as the electric fishes. The larvas of frogs and embryos of fishes, if put in a vessel of water through which a galvanic current is sent, place themselves when it is closed with their longitudinal axis in the direction of the current, with the head directed to the anode and the tail to the cathode (Hermann). Again, the luminous sea-animals which cause the beautiful phenomenon of the illumination of the sea, and the glow-worms and other luminous organisms, have probably an unconscious feeling of the flow of electric energy associated with these phenomena. Many plants show a direct reaction to electric stimuli; when, for instance, we send a con- stant galvanic current for some time through the points 312 SENSATION of their roots (very sensitive organs, compared by Darwin to the brain of the animal), they bend towards the cathode. Many of the protists are very sensitive to electric currents, as Max Verworn especially proved by a series of beautiful experiments. Most of the ciliated infusoria and many of the rhizopods (aDurba) are cathodically sensitive or negatively galvanotactic. When we send a constant electric current through a drop of water in which thousands of paramoociiDii are moving about, all the infusoria swim at once, with the anterior pole of the body foremost, towards the cathode or negative pole; they accumulate about it in great crowds. If the direc- tion of the current is now changed, the whole swarm at once make in the opposite direction for the new cathode. Most of the flagellate infusoria do just the reverse; they are anodically sensitive or positively galvanotactic. In a drop of water, in which swarms of polytoma are moving about, all the cells swim at once towards the anode or positive pole, when an electric current is sent through. The opposite galvanotropic behavior of these two groups of infusoria in a drop of water, in which they are mixed together, is very interesting; as soon as a constant stream enters it, the ciUata fly to the cathode and the flagellata to the anode. When the current is reversed the two swarms rush at each other like hostile armies, cross in the middle of the drop, and gather at the op- posite poles. These and other phenomena of galvanic sensation show clearly that the living plasm is subject to the same physical laws as the water that is decomposed into hydrogen and oxygen by an electric current. Both elements feci the opposite electricities. SCALE OF SENSATION AND IRRITABILITY ist Stage: Sensation of Atoms. Atlinity of the elements in every chemical combination. THE WONDERS OF LIFE 2d Stage: Sensation of Molecules (groups of atoms) : in the attraction and repulsion of molecules (positive and nega- tive electricity, etc.). 3d Stage: Sensation of Plastidules (micella, biogens, or plasma-molecules) : in the simplest vital process of the monera (chromacea and bacteria). 4th Stage: Sensation of Cells: irritability of the unicellular protists (protophyta and protozoa) : erotic chemotropism connected with the nucleus and trophic with the cell-body. 5th Stage: Sensation of Ccenobia (volvox, magosphaera) . With the formation of cell-communities we have associa- tion of sensations (individual feeling on the part of the social cells together with common feeling on the part of the community). 6th Stage: Sensation of the Lower Plants. In the meta- phyta or tissue-plants all the cells are still equally sensitive at the lower stages: there are no special sense-organs. 7th Stage: Sensation of the Higher Plants. In the higher metaphyta specially sensitive cells, or groups of cells, with a specific energy, are developed at certain points: sense- organs.. 8th Stage: Sensation of the Lower Metazoa, without differentiated nerves or sense-organs. Lower ccelenteria: sponges, polyps, platodaria. 9th Stage: Sensation of the Higher Metazoa, with dif- ferentiated nerves and sense-organs, but still without consciousness(?). The higher ccelenteria and most of the coelomaria. loth Stage: Sensation with Dawning Consciousness, with independent formation of the phronema. The higher articulata (spiders and insects) and vertebrates (amphibia, lower reptiles, lower mammals) . nth Stage: Sensation with Consciousness and Thought: amniotes: higher reptiles, birds, and mammals: savages. 12th Stage: Sensation with Productive Mental Action in Art and Science: civilized men. \ XIV MENTAL LIFE Mind and soul — Intelligence and reason — Pure reason — Kant's dualism — Anthropology — Anthropogeny — Embryology of the mind — Mind of the embryo — The canonical mind — Legal rights of the embryo — Phylogeny of the mind — Paleontology of the mind — Psyche and phronema — Mental energy — Diseases of the mind — Mental powers — Conscious and unconscious mental life — Monistic and dualistic theory — Mental life of the mammals, of savages, and of civilized and educated people. THE greatest and most commanding of all the wonders of life is unquestionably the mind of man. That function of the human organism, to which we give the name of "mind," is not only the chief source of all the higher enjoyment of life for ourselves, but it is also the power that most effectually separates man from the brute according to conventional beliefs. Hence it is supremely important for our biological philosophy to devote a few careful pages to the study of its nature, its origin and development, and its relation to the body. At the very outset of our psychological inquiry we are met by the difficulty of giving a clear definition of "mind," and distinguishing it from "soul." Both ideas are extremely ambiguous: their content and connotation are described in the most various ways by the represent- atives of science. Generally speaking, we mean by mind that part of the life of the soul which is connected with consciousness and thought, and is, therefore, only found in the higher animals which have intelligence and reason. 315 THE WONDERS OF LIFE In a narrower sense reason is regarded as the proper function of mind, and as the essential prerogative of man in the animal world. In this sense Kant especially has done much to strengthen the prevailing conception of mental action, and has, by his Critique of Pure Reason, converted philosophy into a mere "science of reason." In consequence of this conception, which still prevails widely in scientific circles, we will first study the mental life in the action of reason, and try to form a clear idea of this great wonder of life. Psychologists and metaphysicians are of very varied opinions as to the difference between intelligence and reason. Schopenhauer, for instance, considers causality to be the sole function of intelligence, and the formation of concepts to be the province of reason; in his opinion the latter power alone marks off man from the brute. However, the power of abstraction, which collects the common features in a number of different presentations, is also found in the higher animals. Intelligent dogs not only discriminate between individual men, cats, etc., according as they are sympathetic or the reverse, but they have a general idea of man or cat, and behave very differently towards the two. On the other hand, the power of forming concepts is still so slight in uncivilized races that it rises but little above the mind of dogs, horses, etc.; the mental interval between them and civilized man is extremely wide. However, a long scale of reason unites the various stages of association of presentations which lead up to the formation of concepts; it is quite impossible to lay down a strict line of demarca- tion between the lower and higher mental functions of animals, or between the latter and reason. Hence the distinction between the two cerebral functions is only relative; the intelligence comprises the narrower circle of concrete and more proximate associations, while rea- son deals with the wider sphere of abstract and more 316 MENTAL LIFE comprehensive groups of association. In the scientific hfe of the mind, therefore, the intelligence is always occupied with empirical investigation, and reason with speculative knowledge. But the two faculties are equally functions of the phronema, and depend on the normal anatomic and chemical condition of this organ of thought. Since Kant won so great a prominence in modern philosophy for the idea of pure reason by his famous Critique (1781), it has been much discussed, especially in the modern metaphysical theory of knowledge. It has, however, like all other ideas, undergone considerable changes of meaning in the course of time. Kant himself at first understood by pure reason "reason independent of all experience." But impartial modern psychology based on the physiology of the brain and the phylogeny of its functions, has shown that there is no such thing as this pure a priori knowledge, independent of all experi- ence. Those principles of reason which at present seem to be a priori in this sense have been attained in virtue of thousands of experiences. In so far as this is a ques- tion of real knowledge of the truth, Kant himself has frequently recognized the point. He says expressly in his Prolegomena to any future metaphysic that can be regarded as Science (1783, p. 204): "A knowledge of things by pure reason or pure intelligence is nothing but an empty appearance; only in experience is there truth." In subscribing to this empirical theory of knowledge of Kant I. and rejecting the transcendental theory of Kant II., we may on our side understand by pure reason "knowledge without prejudices," free from all dogma — all fictions of faith. The familiar cry of modern metaphysicians, "Return to Kant," has become so general in Germany that not only nearly all metaphysicians — the oihcial representa- tives of "philosophy" at our universities — but also 317 THE WONDERS OF LIFE many distinguished scientists, regard Kant's dualistic theory of knowledge as a necessary condition for the attainment of truth. Kant dominated philosophy in the nineteenth century much as Aristotle did in the Middle Ages. His authority became especially powerful when the prevailing Christian faith believed that his "practical reason" fully supported its own three funda- mental dogmas — the personality of God, the immortality of the soul, and the freedom of the will. It overlooked the fact that Kant had utterly failed to find proofs of these dogmas in his Critique of Pure Reason. Even conservative governments found favorable features in this dualistic philosophy. We are, therefore, forced to return once more to this mischievous system; though Kant's antinomy of the two reasons has now been refuted so often and so thoroughly that we need not dwell any further on this point. Although the great Konigsberg philosopher brought every side of human life within his comprehensive sphere of study, man remained to him — as he had been to Plato and Aristotle. Christ and Descartes — a dual being, made up of a physical body and a transcendental mind or spirit. Comparative anatomy and evolution, which have provided the solid morphological basis of monistic anthropology, did not come into existence until the beginning of the nineteenth century; they were quite unknown to Kant. He had, however, a presenti- ment of their importance, as Fritz Schultze has shown in his interesting work on Kant and Darwin (1875). We find in various places expressions which may be described as anticipations of Darwinism. Kant also gave lectures on " Pragmatic Anthropology," and studied the psychol- ogy of races and peoples. It is remarkable that he did not arrive at a phylogenetic conception of the human mind, and a recognition of the possibility of its evolu- tion from the mind of other vertebrates. It is clear that 318 MENTAL LIFE he was held back from this by the profound mystic tendency of his theory of reason, and the dogma of the immortahty of the soul, the freedom of the will, and the categorical imperative. Reason remained in Kant's view a transcendental phenomenon, and this dualistic error had a great influence on the whole structure of his philosophy. It must be remembered, of course, that our knowledge of the psychology of peoples was then very imperfect; but a critical study of the facts then known should have sufficed to convince him of the lower and animal condition of their minds. If Kant had had children, and followed patiently the development of the child's soul (as Preyer did a century later), he would hardly have persisted in his erroneous idea that reason, with its power of attaining a priori knowledge, is a transcendental and supernatural wonder of life, or a unique gift to man from Heaven. The root of the error is that Kant had no idea of the natural evolution of the mind. He did not employ the comparative and genetic methods to which we owe the chief scientific achievements of the last half-century. Kant and his followers, who confined themselves almost exclusively to the introspective method or the self-obser- vation of their own mind, regarded as the model of the human soul the highly developed and versatile mind of the philosopher, and disregarded altogether the lower stages of mental life which we find in the child and the savage. The immense advance made by the science of man in the second half of the nineteenth century cut the ground from under the older anthropology and the dualistic system of Kant. A number of newly founded branches of science co-operated in the work. Compara- tive anatomy showed that our whole complicated frame resembles that of the other mammals, and in particular differs only by slight stages of growth, and therefore in 319 THE WONDERS OF LIFE the details of the organs, from that of the anthropoid apes. The comparative histology of the brain especially showed that this is also true of the brain, the real organ of mind. From comparative embryology we learned that man develops from a simple ovum just like the anthropoid ape; in fact, that it is almost impossible to distinguish between the ape and the human embryo even at a late stage of development. Comparative animal chemistry explained that the chemical compounds which build up our organs, and the conversions of energy which accompany its metabolism, resemble those in the other vertebrates. Comparative physiology taught us that all man's vital functions — nutrition and reproduc- tion, movement and sensation — can be traced to the same physical laws in man as in all the other verte- brates. Above all, the comparative and experimental study of the sense-organs and the various parts of the brain showed that these organs of the m'nd work in the same way in man as in the other primates. Modern paleontology taught that man is, it is true, more than a hundred thousand years old, but only appeared on earth towards the close of the Tertiary Period. Pre- historic research and comparative ethnology have shown that civilized nations were preceded by older and lower races, and these by savages, which have a close bodily and mental affinity to the apes. Finally, the reformed theory of descent (1859) enabled us to unite the chief results of the various branches of anthropological study, and explain them phylogenetically by the development of man from other primates (anthropoid apes, cynoceph- ali, lemures, etc.). By this means a new and monistic basis was provided for modern anthropology; the posi- tion assigned to man in nature by dualistic metaphysics was shown to be utterly untenable. I have attempted in the last edition of my Anthropogeny (of which an English edition is in preparation) to combine all these 320 MENTAL LIFE results of empirical investigation in a sketch of the natural evolution of man, paying special regard to em- bryology. I pointed out in chapters ii.-vi. of the Riddle how important a part of our monistic philosophy this phylogenetic anthropology is. The monistic conception of the human body and mind, which the theory of descent has put on a zoo- logical basis, was bound to meet with the sternest resistance in dualistic and metaphysical circles. It was, however, also regarded with great disapproval by many modern empirical anthropologists, especially those who take it to be their chief task to make as "exact" a study as possible of the human frame, and measure and describe its various parts. We might have expected these descriptive anthropologists and ethnologists to extend a friendly hand to the new anthropogeny, and avail themselves of its leading ideas, in order to bring unity and causal connection into the enormous mass of empirical material accumulated. However, this took place only to a limited extent, The majority of anthro- pologists regarded evolution, and especially the evolution of man, as an undemonstrated hypothesis. They con- fined themselves to accumulating huge masses of raw empirical material, without having any clear aim or any definite questions in view. This was chiefly the case in Germany, where the Society of Anthropology and Pre- historic Research was for thirty years under the lead of Rudolph Virchow. This famous scientist had won great honor in connection with the reform of medicine by his cellular pathology and a number of distinguished works on pathological anatomy and histology since the middle of the nineteenth century. But when he after- wards (subsefjuently to his removal to Berlin, 1856) devoted himself chiefly to political and social questions, he lost sight of the great advance made in other branches of biology. He comi)letely failed to appreciate its 21 THE WONDERS OF LIFE greatest achievement — the establishment of the science of evolution by Darwin. To this we must add the psychological metamorphosis (similar to that of Wundt, Baer, Dubois-Reymond, and others), of which I have spoken in the sixth chapter of the Riddle. The extraor- dinary authority of Virchow, and the indefatigable zeal with which he struggled every year until his death (1903) against the descent of man from other verte- brates, caused a wide-spread opposition to the doctrine of evolution. This was supported especially by Johan- nes Ranke, of Munich, the secretary of the Anthro- pological Society. Happily, a change has recently set in. However, my Anthropogeiiy has remained for thirty years the only work of its kind — namely, a comprehen- sive treatment of man's ancestral history, especially in the light of embryology. As I pointed out in the eighth and ninth chapters of the Riddle, the most solid foundation of our monistic psychology is the fact that the human mind grows. Like every other function of our organism, our mental activity exhibits the phenomenon of development in two directions, individually in each human being and phyletically in the whole race. The ontogeny of the mind — or the embryology of the human soul — brings before us in direct observation the various stages of development through which the mind of every man passes from the beginning to the close of life. The phylogeny of the mind — or the ancestral history of the human soul — does not afford us this direct observation ; it can only be deduced by a comparison and synthesis of the historical indications which are supplied by history and prehistoric research on the one hand, and the critical study of the various stages of mental life in savages and the higher vertebrates on the other. In this the biogenetic law is used with great success (chapter xvi.). 322 MENTAL LIFE As everybody knows, the new-born child shows as yet no trace of mind or reason or consciousness; these functions are wanting in it as completely as in the embryo from which it has been developed during the nine months in the mother's womb. Even in the ninth month, when most of the organs of the human embryo are formed and arranged as they appear later, there is no more trace of mind in its psychic life than in the ovum and spermatozoon from which it was evolved. The moment in which these sexual cells unite marks precisely the real commencement of individual existence, and therefore of the soul also (as a potential function of the plasm). But the mind proper — or reason, the high- er conscious function of the soul — only develops, slowly and gradually, long after birth. As Flechsig has shown anatomically, the cortex in the new-bom child is not yet organized or capable of functioning. Rational conscious- ness is even impossible for the child when it begins to speak; it reveals itself for the first time (after the first year) at the moment when the child speaks of itself, not in the third person, but as "L" With this self -con- sciousness comes also the antithesis of the individual to the outer world, or world-consciousness. This is the real beginning of mental life. In defining the appearance of the individual mind by the awakening of self-consciousness, we make it possible to distinguish, from the monistic physiological point of view, between "soul" (psyche) and "spirit" {p>icnma). There is a soul even in the maternal ovum and the pa- ternal spermatozoon (cf. chapter xi.); there is an indi- vidual soul in the stem-cell (cyttda) which arises at con- ception by the blending of the parent cells. But the mind proper, the thinking reason, develops out of the animal intelligence (or earlier instincts) of the child only with the consciousness of its personality as opposed to the outer world. At the same time the child reaches the 323 THE WONDERS OF LIFE higher stage of personality, which law has for a long time taken under its protection and made morally re- sponsible to society by education. This shows how er- roneous and untenable, from the physiological point of view, are the ideas still embodied in our code as to the psychic life and the mind of the embryo and the new- born infant. They came mostly from the canon law of the Catholic Church. The dualistic ideas of the soul of the human embry^o which were taught by the Church in the Middle Ages are particularly interesting from the psychological point of view; and at the same time they are of great practical importance even in our own day, since many of their moral consequences form an important element in canon law, and have passed from this into civil law. This influential canon law was formed under ecclesiastical authority from the decisions of Church councils and the decretals of the popes. It is, like most of the dogmas and decrees which civilization owes to this powerful hierarchy, a curious tissue of old traditions and new fictions, political dogmas, and crass superstition. It is directed to the despotic ruling of the uneducated masses and the exclusive dominion of the Church — a Church that calls itself Christian while thus acting as the very reverse of pure Christianity. The canon law takes its name from the dogmatic rules (or canons) of the Church. They involuntarily suggest the metal tubes which are so often the ultima ratio regis in the wars of Christian nations. The canonical regulations of the Church, as implements of a crude spiritual despotism, have no more to do with the ethical laws of pure reason than the can- nons of secular authorities have as naked organs of physical force. We might write the motto. Ultima ratio ecclesicB (the last argument of the Church), over the sacred Corpus Juris Canonici. A collection of later papal decretals which forms an appendix to the books 324 MENTAL LIFE of canon law was very happily given the official title of Extravagaiitcs. Among the "extravagant" nonsense which the papacy included in canon law as a moral code for believers is its view of the psychic life of the embryo. The "immortal soul" is supposed to enter the soulless embryo only several weeks after conception. As theologians and metaphysicians are very much di- vided as to the period of this entrance of the soul, and know nothing about the structure of the embryo and its development, we will only recall the fact that the human foetus cannot be distinguished from that of the anthro- poid ape and other mammals even in the sixth week of its development. The outline of the five cerebral vesicles and the three higher sense-organs (nose, eye, and ear vesicle) is discernible in the head ; the two pairs of limbs can be traced in the shape of four simple roundish unjointed plates; and the pointed tail sticks out at the lower part, the rudimentary legacy from our long-tailed ape-ancestors. Although the cortex is not yet developed at this stage, the embryo may be considered to have a "soul" {cf. chapters xiv. and xv. of my AjitJiropogoiy, and plates 8-14). It is said to be a great merit of canon law that it was the first to extend legal protection to the human embryo, and punished abortion with death as a mortal sin. But as this mystical theory of the entrance of the soul is now scientifically untenable, we should expect them consistently to extend this protection to the foetus in its earlier stages, if not to the ovum itself. The ovary of a mature maid contains about 70,000 ova; each of these might be developed into a human being under favorable circumstances if it united with a male sper- mium after its release from the ovary. If the state is so eager for the multiplication of its citizens in the general interest, and regards prolific reproduction as a "duty" of its members, this is certainly a "sin of 325 THE WONDERS OF LIFE omission.** It punishes abortion with several years' imprisonment. But while civil law thus takes its in- spiration from canon law, it overlooks the physiologi- cal fact that the ovum is a part of the mother's body over which she has full right of control; and that the embryo that develops from it, as well as the new-born child, is quite unconscious, or is a purely "reflex ma- chine," like any other vertebrate. There is no mind in it as yet ; it only appears after the first year, when its organ, the phronema in the cortex, is differentiated. This interesting fact is explained by the biogenetic law, which shows that the ontogeny of the brain is a con- densed recapitulation of its phylogeny in virtue of the laws of heredity. The biogenetic law applies just as much to the brain, the organ of mind, as to any other organ of the human body. On the strength of the ontogenetic facts, which fall under direct observation, we infer that there was a corresponding development in the phylogenetic series of our animal ancestors. A significant confirmation of this inference is found in comparative anatomy. It shows that in all the skull-animals (craniota) — from the fishes and amphibia up to the apes and man — the brain is developed in the same way, as a vesicular distension of the ectodermal medullary tube. This simple oval cere- bral vesicle first divides into three and afterwards five successive vesicles by transverse constriction (Anthro- pogeny, chapter xxiv., plate 24). It is the first of these vesicles, the cerebrum, that afterwards becomes the chemical laboratory of the mind. In the lower craniota (fishes and amphibia) the cerebrum remains very small and simple. It only reaches a notably higher stage in the three chief classes of the vertebrates, the amniotes. As these land-dwelling and air-breathing craniota have more difficult work to do in the struggle for life than their lower aquatic ancestors, we find much more varied 326 MENTAL LIFE and complex habits among them. These hereditary habits are gradually converted into instincts by func- tional adaptation and progressive heredity; and with the further development of consciousness in the higher mammals we have at last the appearance of reason. The gradual unfolding of the mental life is accompanied step by step with the advance of its anatomic organ, the phronema in the cortex. Recent careful investigations of the ontogeny and histology of the origin of mi. id (by Flechsig, Hitzig, Edinger, Ziehen, Oscar Vogt, etc.) have given us an interesting insight into the mysterious proc- esses of its phylogeny. While the comparative anatomy of the cortex gives us a good idea of the gradual historical development of the mind in the higher classes of vertebrates, we get at the same time from their fossilized remains positive indica- tions as to the period of time in which this phylogenesis has slowly taken place. The historical series in which the classes of vertebrates have succeeded each other in the great periods of the organic history of the earth is directly demonstrated by their fossil remans — the real commemorative medals of natural creation — and gives us a most valuable record of the ancestral history of our race and of the mind. The oldest strata that contain vertebrate remains form the huge Silurian System, which were, on the latest calculations, formed more than a hundred million years ago. They contain a few fossil fishes. In the succeeding Devonian System these are followed by the dipneusta, transitional forms between the fishes and the amphibia. The latter, the oldest four- footed and five-toed vertebrates, appear in the Carbo- niferous Period. They are succeeded in the Permian, the next system, by the oldest amniotes, the primitive reptiles (tocosauria). It is not until the next period (the Triassic) that the oldest mammals are found, small primitive monotremes (pantotJicria), then marsupials in 327 THE WONDERS OF LIFE the Jurassic, and the first placentals in the Cretaceans. The great wealth of varied and highly organized forms which are contained in this third and last sub-class of the mammals appear only in the succeeding Tertiary Period. The numbers of well-preserved skulls which these placentals have left behind in fossil form are particularly important, because they give us an idea of the quantitative and qualitative formation of the brain within the various orders; thus, for instance, in the modern carnivora the brain is from two to four times, and in the modern ungulates from six to eight times, as large (in proportion to the size of the body) as in their earliest Tertiary ancestors. It is also found that the cortex (the real organ of mind) has developed in the Tertiary Period at the expense of the other parts of the brain. The duration of this Csenozoic Period has lately been calculated at three million years (according to other geologists twelve to fourteen or more million years). It was, at all events, sufficient to make possible the gradual development of the human mind from the lower intelligence of our ape-ancestors and the instincts of the older placentalia. We have given the physiological name of the "phro- nema," as the real organ of mind or the instrument of reason, to that part of the cortex on the normal anatomic condition of which the action of the human mind depends. The remarkable investigations during the last few decades of the finer texture of the grey cortex (or cortical substance of the cerebrum) have shown that its structure — a real anatomic "wonder of life" — represents the most perfect morphological product of plasm; and its physiological function — mind — is the most perfect action of a "dynamo-machine," the highest achievement that we know anywhere in nature. Millions of psychic cells or neurona — each of them of an extremely elaborate fibril molecular structure — are associated as 328 MENTAL LIFE special thought-organs (phroneta) at certain parts of the cortex, and these again are built up into a large har- monious system of wonderful regularity and capacity. Each phronetal cell is a small chemical laboratory, con- tributing its share to the unified central function of the mind, the conscious action of reason. Scientists are still very far from agreement as to the extent of the phronema in the cortex and its delimitation from the neighboring sense-centres (sensoria). But they are all agreed that there is such a central organ of mind, and that its normal anatomic and chemical condition is the first requisite for the life of the human mind. This behef — one of the foundations of monistic psychology — is confirmed by the study of psychiatry. The study of the diseased organism has greatly furthered our knowledge of the normal frame. Diseases are so many physiological experiments made by nature herself under special conditions, which experimental physiology would often be unable to arrange artificially. The thoughtful physician or pathologist can often obtain most important knowledge of the function of organs by carefully observing them during disease. This is espe- cially true of diseases of the mind, which always have their immediate foundation in an anatomical or chemical modification of certain parts of the brain. Our advanc- ing knowledge of the localization of mental functions, or of their connection with special phroneta or organs of thought, is for the most part based on the experience that the destruction of the one is followed by the extinc- tion of the other. Modern psychiatry, the empirical science of mental disease, has thus become an important element of our monistic psychology. If Immanuel Kant had studied it and had visited the asylum wards for a few months, he would certainly have escaped the duaHst errors of his philosophy. We may say the same of the modern metaphysical psychologists who built up a mystic 329 THE WONDERS OF LIFE theory of an immortal soul without knowing the anat- omy, physiology, and pathology of the brain. The comparative anatomy, physiology, and pathology of the brain, in concurrence with the results of ontogeny and phylogeny, have led us to form the sound monistic principle that the human mind is a function of the phronema, and that the neurona of the latter, or the phronetal cells, are the real elementary organs of mental life. Hence modern energism is perfectly justified in regarding mental energy (in all its forms) from the same point of view as all other forms of nervous energy, and in fact all manifestations of energy in organic or inorganic nature. Fechner's psychophysics had already shown that a part of this nervous energy s measurable and methematically reducible to the mechanical laws of physics {Riddle, chapter vi.) Ostwald has, in his Natural Philosophy, lately emphasized the fact that all the mani- festations of mental life, not only sensation and will, but even thought and consciousness, can be reduced to nervous energy. Hence we may distinguish what are called mental forces from the other expressions of nervous energy as phronetic energy. The monistic re- search of Ostwald on the energy -processes in mental life (chapter xviii.), consciousness (chapter xix.), and will (chapter xx.) is very notable, and confirms the views I advanced in the second part of the Riddle (chapters vi., x., and xi.). Ostwald has, however, caused some mis- understanding by insisting on substituting his idea of energy for the pure notion of substance (as Spinoza had formulated it), and by rejecting the other attribute of substance, matter. His supposed "Refutation of Materialism" is a mere attack on windmills; his ener- gism (the consistent dynamism of Leibnitz, etc.) is just as one-sided as its apparent opposite, the consistent materialism of Democritus, Holbach, etc. The latter makes matter precede force ; the former regards matter as 330 MENTAL LIFE the product of force. Monism escapes the one-sidedness of both systems, and, as hylozoism, refuses to separate the two attributes of substance, space-filhng matter and active energy. This appHes to mental hfe just as to any other natural process; our mental forces or phronetic energies are just as much bound up with the neuroplasm, the living plasm of the neurona in the cortex, as the mechanical energy of our muscles is with the contractile myoplasm, the living muscular substance. In the exhaustive study of consciousness which I gave in the tenth chapter of the Riddle I sought to show that this enigmatic function — the central mystery of psychol- ogy — is not a transcendental problem, but a natural phenomenon, subject to the law of substance, as much as any other psychic power. The child's consciousness only develops long after its first year, and grows as gradually as any other psychic function; like these, it is bound up with the normal anatomic and chemical condition of its organs, the phroneta in the cortex. Consciousness develops originally out of unconscious functions (as an "inner view," or mirroring, of the action of the phronema) ; and at any time an unconscious process in the cortex may come within the sphere of consciousness by having the attention directed to it. On the other hand, conscious actions, which need a good deal of attention when they are first learned (such as playing the piano), may become unconscious through frequent repetition and practice. The fact that chemical energy is converted in the phronetal cells during any of these actions is proved by the fatigue and exhaustion which prolonged mental work causes in the brain, just as mechanical work does in the muscles. Fresh matter has to be supplied by the food before the mental work can be continued. Moreover, it is well known that various drinks have a considerable influence on consciousness (coffee and tea, beer and wine) ; and the temporary 331 J THE WONDERS OF LIFE extinction of it under chloroform or ether is an analo- gous fact. Again, the familiar phenomena of the dream, the deviations from normal consciousness, hallucinations, delusions, etc., must convince every impartial thinker that these mental functions are not of a metaphysical character, but physical processes in the neuroplasm of the brain, and thoroughly dependent on the law of substance. In complete contrast to this natural monistic con- ception of the human mind, which is, in my opinion, definitely established by nineteenth-century science, we have the older dualistic estimate of it which is still wide- ly accepted both by unlearned and learned, especially metaphysicians and theologians. I have already dealt in the Riddle (chapter xi.) with the grounds for this be- lief in an immaterial soul, and expressed my conviction that "the belief in the immortality of the human soul is in flagrant contradiction to the soundest empirical principles of modern science." I must refer the reader to what I said there about thanatism and athanatism, only reminding him once more of the immense influence of the Kantist philosophy in maintaining this belief in the spirituality of the soul. Kant derived from the introspective study of his own gifted mind an extremely high estimate of human reason, and he fallaciously trans- ferred this estimate to the human mind generally. He did not perceive that it is either wholl}^ wanting in the savage, or does not rise much above the stage which has been reached by the intelligence of the dog, horse, ele- phant, and other advanced animals. Modern anthropogeny has raised the theory of evolu- tion to the rank of an historical fact. All the various organs of our body resemble those of our nearest rela- tives, the anthropoid apes, in their structure and com- position. They only differ from them in details of form and size, which are determined by inherited variations 332 MENTAL LIFE of growth. But the functions as well as the organs have been inherited by man from his primate ancestors. This appUes to the mind also, which is merely the col- lective function of the phronema, the central organ of thought. An impartial comparison of mental life in the anthropoid ape and the savage shows that the differ- ences between the two are not more considerable than the differences in the structure of their brains. Hence, if one accepts the dualistic theory of the soul formulated by Plato and Kant and accepted by so many modern psychologists, it is necessary to attribute an immortal soul to the anthropoid apes and the higher mammals (especially to domestic dogs) just as well as to savage or civilized man (cf. chapter xi. of the Riddle). The thorough and careful study of the mental life of the savage, supported by the results of anthropogeny and ethnography, has in the course of the last forty years decided the issue of this struggle between the conflicting theories of the origin of civilization. The older theory of degeneration, based on religious beliefs, and so preferred by theologians and theosophists, de- clared that man — the "image of God" — was created originally with perfect bodily and mental powers, and only fell away from his high estate after the original sin. On this view the present savages are degenerate descend- ants of the first godlike men. (In tropical lands the anthropoid apes are in similar fashion regarded by the natives as degenerate branches of their own stem!) Although this Bil^lical degeneration theory is still taught in most of our schools, and even supported by a few mystic ])hilosophers, it had lost all scientific counte- nance before the end of the nineteenth century. It is now replaced by the modern theory of evolution, whit h was represented by Lamarck, Goethe, and Herder a century ago, and raised to a ]ircdominant position in ethnography by Darwin and Lubbock. It has taught 333 THE WONDERS OF LIFE us that human civilization is the outcome of a long and gradual process of evolution, covering thousands of years. The civilized races of our time have arisen from less civilized races, and these in turn from lower, until we reach the savage races which show no trace of civ- ilization. Ethnologists distinguish as a separate class the races which are found midway between the civilized peoples and the savages. We shall deal with their classification and characteristics later on (chapter xvii.). These races show some advance on the artistic instinct which we find in a slight degree even among the savages at times ; moreover, their animal curiosity develops into human curiosity, and raises the question of the causes of phe- nomena, the germ of all science. Civilized races, which occupy the next stage to these, are raised above them by the formation of larger states and a greater division of labor. The specialization of the various groups of workers and the greater ease of maintenance permit a further development of art and science. To these groups belong, of living races, the majority of the Mongolians, and the greater part of the inhabitants of Europe and Asia in ancient and mediaeval times. The great ancient civilizations of China, South- em India, Asia Minor, Egypt, and afterwards of Greece and Italy, show not only a great development of art and science, but also a concern for legislation, religious wor- ship, education of the young, and the spread of knowl- edge by written books. Civilization in the narrower sense, characterized by a high development of art and science and the manifold application of them to practical life in legislation, educa- tion, etc., was greatly advanced even in antiquity among several nations — in Asia by the Chinese, Southern Ind- ians, Babylonians, and Egyptians; in Europe by the Greeks and Romans of the classic age. However, their 334 MENTAL LIFE results were at first restricted to narrow fields, and were mostly lost during the Middle Ages. Modem civiliza- tion rose to importance about the end of the fifteenth century, when the invention of printing had made pos- sible the spread of knowledge far and wide, the dis- covery of America and circumnavigation of the globe had widened the horizon, and the Copemican system had demolished the error of geocentricism. Then began the many-sided growth of civilization which has reached so marvellous a height in the nineteenth century through the extraordinary development of science. Then at last free reason could triumph over the prevailing me- diaeval superstition. \ XV THE ORIGIN OF LIFE The miracle of the origin of hfe — Creation of species: Moses and Agassiz — Creation of the first cells: Wigand and Reinke — Agnostic position : resignation — Eternity hypothesis (dual- istic, Helmholtz; monistic, Preyer) — Archigony hypothesis (autogony hypothesis, Haeckel, Nageli; cyanic hypothesis, Pfliiger, Verworn) — Spontaneous generation — Saprobiosis or necrobiosis — Experiments in spontaneous generation — Pasteur — Stages of archigony — Observation of archigony — Synthesis of plasma — Value of the unsuccessful experi- ments to produce plasm artificially — The logic of modern experimental biology. THE question of the origin of life is one of the most important and interesting, but one of the most dif- ficult and complicated, problems with which the mind of man has been occupied for thousands of years. There are few other questions (such as the freedom of the will or personal immortality) on which such different and con- tradictory views have been expressed, and few that remain so far from being closed at the present day. There are, moreover, few problems on which the opinions of even distinguished thinkers diverge so much, and have degenerated so much into fantastic hypotheses. This is partly due to the extreme difficulty of giving a strictly scientific solution of the problem and partly to the con- fusion of ideas which is so great in this controversy, the lack of clear rational insight, and the powerful authority of the prevailing religious faith and other venerable dogmas. 33^ THE ORIGIN OF LIFE The easiest and quickest thin^^ to do is to cut the Gordian knot of the question with the sword of faith, or answer it with a behef in a supernatural creation. The first article of the creed was given to us in childhood as the foundation of all cosmic philosophy. It is based on the Mosaic account of creation in the first chapter of Genesis. As I have fully examined its scientific value in the second chapter of my History of Creation, I may refer the reader thereto. It is unquestionable that this myth still has a very great practical influence; the great majority of the clergy cling to it because it is found in the infallible ' ' word of God. ' ' Most governments, which hold blind faith to be an important element of education, include it in the code for the elementary school. On the other hand, it is difficult to find a man of science who will uphold it to-day. The gifted Louis Agassiz made one of the most remarkable attempts to do this in his Essay on Classification (1858), a book that appeared almost contemporaneously with Darwin's epoch-making Origin of Species, and dealt with the general problems of biology from the directly opposite, the mystic, point of view. According to Agassiz, each species of animal or plant is an "incarnate thought of the Creator." Differing from this Biblical fancy of the supernatural creation of each species, two botanists, Wigand of Marburg and Reinke of Kiel, have lately restricted the action of the celestial architect very considerably; they have ascribed to him only the creation of the primitive cells, which he is supposed to have endowed with the power to develop into the higher organisms. Wigand assumed for the origin of each species a special primitive cell and a long phylogenetic develo])ment of this; Reinke prefers a stem, composed of a number of species. These modern creative theories have no more scientific value than that of Agassiz; they are equally based on pure superstition {cf. chapters i.-iii.). 337 THE WONDERS OF LIFE A different attitude from this irrational positive super- stition is the sceptical view of those scientists who regard the question of the origin of Hfe as insoluble or transcendental. Darwin and Virchow are representa- tives of this agnostic position; they held that we know nothing, and can know nothing, about the origin of the first organisms. Darwin, for instance, explains in his chief work that he "has nothing to do with the origin of the fundamental spiritual forces, or with that of life itself." This is a complete abandonment of the task of solving a scientific problem which must present as def- inite a subject of inquiry to modern research as any other evolutionary problem. The origin of life on our planet represents a fixed point in its history. However, there is nothing to be said if a scientist chooses to make no inquiry into it. A number of distinguished modern scientists maintain this agnostic attitude ; they are more or less convinced that the origin of life is a natural process, but believe we have not as yet the means to explain it. Different, again, is a third attitude which regards the problem of the origin of life as extremely difficult, yet capable of solution. This is the position of Dubois- Reymond, for instance, who counts the origin of hfe as the third great cosmic problem. Most of the modern scientists who have worked on the problem are of this opinion, although their views as to the way of solving it differ very much. We are confronted, in the first place, with two essentially different views which we may call the eternity-hypothesis and the theory of archigony (or spontaneous generation). According to the first view, organic life is eternal; according to the second, it began at a definite point of time. The eternity- hypothesis has assumed two very different forms, one of which has a dualistic and the other a monistic base. Helmholtz is a representative of the former theory, and Preyer of the latter. 33^ THE ORIGIN n V L I F E Hermann Eberhard Richter put forward, in 1865, the hypothesis that infinite space is full throughout of the germs of living things, just as it is of inorganic bodies; both of them are in a condition of eternal development. When the ubiquitous germs reach a mature and habita- ble cosmic body, which possesses heat and moisture in the proper degrees for their development, they break into life, and may lead to the formation of a whole world of living things. Richter conceives these ubiquitous germs as living cells, and formulates the princii)le: Omne vivuni ab cutcruitate e cellida (Every living thing is eternal and from a cell). In much the same way the botanist Anton Kerner postulates the eternity of organic life and its complete independence of the inorganic world. But the difficulties encountered by this hypoth- esis, in the indefinite form that Kerner gives it, are so great and so obvious that his theory has won no rec- ognition. However, the "cosmozoic hypothesis" attained a great popularity when it was afterwards taken up by two of the most distinguished physicists, Hermann Helm- holtz and Sir W. Thomson (Lord Kelvin). Helmholtz formulated the alternative thus (in 1884)*: "Organic life either came into existence at a certain period, or it is eternal. ' ' He declared for the latter view, on the ground that we have not succeeded in producing living organisms by artificial means. He supposes that the meteors that roam about the universe might contain the germs of organisms, and, under favorable conditions, these might reach the earth or other planets and develop thereon. This cosmozoic hypothesis of Helmholtz is untenable, because the physical features of space (the extreme temperatures, the absolute dryness, the absence of atmos- phere, etc.) exclude the lasting existence of plasm on meteorites in the form of organic germs with a capacity to Uve. The hypothesis is, moreover, logically useless, 339 THE WONDERS OF LIFE since it does not solve, but postpones, the question of the origin of organic life. If it is consistently worked out, it leads to pure cosmological dualism. Another and very different theory of the eternity of life has been elaborated by Theodor Fechner (1873) and Wilhelm Preyer (1880). Both these scientists extend the idea of life to the whole cosmos, and reject the dis- tinction that is usually drawn between the organic and the inorganic. Fechner goes so far as to ascribe con- sciousness to the whole universe and every single body in it, and regards individual organisms merely as parts of one vast universal organism. His system is, there- fore, panpsychistic, and, at the same time, pantheistic, as he somewhat mystically connects the idea of a con- scious God with that of a living universe. Preyer generally agrees with him in extending the idea of life to the whole universe, and conceiving it as an organism. He applies his theory in the symbolic sense which I alluded to on page 38, and described as impracticable. The fiery mass of the forming earth is the gigantic organism, and Preyer gives the name of "life" to its rotatory movement (or gravitational energy). As it cooled down, the heavier metals (the dead inorganic masses) separated from it; from the rest of it were formed first simple and afterwards complex carbon-com- binations, and finally albumin and plasm. This extension of the word "organism " has very properly met with little approval in biology. It only increases the confusion, and the difficulty of marking off biological from abio- logical science, which is both practically necessary and theoretically justified. If, then, in our opinion, the eternity -hypotheses are of no more value than the creation-hypotheses, we have left, for the purpose of answering the great question of the origin of life, only the third group of scientific theories which I have combined under the general head 340 THE ORIGIN OF LIFE of archigony. They start from the following points: I. Organic life is everywhere bound up with the plasm ^ (or protoplasm) , a chemical substance of a viscous char- acter, having albuminous matter and water as its chief constituents. 2. The characteristic movements of this living substance, to which we give the name of organic life, are physical and chemical processes, that can only take place within certain limits of temperature (between the freezing-point and boiling-point of water). 3. Be- yond these limits organic life may in certain circum- stances be maintained for a time in a latent condition (apparent death, potential life) ; but this latent condi- tion is restricted to a certain (and generally short) peri- od. 4. As the earth, like all the other planets, was for a long time in a state of incandescence, at a temperature of several thousand degrees, living organisms (viscous albuminoids) cannot possibly have existed on it, and so cannot be eternal. 5. Fluid water, the first condition for the appearance of organic life, cannot have formed on it until the crust at the surface had fallen below boil- ing-point. 6. The chemical processes which first set in at this stage of development must have been catalyses, which led to the formation of albuminous combinations, and eventually of plasm. 7. The earliest organisms to be thus formed can only have been plasmodomous mo- nera, structureless organisms without organs; the first forms in which the living matter individualized were probably homogeneous globules of plasm, like certain of the actual chromacea (chroococcus). 8. The first cells were developed secondarily from these primitive monera, by separation of the central caryoplasm (nucleus) and peripheral cytoplasm (cell-body). The monistic hypothesis of abiogenesis, or autogony ( = self- development) in the strictly scientific sense of the word, was first formulated by me in 1866 in the second book of the General Morphology. The solid 341 THE WONDERS OF LIFE foundation for it was found in the monera I had de- scribed, the very simple organisms without organs that had up to that time been overlooked or thrust aside. It is of radical importance, in giving a naturalistic solution of the problem of the origin of life, to start from these structureless granules of living matter, and not — as still generally happens — from the cell ; these nucleated elementary organisms could not be the earliest archigo- nous living things, but must have been evolved second- arily from the unnucleated monera. Hence, I made a very thorough study of these rudimentary organisms in my Monograph on the Monera (1870), and endeavored to formulate it more clearly later on (in the first volume of the Systematic Phytogeny). In regard to the chemical question of the first formation of plasm and its inorganic preparation, Edward Pfliiger conducted some valuable investigations, and recognized that the radical of cyano- gen was the chief element of the living plasm. I may therefore distinguish two different stages of the theory — my own older autogony-hypothesis and the later cyanogen-hypothesis. The theory of abiogenesis, or archigony, which I advanced in 1866, and have developed in later writings, appeals directly to the biochemical facts that modern vegetal physiology has firmly established. The chief of these facts is that even the living green plant-cell has the synthetic faculty of plasmodomism or carbon-assimila- tion; that is to say, it is able to build up, by a chemical synthesis and reduction, from simple inorganic com- pounds (water, carbonic acid, nitric acid, and ammonia), the complex albuminous compounds which we call plasm or protoplasm, and which we regard as the active living substance and the true material basis of all vital function (cf, chapter vi.). All botanists are now agreed that this most important process of vegetal life, the fundamental process of all organic life and all organiza- 342 THE ORIGIN OF LIFE tion, is a purely chemical (or, in the wider sense, physi- cal) process, and that there is no question of a specific vital force or a mystic constructor (like the famous "mechanical engineer of life"), or any other tran- scendental agency, in connection with it. The tiny chemical laboratory in which this remarkable organo- plastic process takes place under the influence of sun- light is, in the simplest plants, the chromacea, either the whole homogeneous globule of plasm {chroococcus) or its bluish-green surface-layer, which is active as a chromatic principle (chromatophore). But in most plants these reduction-laboratories are the chromatella or chromatophora, which have been differentiated from the rest of the plasm of the cell, and are colorless globu- lar leucoplasts within its dark interior, or green chromo- plasts (or granules of chlorophyll) at its illumined sur- face. My theory of archigony only assumes that this chemical process of plasmodomism which we find re- peated every second in every plant-cell exposed to the sunlight, and which has become an "inherited habit" of the green plant - cell, developed of itself at the be- ginning of organic life; in other words, it is a catalytic process (or one analogous to catalysis), the physical and chemical conditions of which were present in the condition of organic nature at that time. My hypothesis was very strongly confimied twenty years ago by the adhesion of the able botanist, Carl Niigeli. In his instructive work, A Mechanical- physio- logical Theory of Evolution (1884), he supported all the principal ideas as to the natural origin of life which 1 had advanced in 1866. He formulates the chief part of them in this admirable principle: The origin of the organic from the inorganic is. in the first place, not a question of experience and experiment, but a fact deduced from the law of the constancy of matter and force. If all things in the material world are causally related, if all 343 THE WONDERS OF LIFE phenomena proceed on natural principles, organisms, which are formed of and decay into the same matter, must have been derived originally from inorganic compounds. This excellent and clear declaration of a distinguished scientist and profound thinker might be taken to heart by the "exact" scientists who are always attacking the monistic theory of archigony as an unproved hypothesis, or regard the whole problem as insoluble. Nageli has, moreover, proceeded to make a thorough study of the molecular processes involved, and embodied the results in his idioplasm theory. He believes that at the be- ginning of organization the definite autonomous ar- rangement of the smallest homogeneous parts of the plasm was a matter of the greatest importance. In his opinion these "micella" are crystalline groups of mole- cules, arranged multifariously in strings and parallel rows. A similar and more elaborate attempt to give a physi- cal explanation of the processes of archigony and trace them to mechanical molecular structures was made by Ludwig Zehnder in 1899 in his work on The Origin of Life. He believes that the smallest and lowest life- unities (the micellar strings of Nageli and the biophora of Weismann, corresponding to my plastidules) have a tubular shape, and so he calls them "fistella." He sup- poses that these invisible molecular structures are regu- larly arranged in millions in the plasma of the cell, and differentiated in such a way that some will effect endos- mosis, others contraction, others the conduction of stim- uli, and so on. As in the similar work of Nageli and others, the value of this molecular hypothesis is that it stimulates us to attempt to conceive the mode of the arrangement and movement of the molecules of plasm in the process of archigony on physical principles. A more interesting and notable attempt to penetrate into the mysterious obscurity of the chemical processes 344 THE ORIGIN 01' LIFE in archigony was made in 1875 by the distinguished physiologist, Edward Pfliiger, in his essay on Physio- logical Combustion in the Living Organism. He starts from the fact that the plasm (or protoplasm) is the material basis of all vital phenomena, and that this living matter owes its properties to the chemical prop- erties of the albumin (whether we regard this as a chemical unity, protein or protalbumin, or as a mixture of different compounds). However, Pfliiger sharply distinguishes between the living albumin of the plasm out of which all organisms are built, and the dead albumin, such as we find it, for instance, in the glairy albumin of the hen's e^gg. Only the living albumin (plasm) decomposes of itself in a slight degree, and to a greater extent under the influence of external exci- tation; the dead albumin will remain intact for a long time under favorable conditions. The cause of the extraordinary instability of the living albumin is its intramolecular oxygen — that is to say, the oxygen that is taken into the interior of the plasma-molecules in breathing, and effects there a disassociation, surround- ing the atoms and breaking up the new-formed groups. The real cause of this rapid decomposability of the plasm, and of the accompanying fonnation of carbonic acid, is found in the cyanogen, a remarkable body com- posed of an atom of carbon and an atom of nitrogen, which, in conjunction with potassium, forms the well- known and very virulent poison, cyanide of potassium. The non-nitrogenous decomposition-products of the dead and the living albumin agree in the main, but their nitrogenous products are totally different. Uric acid, creotin, guanine, and the other decomposition products of plasm contain the cyanogen-radical, and the most important of all, urea, can be artificially produced from cyanic compounds, as Wohler showed in 1828. From this we may infer that the living albumin always con- 345 THE WONDERS OF LIFE tains the cyanogen-radical, and that dead nutritive al- bumin does not. The belief that it is cyanogen which gives its characteristic vital properties to the plasm is supported by a number of analogies that we find to exist between cyanide compounds, especially cyanic acid (C N O H.) and the living albumin. Both bodies are fluid and transparent at a low temperature, while they set at a higher; both of them break up in the presence of water into carbonic acid and ammonia ; both produce urea by disassociation (by the intramolecular surround- ing of the atoms, not by direct oxydation). "The similarity of the two substances is so great," says Pfliiger, "that I might describe cyanic acid as a semi- living molecule." Both substances grow in the same way by concatenation of the atoms, homogeneous groups of atoms joining together chain-wise in large masses. There is an especial interest in connection with the theory of archigony and its physical basis in the chemi- cal fact that cyanogen and its compounds — cyanide of potassium, cyanic acid, cyanide of hydrogen, etc. — are only formed at incandescent heat; that is to say, when the requisite inorganic nitrogenous compounds are put with glowing coals, or the mixture is heated to incandescence. Other essential constituents of albu- min, such as carburetted hydrogen or alcohol-radical, can be formed synthetically in heat. "Thus," says Pfluger, "nothing is clearer than the possibility of the formation of cyanic compounds when the earth was en- tirely or partially in a state of incandescence or great heat. We see how extraordinarily all the facts of chem- istry point to fire as the force that has produced the con- stituents of albumin by synthesis. Hence life was born from fire, and the chief conditions of its appearance are associated with a time when the earth was a glowing ball of fire. When we remember the incalculably long period in which the surface of the earth was slowly cool- 346 THE O R I O I X OF LIFE ing, we see that cyanogen, and the compounds that con- tained cyanogen, and carbiiretted hydrogen, had j^lcnty of time and opportunity to follow out to any extent their great tendency to the transposition and formation of polymeria (chains of atoms), and, with the co-opera- tion of oxygen and afterwards of water and salts, to evolve into the self-decomposable albumin which is liv- ing matter." In regard to the latter feature, it is well to emphasize the fact that, as will be understood, there must have been a long series of chemical intermediary stages between the incandescent formation of cyanogen and the appearance of the aqueous living plasm. Pfliiger's cyanogen theory does not conflict with my monera theory, but rather supplements it, by its careful and thoroughly scientific study of a much earlier stage of primitive biogenesis — in a sense, the first period of preparation for the formation of albumin. This must be well borne in mind in view of the attacks which have lately been made on it by Neumeister and other vital- ists; it is supposed to be untenable, because " there is an impassable gulf between cyanic compounds and pro- teids." This criticism is answered by the living albu- min itself, which always contains in its nitrogenous de- composition products the radical of cyanide or other substances (urea) that can be artificially produced from cyanic compounds. Another objection is that "the cyanic compounds which were formed in the heat must have very quickly perished on the subsequent appear- ance of water." The objection has no weight, since we can form no definite idea as to the special conditions of chemical activity in those times. We can only say that the conditions during this long period (embracing mill- ions of years) were totally different from those of chemi- cal action at the surface of the earth to-day. The real ground of the opposition of Neumeister and other vital- ists is their dualistic conception of nature, which will 347 THE WONDERS OF LIFE maintain at all costs the deep gulf between the organic and inorganic worlds. Max Verworn, in his General Physiology, has fully de- scribed and criticised the various theories of the appear- ance of life on the earth. He rightly attributes a great value to Pfliiger's cyanogen theory, because "it makes a strictly scientific study of the problem in close rela- tion to the facts of physiological chemistry, and goes thoroughly into detail." He agrees with Pfiiiger when he expresses himself as follows: "I would say, therefore, that the first albumin to be formed was in point of fact living matter, endued with the property in all its radi- cals of attracting especially homogeneous parts with great force and preference, in order to build them chemi- cally into the molecule, and so grow indefinitely. On this view the living albumin need not have a constant molecular weight, because it is a huge molecule in an unceasing process of formation and decomposition, prob- ably acting on the ordinary chemical molecules as a sun does on a small meteor." This theory, which I believe to be correct, is also maintained by many other modern scientists who have made a particular study of the diffi- cult question of the nature and origin of the albumi- noids. Now that we have described the various modern theories of archigony that are worth considering, and recognized with Nageli that the original development of the organic from the inorganic is a fact, we may glance at the older theories which, under the name of "spontaneous generation," afforded matter for a good deal of controversy. It is true that they are now al- most entirely abandoned, but the experiments in con- nection with them excited a good deal of interest and led to many misunderstandings. The older hypotheses of "spontaneous generation" do not bear on our problem of archigony (or the first 348 THE ORIGIN OF LIFE development of living matter from lifeless inorganic carbon compounds) but relate to the formation of lower organisms out of the putrid and decomposing organic elements of higher organisms. In order to distinguish these hypotheses from the totally different theory of archigony, it is better to give them the name of sapro- biosis (an earlier name was necrobiosis), which means the birth of living from, dead (nekron) or putrid (sapron) organic matter. Saprobiosis is preferable, because nec- robiosis is better used in a different sense, for the dead organic parts which gradually bring about the death of the living body (see p. io6). It was believed in ancient times that lower organisms could arise from the dead remains of higher organisms, such as fleas from manure, lice from morbid pustules in the skin, moths from old furs, and mussels from slime in the water. As these stories were supported by the authority of Aristotle, and on that account believed by St. Augustine and other fathers, and reconciled with the faith, they were held until the beginning of the eighteenth century. Even in the year 17 13 the botanist Heucherus stated that the green duck-weed (lemna) is only condensed grease from the surface of foul standing water, and that water-cress was formed from it in fresh running water. The first scientific refutation of these old stories was made by the Italian physician, Francisco Redi, in 1674, on the basis of very careful experiment: he was perse- cuted for "unbelief" on that account. He showed that all these animals arose from eggs that had been deposited by female animals in dung, skin, fur, slime, etc. But at that time the proof could not be extended to the tape- worms, maw-worms, and other intestinal animals {nt- tozoa), which live inside other animals (in the bowels, blood, brain, or liver). It was still believed that these arise from diseased parts of the host-animals in which they live, until about the middle of the nineteenth cen- 349 THE WONDERS OF LIFE tury. It was not until 1 840-1 860 that it was shown by the experiments of Siebold, Leuckart, Van Beneden, Virchow, and other famous biologists, that all these in- testinal animals have come from without into the ani- mals they live in, and propagate there by eggs. Of late years the proof has been applied all round. On the other hand, the hypothesis of saprobiosis re- tained its position until quite recently for one section of the smallest and lowest organisms, the microscopic forms of life, invisible to the naked eye, which were formerly called infusoria, and which we now call by the wider name of protists or unicellulars. When Leeuwen- hoek discovered the infusoria in 1675 with the newly invented microscope, and showed that they arise in great quantities in infusions of hay, moss, flesh, and other putrid organic substances, it was generally be- lieved that they were spontaneously generated there. The Abbe Spallanzani showed in 1687 that no infusoria appear in these infusions if they are well boiled and the vessel is carefully closed ; the boiling kills the germs in them, and the exclusion of air prevents the entrance of fresh germs. In spite of this, many microscopists still believed that certain infusoria, particularly the very small and simple bacteria, could be born directly from putrid or diseased tissues of organisms, or from decom- posing organic fluids; the opinion was maintained by Pouchet at Paris in 1858, and afterwards by Charlton Bastian. The controversy about the subject moved the Paris Academy in 1858 to offer a prize for "careful research that would throw new light on the question of spontaneous generation." It fell to the famous Louis Pasteur, who proved, by a series of ingenious experi- ments, that there are everywhere in the atmosphere numbers of germs of microbes or microscopic organisms floating among the dust particles, and that these grow and reproduce when they reach water. Not only in- 350 THE ORIGIN OF LIFE fusoria, but also small highly organized plants and ani- mals — such as lichens, mosses, rotifers, and tardigrades — can live for months in a desiccated condition, be car- ried in all directions by the wind, and reawaken into life when they reach water. On the other hand, Pasteur showed convincingly that organisms never a])i)ear in infusions of organic substances when they are sufficient- ly boiled and the atmosphere that reaches them has been chemically purified. He summed up the results of his rigorous experiments, which were confirmed by Rob- ert Koch and other bacteriologists, and gave rise to the modern precautions as to disinfection, in the maxim : " Spontaneous or equivocal generation is a myth." The famous experiments of Pasteur and his successors had destroyed the myth of saprobiosis, but not the theory of archigony. These entirely diflerent hypoth- eses are still very frequently confused, because the old title of "spontaneous generation" is used for both. We still read sometimes that the "unscientific" belief in abiogenesis has been definitely refuted by these experi- ments, and that the question of the origin of life has thus become an insoluble enigma. There is an aston- ishing superficiality and lack of discernment in such re- marks; they would hardly be possible in any other branch of science. But in biology — many of its distin- guished representatives continue to say — we have only to observe and correctly describe facts; the formation of clear ideas and the indulgence in reflection on the facts are unnecessary and dangerous, and, therefore, to be avoided! It is due to this pitiable condition of biological methods of research that our hypothesis of archigony is still attacked, or else ignored. Why? Because the false hypothesis of saprobiosis, which has absolutely nothing in common with it but the name "spontaneous generation," has been refuted by the 351 THE WONDERS OF LIFE experiments of Pasteur and his colleagues!* These ex- periments prove nothing whatever beyond the fact that new organisms are not formed in certain infusions of organic matter — under definite, artificial conditions. They do not even touch the important and pressing question, which alone interests us: "How did the earliest organic inhabitants of our earth, the primitive organisms, arise from inorganic compounds?" The great popularity of the famous experiments of Pasteur on spontaneous generation, and the unfortunate confusion of ideas which was caused by the false inter- pretation of his results, make it necessary for me to say a word on the general value of scientific experiments in many questions. Since Bacon introduced experiment into science three hundred years ago, and gave it a logi- cal basis, both our speculative knowledge of nature and the practical application of our knowledge have made remarkable progress. New methods of research made it possible for modem workers to penetrate far more deeply into the nature of phenomena than the older thinkers had done, who had no knowledge of experiment. Es- pecially in the nineteenth century the development of the experimental method, or the putting of a question to nature, led to enormous advances in the various sciences. In the subject we are considering the question to be put to nature is: "Under what conditions and in what manner is living matter (or plasm) formed from lifeless inorganic compounds?" We may confidently assume that in the period when archigony took place — the time when organic life first appeared on the cooled surface of the earth, at the beginning of the Laurentian Age — the conditions of existence were totally different ' I may remind the English reader that the chosen ecclesias- tical champion against Haeckel in this country, the Rev. F. Ballard, made this extraordinary fallacy the very pith of his "scientific" attack on monism. — Trans. THE (J R i G 1 N OF L 1 F E from what they are now; but we are very far from having a clear idea of what they were, or from being able to reproduce them artificially. We are just as far from having a thorough chemical acquaintance with the al- buminous compounds to which plasm belongs. We can only assume that the ])lasma - molecule is extremely large, and made up of more than a thousand atoms, and that the arrangement and connection of the atoms in the molecule are very complicated and unstable. But of the real features of this intricate structure we have as yet no conception. As long as we are ignorant of this complex molecular structure of albumin, it is use- less to attempt to produce it artificially. Yet in this position of the matter we would seek to produce that great wonder of life, the plasm, artificially, and when the experiment miscarries (as we should expect) we cry out: "Spontaneous generation is impossible." When we carefully consider the intelligent experiments that have been made in regard to archi^ony in the light of these facts, it is clear that their negative result does not in the slightest degree affect our question. The much-admired experiments of Pasteur and his colleagues prove merely that in certain artificial conditions infusoria are not formed in decomposing organic compounds (or the dead tissues of highly organized histona) ; they can- not possibly prove that saprobioses of this kind do not take place under other conditions. They tell us noth- ing whatever about the possibility or reality of archig- ony; in the form in which I put the scientific hypoth- esis in 1866 it is completely untouched by all these experiments. It remains intact as the first attempt to give a provisional reply — if only in the form of a tem- porary hypothesis — on the basis of modern science to one of the chief questions of natural philosophy. In my General Morphology (1866), and afterwards in my Biological Studies on the M oner a and other P rot i sis, aa 353 THE WONDERS OF LIFE and the first volume of my Systematic Phytogeny (1894), I attempted to sketch in detail the stages of the process to which I give the name of archigony. I distinguished two principal stages — autogony (the formation of the first living matter from inorganic nitrogenous carbon-com- pounds) and plasmogony (the formation of the first indi- vidualized plasm; the earliest organic individuals in the form of monera). In more recent efforts I have made use of the important results reached by Nageli (1884) in his investigations of the same subject. In regard to some important points relating to the chemico-physical part of the question, Nageli has, in his Mechanico- physiological Theory of Evolution (chapter ii.), gone more into the details of the process of archigony. To the earliest living things, which were formed by "unicellu- lar organization" of the plasm out of simple inorganic compounds, he gives the name of prohia or probionta, and thinks that these had an even simpler structure than my monera. This view seems to rest on a mis- understanding. Nageli does not strictly follow my definition, "organisms without organs" (that is to say, structureless living particles of plasm without morpho- logical differentiation) , but he has in mind the individual rhizopod-like organisms which I had at first described as monera — protamceba, protogenes, protoinyxa, etc. In my present view the chromacea, or plasmodomous phyto- monera, are rauch more important than these plasmoph- agous zoomonera. It is curious that Nageli does not make thorough use of their primitive organization for the establishment of his theory, although he has had the great merit of describing these most primitive of all living organisms as unicellular algae (1842). As a matter of fact, the simplest chromacea (chroococcus and related forms) approach so closely to his hypothetical probia or probionta that the only things we can regard as the rudiments of organization in the chroococcacea are the 354 THE ORIGIN OF LIFE secretion of a protective membrane about the homo- geneous plasma-globule and the separation of the blue- ish-green cortical zone from the colorless central gran- ule. The more important of the further conclusions of Nageli are those which relate to the mode of the primi- tive abiogenesis and the frequent repetition of this physical process. Recently Max Kassowitz, in the second volume of his General Biology (1899), has gone fully into the various stages of the process of archigony, as a sequel to his metabolic theory of the building up and decay of plasm, from the point of view of physiological chemistry. He says very truly that the development of living from life- less matter must not be conceived as a sudden leap ; the very complicated chemical unities which now form the basis of life have been slowly and gradually evolved during an incalculably long period by the way of substi- tution for simpler compounds. We may join these views — which generally accord with my earlier deductions — with Pfluger's cyanogen theory, and so draw up the following theses : I. A preliminary stage to archigony is the formation ' of certain nitrogenous carbon-compounds which may be classed in the cyanic group (cyanic acid, etc.). 2. When the crust of the earth stiffened, water was formed in the fluid condition; under its influence, and in consequence of the great changes in the carbonic-acid laden atmos- phere, a series of complicated nitrogenous carbon- compounds were formed from these simple cyanic compounds, and these first produced albumin (or pro- tein). 3. The molecules of albumin arranged themselves in a certain way, according to their unstable chemical attractions, in larger groups of molecules (j)leona or micella). 4. The albumin-micella coml)incd to form larger aggregations, and produced homogeneous plasma- granules (plassonella). 5. As they grew the plassonella 355 THE WONDERS OF LIFE divided, and formed larger plasma-granules of a homo- geneous character; monera (=:probionta). 6. In con- sequence of surface-strain or of chemical differentiation, there took place a separation of the firmer cortical layer (membrane) from the softer marrow layer (central granule), as in many of the chromacea. 7. Afterwards the simplest (nucleated) cells were formed from these unnucleated cytodes, the hereditary mass of the plasm gathering within the monera and condensing into a firm nucleus. It is an interesting, but at present unanswered, question whether the process of archigony only occurred once in the course of time or was frequently repeated. Reasons can be given for both views. Pfliiger says: "In the plant the living albumin only continues to do what it has done ever since its origin — constantly to regenerate itself or to grow; hence I believe that all the albumin in the world comes from that source. On that account I doubt if spontaneous generation takes place in our time. Moreover, comparative biology directly shows that all life has come from one single root." However, this view does not exclude the possibility of the chemical process of spontaneous plasmodomism having been fre- quently repeated — under like conditions — in the same form in primordial times. On the other side, Nageli especially has pointed out that there is no reason to prevent us from thinking that archigony was repeated several times, even down to our own day. Whenever the physical conditions for the chemical process of plasmodomism were given, it might be repeated anywhere at any time. As to locality, the sea-shore probably affords the most favorable conditions ; as, for instance, on the surface of fine moist sand the molecular forces of matter in all its conditions — gaseous, fluid, viscous, and solid — find the best conditions for acting on each other. It is a fact that to-day all the 356 THE ORIGIN OF LIFE various evolutionary forms of living matter — from the simplest moneron (chroococcus) to the plain nucleated cell, from this to the highly organized cell of the radio- laria and infusoria, from the simjile ovum to the most elaborate tissue-stnicture in tlic higher ])lants and animals, from the am])hioxus to man — come in an order of succession. There are only two ways of explaining this fact: either the simplest living organisms, the chromacea and bacteria, the jjalmella and amoeba?, have remained unchanged or made very little advance in organization since the beginning of life — more than a hundred million years; or else the phylogenetic process of their transformation has been frequently repeated in the course of this period, and is being repeated to-day. Even if the latter were the case, we should hardly be in a position to learn it by direct observation. Assuming that the simplest organisms are still fonned by abiogenesis, the direct observation of the process would probably be impossible, or at least extremely difficult, for the following reasons: i. The earliest and simplest organisms are most probably globular particles of plasm, without any visible structure, like the simplest living chromacea {chroococcus). 2. These plasmodom- ous monera cannot be distinguished from the chromo- plasts (chlorophyll-granules), which live inside plant- cells, and may continue after the death of the cells to multiply independently by cleavage. 3. We must admit with Nageli that the original size of these pro- bionta (in spite of the relatively colossal size of their molecules) is very small — much too small to come within the range of the best microscope. 4. In the same way the primitive metabolism and the slow, simple growth of these monera would not come within direct observation. 5. As a matter of fact, we do often find in stagnant water, and in the sea, tiny granules which consist, or seem to consist, of plasm. We usually regard them as 357 THE WONDERS OF LIFE detached portions of dead animals or plants; little isolated chlorophyll-granules that may be found every- where are looked upon as rejected products of vegetal cells. But who could refute the assumption that they are really plassonella or young monera, which grow slowly and unite with similar particles to form larger plasmic bodies ? It is often objected to our naturalistic and monistic conception of archigony that we have not yet succeeded in forming albuminous bodies, and especially plasm, in our chemical laboratories by artificial synthesis; from this the perverse dualistic conclusion is drawn that it is only supernatural vital forces that can do this. It is forgotten that we do not yet know the complicated structure of albuminous bodies, and that we do not yet know what really happens inside the green chlorophyll- granules which in every plant-cell convert the radiant energy of sunlight into the virtual energy of the new- formed plasm. How can we be expected to reproduce synthetically, with the imperfect and crude methods of present chemistry, an elaborate chemical process the nature of which is not analytically known to us ? How- ever, the worthlessness of this sceptical objection is obvious: we can never claim that a natural process is supernatural because we cannot artificially reproduce it. XVI THE EVOLUTION OF LIFE Inorganic and organic evolution — Biogenesis and cosmogenesis — Mechanical svolution — Mechanics of phylogenesis — Theory of selection — Theory of idioplasm — Phyletic vital f( 1 T Y struggle for existence. In the case of the higher ani- mals this association becomes particularly imi)ortant, because it is accompanied by an extensive division of labor. Then arises the antithesis of the personal egoism and the communal altruism ; and in human societies the opposition of the two instincts is all the greater when reason recognizes that each has a right to satisfaction. Social habits become moral habits, and their laws are afterwards taught as sacred duties, and form the basis of the juridical order. The morals of nations, so rich in psychological and sociological interest, are nothing more than social in- stincts, acquired by adaptation, and passed on from generation to generation by heredity. An attempt has been made to distinguish between the two kinds of habit by describing the instincts of animals as constant vital functions based on their physical organization, and the habits or morals of human beings as mental powers maintained by a spiritual tradition. This dis- tinction has, however, been excluded by the modern physiological teaching that men's morals are, like all their other psychic ftmctions, based physiologically on the organization of their brain. The habits of the in- dividual man, which have been formed by adaptation to his personal conditions, become hereditary in his family: and these family usages can no more be shar])ly distinguished from the general morals of the community than these can be from the precepts of the Church and the laws of the state. When a certain habit is regarded by all the members of a community as important, its cultivation favored and its breach punished, it is raised to the position of a duty. This is true even in the case of the herds of mammals (apes, gregarious camivora. and ungulates) and the flocks of social birds (hens, geese, ducks). The laws which have been formed in these cases by the higher 419 THE WONDERS OF LIFE development of social instincts are particularly striking and equivalent to those of savage tribes when conspicu- ous individuals (old or strong males) have acquired a leadership of the troop, and successfully insure the ob- servance of the proper habits or duties. Many of these organized bands are in some respects higher than the savages at the lowest stages who live in isolated families, or only form loose temporary associations of a few fami- lies. The great progress made by comparative psychol- ogy and ethnology, and historical and prehistorical re- search, in the second half of the nineteenth century, confirms us in the conviction that a long scale of inter- mediate stages joins the rudiments of law in the social primates and other mammals to the sense of law in the lower savage, and this again to that of the barbarian and the civilized human being — right up to the science of law in modern Europe. Like civil laws, the commands of religion come origi- nally from the morals of the savage, and eventually from the social instincts of the primates. The important province of mental life to which we give the vague name of religion was developed at an early stage among the prehistoric races from whom we all descend. When we study its origin from the point of view of empirical psychology and monistic evolution, we find that religion has arisen polyphyletically from different sources — an- cestor worship, the desire of personal immortality, the craving for a causal explanation of phenomena, supersti- tion of various kinds, the strengthening of the moral law by the authority of a divine law-giver, etc. According as the imagination of the savage or the barbarian followed one or other of these lines it raised up hundreds of relig- ious forms. Only a few of them survived in the strug- gle for existence, and acquired (at least outwardly) do- j minion over the modern mind. But as independent and impartial science advances in our time, religion is 420 M O R A L I T V purified of superstition and turns more and more to morality. The obedience to the "divine commands" wliicli re- ligion demands of its followers is often transferred by human society to rules that have arisen from social cus- toms of subordinate kinds. Thus we get the familiar confusion of manners and morals, of conventional outer deportment and real inner morality. The ideas of good and bad, morality and immorality, are subjected to arbitrary definitions. In this a great part is played by the moral pressure which is exercised by conventional ideas in the social body on the conduct and minds of its members. However clearly and rationally the individ- ual thinks about the important questions of practical life, he has to yield to the tyranny of traditional and often quite irrational customs. As a matter of fact. both in life and in the nature of the case ])ractical reason does take that precedence of pure reason which Kant claimed. The tyranny of custom in practical life does not de- pend merely on the authority of social usage, but also on the power of selection. Just as natural selection in- sures the relative constancy of the specific form in the origin of the animal and plant species, so it has a pow- erful effect on the origin of morals and customs. An im- portant factor in this is mimetic adaptation, or mimicry, the aping or imitating of certain forms or fashions by various classes of animals. This is unconscious in the case of many orders of insects, butterflies, beetles. hvmenoptera, etc. When insects of a certain family come to resemble in their outer form and color and design those of another family, they obtain the protec- tion or other advantages which these particular char- acters give in the struggle for life. Darwin. Wallace. Weismann, Fritz Miillcr. Bates, and others, have shown in numbers of instances how the origin of these deceptive 421 THE WONDERS OF LIFE resemblances can be traced to natural selection, and how important they are in the formation of the species. But many customs and usages in human life arise in just the same way, partly by conscious and partly by unconscious imitation. Of these the varying external forms which we call "fashions" have a most important influence in practical life. The phrase "fashion-ape," when used in a scientific sense, is not merely an expression of con- tempt, but has also a profound meaning; it correctly indicates the origin of fashions by imitation, and also the peculiar resemblance we find in this respect between man and his cousins, the apes. Sexual selection among the primates has a good deal to do with this. The great importance which Darwin ascribes in his Descent of Man to the aesthetic selection of the respective sexes is equally true of man and of all the higher verte- brates that have a feeling of beauty, especially the amniotes (mammals, birds, and reptiles). The beauti- ful coloring and marking and ornamentation which dis- tinguish the males from the females are due entirely to the careful individual selection of the former by the latter. Thus the various kinds of ornamental hair (beard, hair of head, etc.), the tint of the face, the peculiar form of the lips, nose, ears, etc., are to be ex- plained, as we find them in man and the male ape; also the brilliant plumage of the humming-bird, the bird of paradise, pheasant, etc. I have dealt fully with these interesting facts in the eleventh chapter of the History of Creation, and must refer the reader thereto. I will only point out here how valuable the whole of this chapter of Darwinism is for the understanding of the foundation of species on the one hand and men's fashions and customs on the other. It is most closely connected with ethical problems. The growth of fashion in civilized life is very impor- tant, not only for the development of the sense of beauty 423 M O R A L T T ^' and for the sexual selection of the sexes, hut also in con- nection with the origin of the feeling of shame and the finer psychological traits that relate to it. The lower savages have no more sense of shame than animals or children. They are quite naked, and accomplish the sexual act without the slightest trace of shame. The beginning of clothing which we find among the middle savages is not due to a sense of shame, but partly to low temperature (in the polar regions), partly to vanity and love of decoration (such as ornamenting the ears, lips, nose, and sex-organs by the insertion of shells, pieces of wood, flowers, stones, etc.). Afterwards the sense of shame sets in, and we have the covering of certain parts of the body with leaves, girdles, shirts, etc. In most nations the sexual parts are the first to be covered ; though some attach importance to the veiling of the face. In many Oriental tribes (especially Mohamme- dan) it is still the first precept of female chastity to veil the face (the most characteristic part of the indiviiiual), while the rest of the body may remain naked. General- ly speaking, the aesthetic and psychological relations of the sexes play the chief part in the higher development of morals. Morality is often taken to be synonymous with the law of sexual intercourse. As the features of civilized life advance, the influence of reason increases, and so does the power of hereditary tradition and the moral ideas associated with it. The result is a severe conflict between the two. Reason seeks to judge everything by its own standard, to learn the causes of phenomena and direct practical life accord- ingly. On the other hand tradition, or "good morals." looks at everything from the point of view of our fore- fathers and other venerable laws and religious precepts. It is indifferent to the independent discoveries of reason and the real causes of things. It demands that the practical life of every individual be framed in accordance 4-^3 THE WONDERS OF LIFE with the hereditary morality of the race or state. Thus we get the inevitable conflict between reason and tra- dition, or science and religion, which continues in our own day. Sometimes in the course of it a "new fash- ion" is substituted for some sacred tradition, a transi- tory custom that succeeds in imposing itself by its noyelty or curiosity; and when this has contrived to win general acceptance, or has gained the support of Church or state to some extent, it is regarded in much the same light as the older morality. The lowest races of the present time (for instance, the pithecoid pygmies, the Veddahs of Ceylon, the Ak- kas of Central Africa) are very little higher than their primate ancestors in mental development. This is also true of their habits of life and morals. As their ideas are for the most part concrete and sensual, their power of forming abstract concepts is very little developed; they have hardly any religious ideas to speak of. But with the middle savages we begin to find the craving to know the causes of things and the idea of spirits that are concealed behind the phenomena of sense. Dread of these leads to worship, fetichism, and animism, the be- ginning of religion. Even at this early stage of worship we find certain customs associated with the cult to which a symbolical or mysterious meaning is given. These ceremonies lead on in the higher races to the great religious festivities, which the Greeks called "mys- teries." Sensual images of various kinds are mixed up in them with supersensual ideas and superstitions. The festivals, processions, dances, hymns, and sacrifices of all sorts that form part of the cult are more or less con- cerned with the mysterious, and are therefore considered "holy." They are often made the pretext of sensual gratifications, which end in gross immorality and orgies. From the older pagan and Jewish religious usages were afterwards developed in the Christian Church those 424 M ( ) R A L I T Y parts of the cult which arc known as sacraments. These miraculous sacraments, by the mysterious action of which man is supposed to be born a^^ain or rcj^'cncrated, very quickly became powerful instruments in the hand of the Church and thorny problems for theologians, es- pecially after Gregory the Great introduced the dogmas of Purgatory and the relieving power of the Mass. Ac- cording to St. Thomas of Aquin, the sacraments are channels that convey the grace of God to sinful man. The papal authorities fixed their number at seven (bap- tism, eucharist, penance, confirmation, matrimony, or- ders, and extreme unction) in the twelfth century. The superstitious content of these sacraments was generally lost sight of in the glamour of their ceremonious side, but their authority was unshaken. Since the Reformation the Protestants have retained only the two chief sacra- ments which were founded by Christ himself — Baptism and the Lord's Supper. Christian baptism is a continuation of the older ceremonies of washing and purification that were in use thousands of years before Christ amone^ nations of the East and amonj^ the Greeks. They combined the hygienic value of the bath with the idea of a regeneration of the soul and spiritual purification. Au^istine, who founded the dogma of original sin. held that the baptism of children was necessary for the salvation of their souls, and it then became general. It has since given rise to a number of superstitious ideas and unfortunate family troubles, but it is still regarded as a sacred ceremony. Millions of Christians still believe that the child's soul is saved (though it has no conscious- ness whatever when baptized) and delivered from the power of the devil and the curse of sin by baf)tism. The second sacrament that Luther retained is the Lord's Supper, or the sacrament of the body and blood of Christ. It was instituted by Christ r)n the night before his death, and is a continuation of the paschal sujiper of the Jews, in wljich the head of the house shared bread and wine with his family with certain ritual ceremonies. In this paschal supper the people of Israel celebrated their release from the Ixindage of Egpyt and their distinction as the "chosen people." By connecting his THE WONDERS OF LIFE "last supper" with the traditional rite of the Jews, Christ sought / on the one hand to found the new dispensation on the old, and on the other hand to institute a love-feast (communion or agape) among his followers. Like baptism, the Lord's Supper led afterwards to the bitterest controversy among theologians. The differences of opinion as to the Eucharist in the Middle Ages culminated at last in the opposition of the two reformers, Luther and Zwingli. The latter, the founder of the Free Re- formed Church, saw in the Supper only a symbolical act and a commemoration of Christ. Luther, however, adhered to the mysterious miracle that had been defined in 12 15 by the dogma of transubstantiation. Bread and wine are believed on this view to be converted physically into the body and blood of Christ! I was taught this in 1848 by the minister who prepared me for confirmation, and to whom I was greatly attached. We were actually to perceive this change when we assisted at the Supper for the first time, if we did so with real faith. As I was quite conscious of having this quality, I had great expectations of the miracle. But I was very painfully disillusioned when I found only the familiar taste of bread and wine, not the flesh and blood that faith had desired. I had to regard myself (then a boy of fourteen years) as an utterly abandoned sinner, and it was with the greatest difficulty that my parents succeeded in pacifying me over my want of faith. I have spoken somewhat fully in the seventeenth chapter of the Riddle of the view of the papacy and ultramontanism which modem historical and anthropological science leads us to form. No one who has any idea of history and of the metamorphoses of religion can question that Romanism is a miserable caricature of primitive Christianity; it retains the name, but has completely reversed the principles. In the course of its domination, from the fourth to the sixteenth century, the papacy has raised up the marvellous structure of the Catholic hierarchy, but has departed farther and farther from the stand-point of pure Christianity, The aim of Romanism is to-day, as it was a thousand years ago, to dominate and exploit a blindly believing humanity. It finds admirable instruments for this in its mystic sacraments, to which it has ascribed an "indelible character." From the cradle to the grave, from baptism to the last anointing, in confirmation and penance, the believer must be reminded that he must live as an obedient and self-sacrificing child; and the sacrament of ordination must teach him that the priest, with his higher inspiration, is the only intermediary between man and God. The symbolical rites that are associated with these sacraments 426 iM O R A 1. I T Y serve to surround Iheni with the ma^^ic of the mysterious and exclude the penetration of reason. This is particularly true of the sacrament that has had the jjreatcst practical inllucnce — matrimony. In view of the extreme importance of the hfe of the family as a foundation of social and civic life, it is ad- visable to consider marriage from the biological point of view, as an orderly method of reproduction. Here, as in all other sociological and psychological questions, we must be careful not to accept the present features of civilized life as a general standard of judgment. We have to take a comparative view of its various stages, as we find them among barbarians and savages. When we do this impartially, we see at once that reproduction, as a purely physiological process having for its end the maintenance of the species, takes place in just the same way among uncultivated races as among the anthropoid apes. We may even say that many of the higher ani- mals, especially monogamous mammals and birds, have reached a higher stage than the lower savages; the ten- der relations of the two sexes towards each other, their common care of their young, and their family life, have led to the development of higher sexual and domestic instincts, to which we may fitly ascribe a moral char- acter. Wilhelm Bolsche has shown, in his Life of Love in Nature, how a long series of remarkable customs has been developed in the animal world by adaptation to various forms of reproduction. WVstermarck has point- ed out, in his History of Marriai^e, how the crude animal forms of marriage current among savages have been gradually elevated as we rise to higher races. As the sensual pleasure of generation is combined with the finer psychological feeling of sympathy and psychic at- tachment, the latter gains constantly on the former, and this refined love becomes one of the richest sources of the higher spiritual functions, especially in art and po- 427 THE WONDER vS OF LIFE etry. Marriage itself, of course, remains a physiological act, a wonder of life, with the organic sex impulse as its chief foundation. As the conclusion of marriage repre- sents one of the most important moments in human life, we find it accompanied by symbolic ceremonies and festive rites even among lower tribes. The immense variety of marriage festivals shows how this important act has appealed to the imagination. Priests quickly recognized this, and decked out marriage with all kinds of ceremonies and turned it to the advantage of their Church. While the Catholic Church raised it to the status of a sacrament and ascribed to it an "indelible" character, it declared that it was indissoluble when performed according to ecclesiastical rite. This un- wholesome influence of Romanism, this dependence of matrimony on religious mysteries and ceremonies, and difficulty of obtaining divorce, etc., still continue in our day. It is only a short time since the German Reichstag, under the influence of the Centre [Catholic] party, added laws to its civic code which increase instead of lessening the difficulty of obtaining divorce. Reason demands the liberation of marriage from ecclesiastical pressure. It demands that matrimony be grounded on mutual love, esteem, and devotion, and that it at the same time be counted a social contract, and be protected, as civil marriage, by proper legislation. But when the contracting parties find (as so often happens) that they have mistaken each other's character, and that they do not suit each other, they should be free to dissolve the bond. The pressure which comes of marriage being re- garded as a sacrament, and which prevents the dissolu- tion of unhappy marriages, is merely a source of vice and crime. We find in many other features of our social life, besides marriage, a contradiction between the demands of reason and the traditional usages which nioderr^ civ- 428 M () R A L I T V ilization has taken over as a hcritaKc from earlier and lower nations, and partly from barbarians and savages. In the public life of states this contradiction is much more striking than in the private life of the family or the individual. Whereas the milder teaching of the Chris- tian religion— sympathy, love of one's fellows, patience, and devotion — has had a good influence in many ways, there can be no question of this in the international relations of the nations; here we find pure egoism. Every nation seeks to take advantage of others by cunning or force, and, wherever possible, to subjugate them: if they will not consent, the brute force of war is employed. Social misery of all kinds spreads wider and wider, almost in proportion as civilization develops. Alexander Sutherland is right when he characterizes "the leading nations of Europe and their offshoots" (in the United States) as lower civilized races. In some respects we are still barbarians. How far the bulk of modern nations still are from the ideal and the reign of pure reason can be seen by a glance at the social, juridical, and ecclesiastical condition of "these leading nations of Europe," either Teutonic or Latin. We need only consider with an unprejudiced mind the accounts in our journals of parliamentary and legal proceedings, government measures and social re- lations, in order to realize that the force of tradition and fashion is immense, and resists the claims of reason on every side. This is most clearly seen externally in the power of fashion, especially as reganls clothing. There is a good ground for the complaint about "the tyranny of fashion." However unpractical, ridiculous, ugly, and costly a new garment may be, it becomes popular if it is patronized by authority, or some clever manufacturer succeeds in imposing it by specious advertisements. We need only recall the crinoline of fifty years ago. the bustle of twenty years ago, and the cxjiosure of the 429 THE WONDERS OF LIFE breast and back by low dresses (with the object of sexual excitement) which was the fashion of forty years ago.^ For centuries we have had the pernicious fashion of the corset, an article that is as offensive from the aesthetic as from the hygienic point of view. Thousands of women are sacrificed every year to this pitiful fashion, through disease of the liver or lungs; nevertheless, the craze for the hour-glass shape of the female form con- tinues, and the reform of clothing makes little headway. It is just the same with numbers of fashions in the home and in society, of devices in commerce and laws in the state. Everywhere the demands of reason ad- vance little in their struggle with the venerable usages of tradition. A false sense of honor dominates our social life, just as a false sense of modesty controls our clothing. The true honor of man or woman consists in their inner moral dignity, in the determination to do only what they conceive to be good and right, not in the outer esteem of their fellows or in the worthless praise of a conven- tional society. Unfortunately, we have to admit that in this respect we are still largely ruled by the foolish views of a lower civilization, if not of crude barbarians. In many other features of our life besides this false modesty and false honor we perceive the force of social usage. Many of what are thought to be honorable customs are relics of barbarism; much of our morality is, in the light of pure reason, downright immorality. As even the latter is due to adaptation, and as the same custom may be at one time thought useful and fitting, at another time injurious and bad, we see again that it is impossible to restrict the idea of adaptation to useful variations. We may say the same of the changing rules ' At the moment I translate this, telej^rams from Germany announce that, by the emperor's orders, a number of ladies were excluded from the opera for not observing this custom. — Trans. 430 MORA M T V of education, commerce, Ic^Mslation, and so on. The ideal in all departments of life is pure reason; but it has to struggle long against the current prejudices and cus- toms, which find their chief support in the superstitions of the Church and the conservative tendencies of the state. In this state of Byzantine immorality, decorat- ing itself so often with the mantle of piety, practical materialism flourishes, while monism, or theoretical ma- terialism, is thrust aside. If we sum up all that monistic science has taught us as to the origin and development of morality, we may put it in the following series of propositions: i. By adaptation to difi"erent conditions of life the simple plasm of the earliest organisms, the archigonous monera, under- goes certain modifications. 2. As the living plasm reacts on these influences, and the reaction is often repeated, a habit is formed (as in the catalysis of certain inorganic chemical processes. 3. This habit is hereditary, the repeated impressions being fixed in the nucleus (or caryoplasm) in the case of the unicellulars. 4. When hereditary transmission lasts through many generations, and is strengthened by cumulative adaptation, it be- comes an instinct. 5. Even in the protist coenobia (the cell - communities of the protophyta and protozoa) social instincts are formed by association of cells. 6. The antithesis of the individual and social instinct, or of egoism and altruism, increases in the animal kingdom in proportion to the development of psychic activity and social life. 7. In the higher social animals definite cus- toms arise in this way, and these become rights and duties when obedience to them is demanded by the society (herd, flock, people) and the breach of them punished. 8. Savage races at the lowest stage, without religion, are not differently related to their customs than the higher social animals. 9. The higher savages de- velop religious ideas, combine their superstitious prac- 431 THE WONDERS OF LIFE tices (fetichism and animism) with ethical principles, and transform their empirical moral laws into religious commands. lo. Among barbaric, and more particularly among civilized, races definite moral laws are formed by the association of these hereditary religious, moral, and legal ideas, ii. In the civilized races the Church formu- lates the religious commands, and jurisprudence the legal commands, in more definitely binding forms; the advancing mind remains, however, subject in many respects to Church and state. 12. In the higher civil- ized nations pure reason gains more and more influence on practical life, and thrusts back the authority of tra- dition ; on the basis of biological knowledge a rational or monistic ethic is developed. XIX DUALISM Dualistic systems of Kant I. and Kant II. — His antinomies — Cosmolotncal flualism — The two worlds — The world of Imdies and the world of spirits — Truth and fiction — Goethe and Schiller — Realism and idealism — Ami- Kant — Law of sub- stance — Attributes of substance — Sensation and cnerjjy — Passive and active energy — Trinity of substance: matter force, and sensation — Constancy f)f sensation — Psyche and physics — Reconciliation of principles. THE history of j)hilosophy shows how tbe mind of man has pressed along many patbs during the last two thousand years in ])ursuit of truth. Hut, however varied are the systems in which its efforts have found embodiment, we may, from a general i)oint of view, ar- range them all in two conflicting series— monism, or the philosophy of unity; and dualism, or the philosophy of the dualitv of existence. Lucretius and Spinoza are distinguisliod and typical rcj^resentatives of monism: Plato and Descartes the great leaders of dualism. Hut besides the consistent thinkers of each school there are a number of philosophers who vacillate between the two, or who have held both views at different periods of life. Such contradictions represent a personal dualism on the part of the individual thinker. Immanuel Kant is one of the most famous instances of this class; and as his critical philosophy has had a profound influence, and I was compelled to contrast my chief conclusions with those of Kant, I must once more deal briefly with his 38 43.^ u-- THE WONDERS OF LIFE ideas. This is the more necessary as one of the ablest of the many attacks on the Riddle, the Kant against Haeckel of Erich Adick, of Kiel, belongs to this school. In the Creed of Pure Reason, which I published as an appendix to the popular edition of the Riddle in 1903, I pointed out, in view of this and similar Kantist criti- cisms, the clear inconsistency of the great evolutionary principles of Kant, the natural philosopher, with the mystic teaching which he afterwards made the founda- tion of his theory of knowledge, and that is still greatly esteemed. Kant I. explained the constitution and the mechanical origin of the universe on Newtonian prin- ciples, and declared that mechanicism alone afforded a real explanation of phenomena; Kant II. subordinated the mechanical principle to the teleological, explaining everything as a natural design. Kant I. convincingly proved that the three central dogmas of metaphysics — God, freedom, and immortality — are inaccep table to pure reason. Kant II. claimed that they are necessary postulates of practical reason. This profound opposi- tion of principles runs through Kant's whole philosophic work from beginning to end, and has never been recon- ciled. I had already shown in the History of Creation that this inconsistency has a good deal to do with Kant's position in regard to evolution. However, this radical contradiction of Kant's views has been recognized by all impartial critics. It has lately been urged with great force by Paul Ree in his Philosophy (1903). We need not, therefore, linger in proving the fact, but may go on to consider the causes of it. A subtle and comprehensive thinker like Kant was naturally perfectly conscious of the existence of this inconsistency of his dualistic principles. He endeavored to meet it by his theory of antinomies, declaring that pure reason is bound to land in contradictions when it attempts to conceive the whole scheme of things as a 434 D U A I. 1 .s M connected totality. In every attempt to form a unified and complete view of things we encounter these un- solvable antinomies, or mutually contradictory theses, for both of which sound proof is available. Thus, for instance, physics and chemistry say that matter must consist of atoms as its sim])lest particles; but loj^ic declares that matter is tli visible in infinitum. On the one theory time and space are infinite; on the other theory, finite. Kant attcmi)ted to reconcile the.se con- tradictions by his transcendental idealism, by the as- sumption that objects and their ccjnnection exist only in our imagination, and not in themselves. In this way he came to frame the false theory of knowledge which is honored with the title of "criticism," while as a matter of fact it is only a new form of dogmatism. The an- tinomies are not expla ned by it, but thrust aside; nor was there more truth in the assertion that equal proof is available for theses and antitheses. The famous work of Kant's earlier years, Tlic General Natural History and Theory of the Heavens (1755), w:is purely monistic in its chief features. It embodied a fme attempt "to explain the constitution and mechanical origin of the universe on Newtonian principles." It was mathematicallv established fortv vears afterwards bv Laplace in his Exposition dn systeme du monde (1796). This fearless monistic thinker was a consistent atheist, and told Napoleon I. that there was no room for "God" in his Mccanique celeste (1799). Kant, however, after- wards found that, though there was no rational evidence of the existence of God, we must admit it on moral grounds. He said the same of the immortality of the soul and the freedom of the will. He then constructed a special "intelligible world" to receive these three ob- jects of faith; he declared that the moral sense com- pelled us to believe in a supersensual world, although pure theoretical reason is quite unable to form any dis- 435 THE WONDERS OF LIFE tinct idea of it Tlie categorical imperative was sup- posed to determine our moral sense and the distinction between good and evil. In the further progress of his ethical metaphysics Kant expressly urged that practical reason should take precedence of theoretical — in other words, that faith is superior to knowledge. In this way he enabled theology and irrational faith to find a place in his system and claim supremacy over all rational knowledge of nature. The older Greek philosophy had been purely monistic, Anaximander and his disciple Anaximenes (in the sixth century B.C.) conceiving the world in the sense of our modem hylozoism, but Plato introduced (two hundred years afterwards) the dualistic view of things. The world of bodies is real, accessible to our sensible experience, changeable and transitory ; opposed to it is the world of spirits, only to be reached by thought, supersensual, ideal, immutable, and eternal. Material things, the objects of physics, are only transient symbols of the eternal ideas, which are the subject of metaphysics. Man, the most perfect of all things, belongs to both worlds; his material frame is mortal, the prison of the immortal and invisible soul. The eternal ideas are only embodied for a time in the world of bodies here below ; they dwell eternally in the world of spirits beyond, where the supreme idea (God, or the idea of the good) controls all in perfect unity. The human soul, endowed with free-will, is bound to develop the three cardinal virtues (wisdom, fortitude, and prudence) by the cultiva- tion of its three chief moral faculties (thought, courage, and zeal). These fundamental principles of Plato's teaching, s^^stematically presented by his pupil Aristotle, met with a very general acceptance, as they could easily be combined with the teaching of Christianity which arose four hundred years afterwards. The great majority of later philosophic and religious systems followed the 436 D U A L 1 S M same dualistic paths. Even Kant's metaphysics is only a new form of it; only its dogmatic character is hidden by the ascription to it of the convenient title of the "critical" system. Modern science has opened out to us immense depart- ments of the real world that are accessible to observa- tion and rational inquiry ; but it has not taught us a single fact that ])oints to the existence of an immaterial world. On the contrary, it has shown more and more clearly that the supposed world beyond is a pure fiction, and only merits to be treated as a subject for poetry. Physics and chemistry in particular have proved that all phenomena that come under our observation depend on physical and chemical laws, and that all can be traced to the comprehensive and unified law of substance. An- thropogeny has taught us the evolution of man from animal ancestors. Comparative anatomy and ])hysiol- ogy have shown that his mind is a function of the brain, and his will not free; and that his soul, absolutely bound up with its material or^^an, passes away at death like the souls of other mammals. Finally, modern cos- mology and cosmogony have found no trace whatever of the existence and activity of a personal and extra- mundane God. All that comes within the range r^f mir knowledge is a part of the material world. In his observations on the supersensual world Kant lays stress on the fact that it lies beyond the range of experience, and is known only by faith. Conscience, he thinks, assures us of its existence, but does not give us any idea of its nature; and so the three central mysteries of metaphysics are mere words without meaning. Rut, as nothing can be done with mere words, Kant's followers have attempted to put a positive substance into them. generally in relation to traditional ideas and religious dogmas. Not only orthodox Kantians. but even critical philosophers like Schleiden, have dogmatically asserted 437 THE WONDERS OF LIFE that Kant and his disciples have estabHshed the tran- scendental ideas of God, freedom, and immortality, just as Kepler, Newton, and Laplace established the laws of celestial motion. Schleiden imagined that this dogmatic affirmation would refute "the mateiialism of modem German science." Lange has shown, on the contrary, that such dogmatism is utterly foreign to the spirit of the Critique of Pure Reason, and that Kant held the three ideas to be quite incapable of either positive or negative proof, and so thrust them into the domain of practical philosophy. Lange says: "Kant would not see, as Plato would not see before him, that the intelligi- ble world is a world of poetry, and has no value except in this respect." But if these ideas are mere figments of the poetic imagination, if we can form neither positive nor negative idea of them, we may well ask: What has this imaginary spirit-world to do with the pursuit of truth? As I have raised the question of the limits of truth and fiction, I may take the opportunity of pointing out the general importance of this distinction. Undoubt- edly man's knowledge is limited, from the very nature of our faculties or the organization of our bram and sense- organs. Hence, Kant is right when he says that we perceive only the phenomena of things, and not their inner essence, which he calls the " thing in itself." But he is wrong and altogether misleading when he goes on to doubt the reality of the external world, and says it exists only in our presentations — in other words, that life is a dream. It does not follow, from the fact that our senses and phronema can reach only a part of the properties of things, that we call into question their existence in time and space. But our rational craving for a knowledge of causes impels us to fill up the gaps in our empirical knowledge by our imagination, and thus form an approximate idea of the whole. This work 438 DUALISM of the imagination may be called "fiction" in a broad sense— hypotheses when they are in science, faith when they belong to religion. However, these imaginative constructions must always take a concrete form. As a fact, the imagination that constructs the ideal world is never content merely to assume its existence, but al- ways proceeds to form an image of it. Hut these fonns of faith have no theoretical value for philosophy if they contradict scientific truth, or profess to be more than provisional hypotheses ; otherwise they may be of prac- tical service, but are theoretically useless. Hence we fully recognize the great ethical and pedagogical value of poetry and myths, but are by no means disposed to give them precedence of empirical knowledge in our quest of the truth. I agree entirely with the excellent criticism of Kant which Albert Lange gives in his History of Materialism (vol. ii.) ; but I am unable to follow him when he transfers his idealism from practical to theo- retical questions, and urges the erroneous theory of knowledge derived from it in opposition to monism and realism. It is true that, as Lange says: Kant did not lack the sense for the conception of this intelligi- ble world (as an ima.i^inative world) ; but his whi)le education and the period in which his mental life developed prevented him from indulginjT it. As he was denied the Hberty of piN'inj,' a noble form, free from all niedian-al distortion, to the vast slrxicturc of his ideas, his positive philos(Ji)hy was never fully develoi)ed. His system, with its Janus face, stands at the limit of two ages. He himself, in spite of all the defects of his deductions, is a teacher of the ideal. Schiller especially has grasiKvl with pro- phetic insi.i,'ht the very essence of his teachinj^, and purified it of its scholastic dross. Kant held that we must only think, not see, the intcllii,Mble world; thou;,'h what he thinks must have objective reality. Schiller has rightly brought the intel- lij^ible world visibly before us by treating it as a poet, and thus followin.cj in the footsteps of Plato, who. in contradiction to his own dialectic, reached his highest thought when he allowerhich compose the matter. The law of the conserva- tion of energy teaches us that the sum of force or energy that is ever at work in the universe is unchangeable. In the formation or decomposition of a chemical compound the particles of matter move about, and so in every mechanical, thermic, electric, and other process. The changes that take place depend on a constant change of force, both in organic and inorganic bodies; one form of force is converted into another without a particle of the whole being lost. This law of the conservation of force has lately been called, as a rule, the conservation of energy (or the principle of energy) since the ideas of force and energy have been more clearly distinguished in physics ; energy is now usually defined as the product of force and direction. It must be noted, however, that 448 DUALISM the word "energy" (as an equivalent to "work" in the physical sense) is still used in many different senses, as is also the word " force." Others define energy as " work or all that comes of work and may be converted into work." One particular school of voluntarism (Wundt) reduces the motive-force of energy to will. Crusius said in 1744: "Will is the dominating force in the world." And Schopenhauer defines the world (or substance) as "will and presentation." C. Sens.\tion. — In describing sensation (in the broad- est sense) as a third attribute of substance, and sepa- rating "sensitive substance" from energy as "moving substance," I rely on the observations I made in the thir- teenth chapter of the Riddle on sensation in the organic and inorganic world. I cannot imagine the simplest chemical and physical process without attributing the movements of the material particles to unconscious sen- sation. In this sense the chemist speaks every day of a sensitive reaction, and the photographer of a sensitive plate. The idea of chemical affinity consists in the fact that the various chemical elements perceive the quali- tative differences in otlier elements, experience "pleas- ure" or "revulsion" at contact with them, and execute their specific movements on this ground. The sensitive- ness of the plasm to all kinds of stimuli, which is called "soul" in the higher animals, is only a suj^erior degree of the general irritability of substance. Empedocles and the panpsychists spoke in the same sense of sensa- tion and effort in all things. As Nageli said: "If the molecules possess something that is related, however distantly, to sensation, it must be comfortable to be able to follow their attractions and repulsions; uncomfortable when they are forced to do otherwise. Thus we get a common spiritual bond in all material phenomena. The mind of man is only the highest development of the spiritual processes that animate the whole of nature." 29 449 THE WONDERS OF LIFE These views of the distinguished botanist fully agree with my monistic principles. When sensation in the widest sense (as psychoma) is joined to matter and energy as a third attribute of sub- stance, we must extend the universal law of the per- manence of substance to all three aspects of it. From this we conclude that the quantity of sensation in the entire universe is also eternal and unchangeable, and that every change of sensation means only the conver- sion of one form of psychoma into other forms. If we start from our own immediate sensations and thoughts, and look out on the whole mental life of humanity, we see through all its continuous development the constancy of the psychoma, which has its roots in the sensations of each individual. This highest achievement of the work of the plasm in the human brain was, however, first developed in the sensations of the lower animals, and these are in turn connected by a long series of evolu- tionary stages with the simpler forms of sensation that we find in the inorganic elements, and that reveal them- selves in chemical affinity. Albrecht Rau expressly says in his excellent Sensation and Thought (1896) that "perception or sensation is a universal process in nature. This involves, moreover, the possibility of reducing thought itself to this universal process." Recently Ernst Mach has said, in his Analysts of Sensation and the Relation of the Physical to the Psychical, that "sensa- tions are the common elements of all possible physical and psychic occurrences, and consist simply in the dif- ferent mode of the combination of the elements and their dependence on each other." It is true that Mach, in his one-sided emphasis of the subjective element of sensation, goes on to form a similar psychomonism to that of Verworn, Avenarius, and other recent dynamists; but the fundamental character of his system is purely monistic, like the energism of Ostwald. 450 DUALISM In thus uniting sensation with force and matter as an attribute of substance, we form a monistic trinity, and are in a position to do away with the antitheses that are rigidly maintained by duahsts between the psychic and the physical, or the material and the immaterial world. Of the three great monistic systems materialism lays too narrow a stress on the attribute of matter, and would trace all the phenomena of the universe to the mechanics of the atoms or to the movements of their ultimate particles. Spiritualism, with equal narrow- ness, builds on the attribute of energy ; it would either explain all phenomena by motor forces or forms of energy (energism), or reduce them to psychic functions, to sensation or psychic action (panpsychism). Our system of hylonism (or hylozoism) avoids the faults of both extremes, and affirms the identity of the psyche and the physis in the sense of Spinoza and Goethe. It meets the difficulties of the older theory of identity by dividing the attribute of thought (or energy) into two co-ordinate attributes, sensation (psychoma) and move- ment (mechanics). XX MONISM Defence of monism — Pure and applied science (theoretic and practical reason) — Pure (theoretical) sciences : physics, chemistry, mathematics, astronomy, geology; biology, anthropology, psychology, philology, history — Applied (practical) sciences: medicine, psychiatry, hygiene, tech- nology, pedagogics, ethics, sociology, politics, jurispru- dence, theology — Antinomy of the sciences — Rational and dogmatic disciplines — Correlation of the sciences — Faculties — Reform of education — The ideal world — Harmony of monism. NOW that we have reached the end of our long jour- ney, we may take a general survey of the path we have pursued, and say how far we owe our progress to the monistic philosophy. In doing so, we shall at once justify our own point of view and indicate the relation of biology to the other sciences. I feel the more bound to do this as the present volume is not only a necessary supplement to the Riddle, but at the same time my last philosophic work. At the end of my seventieth year I would supply some of the defects of the Riddle, answer some of the most stringent criticisms directed against it, and as far as possible complete the philosophy of life at which I worked for half a century. In inviting my readers to accompany me once more through the broad domain of the monistic philosophy I must, as their modest guide, show scientific justification at the narrow entrance — produce, so to say, the ticket of admission to this investigation. The academic philos- 452 MONISM ophy which vStill controls the German universities watches every door with jealous eyes, and has an es- pecial concern to keep out modern biology. OOicial German philosophy is still for the most part taken up with a mediaeval metaphysic and the dualism of Kant, the openly dogmatic character of which it greets as "criticism." In the course of the forty years during which I have taught as ordinary professor of zoology at Jena I have had occasion to assist at several hundred examinations of doctors, teachers, etc., in which dis- tinguished representatives of philosophy were examiners. I saw that nearly always the chief stress was laid on a kind of conceptual gymnastics and self-observation, and on the correct knowledge of the innumerable errors which the (mainly dualistic) leaders of ancient and modern philosophy have left us in their vast literature. The central feature of the whole scheme is Kant's theory of knowledge, the defects and one-sidedness of which I have treated in the first and nineteenth chapters. In psychology a most extensive knowledge of psychic pow- ers on the basis of the introspective method is demanded ; the physiological analysis of the "soul" and the ana- tomic study of the phronema are carefully avoided, as are also the comparative and genetic study of the mind. Many of our metaphysicians go even farther and regard philosophy as a separate science — a sublime "mental science," quite independent of the common empirical sciences. One is tempted to quote the saying of Schop- enhauer: "It is a sure sign of a philosopher that he is not a professor of philosophy." In my opinion, every educated and thoughtful man who strives to form a definite view of life is a philosopher. As queen of the sciences, philosoy)hy has the great task of combiiiing the general results of the other sciences, and of bringing their ravs of light to a focus as in a concave mirror. The various tendencies of thought that arise in such num- 45.^ THE WONDERS OF LIFE bers have all a right to scientific respect and discussion, the monistic minority no less than the dualistic major- ity. We have to inquire, then, how far monism has succeeded in gaining firm foothold in the various fields of science, and we may begin with a distinction between pure (theoretical) and applied (practical) science. Pure philosophy aims at a knowledge of the truth by means of pure reason, as I explained in the first chapter. However, this theoretical philosophy finds itself in most of the sciences in direct and frequently important rela- tions to practical life, and so in the form of applied philos- ophy becomes a weighty factor in civilization. In this the real claims of practical life are often in contradiction to the ideal tenets of the scientifically grounded theory. In such cases, in my opinion, the pure pursuit of the truth must take precedence of applied philosophy. I thus dissent entirely from the view of Kant, who ex- pressly gives precedence to practical reason, and sub- ordinates theoretical reason to it. Kant's error was fated to have a terrible influence, because the dominant authorities in Church and state eagerly embraced it to insure everywhere the supremacy of the dogmas of practical reason over the attainments of pure critical reason. From the point of view of natural monism we may take physics in the wider sense as the fundamental science. The term physis (the Greek equivalent of the Latin "nature"), in its original meaning, comprises the whole knowable world — Kant's mundus sensihilis. His supersensual or "intelligible" world is, on his own definition, the object of faith, not knowledge. It is very remarkable to find a thinker like Kant contradicting himself already in his fundamental distinction of the two worlds. How can the supersensual world, with its three central mysteries (God, freedom, and immortal- ity), be described as intelligible (i.e., knowable) when 454 M O N I S M it is proved by pure reason that the human mind is in- capable of knowing it, or of forming any positive or negative idea of it? Lucus a non hicendo ! We may, therefore, leave this supernatural metaphysical world to faith and fiction, and confine our studies to the real physical world, nature. The idea of physics as a com- prehensive natural philosophy, as it was conceived in classic Greece, has been more and more restricted in the course of time. To-day it is generally taken to mean the science of the ])henomena of inorganic nature, their empirical determination by observation and ex- periment (experimental physics), and their reduction to fixed natural laws and mathematical formulae (theo- retical or mathematical physics). Of late a distinction has been drawn between the physics of mass and the physics of ether; the one deals with mechanics, the movement and equilibrium of ponderable matter, of solid, fluid, and gaseous bodies (statics and dynamics, gravitation, acoustics, meteorology); the other is oc- cupied with the phenomena of ether (or imponderable matter) and its relations to mass (electricity, galvanism, magnetism, optics, and calorics). In all these branches of inorganic physics the monistic view is now generally received, and all attempt at dualistic explanation aban- doned. The vast department of chemistry, which has now become so important both for theoretical and practical purposes, is really only a part of physics. But while modern physics restricts itself to the study of inorganic forms of energy and their conversions, chemistry, as the science of matter, takes up the study of the qualitative differences between the various kinds of ponderable matter. It divides ponderable bodies into some severity- eight elements, the relations of which to each other have been determined in the periodic system of the elements, and their probable common origin from some primitive 455 THE WONDERS OF LIFE matter (prothyl) been shown. The constant features of chemical combinations which have been estabUshed by the analysis and synthesis of the elements, and especial- ly the law of simple and multiple proportions discovered in 1808, led to the empirical determination of the atomic weight of the elements and to the chemical theory of the atom. The acceptance of these atoms (as space-filUng separate particles of matter — however we may regard them in other respects) is an indispensable hypothesis in chemistry, like the hypothesis of the molecule in physics. Modern dynamism (or energism) is wrong when it thinks it can dispense with these hypotheses and replace the atoms by the notion of immaterial non - spatial points of force. However, in both the dynamic and the mate- rial school, monism is retained in every department of chemistry. Modern science considers the ultimate aim of all re- search to be the exact determination of phenomena in measure and number, or the reduction of all general knowledge to mathematically formulated laws. As the great Laplace established his system mathematically, it has lately been claimed that a comprehensive (ideal) Laplace-mind could embrace the whole past, present, and future of the universe in a single gigantic mathe- matical formula. Kant has expressed this exaggerated estimate of mathematics in the phrase: "Every science is only true science in proportion as it is amenable to mathematical treatment"; and to this he has added the second error that the mathematical axioms (being neces- sary and universal truths) belong to the a priori con- stitution of the mind, and are independent of experience (a posteriori). However, John Stuart Mill and others have shown that the fundamental ideas of mathematics are acquired originally, like those of any other science, by abstraction from experience; and the modern phy- logeny of the mind has confirmed this empirical view. 456 M O X I S M We must remember, moreover, that matheinatics deals only with quantitative relations in time and space, and not with the qualitative features of bodies. In fact, Kant himself showed that mathematics only answers for the absolute formal correctness of conclusions it draws from given premises, and has no influence on the ]jrem- ises themselves. Hence, when we examine the ab- stract thinking-power of the phronema in its mathe- matical operations physiologically and phylogenetically, we find that even this "exact fundamental science" is only accessible to pure monism and excludes ail dual- ism. The great regard which mathematics enjoys as an exact science in all branches of knowledge is chiefly due to its formal accuracy, and to the possibility of express- ing infallibly spatial and time quantities in numVjer and mass. Astronomy is one of the older sciences that took definite shape thousands of years ago, and received a solid mathematical foundation. Observations of the movements of the planets and eclipses of the sun were conducted by the Chinese, Chaldeans, and Egyptians several thousand years before Christ. Christ himself had no more suspicion of these great cosmological discoveries than of the systems which the Greek natural philosophers had built u]) three hundred to six hundred years before his birth. After Copernicus had destroyed the geocentric system in 1543, and Newton had ])rovided a mathe- matical basis for the new heliocentric system by his theory of gravitation in 1686, cosmogony was -finnly established in a monistic sense by the General Natural History of tJie Heavens of Kant, and the M^^caniquc Celeste of Laplace. Since that time there has been no question of the conscious action of a Creator in any part of astronomy. Astrophysics has enlarged our knowledge of the ])hysical features, and astrochemistry (by means of sj)ectn.mi analysis) of the chemical nature 457 THE WONDERS OF LIFE of the other heavenly bodies. The monism of the physi- cal universe has now been established. Geology Vv^as not developed into an independent science until towards the end of the eighteenth century, and did not extinguish the earlier notion of the creation of the earth until after 1830, when the principle of con- tinuity and evolution was established. The oldest part of the science is mineralogy ; the great practical value of the rocks, and especially the metals obtained from them, having appealed to man's interest thousands of years ago. In the Stone Age, Bronze Age, Iron Age, etc., the material for weapons and tools was provided by stone and metal. Afterwards the development of mining led to a closer acquaintance with these metals. But no notice was taken of the fossil remains of animals and plants until the close of the Middle Ages. It was not until the eighteenth century that students began to per- ceive the great significance of these "creation-medals," and at the beginning of the nineteenth paleontology arose as an independent science, and proved equally important to geology and biology. Other branches of geology, such as crystallography, have also made con- siderable progress during the last half-century, with the aid of physics and chemistry. All these sections of geology, especially geogeny, or the science of the natural development of the earth, are now recognized to be purely monistic sciences. In the five branches of science I have enumerated, pure monism has been universally and exclusively ad- mitted (as far as they relate to inorganic nature) in the second half of the nineteenth century. There is no question in them to-day of the wisdom and power of the Creator. This is equally true of geology, astronomy, mathematics, chemistry, and physics. It is otherwise with the remaining sciences which deal with organic nature; in these we have not yet succeeded in giving a 458 MONISM physical explanation and mathematical formulation of all phenomena. Hence vitalism enters with its dualis- tic notions, and splits the science into two different branches — natural science (physics in the wider sense) and mental science (metaphysics) ; fixed natural laws are supposed to rule only in the former, while in the latter we still have the "freedom" of the spirit and the supernatural. This applies, first of all, to biology in the broadest sense (including anthropology and all the sciences that relate to man). In the preceding chapters of biological philosoi)hy we have sought to refute vital- ism in every form, and to secure the exclusive acceptance of monism and mechanicism in every branch of the science of life. Anthropology is still, as it has been for centuries, taken in many different senses. In the widest sense, it embraces the whole vast science of man, just as zoology (in my opinion) deals with all parts of the animal world. Since I regard anthropology as a part of zoology, I naturally extend the principles of monism to both. However, this general monistic conception of the science of man has met with only a restricted acceptance up to the present. As a rule, the term " anthro])ology " is restricted to the natural history of man, which includes the anatomy and physiology of the human organism, embryology, prehistoric research, and a small part of psychology. But this "official anthropology," as most of our anthropological societies (especially in Gemiany) conceive it, generally excludes phylogeny, the greater part of psychology, and all the mental sciences, which are regarded as metaphysical in the narrower sense. I endeavored to show in my Antliropof^cny thirty years ago that man (as a placental mammal of the order of primates) is no less unified an organism (with body and soul) than any other vertebrate, and that, therefore, every aspect of his being should be dealt with monistically. 459 THE WONDERS OF LIFE As is well known, the views of experts and laymen alike are very much divided as to the place of psychol- ogy in the scheme of the sciences. The great majority of the professional psychologists, and of educated people generally, adhere still to the antiquated dogma, with its religious foundation, that man's soul is immortal and an independent immaterial entity. This dualistic view has been supported in the schools especially by the author- ity of Plato, Descartes, and Kant; in religion by the authority of Christ, Paul, and Mohammed ; in education and the state by the authority of most governments; and in physiology by most of the older, and even some recent, physiologists. On this view, psychology is a special mental science, having only an external and limited connection with natural science. But modern comparative and genetic psychology, the anatomy and physiology of the brain, have, in the course of the last forty years, established the monistic view that psychol- ogy is a special branch of cerebral physiology, and that therefore all its parts and their application belong to this section of biology. The soul of man is a physio- logical function of the phronema. As I have fully ex- plained the monistic conception of psychology in chap- ters vi.-xi. of the Riddle, and supported it with all the arguments of anatomy, physiology, ontogeny, and phylogeny in my Anthropogeny, I need not go further into the subject. The science of language shares the fate of its sister, psychology; by one section of its representatives it is taken monistically as a natural science, and by another section it is dualistically conceived as a branch of mental science. On the old metaphysical view, speech was regarded as an exclusive property of man, either a gift of the gods or an invention of social man. But in the course of the nineteenth century the monistic and physiological position that speech is a function of the 460 M O N I S i\I organism, and has been gradually developed like all other functions, has been established. The comparative psychology of the higher animals showed that in various classes the thoughts, feelings, and desires of the gre- garious animals are communicated partly by signs or touch, partly by sounds (the chirrup of the cricket, the cry of the frog, the whistle of many reptiles, song of birds and singing-apes, roaring of carnivora and un- gulates, etc.). The ontogeny of speech showed that its gradual development in the child is (in accordance with the biogenetic law) a recapitulation of its phylo- genetic process. Comparative philology taught that the languages of the different races have been formed poly- phyletically, or independently of each other. The ex- perimental physiology and pathology of the l)rain show- ed that a definite small region of the cortex (the Broca fissure) is the centre of speech, and that this central organ, in conjunction with other parts of the phronema and the larynx (the peripheral organ), produces articu- late speech. Historical science is, like philology or psychology'", still conceived in diflferent senses by experts. Ver}- often history is wrongly taken to mean the record of events that have occurred in the course of the development of civilized life — the history of peoples and states (humor- ously described as "the history of the world"), of civili- zation, of morals, etc. This is merely an anthropo- centric feeling that in the strictly scientific sense "his- tory" can only be used for the record of man's doings. In this sense history is opposed to nature, the one deal- ing with the province of morally free phenomena (with preconceived aim), and the other comprising the prov- ince of natural law (without preconceived aim). As if there were no "natural history," or as if cosmogony, geology, ontogeny, and phylogeny were not historical sciences! Although this dualistic and anthropistic view 461 THE WONDERS OF LIFE still prevails in our universities, and state and Church protect the venerable tradition, there can be no doubt that sooner or later it will be replaced by a purely mo- nistic philosophy of history. Modern anthropogeny shows us the intimate connection between the evolution of the human individual and that of the race; and by means of prehistoric and phylogenetic research it joins what is called the history of the world to the stem- history of the vertebrates. Medicine belongs to the front rank of practical or applied sciences. In its long and interesting history it teaches how it is only a monistic knowledge of nature, not a dualistic notion of revelation, that affords the foundations of true science and the profitable application of this to the most important aspects of practical life. Medicine was originally the business of the priests, and for thousands of years it was under the influence of mystic and superstitious ideas which were connected with religious dogmas. However, two thousand years ago the great physicians of classic antiquity made a serious effort to provide a solid base for medical practice by a thorough anatomic and physiological study of the human frame. But in the general reaction of the Mid- dle Ages superstitious and miraculous ideas once more defeated independent scientific investigation. Disease was supposed to be the work of evil spirits (as Christ thought) which had to be exorcised. Miracles are still thought to take place, even in cultured circles. I need only mention the wonders of patent medicines, mag- netic cures. Christian Science, and other charlatanry. However, the great development of science in the nine- teenth century, especially the astonishing advance of biology about the middle of the century, gradually shaped medicine into the monistic science which as- suages so much pain and suffering in humanity to-day. Pathology, the science of disease, and therapeutics, the 462 M O N I S xM rational science of healing, arc grounded now on the safe methods of physics and chemistry and a thorough knowledge of the human organism. Disease is no long- er regarded as a special entity that comes on the body like an evil spirit or mysterious organism, but is con- ceived as a baneful disturbance of its normal activity. Pathology is only a branch of physiology ; it studies the changes that take place in the tissues and cells under abnormal and dangerous conditions. When the causes of these changes are poisons or foreign organisms (such as bacteria or amoebae), the art of healing has to re- move them and restore the normal equilibrium of the functions. The science of mental disease is a special branch of medicine; it has the same relation to it as psychology has to physiology. However, as pathological psychology it deserves special consideration, not only on account of its extreme practical importance, but also because of its theoretical interest. The misleading dualist idea of body and soul that has perverted our notions of mental life from the oldest times has led people to regard men- tal disorders as special phenomena, at one time directly as evil spirits that enter from without into the human body, at another time as mysterious dynamic occur- rences affecting the mystic being of the soul (indepen- dently of the body) . These dualistic and still wide-spread and mischievous errors have caused the most fatal mis- takes in the treatment of mental disease; they have had the most unfortunate effect on juristic and social and other aspects of practical life. Rut the ground has been cut from under these irrational and superstitious ideas by modern psychiatry, which regards all mental disease as a disorder of the brain, and traces it to changes in the cortex that lie at the root of all psychoses (delusions, lunacy, etc.). As we call this central organ of mind the phronema, we may say: Psychiatry is the pathology 4^>3 THE WONDERS OF LIFE and therapeutics of the phronema. In many disorders we have already succeeded in anatomically and chemi- cally tracing the changes in the psychic or phronetal cells (the neurona in the phronema). These acquisi- tions of the pathological anatomy and physiology of the phronema have a great philosophic interest, because they throw a good deal of light on the monistic concep- tion of psychic life. As the greater part (sixty to ninety per cent.) of these diseases are hereditary, and they have mostly been acquired gradually by the ancestors of the patient, they also afford clear proof of progressive he- redity, or the inheritance of acquired characters. Thousands of years ago, when barbaric races began to adapt themselves to civilized life, they had a concern for their bodily health and strength. In classic an- tiquity the care of the body by baths, gymnastic exer- cises, etc., was greatly developed, and connected with religious ceremonies. The splendid aqueducts and baths of Greece and Rome show how much importance they attached to the external and internal use of water. The Middle Ages brought reaction in this province like so many others. As Christianity depreciated this life and said it was merely a preparation for the life to come, it led to a disdain of culture and of nature; and as it re- garded man's body only as the temporary prison of his immortal soul, it attached no importance to the care of it. The frightful plagues that swept away millions of men in the Middle Ages were only fought with prayer, processions, and other superstitious devices, instead of with rational hygienic and sanitary measures. We have only gradually learned to discard this superstition. It was not until the second half of the nineteenth century that a sound knowledge of the physiological functions and environment of the organism induced people once more to have a concern for bodily culture. All that modern hygiene now does for the public health, espe- 464 M O N I S M cially the improvement of the dwellings and food of the poorer classes, the prevention of disease by healthier habits, baths, athletics, etc., can be traced to the mo- nistic teaching or reason, and is altogether opposed to the Christian belief in Providence and the dualism con- nected therewith. The maxim of modern hygiene is: God helps those who help themselves. The remarkable progress of technical science in the nineteenth century, which has stamped our age as "an age of machinery," is a direct consequence of the im- mense advance of theoretical science. All the privi- leges and comforts which modern life gives us are due to scientific discoveries, especially in physics and chem- istry. We need only recall the enormous importance of steam and electric machinery, modern mining, agri- culture, and so on. If by these means modern industry and international commerce have prospered beyond all expectations, we owe this to the practical application of empirical truths. "Mental science" and metaphys- ical speculation have had nothing to do with it. There is no need of further proof that all the technical sciences have a purely monistic character, like their exact sources, physics and chemistry. The scientific development of education is one of the greatest tasks of modern civilization. The ideas tliat are impressed on the mind in early youth are most persistent, and generally determine the direction of thought and conduct for the whole of life. Hence we find the struggle l)etween the two philosophic tendencies assuming the greatest practical imjjortance in this de- partment. As the priests were, thousands of years ago, in the first stages of civilization, the sole trainers of the growing mind, they had charge of the school as well as of medicine. Religion was made the chief foundation of instruction, and its doctrines were the moral guide for the whole of life. The isolated attempts that were made 30 465 THE WONDERS OF LIFE by monistic philosophy in ancient times to destroy this theistic superstition had no effect on the education of the young. In this the duahstic principles of Plato and Aristotle prevailed, their metaphysical theories being blended with the teaching of the Church. In the Mid- dle Ages the power of the Roman priesthood enforced them everywhere. And, although a good deal of this teaching lost its prestige at the Reformation, the in- fluence of the Church on the school was maintained down to our own time. The spiritual power of the Church finds a useful ally in this in the conservative at- titude of most governments. Throne and altar sup- port each other; both dread the advance of scientific inquiry. In face of this powerful dualistic alliance, supported by the mental apathy of the masses and a convenient blind submission to authority, the monistic system has a difficult position to maintain. It will only gain solid ground in education when the school is divorced from the Church and scientific knowledge is made the foundation of the curriculum. I have pointed out in the nineteenth chapter of the Riddle the guiding principles to be followed in this reform of education in opposition to the influence of Church and state. As we have dealt in the eighteenth chapter with mor- als and their development from habit and adaptation, we need only mention here the contradiction that we still find between the monistic claims of pure reason and the dualistic claims of practical reason. This has been largely sustained by Kant's teaching, but his categori- cal imperative has been completely refuted by modern science. The metaphysical grounding of morality on free will and ethical intuitions (a priori) must be re- placed by a physiological ethic, based on monistic psychology. As this can no more recognize a moral order of the world in history than a loving Providence in the life of the individual, the monistic morality of the 466 M O N 1 S M future must be reducible to the laws of biology, and especially of evolution. The great importance that attaches to the new science of sociology is due to its close relations to theoretical anthropology and psychology on the one hand, and to practical politics and law on the other. When we take it in the wider sense, human sociology joins on to that of the nearest mammals. The family life, marriage, and care of the young'in the mammals, the formation of herds in the carnivora and ungulates and of troops in the social apes, lead on to the looser associations of savages and barbarians, and from these to the begin- nings of civilization. The history of these associations is connected with the social rules that govern the inter- course of smaller and larger communities. In the bio- logical reduction of social rules to the natural laws of heredity and adaptation, dynamic sociology (as Lester Ward has called it) proceeds on purely monistic lines, while in social intercourse itself we still find a good deal of duahsm. How little truth and nature count for in our cultured society, how much hypocrisy and insin- cerity have to do with social rules, has been well shown by Max Nordau in his Conventional Lies of Civilization. Politics is closely connected with sociology on the one hand and law on the other. As internal politics it con- trols the organization of the state by a constitution; as external or foreign politics it directs the relations of states to each other. In my opinion, pure reason should prevail in both departments; the relations of the citizens to each other and to the whole should be regulated by the same ethical principles that we recognize in personal intercourse. We are. unfortunately, very far from this ideal in the life of a modern state. Hrutal egoism rules in foreign politics; every nation thinks only of its own advantage, and furthers it with all its military and other resources. Domestic politics is still largely di- 467 THE WONDERS OF LIFE rected by the barbaric prejudices of the Middle Ages. Great struggles are in progress between the central government and the mass of the people. Both parties spend themselves in fruitless conflicts ; yet reason in the life of the state suffers more than its special political complexion. "Whether the state shall be a monarchy or a republic, aristocratic or democratic, are subordinate questions. The great question is: Shall the modern state be spiritual or secular? Shall it be governed theocratically by irrational beliefs and clerical arbitrari- ness, or nomocratically by rational laws and civic right?" {Riddle, chapter i.). In the science of law, too, we find the prevalence of the dualistic principles that have come down from the Middle Ages and antiquity, and have acquired a certain sacredness by blending with the teaching of the Church. Kant's dualism is again found to be at work, influenc- ing the ideas of jurists and statesmen. With it we find in our codes many carefully preserved relics of mediaeval superstition. A great deal of harm is done by this re- ligious influence. Every day we read in the papers of curious deliverances in the lower and higher courts at which every thoughtful man can only shake his head. Here also there will be no solid improvement until the education of jurists includes a thorough training in anthropology and psychology as well as in the code. Theology has stood at the head of the four venerable "faculties" at our universities for centuries. It still holds this place of honor, as the Church, the organ of practical theology, continues to exercise a profound in- fluence on life. In fact, most of the other branches of applied science — especially jurisprudence, politics, ethics, and pedagogics — are still more or less affected by re- ligious prejudices. The chief of these is the idea of God conceived in some form or other as the Supreme Being; as Goethe says, "Every one calls the best he knows his 468 MONISM God." However, the idea of God is not the chief feat- ure of all religions. The three greatest Asiatic relig- ions — Buddhism, Brahmanisni, and Confucianism — were at first purely atheistic; Buddhism was at once idealistic and pessimistic, whence Schopenhauer regard- ed it as the highest of all religions. On the other hand, belief in a personal God is the central feature of the three great Mediterranean religions. This anthropo- morphic God is conceived in a hundred forms in the various sects of the Mosaic, Christian, and Mohammedan religions, but his existence remains one of the chief ar- ticles of faith. No evidence of his existence is to be found; this was very ably shown by Kant, although he thought that practical reason postulated it. All that revelation is supposed to teach us on the matter belongs to the region of fiction. The whole field of theology, especially dogmatic theology, and the whole of the Church teaching based on it, are based on dualistic metaphysics and superstitious traditions. It is no long- er a serious subject of scientific treatment. On the other hand, comparative religion is a very important branch of theoretical theology. It deals with the origin, develop- ment, and significance of religion on the basis of modern anthropology, ethnology, psychology, and history. When we study without prejudice the results of these sciences bearing on religion, theology turns out to be pantheism, in the sense of Spinoza and Goethe, and thus monism becomes a connecting link between religion and science. This brief survey of the twenty chief branches of modern science and their relation to monism and dual- ism shows that we are face to face with great contra- dictions, and that we are still far from the harmonious and successful adjustment of these differences. Thev are partly due to a real antinomy of reason in the Kantist sense — an antithesis in ideas, in which the posi- tive seems to be just as capable of j^roof as its contra- 469 THE WONDER wS OF LIFE dictory. But, for the most part, this unfortunate an- tinomy in the sciences is connected with their historical development. Pure reason, the highest quahty of civ- iHzed man, was gradually evolved from the intelligence of the savage, and this in turn from the instincts of the apes and lower mammals ; and many relics of its former lower condition remain to-day, and have, through prac- tical reason, a most prejudicial influence on science. These dualistic prejudices and irrational dogmas — in- tellectual residua of the primitive condition of the race, fossil ideas and rudimentary instincts — still pervade the whole of modern theology, jurisprudence, politics, ethics, psychology, and anthropology. If we glance at the whole field of modern science at the beginning of the twentieth century in this connection, we can distribute its twenty sections into three groups — rational (purely monistic), semi-dogmatic (half -monistic) , and dogmatic (predominantly dualistic) disciplines. The following may be classed as rational or purely monistic sciences, in which no competent and thorough- ly expert representative now admits dualistic consid- erations: of the pure or theoretical sciences, physics, chemistry, mathematics, astronomy, and geology; of the applied or practical sciences, medicine, hygiene, and technology. On the other hand, in the semi-dogmatic sciences we still find a mixture of monistic and dualistic ideas in the appreciation of their aims and objects, one or the other prevailing according to the party position or personal training of the individual representative. This is the case with most of the biological sciences, biology (in the broadest sense), anthropology, psychol- ogy, philology, history, psychiatry; and of the applied sciences, pedagogics and ethics. The two latter sciences form a transition to the four purely dogmatic sciences in which the traditional dualism is still paramount: sociology, politics, jurisprudence, and theology. In 470 M U X I S M these branches of science mediaeval traditions retain a good deal of their power. Most of their ollicial repre- sentatives cling to prejudices and superstitions of all sorts, and very slowly and gradually admit the ac- quisitions of pure reason as embodied in monistic an- throj^ology and psychology. The intellectual life was in many respects more advanced at the beginning of the nineteenth than of the twentieth century. This classification of the chief branches of knowledge in their relation to philosophy, the comprehensive science of general truths, is naturally only a provisional and personal sketch. It is especially dithcult from the cir- cumstance that all the sciences have very complex rela- tions to each other, and have undergone many changes as to their aims and subjects in the course of their his- torical development. I will only point out that a good deal of science — in fact, the rational sciences with exact mathematical basis — have now been comi)letely won over to monism; and in the semi-dogmatic sciences it is gaining ground from day to day, so that we may hope sooner or later to see the four dogmatic sciences also, the strong bulwarks of dualism — sociology, politics, jurisprudence, and theolog}'' — succumb to monism. For the ultimate aim of all the sciences can only be the unitv of their underlying principles, or their harmonious unification by pure reason. It is now more and more generally acknowledged in educated countries that a complete reform of our educa- tional curriculum is needed, both in elementary and secondary schools and at the universities. The great struggle between two different tendencies assumes larger proportions ever}' day. On the one hand, most govern- ments, following their conservative instinct, cling as fnr as possible to mediaeval traditions, and find support in the dogmatic teaching of theology and jurisprudence. On the other hand, the representatives of pure reason 471 THE WONDERS OF LIFE seek to get rid of these fetters, and to introduce the empirical and critical methods of modern science and medicine into what are called the mental sciences. The opposition between the two parties is accentuated by their different sociological tendencies. Liberal human- ists claim that the freedom and education of all men is the aim of progressive evolution, in the conviction that the free development of the personality of each individual is the surest guarantee of happiness. To conservative governments this is a matter of indifference ; they look on the individual citizens, in accordance with the mani- fold division of labor, merely as so many screws and wheels in the great organism of the state. The "upper ten thousand" naturally think of their own welfare first, and desire to keep all higher education to themselves. But in the light of pure reason the state is not an end in itself; it is a means to insure the prosperity of the citizens. To each of these, whatever their condition, the opportunity should be afforded of acquiring the higher education and developing their talents. Hence in education we should impart a general outlook on all the sides of human life. Each should acquire the elements of science, not only of physics and chemistry, but also of biology and anthropology. On the other hand, the pre- dominance of the classical training over modern ought to be restricted. Every student and every faculty should be occupied with only philosophy and science in the first sessions, and not take up special studies until afterwards. At the close of the Riddle I brought out in clear relief the antagonism between modern monism and traditional dualism, but also pointed out that this strenuous opposition may be toned down to a certain degree oh clear and logical reflection — may, indeed, be converted into a friendly harmony. In a thoroughly logical mind, applying the highest principles with equal force in the entire field of the 472 MONISM cosmos — in both organic and inorganic nature — the antithetical positions of theism and pantheism, vitahsm and mechanism, approach until they touch each other. Unfortunately, con- secutive thouj,dit is a rare phenomenon in nature. This conciliatory disposition has grown stronger and stronger in me. Every year increases my belief that the dualism of Kant and the prevalent metajihysical school must give way to the monism of Goethe and the rising pantheistic tendency. In this we do not lose sight of our ideals. On the contrary, our "realist phi- losophy of life" teaches us that they are rooted deep in human nature. While occupying ourselves with the ideal world in art and poetry, and cultivating the play of emotion, we persist, nevertheless, in thinking that the real world, the object of science, can be truly known only by experience and pure reason. Truth and poetry are then united in the perfect harmony of monism. tD. H. H\LL UBPARY j^9rU^ ^rglina SUtd Collega I N D E X Abiogenesis, 339-35S; may still occur, 357. Abiology, 27, 78. Abortion. 325. Abstraction, power of, 316. Achromin, 140, 142. Acquired characters, inheri- tance of, 367-36Q, 376. Actinal beauty, 1S5. Active movements in organ- isms, 262. Adaptation, 415. i^sthesis, 296, 308. ^sthetal cells, 14. -Esthetic selection, 422. Agassiz on the creation of species, 30. Agnostic position on the origin of Hfe. 33ii. Albumin, 39, 126, 128. Albuminoids, the, 39, 125, 126. Alg.ne, 161. 195. 220. Alimentary system, the, 227. Allopula, 174. Alternation of generations, 253. Altmann on the structure of plasm, 134. Altruism, sources of, 115. Ambulacra! system, 280. Am(JL'b<)id movements, 268. Amphigony, 240. Amphimixis, 244. Amphithecta, 176. Angiuphyta, 220. Animal states, 36, 148, 150, 168. Animals, kindness to, 115; younger than plants, 216. 4 Animism. 58. Annelids, motor apparatus of the. 281. Antheridia. 249. Anthophyta, 162, 220. Anthropogcny, The, 283, 320. Anthropogeny, the science of, 321. 33^- . Anthropologists and evolution, 321. Anthropology, 86. 478. Anti-vitalism. 50. Ape. mind in the, 332, ii:^. Apes and men. common struct- ure of, 285. Aphanocapsa, 32, 130, 182, 196. 205. Apostles' Creed, the. 60-65. Apotelia, 163. Apposition, 42. Archegonia, 249. Archigonv. 341-358; formula- tion 01, 355, 356; rc})clitic)n of, 356; statement of grounds, 341; theories of. 343-34S Archiplasm. 129, 142, 158. Aristotle. 66. Art, mcnlern development of, 407. Articulates, motor apparatus o{ the. 282. Articulation. 281. Asexual generation, 241-244. Assimilation. 42. 211. Association-contres. 12, 13. Associational l>eauty, 185. Astrularva, 279. Astronomy, monism of, 457. 75 THE WONDERS OF LIFE Astrozoon, 280. Asymmetrical types, 179. Auditory vesicles, 311, Autogony, 341. Autonomous movement, 262. Bacilli, 200, 201, 202. Bacon, the founder of empiri- cism, 7. Bacteria, the, 157, 198-206, 218, 234, 235; absence of nucleus in the, 200, 201. Bacteriology, 198. Baptism, 425, 426. Barbarians, higher, 395; life of, 394; lower, 394; mental life of, 58; middle, 395; religion of, 58. Bar^sthesis, 309, Barotaxis, 309. Bathybius Haeckelii, 207. Beauty, evolution of the sense of, 188; sources of, 184; stages of, 184-187. Beggiatoa, 199, 205, 218. Berzelius on catalysis, 44. Bilateral-radial types, 177. Bilateral symmetry, 177. Bioblasts, 134. Bio-crystals, 41. Biogen-hypothesis of Verwom, 46, 137, 138. Biogens, 102, 128, 137, 192. Biogenetic law, the, 380-382, 384. Biogeny, 94, 360. Biology, division of, 94; sphere of, 27, 78. Bionomy, 78, 95. Bionta, 149, 151; virtual, 151; partial, 151. Biophora, 137, Biotonus, 103. Blastoderm, the, 161. Botanists and zoologists, diver- gence of, 374. Brain, as an organ of mind, 25; evolution of the, 22, 327, 328. Brownian movement, 260. Bryophyta, 162, Budding, 242, 243. Bunge, as vitalist, 50. Biitschli on the monera, 31 ; on the structure of plasm, 132. Calymma, the, 270. Canon law, the, 324, 325. Carbon assimilation, 34, 130, 212, 213, 342. Carbon, importance of, 37, 38. Caryokinesis, 139, 267. Caryolymph, 141, 142. Caryolysis, 268. Child, mind of the, 90, 323. Child-soul, study of the, 20. Children, destruction of in- curable, 21, 120. Chi tine, 282, Chlorophyll, 33, 141, 195, 214. Chorology, 95. Chromacea, 32, 130, 137, 157, 182, 194-197; description of the, 194; structure of the, ^197- Chromatella, 33, 343. Chromatin, 140, 142. Chromatophora, 33. 343. Chromoplasts, 141, 196. Chroococcacea, the, 32, 182. Chroococcus, 32, 130, 182, 196, 197, 208. Ciliary movement, 272, 276, Circulation of the blood, 228. Civilization, characteristics of 58-59; evils of, 114; growth of, 334; modern, 335, 402; shades of, 401 , 408 ; stages of, 398; progress of, 469; value of, 309. Civilized races, higher, 397; life of, 396; lower, 396; middle, 396; mind in, 334. Cleanliness in antiquity, 464. Clothing, beginning of, 423; fashions in, 430. Cnidaria, 224; generation of the, 250, 253. Coelenteria, 166, 221, 223, 225. Coeloma, the, 223, 225. 476 INDEX Coelomaria, i66, 221, 225. Cfcnobia, 160, 161. Colloids, nature of, 39. Colon, the, 226. Coloring methods. 208. Conjugation, 246. Consciousness a function of the brain, 331; development of, 331; nature of, 19, 23, 290, 291. Conservatism of governments, 73- Contact-action, 45, Copulation, 251. Cormophyta, 165, 167. Cormus, 36, 148, 150, 154, 168, 184. Corset, the, 430. Cortex of the brain, 12, 323, 327. 329- Cosmic intelligence, 30; mon- ism, 37. Cosmogony, 360. Cosmokinesis, 266. Craniota, mind in the, 326. Creationism, 337. Crustacea, parasitic, 237. Crystals, 41; forms of, 172; growth of, 42, 43; life of, 41 ; and organisms compared, 35, 40, 41, 43. 44; repro- duction of, 44. Crystallization, 265, 266. Crystalloids, nature of, 39. Culmus, the, 165, 183. Cultivated races, definition of, 397; higher, 400; lower, 398; middle, 399. Custom, tyranny of, 421. Cuticle. 146. Cyanogen, 346. theory, 347- Cytodes, 33, 157. 192, 194. Cytology, 128, 190. Cytophyta, 220. Cytoplasm. 35, 122, 138, 139, 142, 158, 191. Cytosoma, 122, 138. Cytotheca, 145. Cytula, 244. Darwin on the origin of life, ^.^>^: . Darwinism, 50, 80, 361, 363, 364.. 373 De Bries on heredity. 373. Death, nature af, 98; of the unicellulars. 99; of the his- tona, 100; real cause of, loi ; total and partial, 105. Decomposability of plasm. 345. Descartes' idea of the soul, 16, 18. Descriptive science. 4, 5. 6. Design, argument for, 388. Dialysis, 39. Diatomes. 41, 182. Diclinism, 247. Diofcia, 248. Disassimilation, 212. Disease, nature of, 106. Dissogony, 252. Division of labor, 35; in the cell. 143, 158; in the or- ganism. 149, 167; in the state, 150, 169. Divorce, 428. 429. Dogmatic sciences. 470. Dominants, the. of Reinke, 264. Driesch. as vitalist, 51. Dualism. 81 , 91 . 433. Dualistic view of life, 337. 348, 366; of the mind. 332; of morality, 411; of sensation, 446. 447. Dumas. Louis, as vitalist. 47. Duty an evolved sense, 413. Dwarf races. 422. Dynamism, 85. 110. Ear, canals in the. 311; the, Ecninoderms. motor organs of the. 279-281. Ectogcncsis, 369. Education, reform of. 471; Struggle o\cr. 465. Egoism. 115, 403; and al- truism. 419. Elasticity, 310. 477 THE WONDERS OF LIFE Eleatic philosophers, the, 66. Electric organs, 313. Electricity, sensation of, 312, Elements, chemical, 37, 38. Embryo, legal view of the, 325, 326; mind in the, 325. Embryology, 20, 21; mechan- ical, 383^ End of life, 387. Energism, 85. Energy as attribute of sub- stance, 446, 449; definition of, 449. Enzyma, 46, 128. Epicureanism, 83. Epitelia, 163. Epithelium, ciliated and flagel- lated, 276. Erect posture, the, 285. Ergology, 95. Ergonomy, 35, 150. Erotic chemotropism, 306. Eternity hypothesis of life, 338. Ethic, the perfect, 400. Ethics, 411. Eucharist, the, 426. Excretion, 232, 233. Experience, importance of, 3, Experiment, limited use of, 352,353. 383; nature of, 7, 8. Experimental science, 4,8. Extension, 446, 448. Eye, the, 298; evolution of, 298, 299. Faith, 437, 439; natural and supernatural, 54, Family, evolution of the, 402. Fashion, 422. Fechner on sensation, 295; on the universality of life, 340. Feeling, 296, 308. Fetichism, 57, 58. Filar theory of plasm, 134. Fistella. 344. Flagelliform movement, 271, 276. Flame, analysis of the, 28. Flat-fishes, metamorphosis of, ^78.. . Flechsig, discoveries of, 13. Flemming on the structure of plasm, 133. Food, artificial production of, 400. Forms of organic structure, 173-184. Frommann on plasm, 133. Frothy theory of plasm, 132, 133. Fungi, 162, 204, 215, 234, 236. Fungilli, 204, 235. Gameta, the, 244. Gastraea theory, the, 223. Gastraeads, 223. Gastric canal, 228. Gastro-canal system, 222, 223. Gastrula, the, 166. Gemmation, 242, 243. Genealogy of organisms, 304, 305. 376. Generation, sexual and asexual, 241-251. Geogeny, 360. Geology, historical nature of, 378; monism of, 458. Geotropism, 310. Germ-plasm, 143; the theory of, 367. 372- German mind, Janus character of, 441. Gills, 229, 230. Globular shape, origin of, 34. Gloeocapsa, 32, 196, 205. Goethe, monism of, 442; real- ism of, 440 ; scientific studies of, 440, 441. Gonades, 249. Gonochorism, 246. Gonoducts, 250. Granular theory of plasm, 134. Gravitation, sensation in, 309. Growth, 241. Growth movements, 264. Habit. 415-417; in inorganic bodies, 417. 478 I N D I-: X Heart, the. 228; work of the, 277- Heat, sensation of, 300, 301. Heaven, 109. Hedonism, 84. Hehotropism, 298. Ilelmholtz on the origin of Hfe, 339- Herachtus on hfe, 28. Heredity, conservative and pro- gressive, 368; cumulative. 369; theories of, 135, 136, 366. Hermaphrodism, 245, 246, 258, 259- Hermaphroditic glands, 249. Hertwig, O., on the biogenetic law, 382 ; on the monera, 31- Heterogenesis, 254. His, W., theories of, ;^8^. Histolysis, 106. Histona, the, 36. Histonals, 165, 166, 171, 182. Historical waves, 389. History, 461; nature of, 9; sources of, 9. Hofmeister on organic chemis- try. 45- Holosphnera. 173. Honor, false sense of, 430. Huxley on organic individual- ity, 152. Hyaloplasm. 130, 143. Hybrids, 255, 256; fertility of, Hydrf>static movements, 270. Hygiene, 401, 464. Hylonism. 82. Hylozoism, 8r. 86, 451. Hypogenesis, 255. Hypotheses, nature of, 54; necessity for, 86, 87, 89, 378. 439- Idealism, theoretical aiid prac- tical, 84, 92. Idiocy, 20. Idioplasm theory, the, 136, 137, 366, 367. Ileum, the, 226. Imugmation, function of the, Imbibition energy of plasm. Imbibition in organisms, 261. Immaterial world, the, 436, 437- Immortality, the l)elief in, 64, 65, 71, 108; of the uni- cellulars, 99-101. Incurables and suicide. 118, ' } 9 • Individuality, organic. 149, ic2. Infusoria, movement in the, 268, 269, 272. Inoculation, 204. Insanity, increase of, 114, 118, 119. Insectivorous plants, 304, 305. Instinct, 418. Intelligence, 316, 317. Intercellular matter, 145. Intussuscc|)li<)n, 42. Ionic philosophers, the. 66. Irritability, 287, 288. 291, 293, Isopola. 174. Ka.vt as natural historian, 9; biological ignorance of, 11, 318, 319; critical views of, 438; C(jntradictory views of. 68. 434. 444; influence of. 25; mechanical views of, 435; moral j)hilosophv of. 412, 413; mystic trainmg of. 443; narrow life of, 443: philos- ophy of. 68. 6(). 74. 434- 440; popularity of. 444: theory of knowledge of. 9. 10, ,'^9. 317-319. 332; Kassowitz on archijjony. 355. Kelvin, honl. on the oriinn of life. 339. Kidneys, the. jj^ji. KirehhofTon the work of science. (i. Knowletlge. a priori and a p